Imagine Communications Magellan CCS Navigator Installation and Operation Manual

Installation and Operation Manual
MagellanTM CCS Navigator
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application
Volume 1: Device control Edition AH
175‐000114‐00
Publication Information
© 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential. Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product.
Trademarks
CCS Navigator™ is a trademark of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries. Portions © 1994‐1996, QLogic Corporation. All rights reserved. Portions © 2004‐2007 Amino Communications Ltd. All rights reserved. Portions © 1989, 1991, 1992, 1998 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved. Derivative Work ‐ 1996, 1998‐2000 Portions © 1996, 1998‐2000 The Regents of the University of California. All Rights Reserved. Portions © 2001‐2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions © 2001‐2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Portions © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Portions © 2003‐2008, Sparta, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network. All rights reserved. Portions © Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003. All rights reserved.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For locations and contact information see: http://www.imaginecommunications.com/contact‐us/
Support Contact Information
For support contact information see: Support Contacts: http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/technical‐support/
eCustomer Portal: http://support.imaginecommunications.com
iii
Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................ xv
Manual Information ..................................................................................................... xv
Purpose .................................................................................................................... xv
Audience .................................................................................................................. xv
Revision History ........................................................................................................ xv
Writing Conventions ................................................................................................... xvi
Obtaining the User Manuals ...................................................................................... xvi
Chapter 1
Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device Control ................... 1
Magellan™ CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Overview ................................................. 1
Navigator Licenses ........................................................................................................ 2
NAVIGATOR-DEV License .......................................................................................... 2
NAVIGATOR-SRV License ........................................................................................... 3
NAVIGATOR-SNMP License ........................................................................................ 5
NAVIGATOR-INT License ............................................................................................ 5
NAVIGATOR-CLI License ............................................................................................ 5
NAVIGATOR-RTR License ........................................................................................... 5
ICONM-SCP License ................................................................................................... 6
ICONM-SCP-LITE License ........................................................................................... 6
NAVIGATOR-NX License ............................................................................................ 6
Basic CCS Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses) ........................................... 6
Chapter 2
Installation ............................................................................................................... 7
Software Installation Overview ................................................................................... 7
Required Hardware ....................................................................................................... 7
Configuring a PC Monitor for Best Display ................................................................. 8
Required Operating System and Software ................................................................. 9
Installing Other Required Software .......................................................................... 10
Order of Installation for Software and Firmware ...................................................... 11
Requirements for Using MPEG-4 Streaming ............................................................. 12
Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool ...................................................... 12
Preparing the PC for Installation .............................................................................. 12
Installing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software .............................................. 12
iv
Contents
If Setup Detects No Previous Installations ................................................................. 15
If Setup Detects a Previous Installation ..................................................................... 15
Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software ............................................. 16
Using the Add or Remove Programs Application ...................................................... 17
Using the Uninstall Program ..................................................................................... 17
Manually Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software .............................. 18
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses ............................................................ 19
Viewing Your License Key ........................................................................................ 20
Changing a License Key ........................................................................................... 20
Backup and Restore Utility ......................................................................................... 21
Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration .................................................. 23
User Account Overview .............................................................................................. 23
Logging On .................................................................................................................. 23
Logging Off or Exiting ................................................................................................ 25
Managing User Groups ............................................................................................... 25
Adding a User Group ............................................................................................... 26
Assigning Access Rights ........................................................................................... 28
Removing a User Group ........................................................................................... 31
Modifying Group Properties ..................................................................................... 31
Managing User Accounts ............................................................................................ 32
Adding a User Account ............................................................................................ 32
Removing a User Account ........................................................................................ 33
Changing User Account Information ........................................................................ 34
Viewing User Account Information ........................................................................... 34
Changing a Password .............................................................................................. 34
Administering User Logs ............................................................................................. 35
Creating a User Log ................................................................................................. 35
Viewing the User Log ............................................................................................... 36
Chapter 4
Interface Overview .............................................................................................. 37
Main Interface ............................................................................................................. 37
Setting the Operational Mode ................................................................................... 37
Setting the Operational Language ............................................................................ 39
Installing Files for East Asian Languages ................................................................... 40
Changing the Operational Language ........................................................................ 41
Tools ............................................................................................................................. 41
Toolbars ................................................................................................................... 41
Built-In Tools ............................................................................................................ 43
Status Bar ................................................................................................................ 49
Plug-ins .................................................................................................................... 49
Standalone Tools ..................................................................................................... 51
Using Interface Dialog Boxes ..................................................................................... 52
Docking or Floating a Tool Dialog Box ...................................................................... 53
Showing and Closing a Tool Dialog Box ................................................................... 53
Using the Window Menu ......................................................................................... 55
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Working with Layouts .............................................................................................. 56
Property Sheets ....................................................................................................... 57
Using Menus ................................................................................................................ 58
Shortcut Menus ....................................................................................................... 58
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration .............................. 59
Communication Options Overview ........................................................................... 59
Setting Communication Options ................................................................................ 59
Setting Serial Connection Preferences ...................................................................... 60
Creating a New Device in the Serial Settings Tab ..................................................... 61
Editing a Previously Created Device in the Serial Settings Tab ................................... 61
Setting SNMP Options ................................................................................................ 62
SNMP Monitoring and Control Using Magellan CCS Navigator ................................ 62
SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan CCS Navigator ..................................... 70
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery.......................................................................................... 75
Discovery Overview .................................................................................................... 75
Summary of Discovery Tasks ...................................................................................... 76
Entering Network Address Information .................................................................... 76
Setting Discovery Options .......................................................................................... 77
Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery ................................................................. 77
Modifying a Previously Used Discovery ..................................................................... 82
Setting Discovery Save Options ................................................................................ 83
Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device ................................................................... 84
Running a Discovery ................................................................................................... 85
Running a Full Discovery .......................................................................................... 85
Running a Partial Discovery ...................................................................................... 86
IP Settings and Device ID Configuration ................................................................... 88
Finding a Device ...................................................................................................... 89
Configuring Multiple Devices ................................................................................... 89
Rediscovery ................................................................................................................. 91
Copying Discovery Results ......................................................................................... 91
Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu .......................................................................... 92
Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View .......................................................... 92
Chapter 7
Network View Construction ............................................................................ 93
Network View Overview ............................................................................................ 93
Updating the Navigation Pane on a Client PC .......................................................... 94
Resource Folders ...................................................................................................... 94
Sorting Items in the Resource Tree ........................................................................... 95
Resource Icons ......................................................................................................... 95
Navigating the Resource Tree .................................................................................. 97
Finding Items in the Navigation Pane ....................................................................... 98
Starting Software From the Navigation Pane ............................................................ 98
v
vi
Contents
Adding Resources to the Navigation Pane ................................................................ 99
Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon .......................................................... 99
Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon ..................................................................... 100
Deleting a Resource Icon ........................................................................................ 101
Setting Navigation Properties .................................................................................. 103
Setting General Navigation Properties for a Device ................................................. 104
Setting the Device Tab ........................................................................................... 105
Setting the Command Tab ..................................................................................... 107
Setting the Monitor Point Properties ...................................................................... 108
Setting HTTP Properties .......................................................................................... 108
Viewing the Preset Tab .......................................................................................... 109
Viewing the Shortcut Tab ....................................................................................... 109
Viewing the Communication Settings Tab .............................................................. 109
Setting SNMP Navigation Properties ....................................................................... 110
Setting the Amino STB Tab .................................................................................... 111
Sample Resource Tree Views .................................................................................... 114
Using Navigation Shortcut Menus ........................................................................... 117
Checking the Control Access Rights for a Device .................................................... 119
Showing Product Information for a CCS Device ...................................................... 119
Setting Navigation Options ...................................................................................... 120
Using the Optional Columns in the Navigation Pane ............................................... 122
Using Navigation Shortcuts ...................................................................................... 124
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration ............................................................................... 127
CCS Device Configuration Overview ....................................................................... 127
CCS Devices Requiring Special Configuration ......................................................... 127
Opening and Closing a Configuration Dialog Box ................................................... 128
Using the Configuration Status Bar ........................................................................ 128
Configuring Network Settings for a CCS Device ..................................................... 129
Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device .................................................................. 129
Changing the Network Settings of a Device ........................................................... 129
Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device .......................................................... 130
Adding a Route to the PC Routing Table ................................................................ 132
Reading the Network Configuration from a Device ................................................ 134
Writing Network Information to a CCS Device ....................................................... 135
Upgrading Software .................................................................................................. 135
Stopping a Transfer Task ........................................................................................ 139
Upgrading a NEO SuiteView Using the Wizard ....................................................... 139
Using the Software Upgrade Progress Tab .............................................................. 140
Correcting a Failed Upgrade Procedure .................................................................. 142
Using the Configuration Dialog Box’s File Transfer Tab ......................................... 143
Backing Up Files From a CCS Device ....................................................................... 143
Transferring Files With the File Transfer Tab ........................................................... 144
Correcting a Failed Upgrading Procedure ............................................................... 145
Listing the Files Installed on a CCS Device .............................................................. 147
Restarting a CCS Device from the PC ....................................................................... 148
Setting Device Options ............................................................................................. 149
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Setting SNMP Options .............................................................................................. 150
Adding New Addresses for SNMP Traps ................................................................. 151
Modifying an SNMP Trap Destination .................................................................... 152
Getting Version Information .................................................................................... 152
Logging Configuration Activity ............................................................................... 154
Viewing a Configuration Log ................................................................................. 154
Setting Configuration Options ................................................................................. 155
Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu ................................................................. 156
Finding the Resource Icon for a CCS Device ........................................................... 156
Returning a Configuration Dialog Box to its Default Size ........................................ 156
‘Remembering’ Telnet Information ........................................................................ 157
‘Remembering’ FTP Information ............................................................................. 157
Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device ........................................................... 157
Using the Configuration Folder ............................................................................... 157
Getting Help with Configuration Hierarchies .......................................................... 158
Creating Configuration Hierarchies ........................................................................ 158
Ordering Devices in a Configuration Hierarchy ....................................................... 159
Renaming Configurations ...................................................................................... 159
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration .................................................................................. 161
NUCLEUS Configuration Overview .......................................................................... 161
Devices Configured using Magellan CCS Navigator ................................................ 161
Devices Configured Using the Control Panel Interface .......................................... 162
Activating NUCLEUS License Keys ........................................................................... 162
Configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel Using Magellan CCS Navigator ............... 163
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder ............................................................. 163
Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration ......................................... 164
Adding a Routing View to a NUCLEUS Configuration ............................................ 164
Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration ......................... 165
Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration ......................................... 171
Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard ................................................... 171
Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel ............................................... 173
Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel ........................................ 174
Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus Only) ... 175
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel ................................................. 175
Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) ......................................... 175
Selecting Destination Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) .............................................. 176
Selecting Source Categories (Cat/Index mode only) ................................................ 178
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) ..................................................... 178
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel .................................................. 178
Selecting Salvos for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel .................................................. 178
Editing a Routing Panel .......................................................................................... 179
Auto Validation ......................................................................................................... 179
Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Configuration ...................................... 180
Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard .................................................... 180
Selecting PIP Attributes .......................................................................................... 181
Selecting the Sources and PIPs for Your CENTRIO Panel ......................................... 182
vii
viii
Contents
Selecting Displays for Your CENTRIO Panel ............................................................. 183
Selecting Source Categories for Your CENTRIO Panel ............................................. 184
Selecting Source Indexes for Your CENTRIO Panel .................................................. 185
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration ......................................................................... 186
Assigning Parameters With NUCLEUS Configuration Wizard .................................. 191
Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard ................................................. 193
Editing a Panel Configuration ................................................................................. 202
Configuring Router TRAX for NUCLEUS .................................................................. 202
Setting Destination Mode Options ......................................................................... 205
Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files .............................................................. 205
Transferring Configurations to Multiple Control Panels .......................................... 207
Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file to XML .................................................... 208
Importing a NUCLEUS Configuration file from XML ................................................ 208
Getting a Configuration File From a NUCLEUS ....................................................... 208
Transferring MIBs to NUCLEUS ............................................................................... 209
Deleting a Configuration File from a NUCLEUS ....................................................... 210
Listing the Configuration Files on a NUCLEUS ........................................................ 210
Chapter 10
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway
Configuration and Control ............................................................................. 211
EDGE-DPS575 Overview ............................................................................................ 211
Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File ......................................................... 211
Editing an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration ................................................................. 213
Deleting a Configuration from an EDGE-DPS575 .................................................... 214
Adding DPS-575 Parameters to NUCLEUS Configurations ...................................... 214
Controlling an EDGE-DPS575 Gateway .................................................................... 215
Using the DPS-575 Control Interface ........................................................................ 215
Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and Monitoring ..................................... 216
Using the DPS-575 Updater ...................................................................................... 218
Connecting the DPS Uploader Utility to a Specific DPS-575 .................................... 219
Chapter 11
NEO Frame Configuration ............................................................................. 221
Frame Configuration Overview ................................................................................ 221
Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame ....................................................... 222
Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO Frame .................................................. 223
Cancelling the Transfer of a NEO Frame Configuration File ..................................... 223
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log ........................................................... 224
Refreshing the NEO Frame Configuration ............................................................... 224
Working With Configurations on a NEO Frame ...................................................... 224
Listing the Configuration File Stored on a NEO Frame ............................................ 224
Getting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame ..................................................... 225
Deleting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame .................................................... 225
Clearing the Configurations List from the Frame Tab .............................................. 225
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Chapter 12
LCP and RCP Configuration ........................................................................... 227
LCP and RCP Configuration Overview ..................................................................... 227
Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP ................................................ 227
Configuring Favorites for a Device ......................................................................... 229
Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP ........................................... 231
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log .......................................................... 233
Refreshing a CCS Control Panel Configuration ...................................................... 233
Using the Configuration List on a CCS Control Panel ............................................. 233
Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP ...................................................................... 235
Using Alarm Filtering ............................................................................................. 236
Using Alarm Filtering Contents .............................................................................. 236
Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and RCPs ............................................ 236
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics ........................................................................... 237
Diagnostics Overview ............................................................................................... 237
Showing the Diagnostics Dialog Box ...................................................................... 237
Using Alarm Tables ................................................................................................... 238
Selecting a Row in an Alarm Table ......................................................................... 238
Reordering Columns in the Alarm List .................................................................... 239
Saving Column Order Changes .............................................................................. 239
Resizing Columns .................................................................................................. 240
Sorting Columns .................................................................................................... 240
Interpreting Fields in the Alarm Lists ...................................................................... 241
Interpreting Alarm Colors ......................................................................................... 241
Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus ................................................................... 242
Finding a CCS Device from an Alarm Record .......................................................... 243
Locally acknowledging SNMP traps ........................................................................ 244
Opening a Device Control Dialog Box from an Alarm Record ................................. 244
Ignoring Alarms ..................................................................................................... 244
Refreshing the Alarm Lists ..................................................................................... 245
Clearing Alarms ..................................................................................................... 245
Saving Alarms to a File ........................................................................................... 245
Loading an Archived Alarm Log into the Offline Tab .............................................. 246
Setting Diagnostics Properties for an Alarm Message ............................................. 246
Setting Diagnostics Options ..................................................................................... 247
Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box ................................................ 248
Setting Alarm Filtering Options .............................................................................. 249
Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms ..................................................................... 251
Setting Alarm Log Options ..................................................................................... 252
Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs ................................................. 253
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control............................................................................................. 255
Control Overview ...................................................................................................... 255
Opening and Closing Control Dialog Boxes ............................................................ 255
Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes ................................................... 257
ix
x
Contents
Checking the Active Window Type ......................................................................... 258
Showing a Container Device’s Control Dialog Boxes ............................................... 258
Using Older Generic Control Dialog Boxes .............................................................. 263
Checking a Device’s Control Status .......................................................................... 265
Using the Control Shortcut Menu ............................................................................ 266
Using a Control Dialog Box to Find a Resource Icon ................................................ 267
Refreshing the Connection Status of a CCS Device ................................................. 267
Clearing an ‘Alarm Query Failed’ Message ............................................................. 267
Getting Help with the Control Tool ........................................................................ 267
Showing the User Manual for a CCS-Enabled Device .............................................. 268
Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device .......................................................... 268
Setting Control Options ............................................................................................ 268
Using Presets .............................................................................................................. 270
Working With Presets in a Control Dialog Box ........................................................ 271
Working With Presets in the Navigation Pane ......................................................... 272
Chapter 15
Streaming in Control Windows .................................................................... 277
Streaming Overview ................................................................................................. 277
Adding a License Key for MPEG-4 Streaming in QSEE6800+ ................................... 277
Multicasting ........................................................................................................... 278
Streaming in a Control Dialog Box ........................................................................... 278
QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes .......................................................................... 278
Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames ..................................................... 282
Viewing an X75 Streaming Source ......................................................................... 285
Playing MPEG-4 Video from the Navigation Pane ................................................... 285
Chapter 16
Video Output Monitoring................................................................................ 287
Signal Monitoring Overview .................................................................................... 287
Using the Signal Monitor Tool .................................................................................. 287
Showing the Signal Monitor Dialog Box ................................................................. 288
Monitoring Video Signals ......................................................................................... 288
Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu ............................................................... 289
Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor ...................................................... 289
Setting Signal Monitor Options ............................................................................... 290
Chapter 17
Device Control through HTTP ....................................................................... 293
HTTP Device Control Overview ................................................................................ 293
Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a Web Browser .................................. 293
Controlling an HTTP Device ...................................................................................... 294
Appendix A
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 295
Suggested Troubleshooting Steps ........................................................................... 295
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Common Problems ................................................................................................ 295
Installation Problems ................................................................................................ 295
InstallShield Errors ................................................................................................. 296
Magellan CCS Navigator Install Fails during Router Database Upgrade ................... 296
Installation Exits without Finishing ......................................................................... 296
Installation Cannot Update Users Database ............................................................ 297
Module Firmware Needs to be Upgraded ............................................................... 297
SQL Server Re-installation Needs Authentication .................................................... 298
Windows Message Queuing Requests Installation CD ............................................ 298
Cannot Install Magellan CCS Navigator on Windows XP or Windows 2003 ........... 299
Problems at Startup .................................................................................................. 299
CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Start after Setup .......................................... 300
Magellan CCS Navigator Starts up with Build Mode Only ....................................... 300
Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure ...................................... 300
PC Running CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Operates Sluggishly .............................. 300
Password Has Been Lost or Forgotten ................................................................... 302
Password Does Not Work ...................................................................................... 303
File Permissions Prevent Use of Magellan CCS Navigator ........................................ 303
File Share Handling From Magellan CCS Navigator Clients ..................................... 303
Managing Permissions ........................................................................................... 304
PC Turned Off While ‘On Air’ ................................................................................ 304
Online Help Hangs After User Selects ‘Properties’ .................................................. 304
"Windows Security Alert" Dialog Appears ............................................................. 304
PC Work Space Settings Need to be Returned to Default ....................................... 305
Serial Connection Error at Startup .......................................................................... 306
Menus or Tools Not Available ................................................................................ 306
Clearing the Internet Explorer Cache Closes Magellan CCS Navigator .................... 307
Configuration Problems ............................................................................................ 307
Telnet Fails During Device Configuration ................................................................ 308
Discovery Fails to Find a Device .............................................................................. 308
Magellan CCS Navigator Hangs While Discovering 6800+ Devices ......................... 308
Magellan CCS Navigator Has Problems Discovering a 6800+ Frame ........................ 308
Discovery Takes Too Long ...................................................................................... 309
FTP Fails During Device Configuration .................................................................... 309
NUCLEUS Device Firmware Upgrade Fails ............................................................... 310
Broadcast Communication Fails ............................................................................. 310
Device Can’t Be Controlled or Has No Version Information .................................... 310
IP Address Disappears from Icon Name .................................................................. 310
Detection of a Lost Network Connection Takes Too Long ...................................... 311
Difficulty Configuring an NSM card ....................................................................... 311
Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations ........................................... 311
Serial Port Conflict ................................................................................................. 311
Validating Routing/CENTRIO Panels After Upgrading ............................................. 312
Folder Browser Dialogs Do Not Show Network Drives in Windows 8 ...................... 312
Alarm Problems ......................................................................................................... 312
Alarms Behave Differently on Card Edge than in Magellan CCS Navigator ............. 313
Disabled Alarm Remains Listed in Diagnostics Dialog Box ....................................... 313
Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots ............................................................. 313
Module Alarm is Difficult to Identify in Control Dialog Box ..................................... 313
xi
xii
Contents
Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms ............................................................ 313
Diagnostics Dialog Box Fails to List Alarms for SNMP Traps ..................................... 314
SNMP MIB Load Errors Appear ............................................................................... 314
Network is Overloaded With Duplicate SNMP Traps ............................................... 316
SNMP Traps Do Not Appear to be Received ............................................................ 316
Alarms Not Appearing Correctly in Japanese or Chinese Language Interface .......... 316
Control Problems ....................................................................................................... 316
Magellan CCS Navigator Cannot Control a Module in the Navigation Pane ............ 317
No Alarms, Status, or Changes in Parameter Values Reported for an X75 Device .... 317
Device Status is Not Reported for X75 or X75-RCP Devices ..................................... 317
Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Load ........................................... 318
Problems With Presets in QSEE6800+ Modules ...................................................... 318
Device Status Column Reports No Status or ‘Not Ready’ ......................................... 318
Frame Control Dialog Box Shows Error or Warning for Slot .................................... 319
‘Unable to Open a New Control Window’ Message Appears .................................. 319
No Video Shows in the Signal Monitor Dialog Box .................................................. 319
Unable to get Streaming Video in Navigator Page or Device Control Dialog Box ..... 320
Getting Help With Magellan CCS Navigator ........................................................... 320
Getting Help from Customer Service ....................................................................... 321
Expediting a Software Solution .............................................................................. 321
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions ......................................................................... 323
What are the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Licensing Options? ............................ 323
Can I use CCS Software to Configure my Devices? ................................................. 323
Can I use Magellan CCS Navigator to Build a Graphical Network Model? ............... 323
What is the Navigation Pane? ................................................................................ 323
What is Graphical Navigation? ................................................................................. 324
What is the Graphical Navigation Window? ........................................................... 324
What is a Magellan CCS Navigator Page? .............................................................. 324
Can I Create my Own Magellan CCS Navigator Pages? .......................................... 324
What are Magellan CCS Navigator Actions? ........................................................... 324
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor the Overall Status of Network Devices?
325
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor Network Device Environments? ........... 325
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Perform Router Operations? ............................ 325
Can I Keep the Application Always on Top? ........................................................... 326
Can I Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once? ............................................................ 326
Appendix C
Copyright, Trademark, and Warranty Information ........................... 329
Copyrights .................................................................................................................. 329
Trademarks ................................................................................................................. 329
Software User License and Warranty Agreement ................................................... 330
License ................................................................................................................... 330
Limited Software Warranty .................................................................................... 330
NET SNMP License ................................................................................................. 331
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Appendix D
Glossary ................................................................................................................... 337
Index to Terms ........................................................................................................... 337
Index......................................................................................................................... 349
xiii
xiv
Contents
xv
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
Audience
This manual details the features, installation procedures, operational procedures, and
specifications of the Navigator software.
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the
installation, setup, and/or operation of the Navigator software.
Revision History
Table i-1 Software Revision History
Edition
Software Version
Release Date
Changes
A
CCS Navigator 1.0
March 2003
Z
CCS Navigator 4.6.1
June 2010
LRC and PredatorII support
AA
CCS Navigator 4.6.3
November 2010
Magellan support
AB
CCS Navigator 4.7
January 2011
Discontinuation of BOS device support
AC
CCS Navigator 4.7.1
July 2011
Addition of custom properties window
AD
CCS Navigator 4.8
March 2012
Enhanced salvos
AE
CCS Navigator 4.9
July 2012
Support for HView SX Pro devices
AF
CCS Navigator 5.0
January 2013
IP3 support
AG
CCS Navigator 5.2
January 2014
Increased support for Nexio and Windows 8.1
xvi
Preface
Writing Conventions
This documentation adheres to the following writing conventions:
Table i-2 Conventions
Term or Convention
Description
Bold
Indicates dialog box, property sheet, field, button, check
box, list box, combo box, menu, submenu, window, list,
and selection names
Italics
Indicates email addresses, names of books and
publications, and first instances of new terms and
specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS
Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER,
TAB, CTRL, ALT, DELETE
Code
Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a
DOS entry or something you type into a field
>
Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy
of menus and dialog boxes
hyperlink
Indicates a jump to another location in the document or
elsewhere
Internet address
Indicates a jump to a website or URL
Indicates important information that helps to avoid and
troubleshoot problems
[VersionNo.]
Placeholder for a software version number
CCS Software
Application
A generic term for any CCS software applications,
including CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, and CCS CoPilot
Obtaining the User Manuals
The documentation for your product is included in your Documentation and Product
Resources DVD as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file. The CCS Navigator Online Help is an
electronic document integrated into the software. While working in the application, you
can open the Online Help and print out individual topics.
The most up-to-date documentation and software is always available on our website.
1
1
Introduction to Magellan CCS
Navigator Device Control
Magellan™ CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Overview
Magellan CCS Navigator is a scalable Windows-based software tool for configuring and
controlling various devices that use industry-standard protocols, such as UDP, TCP/IP, SNMP,
FTP, and HTTP.
Figure 1-1 Magellan CCS Navigator Screen
Magellan CCS Navigator supports the following devices:

CCS control panels

CCS EDGE-DPS575 gateway

NEO, 6800+, and Selenio frames, modules and resource modules

DPS-575, X75, and X85 synchronizers

SNMP-compliant devices
2
Chapter 1
Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device Control

HTTP-controlled devices

IconMaster systems

Router systems

Imagine Communications Digital Legalizers

Amino STB

Imagine Communications Broadcast Multiviewers, including PlatinumTM SX Hybrid and
PlatinumTM SX Pro

Suiteview and Predator multiviewers

NEXIO servers

NetVX devices

SQM devices
Starting with Navigator 4.7, the following devices and device families are no longer
supported:

Genesis

Digibus

DFS

CCS Gateway

CCS Router Gateway
The Magellan CCS Navigator interface can be configured to display text in English,
Japanese, or Chinese. See Setting the Operational Language on page 39 for more
information.
Navigator
Licenses
Depending on the licensing options you choose, your Magellan CCS Navigator software
may be able to fulfill various functions. License options are described in the following
sections:

NAVIGATOR-DEV License on page 2

NAVIGATOR-SRV License on page 3

NAVIGATOR-SNMP License on page 5

NAVIGATOR-INT License on page 5

NAVIGATOR-SNMP License on page 5

NAVIGATOR-RTR License on page 5

ICONM-SCP License on page 6

ICONM-SCP-LITE License on page 6

NAVIGATOR-NX License on page 6

Basic CCS Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses) on page 6
To obtain a Magellan CCS Navigator license, or to add an option to an existing license,
please contact your sales representative.
NAVIGATOR-DEV License
This license supports the remote discovery, configuration, monitoring, control, and
diagnostics of supported devices.
The NAVIGATOR-DEV option will help you accomplish the following tasks from a PC:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

Centrally navigate, control, and monitor CCS devices over a local- or wide-area
network.

Set alarms to signal visual, auditory, or e-mail alerts when CCS-enabled devices go
off-line or malfunction.

Transfer software upgrades to CCS-enabled devices.

Quickly diagnose and correct problems with the CCS-enabled network or devices.

Monitor the integrity of video signals throughout a facility.

Control CCS routing systems.

Secure the network with user-login and access-level verification.

Control and monitor routers for video monitoring.

Control and monitor multiviewer systems, including HView SX Hybrid and HView SX
Pro.
In most cases, the remote controls that the NAVIGATOR-DEV license offers are more
intuitive and user-friendly than the local controls on the devices. From a Magellan CCS
Navigator PC, you can quickly survey the network from an array of PC monitors, avoiding
the need to track changes of hundreds of LEDs on racks of devices.
For example, using Magellan CCS Navigator’s control interfaces, operators can track
the status of multiple X75 Converters and Synchronizers, each with more than 1000
individual controls, with a simplified and more-intuitive interface.
NAVIGATOR-SRV License
This license includes all the functionality of the NAVIGATOR-DEV license. Magellan CCS
Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license can operate in Build and Control modes.
The NAVIGATOR-SRV license allows administrators to use Graphical Navigation tools to
create easy-to-use graphical pages that visually represent a network’s many devices,
systems, and environments. Pages can associate actions, such as loading a page or creating
a configuration, with graphical objects, such as buttons, symbols, and images, that
represent items in a network environment.
On these graphical pages, called Magellan CCS Navigator pages, an administrator user can
consolidate network wide status monitoring and troubleshooting tasks.
3
4
Chapter 1
Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device Control
A NAVIGATOR-SRV license includes a collection of buttons, symbols, and images for use in
creating the custom pages, each representing an interface to one network environment.
If the supplied library of images fails to satisfy a network’s needs, you can import other
image files, such as your corporate logo, to supplement that gallery.
Figure 1-2. Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
A PC with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license will normally be operated by an Administrator user.
This PC can discover devices within the network, set up pages and link devices to pages.
The administrator user can add pages and discover new pages while clients are also using
the system.
Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license stores the following resources:

Graphical Navigation pages

Device, preset and page user and user group access rights

Presets

Navigation pane data

Layouts
Administrator users can grant or deny other PCs on the network which have
NAVIGATOR-CLI licenses access to pages, presets, and devices. The resources stored on a
Magellan CCS Navigator system with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license can be retrieved by users at
NAVIGATOR-CLI systems as needed, or as those resources are updated.
The tools available with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license are described in CCS RouterNAV: Router
Specific Plug-in.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
NAVIGATOR-SNMP License
The NAVIGATOR-SNMP license allows complete monitoring and control customization of
any SNMP-enabled device. When used in combination with an NAVIGATOR-INT license, you
can build Graphical Navigation pages with parameters and alarms generated by SNMP
traps.
NAVIGATOR-INT License
The NAVIGATOR-INT license lets you drag and drop parameters and alarms onto Graphical
Navigation pages. By mixing and matching multiple devices,you can build virtual device
control and monitoring surfaces, such as Alarm Network Walls. This license requires either
the NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license key on the same PC.
For more information about the NAVIGATOR-INT license key, see Volume 5.
NAVIGATOR-CLI License
This license includes the Control mode functionality of NAVIGATOR-DEV and the graphical
navigation capabilities of NAVIGATOR-SRV. A PC running NAVIGATOR-CLI is installed on a
network that also has at least one instance of NAVIGATOR-SRV. Users on a NAVIGATOR-CLI
PC can retrieve graphical navigation pages and presets, and access devices for control and
monitoring purposes, from the NAVIGATOR-SRV PC. Users can control devices and operate
pages to which they have been granted permissions, and they can load and create presets.
NAVIGATOR-CLI installations operate only in Control mode. A user with a NAVIGATOR-CLI
license does not configure the Navigation pane, create router configurations, run
discoveries or create Graphical Navigation pages.
Though some data is stored on the NAVIGATOR-SRV PC, a PC with a NAVIGATOR-CLI
license communicates directly with equipment. The NAVIGATOR-CLI PC receives alarms
directly from all devices the user is assigned to monitor. Assignments are done by an
Administrator user on a NAVIGATOR-SRV PC.
Information that is stored on a NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed system includes:

Alarm logs

Product sheets and user manuals

Control options settings

Diagnostic options settings

Standalone tools

Dialog box placements
These settings and items will not travel with your User ID if you log into a different
NAVIGATOR-CLI PC.
NAVIGATOR-RTR License
The NAVIGATOR-RTR license does not work in cooperation with any other license keys.
Using this license in Build mode, you can configure any device and create control panels for
routers using the Wizard. In Control mode, you have CCS-P control of all Imagine
Communications routers, including Platinum, Integrator, and Panacea. You can control
devices using default software control panels and custom software control panels created in
Build mode.
5
6
Chapter 1
Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device Control
For more information on configuring and controlling routers, see Volume 6.
ICONM-SCP License
The ICONM-SCP (ISCP) license does not work in cooperation with any other license keys,
and is intended for use with a touch-screen monitor. Using this license, you can create a
feature-complete control panel for an IconMaster switcher. The control panel also has tools
for setting some IconMaster configuration options.
The control panel provides audio information for a selected channel and provides
sub-panels to adjust various settings on the channel. For more information, see CCS
Navigator: Enhanced Functionality .
ICONM-SCP-LITE License
The ICONM-SCP-LITE (ISCP-LITE) license is intended for use with a touch-screen monitor
and must be physically and logically paired with an IconMaster Hardware Remote Control
Panel. It does not work in cooperation with any other license keys. The control panel has
tools for setting some IconMaster configuration options, provides audio information for the
hardware control panel, and provides sub-panels to adjust various settings on that panel.
For more information, see CCS Navigator: Enhanced Functionality .
NAVIGATOR-NX License
When you have a NAVIGATOR-NX license, after discovering NEXIO devices, you can open
control windows for those devices.
The NAVIGATOR-NX license also enables a wizard for creating graphical pages for NEXIO™
systems. These pages allows you to monitor the health and operational parameters of your
NEXIO system. Working in conjunction with agents on the NEXIO server platform,
NAVIGATOR-NX enables you to monitor system notifications, to make setting adjustments,
and to control basic server configuration from a remote PC.
For more information, see Volume 4.
Basic CCS Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses)
If you do not purchase any license keys, after the initial 30-day trial period Magellan CCS
Navigator will open in Build mode only, with no option to switch to Control mode.
With no licenses, you have tools to discover and set up CCS-enabled devices on a broadcast
network. You can establish IP settings (IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask)
for CCS-enabled devices and set up menu hierarchies for CCS-compliant control panels.
You can configure and monitor physical and logical routing devices. You can determine the
current version of software and/or firmware on each CCS device and to upload new
software or firmware to the devices.
7
2
Installation
Software Installation Overview
If you are installing Magellan CCS Navigator for the first time on your PC, it will
automatically install with a free 30-day license. For the trial period, all license keys will be
activated, so you can evaluate which licenses you need.
If you have a previous version of CCS software (Pilot, CoPilot, Magellan CCS Navigator, or
IconMasterNav), you can choose to install either a Client or Server version of Magellan CCS
Navigator. When your 30-day trial license expires, you must purchase a NAVIGATOR-CLI or
NAVIGATOR-SRV license to preserve the previous data.
This version of the Magellan CCS Navigator software requires NEO 3901RES-E, ICE6800+,
LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to be upgraded to version 3.0 or higher software. The
recommended system upgrade procedure consists of first upgrading all NEO 3901-RES-E
and ICE6800+ modules, then the LCP-3901-1U or RCP-CCS-1U, and finally to install or
upgrade the Magellan CCS Navigator software.
You may need to install other required programs or components as well. Most of these are
handled as part of the Magellan CCS Navigator installation.
See the following topics to install the CCS Navigator software application and other required
software and hardware components:

Required Hardware on page 7

Required Operating System and Software on page 9

Installing Other Required Software on page 10

Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool on page 12

Installing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software on page 12

Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software on page 16

Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19
Required Hardware
A Magellan CCS Navigator Client system normally connects to a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server for administrative purposes and to retrieve pages and panels, profiles, presets, and
layouts. Each Magellan CCS Navigator client PC normally has a NAVIGATOR-CLI license.
8
Chapter 2
Installation
Magellan CCS Navigator Servers are where administrator users will normally configure a
network and create pages and panels. These PCs will store pages and profiles, presets, and
layouts, and will normally have a NAVIGATOR-SRV and/or a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
They may additionally have NAVIGATOR-NX and NAVIGATOR-INT licenses.
Standalone Magellan CCS Navigator systems will normally connect to specific equipment,
or a network without a Magellan CCS Navigator Server system as an intermediary. They
may have a NAVIGATOR-NX, ICONM-SCP, ICONM-SCP-LITE, or NAVIGATOR-DEV license.
Install the CCS Navigator software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following hardware
requirements:
Table 2-1 PC Requirements for Magellan CCS Navigator Clients and Servers
Client
Server
Minimum Supported
Requirements
Minimum Supported
Requirements
3 GHz Pentium IV
processor (Core 2 Duo 2.39 GHz recommended)
Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz
Processor
System Memory
8 GB DRAM
(16 GB recommended)
16 GB DRAM
100-BaseT
10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet
Connection
HDD Drive
20 GB
160 GB Hard Disk Drive
Available Disk Space
1 GB
5 GB
Optical Drive
DVD-ROM Drive
DVD-ROM Drive
Super VGA supporting
1152 × 864 (19-inch
recommended)

Video graphic module with
256MB DDR3 SDRAM
supporting up to a minimum
1920x1080 resolutions

LCD Monitor supporting up to
1920x1080 resolution
Network Connection
Display
It is not recommended to run Magellan CCS Navigator Server on a PC that is running or
hosting other applications or servers. If Magellan CCS Navigator is installed remotely, the
clients should connect to the server through VPN, which offers a layer of protection.
For a routing system that contains Platinum TDM or is of size larger than 256x256 it is
recommend that you use a system that meets or exceeds the recommend system
requirements.
Configuring a PC Monitor for Best Display
For CCS software to show clearly and appropriately on a PC monitor, set the Display
Properties for the monitor to 1152 × 864 resolution with small fonts. Go to the Start
menu and select Settings > Control Panel > Display > Display Properties and. Also,
set the color palette to display either “High” (16-bit) or “True” (24-bit) color.
For best results, set the display to 96 DPI. This setting is found in Settings > Properties >
Settings > Advanced, on the General tab.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Required Operating System and Software
For best results, use Microsoft Windows 8.1 Professional, 64 bit.
You can install Magellan CCS Navigator on a PC running one of the following operating
systems:

Microsoft Windows 8.1 Professional, 64 bit

Windows Vista

Windows Server 2003 R2 Service Pack 2 (Standard or Enterprise Editions)

Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 or 64 bit

Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, and Windows 8.1

Windows XP Service Pack 3
The CCS Navigator software does not support Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, or
Windows 2000.
Before installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software on a PC running Windows XP
Service Pack 3, contact Customer Service. If you are running Windows XP Service
Pack 2, you must update to SP3 before installing Magellan CCS Navigator.
Before you install CCS Navigator, you should install the recommended third-party software
programs or components on the PC. Most of these programs are included on the
Documentation and Product Resources DVD, but you can download the others from the
Internet.
If a PC does not have installations of the prerequisite third-party software for its operating
system, the setup program will abort.
See the following topics for more information:

Installing Other Required Software on page 10

Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool on page 12
9
10
Chapter 2
Installation
Installing Other Required Software
Most of the required software is available in the Third party folder on the Documentation
and Product Resources DVD. During your Magellan CCS Navigator install, if the following
software is not found, an installer for the missing program may start. This will not disrupt
your installation of Magellan CCS Navigator, which will continue once all the other required
software is found or installed.
Table 2-2 Required Third-Party Software
Software
Description
File Name and Location
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader
4.0 minimum; 8.0 preferred
Opens and prints user manuals and product
brochures included with CCS software
applications and Online Help.
For best results, install Acrobat 8.0 for
Windows, available for free from Adobe
Systems Inc.
If you choose to install the latest version of
Acrobat Reader from the DVD, you should
first uninstall the previous version.
Third Party\Adobe\
AdbeRdr812_en_US.exe
Microsoft Windows Installer
3.1
Ensures that you are able to install Microsoft
XML Parser.
Third party\
Microsoft\Installer\
instMsiW.exe
Microsoft XML parser 3.0
Helps read XML configuration files and runs
the New Page Wizard.
Third party\
Microsoft\XML\
msxml3usa.msi
Microsoft Internet Explorer
7.0
Enables you to read the Online Help and
other support documents. It also provides
access to our website.
The Windows XP operating system works
best with IE 7.0.
Third
party\Microsoft\Ie7\ie7s
etup.exe
Note: For best results, do not use Internet
Explorer 10.
Windows XP Service Pack 3
Provides a higher level of security and all of
the latest updates to Windows XP.
Microsoft does not permit the
redistribution of this Service Pack
software. However, you can
download it from the Microsoft
website. If your PC is directly
connected to the Internet, visit
http://
windowsupdate.microsoft.com/.
Otherwise, select Download and
Deploy Service Pack 3 on http://
www.microsoft.com/downloads/
details.aspx?familyid=673A1019-8E
3E-4BE0-AC31-70DD21B5AFA7&di
splaylang=en, and follow the
download instructions.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Table 2-2 Required Third-Party Software (Continued)
Software
Description
File Name and Location
Windows Server 2003
Service Pack 2
Provides a higher level of security and all of
the latest updates to Windows Server.
Microsoft does not permit the
redistribution of this Service Pack
software. However, you can
download it from the Microsoft
website. If your PC is directly
connected to the Internet, visit
http://
windowsupdate.microsoft.com/.
Otherwise, select Download and
Deploy Service Pack 2 to
Multiple Computers on http://
www.microsoft.com/technet/
prodtechnol/winxppro/maintain/
winxpsp2.mspx, and follow the
download instructions.
Microsoft .Net 2.0
Needed to support some of the components
within the Magellan CCS Navigator
application
Third Party\Microsoft\Net
2.0\dotnetfx.exe
SQL Server Express 2005
(SP3)
A relational database management system.
Third Party\Microsoft\SQL Server
SQLEXPR.EXE
(Magellan CCS Navigator
Server installations only)
If the PC has SQL 2005, 2008, or 2012 then
Magellan CCS Navigator’s install will
proceed. If none of these is found, SQL 2008
R2 is installed as part of the Magellan CCS
Navigator installation procedure.
Microsoft Messaging Queue Needed for notifications between Magellan
CCS Navigator Server and Client.
Part of your Windows XP, Windows
Vista, or Windows 7 install; if this
option was not installed with the
rest of the operating system, an
attended install will start. In rare
cases you may need to insert the
Windows Installation DVD in your
DVD drive to complete the install.
To use the Signal Monitor tool, you must install additional hardware and software. See
Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool on page 12.
Before you upgrade or install Magellan CCS Navigator software, you may need to upgrade
other compatible equipment on your network. See Order of Installation for Software
and Firmware on page 11.
Order of Installation for Software and Firmware
If you are upgrading from a version of CCS software prior to 3.0, you must upgrade your
entire network at the same time. This version of the Magellan CCS Navigator software
requires NEO 3901RES-E, ICE6800+, LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to be upgraded to
version 3.0 or later software. The recommended system upgrade order is:
1
First, upgrade all NEO 3901-RES-E and ICE6800+ modules.
2
Next, upgrade the LCP-3901-1U or RCP-CCS-1U local and remote control units.
3
Finally, install or upgrade the current installation of the Magellan CCS Navigator software.
11
12
Chapter 2
Installation
Requirements for Using MPEG-4 Streaming
To use Magellan CCS Navigator with QSEE6800+ (with QSEE6800+HS option) and X75
(with X75OPT-STR module), you need to install.QuickTime 7.1 release. You can download
QuickTime directly from Apple's Website at http://www.apple.com/quicktime/win.html.
Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool
The CCS Magellan CCS Navigator software uses any video card compatible with Microsoft
DirectX 8.1 or later for confidence monitoring of video signals on the CCS network. The
Windows XP operating system includes DirectX 8.1, so you do not need to install this
separately.
Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements specified for the
video card you are installing, and install it according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Preparing the PC for Installation
Prior to installing Magellan CCS Navigator Client, you must turn off Windows Firewall
(found at Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall. Once installation is complete, you
can reactivate Windows Firewall and Magellan CCS Navigator Client will operate correctly.
Procedure-- Windows XP
Before installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software on a PC running Windows XP
Service Pack 3, contact Customer Service.
Procedure-- Windows 2003
If your PC is running the Windows 2003 operating system with Service Pack 2, before you
install Magellan CCS Navigator, you must remove MSXML6 sp2. To remove this file, use the
Add/Remove Programs tool.
To use Add/Remove Programs to prepare your PC for Magellan CCS Navigator installation,
follow these steps:
1
From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2
From the list that appears, choose MSXML6 SP2, and then click Remove.
3
When the process is finished, close the window.
You are now ready to install Magellan CCS Navigator.
Installing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software
Magellan CCS Navigator can not be installed in a compressed drive. If the installation fails,
check whether the drive is compressed or not.
To install the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator software, complete these steps:
1
Close all other applications running on the PC and insert the Documentation and Product
Resources DVD into the PC DVD drive.
Select Software Applications > CCS Navigator > Navigator x.x Setup.exe.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
2
When the unpacking process finishes, click Next.
A Welcome box appears.
3
Exit all Windows programs, read the instructions in the Welcome box, and then click
Next>.
The Software License Agreement box appears.
4
Read the license agreement, and then click Yes to accept its terms.
The Magellan CCS Navigator install will continue in Chinese or Japanese if the PC is known
(to Magellan CCS Navigator) to be operating in either of those languages. Otherwise, the
installation will continue in English. To switch the language of the Magellan CCS Navigator
display after installation, see Setting the Operational Language on page 39.
5
A readme about licenses appears. Read the license information and then click Next> to
proceed.
6
The Client/Server box appears. Click the type of install you want.

If Setup detects a CoPilot or Pilot install, or a previous version of Magellan CCS
Navigator Client, you should install Magellan CCS Navigator Client.
Note: if you are doing a client install, disable Windows Firewall during installation. After
installation is complete, you can re-enable Windows Firewall and Magellan CCS
Navigator Client will operate correctly.

7
If Setup detects a previous version of Magellan CCS Navigator Server, you should
choose to install the newer version of Magellan CCS Navigator Server.
Click Next.
If the chosen type of install is not possible, you will see an error message. Go back and
choose your install type again.
If you are installing Magellan CCS Navigator Client, the Setup will try to connect to the
Server. Even if it fails, you can proceed with the install (or make the necessary changes).
Note however that the Magellan CCS Navigator Client will not start without a valid
Magellan CCS Navigator Server.
8
(Client installs only) If you choose a Client install, the Choose a Server box appears.
Choose the location of the Magellan CCS Navigator Server (either the IP address or
computer name).
Enter the SQL instance. By default, this is SQLEXPRESS.
Click Next.
9
Now the Select Components box appears. Select the check box of each component you
want to install.
13
14
Chapter 2
Installation
Table 2-3 Options in Select Components Box
Box
Function
Response
Program Files
Enables installation of the CCS
program files
Leave the option
enabled.
Documentation
Enables installation of the
electronic version of user
manuals for CCS Magellan
CCS Navigator and all
supported devices
Leave the option
enabled unless the PC is
almost out of hard drive
space.
The Mandatory Components box appears, listing third-party software that you must
install on the PC before you can install the CCS Navigator software.
10 Click OK.
The setup program will now search the PC for both the required and recommended
software, including SQL Server, MSMQ (Microsoft Messaging Queue), and Microsoft .Net
v2.0, and determine what version of the software is on the PC.
This search has three possible outcomes:
a
Minimum Versions of the Required Software Not Installed—If the setup program
discovers that minimum versions of the required software programs are missing, it will
list the missing software and then start an installer to load each missing program.
b
Recommended Versions of Required Software Not Installed—If the setup
program discovers that the recommended versions of one or more pieces of software
are missing, a warning box lists the newer version or versions and recommends that you
quit the setup program to install the newer version. However, the setup will continue if
you choose not to quit.

To continue the setup, click Yes.

To quit the setup, click No. Then, when the Exit Setup box appears, click Exit
Setup. Install the required or recommended software, and then restart the setup
program.
See Required Operating System and Software on page 9 and Installing Other
Required Software on page 10.
c
Appropriate Installations of all Required and Recommended Software Found—
The setup program discovers that appropriate versions of all required and
recommended software programs are installed.
11 The setup program then searches the PC for previous CCS software installations. The two
possible outcomes to this search are as follows:

No Previous CCS Control Software Installations —
A Choose Destination Location box appears. See If Setup Detects No Previous
Installations on page 15.

Previous CCS Control Software Installations Exist —
A Previous Installation Detected box appears. See If Setup Detects a Previous
Installation on page 15.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
If Setup Detects No Previous Installations
This section continues the procedure for installing Magellan CCS Navigator software
for a PC that has all the required third-party software installed but no previous installations
of CCS control software.
When the Choose Destination Location box appears, complete these steps:
1
Either leave the default destination location as is or use the Browse dialog box to select
another destination for the installation, and then click Next>.
When the Select Program Folder box appears, a default program folder title appears in
the Program Folders box.
The default program folder is Harris Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.].
(VersionNo. refers to the software version number.)
2
Click Next> to accept the default folder.
The Start Copying Files box appears, listing the destination folder for the installation.
3
Click Next.
The setup program will copy and register the components, and then the Setup Complete
box appears.
4
Click Finish.
Your installation is done. Magellan CCS Navigator is ready to use.
If Setup Detects a Previous Installation
An Administrator user must install, reinstall, or upgrade CCS software. The default
Administrator password for upgrades from Pilot 1.0 is Leitch. Pilot 1.1 and higher, all
CoPilot versions, and Navigator 1.0 have no default passwords—therefore, the Password
box remains blank or empty. All passwords are case-sensitive, so type UPPER and lower case
carefully.
This section continues the procedure for installing Magellan CCS Navigator on a PC that has
all the required third-party software installed and a current or previous version of a CCS
control software application.
When the Previous Installation Detected box appears, complete these steps:
1
Click Yes on the Previous Installation Detected box.
A query box asks if you want to continue installation.
2
Click Yes.
An Administrator Logon box appears.
3
Type in the appropriate password. (Passwords are case-sensitive.)
4
Click Log On.
The Database Upgrade box appears, showing three options:

Upgrade existing databases

Upgrade existing databases and alarm logs

Start over with new databases (Overwrites the existing databases)
15
16
Chapter 2
Installation
5
Select an option, and then click Next>.
The SNMP Trap Conversion Rules Upgrade dialog box appears, showing two options:
6

Replace overwrites the previous installed SNMPRuleBase.xml with a new version with
new "Traps to Alarms" conversion rules for new SNMP devices.

Keep does not replace the SNMPRuleBase.xml database and retains local "Traps to
Alarms" conversion rules for your own SNMP devices that were created using the
SNMP Trap Configuration tool.
Select an option, and then click Next>.
The Previous Installation Folder Detected box appears.
7
Click Yes to accept this folder as the destination for the new setup.
The Start Copying Files box appears.
8
Click Next> to continue.
An information box advises that the setup application will save the existing users directory
to a specified backup directory.
Regardless of the option selected earlier in the Database Upgrade box, the setup
application will create a backup folder containing the old user database files.
9
Click OK to close the information box.
If you are upgrading the user database files, the setup application logs the conversion
activity and shows the log on the screen in the Database Upgrade box.
10 Read the log to check whether all files successfully converted, and then click OK to close
the log.
When the setup program finishes, click Finish.
If you are upgrading your Magellan CCS Navigator installation from a previous version, and
you have a configured CCS Router, and you have some pages with rules or objects referring
to the router, you may need to modify the router configuration. For more information,
please refer to Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
Your installation is done. Magellan CCS Navigator is ready to use.
After upgrading from a previous version of Magellan CCS Navigator, the positions of
docked windows may change. You will need to drag and drop the Navigation panel (on the
right) to the left side of your screen in Magellan CCS Navigator.
Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software
Only an Administrator user can properly and entirely remove the Magellan CCS
Navigator software.
For best results, remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software by using the automatic Add/
Remove Programs application or the Uninstall program.
Only if both the automatic removal methods fail to delete all Magellan CCS Navigator
software components should you use the manual method for removing the software.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
See the following topics for more information:

Using the Add or Remove Programs Application on page 17

Using the Uninstall Program on page 17

Manually Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software on page 18
Using the Add or Remove Programs Application
If you remove a Magellan CCS Navigator Server that has connected Clients, those
Clients will stop working.
To remove the CCS Navigator software with the Windows Add/Remove Programs
application, an Administrator user must complete these steps:
1
Click Start, point to Settings, and click Control Panel.
This will show the Control Panel application icons, including the Add/Remove Programs
icon.
2
Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.
The Install/Remove tab of the Add/Remove Programs Properties box will appear.
3
Scroll down the list of installed programs, and select this program:
Magellan CCS Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.]
VersionNo. represents a version number of the software targeted for removal.
4
Click Add/Remove.
A Confirm File Deletion box appears.
5
Click Yes.
6
(Magellan CCS Navigator Server only) Another warning appears letting you know that
removing the software will cause all connected Magellan CCS Navigator Clients to stop
operating.
7
Click Yes.
(Magellan CCS Navigator Servers only) Another warning may appear, informing you that
Router Service is operating.
8
Click Yes to disable the Routing Service.
9
Click Yes to continue the removal process.
10 When the program has finished removing the application from the computer, click OK on
each of the two open boxes to close them.
Using the Uninstall Program
To remove the CCS Navigator software using the Uninstall program, an Administrator user
must complete these steps:
1
Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs for Windows XP), select Magellan CCS
Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.], and then click Uninstall.
VersionNo. represents the CCS Navigator software version number.
17
18
Chapter 2
Installation
2
When a Confirm File Deletion box appears, click Yes.
3
When asked if you want to continue, click Yes.
4
When the program finishes removing the application, click OK to close the Remove
Programs from Your Computer box.
5
Click OK to close the Add/Remove Programs box.
Manually Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software
If you remove a Magellan CCS Navigator Server that has connected Magellan CCS
Navigator Clients, those Clients will stop working.
Use this method for removing the CCS Navigator software only if both the automatic
methods for removing the software fail to remove all its components.
To manually remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software, complete these general steps:
1
Delete the Magellan CCS Navigator folder and its contents. See Deleting the Magellan
CCS Navigator Folder on page 18.
2
Remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software components from the Windows Registry. See
Removing Components from the Windows Registry on page 19.
Deleting the Magellan CCS Navigator Folder
To manually remove the Magellan CCS Navigator folder from the PC, an Administrator
user must complete these steps:
1
Double click on My Computer on your PC desktop.
2
On the system drive where your Magellan CCS Navigator Server software is installed,
browse to the location where the database files are stored.
The typical path is: c:\Program files\Harris\Magellan CCS Navigator. If
you have upgraded to CCS Navigator from an existing CoPilot or Pilot installation, first
locate the Pilot folder at c:\Program files\Leitch\Pilot, then right-click the
Pilot folder and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
3
Right-click the Magellan CCS Navigator folder icon and then select Delete
from the resulting shortcut menu.
4
When an alert box asks you to confirm deletion of the folder and its contents, click OK.
Deleting the Databases (Magellan CCS Navigator Server Only)
To manually remove the Magellan CCS Navigator databases from the PC, an Administrator
user must complete these steps:
1
Double click on My Computer on your PC desktop.
2
On the system drive where your Magellan CCS Navigator Server software is installed,
browse to the location where the database files are stored.
The typical path is: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Harris\CCS
3
Right-click the CCS folder icon and then select Delete from the resulting shortcut menu.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Removing Components from the Windows Registry
To remove the CCS Navigator software components from the Windows Registry, complete
these steps:
1
Click Start and point to Run... to show the Run box.
2
Type regedit in the Run box, and then click OK to start the Registry Editor.
3
Locate the Navigator folder icon in these parts of the registry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Harris\Magellan CCS Navigator
4
Right-click the Navigator folder icon, and then select Delete from the resulting shortcut
menu.
5
A box will ask you to confirm deletion.
Click Yes.
6
Locate the Magellan CCS Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.] folder icon in this part
of the registry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\
CurrentVersion\Uninstall\Magellan CCS Magellan CCS
Navigator [Version No.]
VersionNo. represents the software version number.
7
Right-click the Magellan CCS Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.] folder icon, and
then select Delete from the resulting shortcut menu.
8
When an alert box asks you to confirm the deletion, click Yes.
9
Click Close in the top right corner of the Registry Editor dialog box.
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses
When you install Magellan CCS Navigator, it will automatically start with a 30-day free
license with all keys enabled. When this license expires, unless you purchase a license, your
Magellan CCS Navigator installation will revert to Build mode only. No Control mode
functionality will be available.
If your license is temporary, you will see a notification on the bottom of the splash screen
during logon. This notification will indicate the number of days remaining before your
license expires. To acquire a license key, see Changing a License Key on page 20.
License keys are described in these sections:

NAVIGATOR-DEV License on page 2

NAVIGATOR-SRV License on page 3

NAVIGATOR-SNMP License on page 5

NAVIGATOR-INT License on page 5

NAVIGATOR-CLI License on page 5

NAVIGATOR-RTR License on page 5

ICONM-SCP License on page 6

NAVIGATOR-NX License on page 6
19
20
Chapter 2
Installation
Viewing Your
License Key
To view your license information in Build or Control mode, choose Help > License from
the main menu.
Items for which there is a key display Enabled in the Status field. Items for which no key is
available display Disabled. If your PC has a temporary license, the duration of that license is
displayed.
The number of days remaining in a temporary license are displayed on the splash screen
during Magellan CCS Navigator startup.
Changing a License Key
To alter the license key on your PC, you must be logged on to Windows as an administrator.
To add a new license, follow these steps:
1
In Build mode, choose Help > License from the main menu.
A dialog box appears:
Click here to open a
PDF license request
form.
Figure 2-1 License Dialog
2
Provide the serial number from the License Dialog dialog box to your sales representative.
There are two ways to provide the serial number and receive your license key:

By phone. Contact your sales representative.

By faxing or mailing a form to Imagine Communications. This form is available by
clicking License Form. The form includes information on where it should be sent.
Acrobat Reader is required.
3
Enter the provided key in the License Key field, and then click Apply.
4
Shut down and restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
The Magellan CCS Navigator license should be recognized. A restart of the PC is not
required.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Backup and Restore Utility
You may sometimes need to return Magellan CCS Navigator to a previous configuration.
For this, Magellan CCS Navigator has a utility to create backups and install them. A backup
includes configured data in your Magellan CCS Navigator system.
Magellan CCS Navigator must be closed in order to use the Backup and Restore utility.
To launch the Backup and Restore utility, choose Start > Programs > Magellan CCS
Navigator x.x Server > Navigator Backup Restore Utility.
This window opens:
Browse
Figure 2-2 Navigator Backup Restore Utility Main Dialog Box
To create a backup:
1
(Optional) Enter Source information for the Magellan CCS Navigator server on your
network that you want to back up.
2
(Optional) Click Browse to choose a location to save your backup files.
3
Click Backup (backs up data locally) or Backup and Restore to Destination Server
(transfers data to an alternate server).
The Backup in Progress dialog box opens. The Log Details field documents the files that
are backed up.
When the backup is complete, message appears.
4
(Optional) Enter a name for the backup in the Backup Label field.
This field is not available until the backup has been successfully created.
If you do not enter a name for the backup, the default name includes the day and time.
5
Click Exit to close the Backup in Progress dialog box.
21
22
Chapter 2
Installation
To view the contents of a backup, first select an item in the Recent Backups list, and then
click View Log.
The Viewing Log File dialog box contains the same information as the Backup in Progress
dialog box. You can rename the backup here by entering a new name in the Backup Label
field.
Figure 2-3 Viewing Log File Dialog Box
To restore a backup:
1
Enter Destination information for the Magellan CCS Navigator server on your network
that you want to restore files to.
1
Do one of the following:
2

Select an item in the Recent Backups list.

Click Restore External Backup to open a dialog box where you can choose a
backup to restore, possibly from a memory card or another PC.
Click Restore Selected Backup.
When the process is complete, a Progress is Complete message appears.
3
Click OK, and then click Exit to close the Restore in Progress dialog box.
23
3
Logging In and Account
Administration
User Account Overview
All users are assigned to user groups, which can have varying levels of access to specific
devices on the CCS network.
Administrator users have access to all devices and all user accounts. However, access is
limited based on whether you are at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server (NAVIGATOR-SRV
license) or a Magellan CCS Navigator Client (NAVIGATOR-CLI) workstation. An
Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Client will be able to see User tabs in the
Navigation pane for all users, but will still not be able to use Build mode on the Magellan
CCS Navigator Client.
Administrators set up user accounts and user groups, which define the level of access the
other users have to devices on the network. Each user account is assigned to a user group
and inherits default access level assignments. Access privileges can, however, be altered on a
per-user account basis. All users can view their own user account information and change
their password.
Access privileges are divided into three groups: Presets, Devices, and Pages. These are
described in Assigning Access Rights on page 28.
Logging On
For the first login after an installation or reinstallation of CCS Navigator, the User Name
box shows the name Administrator. At subsequent logins, the User Name box shows
the name of the person who last logged on.
If the previous user had Auto Login privileges, then the Logon box does not appear as
Magellan CCS Navigator starts. You can select File > Logout to log in as a different user.
See the following topics for more information:

Logging Off or Exiting on page 25

Adding a User Account on page 32
By default, a new CCS Navigator installation has no password. However, if you are
upgrading from CCS Navigator 1.0, the default password is Leitch.
To start CCS Navigator, complete these steps:
1
Find the CCS Navigator application icon in Windows Explorer and double-click the icon.
24
Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration
Or click Start, point to Programs > Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.], and then
click Navigator [VersionNo.]. VersionNo. represents the CCS Navigator software
version number.
2
When the Logon box appears, perform one of these actions:

If you are logging on as a user, enter your assigned user name. (You do not need to
re-enter your user name if it already appears.)

If you are logging on as an Administrator user, type
Administrator
Or your user name.

If you are logging on as a Support user, type
Support
3
Tab to the Password box, and then type in the password. (Passwords are case-sensitive.)
4
(Optional, available on NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PCs only) Click the Options button.
The Magellan CCS Navigator Server and Client must be using the same software revision in
order to for Client logon to be successful. Magellan CCS Navigator Client will not start
without a valid Server.
The Login dialog box expands to show a Server menu.
Figure 3-1 Client Login Dialog Box
When using Windows Vista or Windows 7, only a user with Administrative privileges can
change the designated Server.
5
From the Server menu, select the PC to which your Magellan CCS Navigator Client
connects to store and retrieve shared data, such as Navigator pages, panels, discoveries, etc.
6
(Optional) To modify the list of servers, select (Server Management).
The Server Management dialog box opens.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 3-2 Server Managemend Dialog Box
On this screen, you have the following options:


Add—Opens a dialog box where you can add a new server.
Modify—Opens a dialog box where you can modify the selected server
(highlighted in blue on the Server Management dialog box).

Delete—Removes the highlighted server from the list. You are asked to confirm
the deletion.
Click Close to return to the Login screen.
7
(Windows Vista or Windows 7 only) A Permissions dialog appears. Click Allow to
complete the change. Only a user with Windows Administrator privileges can make this
change.
8
Click Log On.
Logging Off or Exiting
Logging off the application enables you to log on as a different user without closing the
application, while exiting closes the application.
To log off, select Log Off from the File menu.
To exit, choose one of the following methods:

Click Close at the right end of the Title Bar.

Select Exit from the File menu.

Click Exit on the Log On box.
Managing User Groups
Only administrators can create or modify user groups. They can add, remove, and modify
the device, preset, and page access rights assigned to user groups.
25
26
Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration
A member of the Administrator user group can selectively enable another user or user
group's access to individual devices and to individual parameters on a device, to Graphical
Navigation pages, and to Presets. By default, all device, page, and preset access is disabled
for all users and user groups other than the Administrator user group.
After creating user groups and selecting the access rights for each user group, the
administrators create individual users and assign each user to a user group. Each user starts
with the access rights of the users group they are assigned to. An administrator can then
adjust the access rights for each individual user. If the user group’s access rights are altered
after a user account is created, the user account will not inherit the changes from the user
group.
Only members of the Administrator user group can modify group permissions. However,
all users can view information about their own user account and user group.
Examples of user groups include the following.

Administrators—a group of users who can assign and change permissions for other
users on the system

Demo—a group of users who demonstrate the software

Engineers—a group of users who design and implement the CCS network, have
responsibility for maintaining it, and troubleshoot problems

Operators—a group of users who operate and monitor specific devices on the CCS
network
See the following topics for help with user groups:

Adding a User Group on page 26

Removing a User Group on page 31

Modifying Group Properties on page 31
Adding a User Group
Only Administrator users can create user groups.
To add a user group, complete these steps:
1
From the main menu, choose Options > User Groups, or if the Login Options dialog
box is already open, click the User Groups tab.
The Login Options dialog box appears.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 3-3 Login Options Dialog Box’s User Groups Tab
2
Click Add Group.
The Add Group box appears.
Figure 3-4 Add Group Box
3
Type a group name in the Group Name box, or click the down arrow and select a Windows
user group name from the list.
The Group ID field is automatically populated with a unique ID number. You can
change the number. If the number you enter has been used by another group, when
you try to save the group, you will see an error message and will not be able to close
the dialog box until you either cancel or change the Group ID to an unused number.
You can also type a brief description of the group in the Description field.
27
28
Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration
4
Under the Access rights section of the screen, select the access privileges members of this
group will have. See Assigning Access Rights on page 28 for more information.
5
Click OK to close the Add Group box.
6
Add additional user groups by repeating steps 2-6, or click OK to close the Login Options
box.
After you create a group, you can add users to it. See Adding a User Account on page 32
for more information.
Assigning
Access
Rights
User accounts inherit access rights from the user group to which they are assigned. See
Managing User Groups on page 25 and Managing User Accounts on page 32 for more
information.
Access rights are assigned in three areas:

Assigning Device Access Rights on page 28

Assigning Preset Access Rights on page 29

Assigning Page Access Rights on page 30
Assigning Device Access Rights
If you are an Administrator user, all the discovered and created devices appear on the
Devices tab of the User Account and User Group tab of the Login Options
dialog box. If you are a General user, you will only see the devices to which you have access
rights.
Device access privileges are defined per device, and all discovered or created devices appear
in the list.
The devices list on the Access Rights dialog box includes routers, salvos, frames, and
modules as discrete items.
Figure 3-5 Assigning Device Access Privileges
When Monitor is checked, Control and Configuration become available, if a device
has Control and Configuration options. Some devices may not have all three options. For
example, you cannot place a check beside Control for a NUCLEUS control panel, because it
doesn’t have control options.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

Monitoring - Users with this access level can view device settings and receive alarms,
but not alter settings on the device. Users must be assigned Monitoring access in order
to have either Control or Configuration access. Device monitoring is described in
Network Event Diagnostics on page 237.

Configuration - Users with this access level can alter the IP address and upload
firmware for the device. Device configuration id described in CCS Device
Configuration on page 127.

Control - Users with this access level can alter control and alarm settings on the
device, as described in CCS Device Control on page 255
When you click Control for a particular device, if that device has parametric control,
the Parameters button becomes available.
If you click Parameters, the Parameter Access Rights dialog box appears:
Figure 3-6 Assigning Parameter Access Privileges for a User Group
By default, access to all parameters is enabled when Control for a device is enabled.
Check the Enabled box to enable any advanced access rights, or clear the Enabled
box to disable any advanced access rights.
You can also click Enable All or Disable All to make universal changes to this list.
If an access right is disabled for a control parameter, the user or user group can view
the value of the parameter but not change it.
If you select the row and press the spacebar on your keyboard, all three columns are
selected. See Can I Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once? on page 326 for ways to make
selecting and unselecting items in a table.
If a user does not have access (control, monitoring or configuration) for a frame, they will
not have access to the devices in that frame either.
Assigning Preset Access Rights
Presets are stored on the Magellan CCS Navigator Server. All users can create presets for the
devices to which they have access.
29
30
Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration
Figure 3-7 Presets Tab of the User Group or User Account Dialog Box
By default, all presets are disabled for non-Administrator users. To change the status of a
preset, click in the Access Right Level column of the preset to be adjusted. The level
for that item becomes a drop-down menu. Click again to review the options.

Read/Write - This user or user group will be able to load (apply) the preset and
modify (save) it.

Read Only - This user or user group can load (apply) this preset, but cannot modify
(save) it.

Disabled - The preset will not show under the Preset folder for this user or user
group.
See Using Presets on page 270 for more information.
Assigning Page Access Rights
If you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, users of
NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed workstations can be assigned privileges to access pages. If a user
does not have access privileges to a page, that page will not appear within their interface at
all.
Figure 3-8 Pages Tab of the User Group or User Account
Dialog Box
By default, all pages are disabled for non-Administrator users. To change the status of a
page, place a check in the Access Right Level field.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
If a user does not have access to a page that is connected to another page that they do
have access to, they will receive an informative message.
Page access rights can also be assigned when an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS
Navigator Server creates a page. See Saving Graphical Navigation Pages on page 10 of CCS
RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in for more information.
Removing a
User Group
Only an Administrator user can remove user accounts and user groups. Before removing a
user group, you must first remove all user accounts associated with that group.
To remove a user account or user group, complete these steps:
1
(User accounts only) Remove all members listed in the group to be removed. (For
information on how to do this, see Changing User Account Information on page 34.)
2
Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click User Groups.
This shows the User Groups tab of the Login Options box.
3
Select the name of the group you want to remove, and then click Remove Group.
You cannot remove the Administrators user group, because it is required for operation of
the software. If you select the Administrators user group, the Remove button is
unavailable.
If you have not first deleted all members of the group, an alert box will advise you that
you must delete all group members before you can delete the group.
If you have already deleted all members of the group, an alert box asks you to confirm
removal of the group.
4
Click Yes to confirm removal of the group, or click No to cancel the action.
5
Click OK to close the User Groups box.
Modifying
Group
Properties
Group properties include the group name, description, and access rights to specific devices,
presets, and pages. Administrators can view and modify group properties. General users
can view only their group properties and have no editing rights for those properties.
To change the properties of a user group, complete these steps:
1
From the main menu, choose Options > User Groups, or if the Login Options dialog
box is already open, click the User Groups tab.
The User Groups tab of the Login Options box will appear.
2
Select the group whose properties you want to modify, and then click Modify Group.
In the User Group dialog box that appears, you can change the Group ID,
Description, and access rights for presets, pages, and devices. You cannot change
the Group Name.
See Assigning Access Rights on page 28 for more information.
3
Click OK to save your changes and close each open box.
31
32
Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration
Managing User Accounts
The Administrators are responsible for creating a user account and temporary password for
each person. However, users can change their passwords later.
Administrators also assign access permissions for pages, devices, and presets. Initially,
permissions are based on those assigned for the user group that a user is assigned to, but
they can be modified on an individual basis. See Managing User Groups on page 25 for
more information.
Any user can view their own user account information and change their own password.
Only Administrators can perform other tasks related to user accounts.
See these topics for further information on user accounts:
Adding a
User Account

Adding a User Account on page 32

Changing User Account Information on page 34

Changing User Account Information on page 34

Changing a Password on page 34
To add, remove or modify a user account, an Administrator user must make changes
in the User Accounts tab of the Login Options box.
To add a user account, an Administrator user must complete these steps:
1
Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click User Accounts to show the User
Accounts tab.
When Auto Login is
checked, users will
not be asked for a
user name or
password when
logging in. They will
be logged in
automatically as
members of the
Administrators group.
Figure 3-9 Login Options User Accounts Tab
2
Click Add User to show the User Account box.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
User IDs are
assigned
sequentially.
You can change
the user ID
number, but if
you select a
number that is
currently in use,
an alert box will
advise you to
select another
number.
Figure 3-10 User Account Dialog Box
3
Type the new user's name in the User Name box, or click the down arrow and select
a Windows user name from the drop-down list.
4
Select a user group for the new user from the Group list.
5
Type the user password twice, once in the New box and again in the Confirm box.
Passwords are case-sensitive, so type UPPER and lower case characters carefully.
6
Click OK to close the User Accounts dialog box, and then OK on the Login Options
dialog box to save your changes.
Removing a User Account
Only an administrator user can remove other user accounts.
To remove a user account, complete these steps:
1
Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click User Accounts.
This shows the User Accounts tab of the Login Options box.
2
Select the user name you want to remove, and then click Remove User to show the
Remove User Account box.
33
34
Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration
Figure 3-11 Remove User Account Dialog Box
The Remove User button will activate when you select the name of a user account
that can be removed. You cannot remove an Administrator user.
3
Click Yes to confirm the account removal in the Remove User Account box.
Select the Make a Backup Directory on Removal box to create a backup of the
account information, or clear the box if you do not want a backup of the information.
4
Click OK to close the Login Options box.
Changing User Account Information
Administrators can change the user ID, group assignment, access privileges, and password
of any user account other than their own. To change user account information, an
Administrator user must complete these steps:
1
From the main menu, choose Options > User Accounts.
This shows the User Accounts tab of the Login Options box.
2
Select the name of the user whose information you want to change.
3
Click Modify User to open the User Account box for the selected user.
You can change all the information on the screen except the user name.
4
Click OK to close the Login Options box.
Viewing User Account Information
General users cannot change their own access privileges for devices, pages, or presets.
However, they can view the list of devices, pages, and presets they have been assigned
access to. If you are a general user and need to see this information, follow these steps:
1
Click User Accounts on the Options menu.
2
Click Modify User on the User Accounts tab.
In the Access Rights section of the screen, click on the Devices, Presets and Pages
tabs to see the items that are listed.
Changing a Password
Administrators can change other account and group information. General users can only
change their password.
An Administrator user will initially assign passwords, but general users can change the
assigned password. If a general user forgets their password, an Administrator user can
assign a new password. See Changing User Account Information on page 34.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
To change a password, complete these steps:
1
Click User Accounts on the Options menu.
2
Click Modify User on the User Accounts tab.
3
In the Password section of the User Account box, type the new password into the New
box.
4
Type the password again, exactly as before, into the Confirm box.
Passwords are case-sensitive, so use the same combination of upper and lower case
characters each time you type your password.
5
Click OK to close the User Account box and then click OK to close the Login Options
box.
Administering User Logs
If you are an Administrator user, you can document usage of the software application for
troubleshooting and security purposes. You can log information about user names,
passwords, log ons, log outs, and failed log on attempts in a logon database.
See these topics for further information on specific tasks:
Creating a
User Log
1

Creating a User Log on page 35

Viewing the User Log on page 36
An Administrator user can configure the software to save user logon activity to a file. To
create a User Log file, complete these steps:
Click Log On... on the Options menu.
This shows the Log On tab of the Login Options box.
Figure 3-12 Login Options Dialog Box’s Log On Tab
35
36
Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration
2
Select the check boxes of the Event Logging Options you want to appear in your log;
clear the check boxes of any options you do not want to appear in your log. The options are
to log user logons, log user logouts, and log failed user logons.
3
Set the maximum size of your log file by typing in the desired number of megabytes.
When the log file reaches its maximum size, the application will rename the file and
begin a new log file with the current date stamp.
4
Click Clear Log to clear the current contents of the log file, if any.
5
Click OK to save your changes to the log file set up and close the Login Options box.
Viewing the
User Log
General users cannot view the user log, but Administrators can view the log if they have
enabled the log feature.
To view the user activity log, complete these steps:
1
Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click Log On.
2
When the Login Options box appears, select the Log tab.
The Previous and Next
buttons are only available
if the largest number of
events is more than the
Maximum number.
Hover the cursor over a
column divider to turn it
into a double-headed
arrow. In this state, you
can drag the divider to
make columns wider or
narrower.
Figure 3-13 Login Options Dialog Box’s Log Tab
Events are logged in the Log On Events section of the Log tab.
3
Click Load Events to refresh the list of log on events.
4
Select All logged events to show all the logged events at once, or enter a maximum
number of events to show at once in the Maximum number box.
5
Click OK to close the Login Options box.
37
4
Main
Interface
Interface Overview
The CCS Magellan CCS Navigator interface enables you to discover, configure, upgrade,
monitor, and control CCS-enabled devices from a central PC, even if the devices are
in different locations around the world.
Figure 4-1 CCS Magellan CCS Navigator
Setting the Operational Mode
There are two operational modes, each representing a different way of using the software
applications and their built-in tools. The operational modes are as follows:

Build mode has tools to build graphical representations of the devices on the CCS
network and configure those devices.

Control mode has tools for controlling and diagnosing problems with devices on the
CCS network.
On a PC running a NAVIGATOR-CLI license, only Control mode is available. PCs running
other Magellan CCS Navigator licenses can switch between Build and Control modes.
38
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
If you have activated the status bar, the name of the active operational mode shows in a cell
at the right end of the status bar.
Figure 4-2 Status bar Displaying Build Mode
The operational mode cell shows a colored background that changes with the operational
mode: yellow for Build mode, and green for Control mode.
Table 4-1 Tools Available in Each Operational Mode
Tool
Build
Control
Navigation
Yes
Yes
Diagnostics
No
Yes
Control
No
Yes
Graphical Navigation
Yes
Yes
Signal Monitor
Yes
Yes
Discovery
Yes
No
Parameters (with NAVIGATOR-INT license only)
Yes
No
Configuration
Yes
View only
Software Upgrade
Yes
No
Rules and Macros
Yes
Yes
Custom Properties
No
Yes
Standalone
Yes
Yes
SNMP
Yes
Yes
The tools you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more information.
CCS Magellan CCS Navigator provides two ways of setting the operational mode:

To change operational mode from the Status Bar, right-click the Operational Mode
cell at the right end of the Status Bar, and select the name of the mode you want from
the resulting shortcut menu.
The active mode has a highlighted colored square to the left of its name.
Figure 4-3 Shortcut Menu for the Operational Mode Status Cell

To change operational mode from the File menu, point to File > Operational Mode,
and then click the name of the operational mode you want.
A colored rectangle appears to the left of each of the operational modes. The Control
rectangle is green, and the Build rectangle is yellow. The rectangle of the current
operational mode is selected to indicate that it is active.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
If your license key expires, Magellan CCS Navigator will start in Build mode. You will be
unable to switch to Control mode. You cannot log into Magellan CCS Navigator if a
NAVIGATOR-CLI license has expired. For information on purchasing licensing keys, see
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19.
Setting the Operational Language
During Magellan CCS Navigator installation, the Setup language is configured to either
English, Japanese, or Chinese. When Magellan CCS Navigator is subsequently started, it
uses the Setup language as its operational language.
Figure 4-4. Magellan CCS Navigator Interface With Chinese Selected as Display Language
Static areas of Magellan CCS Navigator appear in the operational language when it is
different from English. The following areas of the interface appear in the Operational
language:

Menus, tabs, column headers, dialog boxes, Wizards, and status bars

Main folders of the Navigation pane, except the contents of the Catalog folder and
its sub-folders

User messages, including alerts, warnings, informational notices, and questions
Magellan CCS Navigator displays data that is received from a device or module in English,
regardless of the selected operational language. Information that will always appear in
English includes the following:
39
40
Chapter 4
Interface Overview

Magellan CCS Navigator user manuals and on-line help, and product sheets and user
manuals in the Catalog folder

Some portions of some Configuration dialog boxes, including the Version tab and
special Configuration interfaces for NUCLEUS, NEO LCP/RCP, and NEO Frames (field
names in Japanese or Chinese only)

Device-specific information such as parameters and alarms on Control dialog boxes
and in Access Rights interfaces, and alarm information
Entering data to a router database while in Japanese or Chinese language mode could
cause data corruption. Before entering router data, switch your keyboard settings to
English.
While text can be entered in Magellan CCS Navigator in any language, some areas of the
interface will only support data entry in English, even when an alternate operational
language is selected. When you enter text in some fields that can only accept data entry in
English, Magellan CCS Navigator automatically changes the keyboard layout from the
selected operational language back to English. Fields where this will happen include:

X75 machine name

QSEE6800+ channel name

Alias (name) for any parameter in Favorites

NUCLEUS name, category name, and Configuration submenu

NEO SuiteView command string
If you change the keyboard to a different operational language to force alternate data entry
in one of these fields, data corruption could occur.
When Magellan CCS Navigator is the recipient of forwarded alarms or traps containing
Unicode text description, you need to configure Windows Regional and Languages
Options (in the Control Panel settings) for the alarm listening PC, in order to display
Unicode text properly. Select the corresponding language in the Language for
non-Unicode programs setting.
Magellan CCS Navigator Trap Agent does not support Japanese or Chinese.
Installing Files for East Asian Languages
If you will be switching the operational language to Japanese or Chinese, files for East Asian
languages must be installed. These are not part of the standard Windows install. To add
files for East Asian languages, follow these steps:
1
Open the Windows Control Panel.
In Windows XP in Classic mode, you can open the Control Panel from the task bar by
choosing Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2
Click Regional and Language Options, and then click the Languages tab.
3
Click Install Files for East Asian languages.
You may be prompted to insert a Windows CD/DVD, or to browse for the location of
files.
4
Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
You may have to reboot the computer for changes to take effect.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Changing the Operational Language
To change Magellan CCS Navigator’s operational language, do one of the following:
Tools

Select Tools > English to set the operational language to English, and then reboot
Magellan CCS Navigator for the change to take effect.

Select Tools >
(Simplified Chinese) to set the operational
language to Chinese, and then reboot Magellan CCS Navigator for the change to take
effect.

Select Tools >
to set the operational language to Japanese, and then reboot
Magellan CCS Navigator for the change to take effect.
The tools you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more information.
Magellan CCS Navigator has a number of built-in tools, but you can configure the
application to use standalone (non-Magellan CCS Navigator) tools as well.
For more information on various types of tools, see the following:
Toolbars

Toolbars on page 41

Built-In Tools on page 43

Navigation Pane on page 44

Status Bar on page 49

Plug-ins on page 49
Magellan CCS Navigator’s Standard toolbar has many familiar Windows-style tools.
Table 4-2 Tools on the Standard Toolbar
Tool
Icon
Function
Alternate
Menu Item
New
In Build mode, opens the New Page Wizard;
not available in Control mode (Not available with
NAVIGATOR-CLI license)
File > New
Open
Opens a Browse dialog. Select a graphical
navigation page and then click Open (Not
available with NAVIGATOR-CLI license)
File > Open
Delete
Opens a Delete dialog box, where you can select
Navigator pages for deletion
File > Delete
Save
Saves the content in the currently active dialog
box
File > Save
Save All
Saves all unsaved content on all open dialog boxes File > Save All
Keyboard
Shortcut
41
42
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Table 4-2 Tools on the Standard Toolbar (Continued)
Tool
Print
Icon
Function
Prints the current Magellan CCS Navigator page or
file; only available when a Graphical Navigation page
Alternate
Menu Item
Keyboard
Shortcut
File > Print
or panel is open
Print Preview
Shows what the current Magellan CCS Navigator
page will look like when printed; only available
File > Print
Preview
when a Graphical Navigation page or panel is open
Refresh
Updates the status of the selected Amino or SNMP
device
Reloads the data from a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server
View > Reload
Undo
Undoes the last action in the active Navigation,
Graphical Navigation, dialog box (you can
enable up to 10 levels of Undo actions)
Edit > Undo
CTRL + Z
Redo
Redoes the last action in the active Navigation,
Graphical Navigation, dialog box
Edit > Redo
CTRL + Y
Reload
You can enable up to 10 levels of Redo actions
Cut
Cuts a selected object or objects from the current
location to the Clipboard for use in a subsequent
Paste operation
Edit > Cut
CTRL + X
Copy
Copies the selected object or objects to the
Clipboard for possible use in multiple Paste
operations
Edit > Copy
CTRL + C
Paste
Pastes an object currently on the Clipboard
as the result of a previous Cut or Copy operation
Edit > Paste
CTRL + V
Delete
Deletes the object or objects selected (Note:
deleted objects cannot be pasted)
Edit > Delete
CTRL + Z or
DELETE
Help Contents
Displays the Contents tab for Online Help
ContextSensitive Help
Displays the associated help file for a right-clicked
object
To show a toolbar, point to View > Toolbars on the menu bar and click the name of the
toolbar you want to display.
A check mark appears to the left of that toolbar’s name on the View > Toolbars submenu
when the toolbar is selected.
To hide a toolbar, click the View menu, point to Toolbars, and then click the name of the
toolbar you want to hide.
If you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, NAVIGATOR-RTR, ICONM-SCP-LITE, or
ICONM-SCP license, Magellan CCS Navigator also has a Create Objects toolbar and a
Graphical Navigation toolbar, which appear across the top of the Graphical
Navigation page or panel. See Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar on page 129 of
CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Built-In Tools
The tools you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more information.
Built-in tools, accessible from the Tools menu, enable you to perform tasks by executing
actions in their tool dialog boxes.
Table 4-3 Built-in Tools
Tool
Purpose
Reference
Navigation
Navigate the CCS devices on the network
and build hierarchical views of the
network
Network View
Construction on page 93
Graphical
Navigation
Creates an interactive graphical interface
with your network that you can configure
to perform tasks
Introduction to Graphical
Navigation on page 1
Discovery
Discover the devices on the CCS network
CCS Device Discovery on
page 75
Parameters
View the favorite parameter and alarm
lists for a device (available with the
NAVIGATOR-INT license only)
NAVIGATOR-INT
Overview on page 1
Configuration Set the IP address of a CCS device,
configure it, transfer files to it, and see
version information
CCS Device
Configuration on page 127
Software
Upgrade
Send new software to devices on the
network
Upgrading Software on
page 135
Standalone
Start standalone (non-CCS) programs
from the Tools menu
Navigation Pane on
page 44
Rules and
Macros...
Provides tools to use events to trigger
actions
Working with Macros on
page 86
Custom
Properties
Displays variables that store
CCS RouterNAV: Router
Specific Plug-in
Utilities
Depending on your PC's configuration,
provides access to plug-ins and utilities
that are installed in your PC
Creating a Routing System
SNMP
If you have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license,
two sub-options will be available
Setting SNMP Options on
page 62

Traps provides tools to create
parameters and alarms from trap data
sent to Magellan CCS Navigator

Agent provides tools to configure
Magellan CCS Navigator to forward
trap information to other SNMP
devices
43
44
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Navigation Pane
The Navigation pane contains the resource tree, a hierarchical representation of the
content and organization of the CCS devices. Administrator users on a PC with a
NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-DEV, or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can build custom views
of the resources on a network in this pane.
The Navigation tool provides resource icons to use as building blocks, customizable text
colors, and specialized informational columns. You can rename the icons and use them
to represent other objects.
Figure 4-5 Sample Navigation Pane
Figure 4-6 Navigation Pane with Open Network Folder
The Navigation pane has tabs, or pages, showing different views of the CCS network.

Administrators have a System tab and a User tab for each general user that has been
defined. The System tab shows all the devices that are available on the network, and
each User tab shows only the devices that specific user can configure, control, or
monitor.

General users have a User tab only, which is customized to show only the devices the
user can configure, control, or monitor.
Extensive information about the Navigation pane can be found in Network View
Construction on page 93.
Discovery Pane
The Discovery pane tracks the progress of the Discovery tool in finding CCS devices
connected to the network. You will use this pane and its options to control the discovery
process and narrow its scope of operation, thereby quickening the process.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 4-7 Discovery Pane after a Discovery
For information on using the Discovery pane, see Chapter 6, CCS Device Discovery on
page 75.
Parameters Panel
The Parameters panel appears if you have the NAVIGATOR-INT license only.
When you click on a device in the Navigation panel while in Build mode, the
Parameters panel updates to display the favorite parameters and alarms for that device.
If favorites are not defined for a device, the panel displays all parameters and alarms for that
device.
Figure 4-8 Favorites (Parameters) Panel
For information on using the Parameters panel, see Volume 5.
Custom Properties Viewer
The Custom Properties viewer appears in Control mode only. It is closed by default, but you
can open it by choosing Tools > Custom Properties from the main menu.
45
46
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Figure 4-9 Custom Properties Panel
Table 4-4
Column
Function
Name
Each specific variable has a name that is either generated by
the wizard that created the page, or is created by the user
that created the rule.
Runtime Value
The current value of the property; click Refresh to see the
most up-to-date value
Initial Value
The value that the property had when it was defined in
Build mode
Scope
The page(s) where the value is used; Global Properties apply
systemically to all pages
Description
A user-defined or wizard-defined explanation of the
property
For information on using custom properties, see CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
Configuration Dialog Boxes
A Configuration dialog box is where administrators can adjust the network settings
of a device, transfer files, see version information for the device hardware and software,
and perform other configuration tasks specific to the device. Topic tabs, appearing
at the top of the dialog box, divide the information into pages by subject.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 4-10 Configuration Dialog Box
For information on using Configuration dialog boxes, see Chapter 8, CCS Device
Configuration on page 127.
Software Upgrade Tool
The Software Upgrade tool allows you to select one or more devices of the same type to
be upgraded in parallel using the transferred software package. It automates the backup
and upgrade process so it can be run in the background, and includes event and error
logging.
Figure 4-11 Software Upgrade Dialog Box
For more information on upgrading software, see Upgrading Software on page 135 and
Transferring Files With the File Transfer Tab on page 144.
The types of devices you can control depends on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
You will be able to open Control dialog boxes for all the items to which you have control or
monitoring access on your CCS network.
47
48
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Graphical Navigation Dialog Boxes
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create Graphical
Navigation pages in Build mode, and a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or
NAVIGATOR-CLI license to monitor and control pages and panels in Control mode.
If you want to create router pages only, you can also use a NAVIGATOR-RTR license. (Router
functionality is also included in the NAVIGATOR-SRV license.)
In Build mode, you can create Graphical Navigation dialog boxes, and you can
configure and update the content of Graphical Navigation pages.
General users, and administrator users when the software is in Control mode, can activate
and operate Graphical Navigation pages.
Graphical Navigation pages can provide control and monitoring access to devices, can
have rules made up of events and actions, You can configure a page to provide visual
feedback to let you know that CCS Magellan CCS Navigator has successfully completed
a task or action.
Figure 4-12 Graphical Navigation Pane Showing an FR-3903 Frame and its Component
Modules
In Control mode, you can set an active Graphical Navigation pane to Full Screen mode
from the main menu by selecting View > Full Screen. In Full Screen mode, toolbars and
scroll-bars are hidden. To return to a smaller, resizable page, either click the Close Full
Screen button on the Full Screen toolbar, or press ESC on your keyboard.
See CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in for information on creating and operating
Graphical Navigation dialog boxes.
The types of devices you can control depends on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
The types of devices you can control depends on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Status Bar
The Status Bar shows two cells, one on each end of the bar, located at the bottom of the
main application window.
Figure 4-13 Status Bar
The cell on the left end shows a message describing the operational status. The operational
status cell will also show a one-line Help message as you roll the mouse over menu options.
The operational mode cell on the right end of the Status Bar shows a colored background
that changes as the currently active operational mode changes: yellow for build, and green
for control.
If you right click in the Status Bar, you open the Options shortcut menu.
The Status Bar does not show unless the Status Bar option in the View menu is selected,
indicated by a check mark to the left of the title.
See Setting the Operational Mode on page 37 for more information.
Plug-ins
Use the Plug-in Options dialog box to view the plug-in options that are installed on your
PC. Some plug-ins have configuration options that are accessible from the Plug-in dialog
box.
To see the plug-ins that are installed, complete these steps:
1
Click Plug-ins on the Options menu. The Plug-ins dialog box appears.
Figure 4-14 Plug-ins Dialog Box
2
Review the Configure Plug-ins list.
3
Click OK to close the Plug-ins dialog box.
Advanced Router Control
Using the Advanced router control plug-in, you can monitor and control a wide range of
Imagine Communications routers. Magellan CCS Navigator may be used as the only
controlling device, or it may be used in conjunction with traditional hardware control
panels. Note that you can access multiple routing views on the same workstation
simultaneously.
49
50
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
To build pages, you must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license or NAVIGATOR-RTR license.
You can create a basic router control panel using tools that are available in the Advanced
Router Control plug-in, or using the wizard if you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-RTR license. You can use the Wizard to create nine different types of router
control panels. All panels contain tools to detect and indicate signal presence via the router
engine for devices that support these features. Panels also trigger alarms for power
supplies, fans, I/O boards and logic cards and monitor connection status of all devices.
For more information, see Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
AminoSTB Control
With the Amino STB plugin, you can remotely monitor an AmiNET120 or AmiNET500
set-top box.
For more information, see Setting the Amino STB Tab on page 111.
Interface control
The Interface Control plug-in allows you to to control and monitor processing devices. This
plug-in is available with NAVIGATOR-DEV, NAVIGATOR-SRV, and NAIVAGATOR-CLI licenses.
See Volume 5.
Master Control
This plug-in is available on PCs that have an ICONM-SCP or ICONM-SCP-LITE license. A
panel created with this license can fully control IconMaster switchers, and allows faster
access to many of the switcher’s operational feature submenus and audio meters. This
license is designed to work optimally with a 19" touchscreen monitor (1280 × 1024
recommended).
For more information on configuring IconMaster Software Control Panel, see CCS
Navigator: Enhanced Functionality .
SNMP Control
If you have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, you will be able to build Magellan CCS Navigator
pages to communicate with SNMP enabled devices (SNMP is a communication protocol like
TCP/IP, FTP and HTTP), and configure Magellan CCS Navigator to forward received traps and
information to other SNMP devices. When combined with an NAVIGATOR-INT license, you
can create parameters and alarms from SNMP traps, and add individual controls to
Graphical Navigation pages and panels.
For more information on using SNMP with Magellan CCS Navigator, see SNMP Plug-in on
page 113 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in, and Setting SNMP Options on
page 62.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
SuiteView Control
In order to work with the SuiteView multisource display processor, within Magellan CCS
Navigator, you will build a Graphical Navigation page. On that page, you can set rules for
conditional events and actions for communicating with SuiteView.
For more information on controlling SuiteView, see SuiteView Plug-in on page 119 of CCS
RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
Standalone
Tools
Standalone tools are applications that normally run outside of the CCS Magellan CCS
Navigator software, such as Imagine Communications Layout Designer, ZUpgrade, and
ZConfigurator (for PredatorII devices). You can configure CCS Magellan CCS Navigator
to start these independent applications from the Tools menu. See the following topics for
more information:

Adding a Standalone Program to the Tools Menu on page 51

Starting a Standalone Program on page 52

Removing a Standalone Program on page 52
Adding a Standalone Program to the Tools Menu
To add a standalone program to the Tools menu, complete these steps:
1
Click the Tools menu, point to Standalone, and then click Customize....
2
On the Customize box, click Add.
This shows the words [new tool] in both the Menu Contents box and the Menu Text
box.
Browse button
Figure 4-15 Customize Dialog Box
3
Select [new tool] in the Menu Text box, and then type in the name of the standalone
program you want to add.
For instance, if you want to start Microsoft® Excel from within Magellan CCS
Navigator, type:
Microsoft Excel
4
Click Browse to the right of the Command box.
5
Browse in the Select Program box for the path to the command line for the standalone
program.
51
52
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
6
Click the name of the program, and then click Open.
This closes the Select Program box, returns you to the Customize box, and shows the
path to the standalone program in the Command box.
7
Click OK to close the Customize box and save the choices.
The name of the application that you entered in the Menu Text box shows as an
option on the Tools > Standalone submenu.
Starting a Standalone Program
Before you can start a standalone program from the Tools menu, you must first configure
the path and name of the standalone application. See Adding a Standalone Program to
the Tools Menu on page 51.
To start a standalone program from the Tools menu, click the Tools menu, point to
Standalone, and then click the name of the standalone program.
Removing a Standalone Program
You can remove previously configured options that start standalone (non-Magellan CCS
Navigator) applications from within Magellan CCS Navigator. To remove a standalone
program from the Tools menu, complete these steps:
1
Point to Tools > Standalone on the menu bar and click Customize....
When the Customize box shows, the names of all standalone programs configured to
start from within Magellan CCS Navigator show in the Menu Contents box.
2
Select the name of the program you want to delete in the Menu Contents box, and then
click Remove.
Now the name of the program no longer appears as an option on the Tools >
Standalone > Customize... submenu.
Repeat step 2 for the names of any other programs you want to delete from the Menu
Contents box.
3
Click OK.
This closes the Customize box and saves the changes.
Using Interface Dialog Boxes
In Magellan CCS Navigator, you are able to have multiple dialog boxes open simultaneously.
To maximize a dialog box, double-click the dialog box title or click the square Maximize
button in the top-right corner of the dialog box.
In the maximized state, a dialog box has a Restore button in the top-right corner. Click
Restore to return the dialog box to its previous size.
If a dialog box is not maximized, you can drag any border (top, bottom, left, and right). To
resize the dialog box, click and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the handle
that appears on the corner of the dialog box.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
To move a dialog box, click within the dialog box title and keep the button depressed while
dragging the dialog box. To complete the move, release the mouse button.
To close a dialog box, click the Close button.
Docking or Floating a Tool Dialog Box
You can dock each of these tool dialog boxes to a border of the main or float the tool
dialog box to another location within the main screen. A floating tool dialog box has a black
title bar that bears the name of the dialog box in reverse (white) type.
Figure 4-16. Docked Discovery Pane (Left) and Floating Discovery Pane (Right)
Showing and Closing a Tool Dialog Box
To show a tool dialog box, click the tool name on the Tools menu.
If the tool is open and active, the tool icon on the Tools menu is selected, and the dialog
box is open.
Figure 4-17 Selected Navigation Icon
If the tool is closed and inactive, the tool icon is not selected, and the dialog box is closed.
Figure 4-18 Unselected Navigation Icon
To close a tool dialog box, click the Close box in the upper right corner of the dialog box,
or point to Tools and click the tool name to deselect the name.
In managing the CCS network, you will be monitoring many devices at once, each with its
own multipage sets of control parameters. You have several ways of keeping up with all of
the open Control, Configuration and Signal Monitor dialog boxes:

Stack all the open dialog boxes on top of each other, with only the top dialog box in
view. Then, to move between dialog boxes in the stack, press CTRL + TAB.

Cascade the dialog boxes diagonally across the application dialog box, using the
Window menu’s Cascade option. Then, to activate a specific dialog box and move it to
the top of the cascading pile, click the dialog box’s title bar.
53
54
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Figure 4-19 Cascading Dialog Boxes

Tile the dialog boxes horizontally or vertically, using one of the Tile options in the
Window menu. Then, to activate a dialog box, click its title bar.
Figure 4-20 Tiled Control Dialog Boxes

Show all of the open Control, Signal Monitor, Navigator, Configuration, and
Software Upgrade dialog boxes as tabbed pages in a workbook, using workbook
mode. Workbook mode shows each dialog box as an individual multipage tab in a
workbook of open device dialog boxes. Workbook tabs, which appear at the bottom
of the workbook dialog box, show a tool icon to the left of the name of the device the
dialog box represents.
The workbook below shows the top dialog box in a workbook containing two open
configuration dialog boxes, each with a tab at the bottom of the workbook dialog box.
Each configuration dialog box is divided into multiple topic tabs (pages). Topic tabs
appear at the top of the workbook dialog box.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
These tabs
represent different
pages of one
Configuration
dialog box.
Workbook tabs
each display a tool
icon and the name
of the device they
represent.
Figure 4-21 Two Configuration Dialog Boxes in Workbook Mode
To enable Workbook mode, point to View in the menu bar and click Workbook
Mode. A check mark appears to the left of Workbook Mode when the mode is
active.
To stack, cascade, or tile multiple dialog boxes, you must disable workbook mode and
then select the dialog box style you want from the Window menu. To disable
workbook mode, point to View on he menu bar and click Workbook mode to clear the
check mark to the left of Workbook Mode.
Using the Window Menu
To show the Window menu, click Window on the menu bar.
Use the Window menu to change the way that multiple dialog boxes cascade, stack, or tile
inside the main screen of the application.
The Window menu contains the following options:
Table 4-5 Window Menu
Command
Function
Always On Top
Ensures that Magellan CCS Navigator is the topmost
program for controlling and monitoring on your PC
monitor
Cascade
Stacks open Control, Configuration, Graphical
Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog boxes with
each higher dialog box in the stack offset slightly to
the bottom right
Tile Horizontally
Horizontally tiles open Control, Configuration,
Graphical Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog
boxes
55
56
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Table 4-5 Window Menu
Command
Function
Tile Vertically
Vertically tiles open Control, Configuration,
Graphical Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog
boxes
Layout...
Opens a dialog box where you can save and retrieve
different screen configurations
See Using Interface Dialog Boxes on page 52.
Close
Closes the selected Control, Configuration,
Graphical Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog
boxes
Close All
Closes all open Control, Configuration, Graphical
Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog boxes
Resource Name
Titles of open Control, Configuration, Graphical
Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog boxes list
in the menu as options. If no such dialog boxes are
open, no titles list.
Working with Layouts
Only an Administrator with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create and
modify layouts. General users with NAVIGATOR-CLI licenses can load layouts.
Within Magellan CCS Navigator, there are many dialog boxes that can be moved and
repositioned. A layout is a snapshot of the current screen configuration, including the
operational mode and the position of all dialog boxes, toolbars, menus, docking panels,
Navigator pages, and Control and Configuration dialog boxes.
You can use a layout over and over on different events throughout Magellan CCS
Navigator. You can create a rule to recall a layout. See Setting Properties for a ‘Load
Layout’ Action on page 75 for more information.
Access the tools for working with layouts by choosing Window > Layouts... from the
main menu.
The Layout dialog box appears, listing the existing layouts.
Figure 4-22 Layout Dialog Box
Layouts can only be created in control mode. You can either rearrange all your dialog boxes
before opening the Layout dialog box or with the Layout dialog box open.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
To create a layout, click the Add Layout button. The Add Layout dialog box appears.
Type a name for the layout and click OK. Magellan CCS Navigator records the current
screen configuration.
General users on NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PCs can load layouts, but not create or modify
them.
You can load any layout at any time by selecting it in the Layouts list, and then clicking
Load Layout. The Magellan CCS Navigator screen is rearranged according to the current
layout.
To change a layout, select it in the Layouts menu at the left of the screen and then click
Modify Layout.

If you do not change the name of the layout, the changes you make will replace the
current layout. If you change the name, a new layout will be created.

If you select Update layout entries, Magellan CCS Navigator replaces the modified
layout with the current positioning of all dialog boxes.
To delete a layout from the menu, select the layout from the list and click Remove Layout.
A layout can only be deleted if any rules that use it are deleted.
Property
Sheets
A property sheet is a dialog box that shows the properties of an object in the interface. The
Navigation Properties box, the Diagnostics Properties box, and the Object Properties
box are all property sheets.
ProcedureChanging Pages in a Multipage Property Sheet
If the property sheet has multiple pages, each page will have a tab with text for the title of
the tab.
Figure 4-23 Property Sheet Tabs
Tabs represent different pages in a multipage property sheet.
To change to another page in the property sheet, select the tab for that page with a click of
the mouse.
Procedure‘Pinning’ a Property Sheet Open and Closed
To keep a property sheet open while you complete other tasks, click the Push-Pin icon in
the top left corner of the property sheet.
Figure 4-24 Unselected Push-Pin Icon
To close a property sheet that you have “pinned” open, first click the selected Push-Pin
icon and then click the Close button.
Figure 4-25 Selected Push-Pin Icon
57
58
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Using
Menus
The menus you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more information.
The menu bar may contain up to eight menu titles. Each menu contains a list of commands.
Table 4-6 Menus on the Menu Bar
Shortcut
Menus
Title
Function
File
Manages the operational mode, saving, logging off, and
exiting
Edit
Manages editing tools: Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste,
Delete..., Clear, Replace IP, and Find
View
Manages how and what the toolbars, status bar, and dialog
boxes show
Tools
Manages the operation of built-in tools and standalone
(non-Magellan CCS Navigator) tools that you add to the
Tools menu
Options
Manages the setting of Magellan CCS Navigator software
options
Window
Manages how dialog boxes appear in the main Magellan
CCS Navigator window
Help
Manages information on Magellan CCS Navigator use,
accessing our website, copyrights, and software version
information
A context or shortcut menu appears when you right-click an object. These menus contain a
list of options relevant to the selected object, the current dialog box, and the current
operational mode.
Some options may be unavailable in the context imposed by the active operational mode, or
the selected item. For example, you cannot conduct a discovery in Control mode, so that
option is unavailable on the main shortcut menu for Control mode.
Likewise, you cannot perform diagnostics in Build mode, so that option is unavailable on
the shortcut menu for Build mode in the main Magellan CCS Navigator interface.
There are shortcut menus for each dialog box, and for some tables, bars, and cells. See the
following topics on shortcut menus:

Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu on page 92

Using Navigation Shortcut Menus on page 117

Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu on page 156

Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus on page 242

Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu on page 289

Using the Control Shortcut Menu on page 266

Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus on page 58 of CCS RouterNAV: Router
Specific Plug-in
59
5
Communication Options and
SNMP Configuration
Communication Options Overview
Depending on how your network is configured, you may need to set SNMP options or Serial
options.
See the following topics for more information.

Setting Communication Options on page 59

Setting Serial Connection Preferences on page 60

Setting SNMP Options on page 62
To set Communication options, your Magellan CCS Navigator PC must have one of the
following licenses:

NAVIGATOR-DEV

NAVIGATOR-SRV

NAVIGATOR-RTR
To set SNMP and SNMP Trap options, your Magellan CCS Navigator PC must have a
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license key.
NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed systems and non-administrator users can view, but not set,
Communication options.
Setting Communication Options
With a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-DEV license key, you can set the periodicity of the
PC communicating with devices on the network. This affects the speed at which
the software recognizes a device power failure or a loss of network connectivity.
To set the communication options, complete these steps:
1
Click Communication on the Options menu.
2
On the Keep Alive tab, select the Use keep alive check box to enable the automatic
testing of all device connections. Clear the check box to disable this feature.
60
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration
Figure 5-1 Communication Options Dialog Box’s Keep Alive Tab
3
Type in an appropriate time value and unit of measurement for Connection Idle Time for
keep alives.
The default time value is 10000, and the default unit of measurement is milliseconds.
The System Settings Change box appears, advising you to restart the computer to
implement the changes.
4
Click Yes to restart the PC.
The PC will shut down and then restart with the new settings.
See Setting Serial Connection Preferences on page 60.
Setting Serial Connection Preferences
To configure serial communication port settings and connection preferences, you will use
the Serial Settings tab of the Communications Options dialog box.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 5-2 Communications Options Dialog Box’s Serial Settings Tab
Creating a New Device in the Serial Settings Tab
To create a new device, follow these steps:
1
Open the Communication Options box from the Options menu, and then click the
Serial Settings tab.
2
Click Add, type a device name in the Name field, and then click OK to create a new device
name.
3
Change the following connection information as required:
4

Port (default: COM 1)

Bits per second (default: 57 600)

Data bits (default: 8)

Parity (default: None)

Stop bits (default: 1)

Flow control (default: None)
Click OK.
Editing a Previously Created Device in the Serial Settings Tab
To edit a device’s settings, follow these steps:
1
Open the Communication Options box from the Options menu, and then click the
Serial Settings tab.
2
Select an existing device by select a name from the Device Name field.
3
Change the following connection information as required:

Port (default: COM 1)

Bits per second (default: 57 600)

Data bits (default: 8)

Parity (default: None)
61
62
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration
4

Stop bits (default: 1)

Flow control (default: None)
Click OK.
Setting SNMP Options
Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can configure and control SNMP
devices. These functions are described in SNMP Monitoring and Control Using
Magellan CCS Navigator on page 62.
Magellan CCS Navigator can also act as an element manager for control and monitoring,
forwarding events such as CCS alarms and SNMP traps, as SNMP traps, to a centralized
network operations center (NOC). See SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan CCS
Navigator on page 70.
SNMP Monitoring and Control Using Magellan CCS Navigator
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to configure SNMP devices to work with
Magellan CCS Navigator, NUCLEUS, etc. For information on getting a license, see
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19.
To view the list of loaded SNMP files, click Options > SNMP on the main menu.
A dialog box appears:
Loads selected MIB files in
Microsoft Windows Notepad
Figure 5-3 SNMP Options Dialog Box
By default, the MIB Files to Load box on the SNMP Options box contains a list of MIB files
used by compatible equipment. Using this dialog box, you can perform the following
functions:

Adding a MIB file for an SNMP Device on page 63

Removing MIB files on page 63

Restoring the Default MIB Files Setting on page 64

Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

Setting the SNMP Trap Color on page 63
Adding a MIB file for an SNMP Device
To add an MIB file for a SNMP device, follow these steps:
1
Copy the corresponding MIB files to the MIB subdirectory:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Harris\CCS\Files\mib
2
Click SNMP on the Options menu to open the SNMP Options dialog box.
3
Click Add and then select the MIB files you want to open.
The new MIB files will show under the MIB Files to Load list with a check mark. To
temporarily disable the loading of a MIB file, clear the check mark beside its name.
4
If an error occurs when the MIB files are loaded, an alert box will show. Click OK to
acknowledge the box, then click View Log to read the description of the load errors. Either
remove the MIB files that caused the error or add any missing MIB files. See SNMP MIB
Load Errors Appear on page 314 for more information.
5
Click OK to accept the changes and close the SNMP Options box.
If there are a lot of files in the list, or if some files are very large, it can take several minutes
for the SNMP Options dialog box to close.
Removing MIB files
To remove MIB files from the SNMP Options dialog box, follow these steps:
1
Select one or more MIB files under the MIB Files to Load list, and then click Remove; or to
remove all MIB files, click Remove All.
2
When a query box asks you to confirm the removal, click Yes.
3
Click OK to accept the changes and close the SNMP Options box.
Setting the SNMP Trap Color
When you change the color that traps appear, the trap color is changed for all traps in the
following places:

The Alarm column of the Navigation pane

The symbols border color and trap control color on Graphical Navigation pages

Trap color in the Diagnostic window
To change the trap color, make the following setting:
1
On the SNMP Options dialog box, click Trap Color.
You can choose one of the 20 default colors,or click Other to select from a much
wider palette.
This change applies to all traps.
63
64
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration
Restoring the Default MIB Files Setting
To restore the default MIB files setting in the SNMP Options dialog box, follow these
steps:
1
Click Set Default.
2
When a query box asks you to confirm the action, click Yes.
3
Click OK to accept the changes and close the SNMP Options box.
Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps
SNMP traps are shown on the Diagnostics dialog box. Since SNMP does not generically
support the concept of a cleared alarm, you should limit the number of SNMP traps to show
on the Monitor tab of the Diagnostics dialog box.
To limit the number of SNMP traps that list on the Monitor tab of the Diagnostics dialog
box, complete these steps:
1
Click SNMP on the Options menu.
2
In the SNMP Options box, set the Maximum number of SNMP traps shown...for each
Device to some value.
The default value is 1000. Once this number is reached, previous alarms for SNMP traps
are overwritten in the Monitor tab.
When this occurs, double-click the ID column of the Monitor tab to see new SNMP
traps reordered by their ID number.
3
Click OK to accept the changes and close the SNMP Options box.
If an error occurs when the MIB files are loaded, an alert box will show. Click OK to
acknowledge the box, then click View Log to read the description of the load errors.
Either remove the MIB files that caused the error or add any missing MIB files.
See Setting Communication Options on page 59.
SNMP Trap Configuration
SNMP traps are notification events issued by a managed device to the network
management station (i.e. Navigator) when a significant event (not necessarily an outage, a
fault, or a security violation) occurs. A SNMP trap contains information about the event,
which might be complex in nature, combining many different bits of data into a single
message.
A NAVIGATOR-SNMP license provides tools to interpret SNMP traps, so they can be treated,
for example, like alarm triggers and alarm clears. Within Navigator, you can group traps into
a single trap group. Multiple trap groups can be used to represent a single device, or you
can have one group per device.
1
From the main menu, choose Tools > SNMP > Traps.
The SNMP Trap Configuration dialog box appears.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
New Delete
Figure 5-4 SNMP Trap Configuration Dialog Box
2
Click the New button to add a row to the Groups table.
New rows are added at the bottom of the list.
To delete a row, click the Delete button. The selected row will be deleted, and all
associated data in the Trap Definitions field will be removed as well.
3
Under Group Name, enter a descriptive name for the specific device for which you are
defining traps.
The Group Type is automatically filled in as “Enterprise.”
4
Under Trap Definitions, click Add.
The Trap Definition dialog box opens.
Click here to find
variables or
Figure 5-5 Trap Definition Dialog Box
parameters that are
part of a trap.
65
66
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration
5
Beside Trap Name, do either of the following:

Type a name for the customized trap.

Click MIB.
In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to a trap. Click OK and the
name of this trap (alarm) will fill in the Trap Name field. (If you choose an invalid
object, an error message will appear.)
One or more rows will appear in the Trap Object IDs table.
6
If another trap should be associated with this trap, click Associate with existing trap
and then choose that trap from the drop-down menu.
This option could be used, for example, to associate athe trap that creates an alarm and
the trap that clears the alarm. In the Parameters pane, one trap with two states
would appear.
If you click Ignore Trap it will be ignored completely, except if there are rules that use
that trap.
7
Click Add to add new rows to the Trap Object IDs table, or Delete to remove rows.
With a row selected, click MIB to open an SNMP MIB Browser, and then browse to
a condition that generates a trap. Click OK, and then click the variable or parameter,
and its Object ID (OID) will fill the selected row.
8
9
To define rules to go with your traps, see Creating New Trap Rules on page 66. If rules
already exist in the table, you can modify them using the following tools:

Copy a rule by selecting it and then clicking Copy. An exact duplicate of the rule
appears in the List of Trap Rules table.

If a rule already exists, modify it by selecting it and then clicking Modify. The
dialog box that opens is described in Creating New Trap Rules on page 66.

Delete a rule by selecting it and then clicking Delete.
Click OK to close the Trap Definition dialog box, and then OK to close the SNMP
Trap Configuration dialog box.
Creating New Trap Rules
1
Under Trap Rules on the Trap Definition dialog box, click Add.
The Trap Rule Configuration dialog box opens.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
New
Delete
New
Delete
Figure 5-6 Trap Rule Configuration
2
Enter a name for the rule. This name identifies the rule in subsequent dialog boxes.
3
If another rule should be associated with this rule, click Associate with existing rule
and then choose that rule from the drop-down box.
This option could be used, for example, to associate an alarm and the alarm that clears
it. It would mean that in the Parameters pane, only one instance of the trap would
appear, and it would have two states.
4
Under Rule Conditions, click New to add a new row.
To delete a row from this table, click Delete.
5
In the Variable field, select an object ID.
The drop-down box lists all the object IDs that are part of the trap definition.
6
(Optional) Enter a value in the Instance ID field.
7
To complete the Value field, do either of the following:

Enter a value.
Click Value Expression, and then complete the Bitrate Expression
Builder screen that appears. See Creating a Value Expression on page 68.

Click MIB, and then choose a value from the MIB Browser that appears.
Under Rule Actions, click New, and then select an Action Name from the drop-down

8
box that appears in the new row.
9
To complete the Description field, do either of the following:

Enter substrings and/or SNMP variable values.
67
68
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration

Click Description Expression, and then complete the Alarm Description
Builder dialog box that appears. See Building an Alarm Description on
page 68.
If the description is entered in Japanese or Chinese, Navigator Agent will not be able to
forward this alarm properly, because these character sets are not supported by the agent.
10 On the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box, enter a Trigger time (measured in
milliseconds).
This delay is used mostly for clearing traps.
11 Click OK to close the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box.
ProcedureCreating a Value Expression
Value expressions help specify a specific condition, where your SNMP device may combine
many bits of data into a single trap.
Figure 5-7 Bitwise Expression Builder Dialog Box
1
From the Bit box, choose a Bit that pertains to the rule you are defining.
2
Beside Value, enter the value that must be met, and then click Add.
The Expression field (read-only) updates.
3
Repeat as many times as required to define the value specific to the alarm or parameter
from the string.
You can remove the selected row by clicking Remove.
4
Click OK.
ProcedureBuilding an Alarm Description
An alarm description provides information to help operators correct the alarm condition.
Before using the Alarm Description Builder, you need to know what data that the alarm
sends to Navigator when it is triggered. You can retrieve this data by triggering the alarm.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 5-8 Action Description Builder Dialog Box
The trap normally consists of a description, including a header and variables. The expression
builder operates in a linear fashion, starting at the beginning of the description and making
changes in sequence as it progresses towards the end of the description. So, the order in
which you present your expression is very important.
If, for example, you use a rule to remove the third word of the description, you cannot
subsequently remove the first word. If there is a later instance of the same word, you will
remove that instead. Otherwise, your instruction will be ignored.
1
Choose an option from the Conversion Rule field.
Options include:
Table 5-1 Conversion Rules for SNMP Alarm Expressions
Conversion Rule
Function
Keep text up to a
specific string
Keeps the text, starting from the previous action, up to
and including the specified attribute
Add specific string
Adds text at the spot where the previous action took place
Add remaining text
Keeps all text until the next specified rule, or until the end
of the alarm expression if no other rule follows this rule
Remove text up to a
specific string
Deletes the text between the previous action and the
specified attribute (but not including the specified
attribute)
Remove specific string Searches forward and removes the next instance of the
specified attribute
2
Enter text or a variable in the Attributes field.
If no variable value or string token is specified, the entire string is displayed.
3
Under Description Entries, click Add.
The addition to your alarm description appears in the Expression String field.
4
Repeat steps 1–3 to add to your expression, keeping in mind that the change will always
take place at a point later in the description than the change you just made.
5
Click OK.
69
70
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration
SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan CCS Navigator
The settings on this screen configure Navigator as an SNMP agent. An SNMP license is not
required to forward CCS-P device alarms as traps to another device. These settings apply to
Navigator only. To configure other SNMP devices, see Setting SNMP Options on
page 150.
Navigator Trap Agent does not support Japanese or Chinese.
Navigator can translate alarms into SNMPv2c notifications, whether they be alarms from
CCS-enabled devices, or generic SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c traps, and then forward them to
other devices.
Due to a limitation in NET SNMP, the Agent Address (Agent IP) field in a SNMPv1 trap is
always filled with the IP of the system on the default or primary network adapter, instead of
the adapter the trap was broadcast on.You can get around this by changing the primary
network card, or by listening to the other IP address.
Recipient devices can include other Navigator clients and servers. Navigator must be
configured to send data to all clients, etc. that want to receive traps. You cannot just
configure a Navigator client on its own to listen to the agent server.
Windows SNMP agent and the Navigator SNMP agent cannot be running at the same time.
SNMP trap forwarding along a chain of SNMP agents is permitted as long as the forwarding
does not create a loop in the chain. An Agent can forward traps to another agent, as long
as the traps are not forwarded to an Agent already existing in the chain. This includes
configuring the trap destination of an agent to be the IP address of the agent itself. Doing
so will cause unpredictable results.
Devices that intend to monitor a Navigator agent need the Navigator.mib file loaded in their
MIB directory. When a device receives an alarm from a Navigator agent, that alarm will
include Navigator’s IP address, and the IP address of the triggered device.
1
From the main menu, select Tools > SNMP > Agent.
2
Select the SNMP tab.
Figure 5-9 SNMP Tab of the SNMP Agent Configuration Dialog Box
3
In the SNMP Agent section of the screen, make the following selections:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Table 5-2 SNMP Agent Configuration
Field
Function
Port Number
(Can be from 0 to 65535) The network port used by the
SNMP agent
Read
Community
SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a “Get”
operation has to match this setting in the MIB browser in
order to read information from device)
Write
Community
SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a
“Set” operation has to match this setting in a MIB browser
in order to write information to that device)
Enable
Authentication
Traps
When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read or
write community doesn’t match between the SNMP agent
and MIB browser, for example when an unauthorized
system tries to read the device.
Enable SNMP
Agent
When checked, SNMP support is available; if not checked,
SNMP support is disabled
Enable Trap
Sequence ID
When checked, this option adds sequence ID data to every
trap that the agent forwards. If the trap is forwarded to
another Navigator system, that data will appear in the
description column of the Diagnostic window. This helps
track the order in which traps are received.
In the System section of the screen, make the following selections:
Table 5-3 System Fields of SNMP Tab - MIB-2 System Information
4
Field
Explanation
Description
The default is “Harris SNMP Agent”
Location
The physical location of the device
Contact
The contact person for this device
Name
Name of the device
Click on the Destination tab, and then, for each place you would like Navigator to
forward alarms, enter the following information:
Table 5-4 Destination Configuration For SNMP Agents
5
Field
Function
IP Address
The specific place where data will be forwarded to
Description
For informational purposes?
Port Number
The port that destination communicates on. The default is
162.
Version
Click in this field to choose V1 or V2c. These are the only
SNMP versions Navigator supports.
Click on the Trap Selection tab, and then choose one of the following :
71
72
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration
Table 5-5 Trap Selection For SNMP Agents
Option
Function
None
No alarms, traps, or notifications will be forwarded.
All Alarms, Notifications,
and Traps
All alarms, notifications, and traps for the
monitored devices will be forwarded.
Select By Type
Select the specific types to be forwarded.
Individual Device Alarms
6

Critical alarms

Warning alarms

Information Alarms

Clear alarms

Acknowledged

SNMP device traps
Click the browse button to select those devices you
want to provide alarms.
You can edit the Alias for any alarm that is
checked. An alarm carries the same alias in the
Forward Alarms, Favorites, and SNMP Trap
Selection dialog boxes.
You can also edit the Comments field (at the far
right of the alarms table) to provide more
information when the alarm is triggered.
For more information, see Selecting Device
Alarms for Transmission on page 72.
Click OK to close the SNMP Agent Configuration screen and save all changes.
Selecting Device Alarms for Transmission
By default, when configured as an SNMP agent, Navigator will transmit alarms for all
devices. To choose specific devices to transmit alarms, ignoring all others, follow these
steps:
1
From the main menu, select Tools > SNMP > Agent, and then click on the Trap
Selection tab.
2
Select By Type, click Individual Device Alarms, and then click on the browse button.
The Individual Device Alarms window opens.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 5-10 Individual Device Alarms Dialog Box
3
To select specific alarms or traps for a device, click the device in the Device Selection field.
The Trap Selection field updates to display all alarms or traps for that device.
4
Place checks beside alarms or traps to receive/transmit, and remove checks from beside
traps or alarms to ignore.
By default, all alarms are selected.
5
Click OK.
Configuring Navigator to Forward Traps and Notifications
1
Right-click a device in the Navigation pane and select Forward Alarms.
The following window opens:
Figure 5-11 Alarm Forwarding Dialog Box
73
74
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration
2
Place checks beside alarms or traps to receive/transmit, and remove checks from beside
traps or alarms to ignore.
You can edit the Alias for any alarm that is checked. An alarm carries the same alias in
the Forward Alarms, Favorites, and SNMP Trap Selection dialog boxes.
You can also edit the Comments field (at the far right of the alarms table) to provide
more information when the alarm is triggered.
3
Click OK.
There are also two right-click options:

Copy Forward Alarms - Copies the list of selected traps and alarms for the selected
device.

Paste Forward Alarms - Pastes the list of copied traps and alarms to a selected
device. It the Device type does not match, a warning asks if you want to continue,
before allowing the paste.
Alarms for devices in the Temporary folder are not forwarded.
75
6
Discovery
Overview
CCS Device Discovery
Discovery is the process by which Magellan CCS Navigator finds and connects to the IP
addresses of CCS devices so that you can access the devices remotely from the PC. You will
initially use the Discovery tool to find the CCS devices on your network. Later, you may
want to run a full or partial discovery when you make changes to your CCS network.
Magellan CCS Navigator will only discover X75 units with firmware version 1.4 or higher.
Magellan CCS Navigator will only discover 6800+ modules through an ICE6800+ module
upgraded to firmware version 2.0-16 or 2.0-8, or through a 6800+ETH resource module.
By default, the Discovery tool will try to discover all CCS-compatible devices on the same
subnet as the PC. However, you can narrow the scope of a discovery by setting discovery
options. See Setting Discovery Options on page 77.
You can discover devices using two methods:

Searching by IP address.
This method involves entering IP addresses, or ranges of IP addresses. It is not the
optimal method when multiple devices have the same IP address, as when many similar
devices are first connected to a network.

Searching by MAC address.
Graphical tools allow you to discover all the devices and frames on the physical
Ethernet/IP network. This includes brand new equipment, right out of the box still with
factory default settings; devices that are pre-configured at the factory; and devices that
have already been modified in the field. You can perform IP address configuration as
part of a MAC address discovery. See IP Settings and Device ID Configuration on
page 88.
When an Administrator user runs a discovery from a Magellan CCS Navigator Server, results
appear on the System tab of the Navigation pane. Discovery is a Build mode tool.
General users on NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PC cannot run discoveries.
After a discovery runs, the Discovery folder will contain a collection of icons that represent
the devices discovered on a CCS network. For example, you will see a server icon for each IP
address and a default hierarchy or “tree” of the devices located at each IP address.
You can use the Rediscover feature to run a discovery for an already-discovered device. See
Rediscovery on page 91.
Some devices cannot be added to the Navigation pane using the Discovery process. See the
following topics for information on adding items using other methods:
76
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery

Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon on page 99

Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon on page 100
Summary of Discovery Tasks
If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main
menu. When docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan
CCS Navigator screen.
CCS Magellan CCS Navigator cannot discover DPS-575 modules on a CCS network
without the assistance of the CCS DPS-Gateway, which discovers the synchronizers and
reports to CCS Magellan CCS Navigator their presence on the subnet of the gateway. To
add additional DPS-575 synchronizers to the subnet, rediscover the CCS DPS-Gateway. See
Modifying a Previously Used Discovery on page 82.
Below is a summary of the discovery procedure.
1
Optional—Open the Discovery column of the Navigation pane, which shows information
in the Navigation pane about the status of device discovery. See Using the Discovery
Column in the Tree View on page 92 and Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
2
In Build mode, point to Tools on the menu bar, and then click Discovery to open the
Discovery tool. See Setting the Operational Mode on page 37.
3
Set the Discovery Options. See Setting Discovery Options on page 77.
4
Start a discovery and save the results. See Running a Full Discovery on page 85 and
Running a Partial Discovery on page 86.
5
Copy the discovery results from your Discovery folder to the Network or Temporary
folder. See Copying Discovery Results on page 91.
6
Customize your hierarchical view of the CCS network. See Network View
Construction on page 93.
Only an administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can run a discovery.
Entering Network Address Information
Each device that you intend to control or monitor must have a valid IP address, gateway,
and subnet mask. Addresses are divided into numeric chunks, with each chunk separated
by a dot (period).
To be controlled or monitored, a device’s IP address and gateway must meet the following
criteria:

The first number can range from 1 to 224.

The second number can range from 0 to 255.

The third number can range from 0 to 255.

The fourth number can range from 1 to 254.
The highest possible IP address for a device controlled by Magellan CCS Navigator would be
224.255.255.254.
The subnet mask must meet the following criteria:

The first number can range from 1 to 255.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

The second number can range from 0 to 255.

The third number can range from 0 to 255.

The fourth number can range from 0 to 254.
Network configuration provided by a network administrator will normally follow these
rules.
Setting Discovery Options
If you do not add any host IP addresses, the Discovery tool will attempt to discover all
CCS-compliant devices on the same subnet as the PC.
To set the discovery options, complete these steps:
1
Click Discovery on the Options menu, or click Options... in the Discovery pane.
If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main
menu. When docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan
CCS Navigator screen.
2
Select and complete the Hosts tab. See Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery on
page 77.
3
Select and complete the Save tab. See Modifying a Previously Used Discovery on
page 82.
4
Click OK to save the discovery options.
Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery
For additional information about discovering Routers, see Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
To set host IP addresses for a discovery, complete these steps:
1
Click Discovery on the Options menu, or click Options... in the Discovery pane.
The Discovery Options box appears, with the Hosts tab on top.
77
78
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery
Figure 6-1 Discovery Options Box, Hosts Tab
2
Select your Start options.
These options determine what Magellan CCS Navigator will do when you click Start on the
Discovery pane.

Enable Scanning of MAC Addresses—when selected, when you click Start,
Magellan CCS Navigator performs a low-level device discovery to discover new devices
with IP addresses that are not on the IP address list for discovery on the subnet, with
their current IP settings.
Due to security features, when scanning MAC Addresses on a PC running Windows Vista or
Windows 7, you should temporariliy disable all network interfaces except the one you
intend to scan.
Only when Enable Scanning of MAC Addresses is selected, you can also select
Configure IP settings and/or Device IDs. If you select this option, upon
completion of a discovery, a window will open where you can assign IP addresses for
devices. See Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu on page 92.
These options are often used for initial configuration of devices with a (possibly
identical) default IP address.

3
Enable scanning of IP addresses—When selected, the Discovery tool will scan the
network for CCS-compliant devices and then discover the device IDs of all devices
that respond to the scan. This will speed the discovery process.
To add the default IP addresses, click Add Default and ensure that the check box to the left
of IP address 192.168.100.250 and/or 192.168.100.251 is enabled.
The PC and the CCS devices you are discovering must be on the same subnet. To set the PC
to the same subnet as a CCS device, see Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet
of a CCS Device on page 130.
You will typically use the default device IP addresses—192.168.100.251 for control panels
and 192.168.100.250 for all other devices—to configure a newly purchased device
connected to the PC on the same Ethernet hub or through an Ethernet crossover cable.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The Add Host process can be repeated more than once, so you can add multiple ranges of
IP addresses.
4
To add other IP addresses, click Add.
The Add Host box appears.
5
In the Add Host box, you have these options:

Add a host IP

Add a range of host IPs
If no hosts are added, the Discovery tool will attempt to discover all compatible devices
on the network.
CCS Navigator cannot discover 6800+ modules on a CCS network without the assistance of
an ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module in a host frame. The ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH reports
the presence of all networked FR6800+ frames and module configurations via the Ethernet
connection. To update the frame/module configuration, rediscover the host ICE6800+ or
6800+ETH.
6
Select the protocols (device types) you want to discover in the Select Products for
Discovery section of the Add Host box. The following check boxes are available (By
default, all are selected except HTTP and SNMP):
Table 6-1 Device Type Options for Discovery
Product
Options
X50, X75, X85, HView SX Pro, NEO, Communication Type
6800+, MULTIVIEWER, NUCLEUS,
 Broadcast (default) communicates with devices that are on
Platinum, EDGE-DPS575, Legalizer,
the same subnet as the CCS application
RCP-CCS-1U
 Point-to-Point communicates with devices that are on a
Note Magellan CCS Navigator will only discover
X75 units with firmware version 1.4 or higher.
different subnet and cannot be discovered using the Broadcast
option
Authentication (not currently implemented)
Selenio, IP3, LCP-CCS-1U (NEO Local
Control Panel)
Communication Type

Point-to-Point (default) communicates with devices over
UDP

TCP Point-to-Point When the device is switched to Control
mode, it will use TCP communication, which is more reliable,
but can be slower
Authentication (not currently implemented)
Routing Devices (Panacea, Hardware
Control Panel, Leitch router)
Router Discovery Type

Full Discovery—Attempts to discover all Imagine
Communications and Leitch routing products

Express (ignores legacy) —Only attempts to discover
Imagine Communications devices, and ignores older panels that
a full discovery might see
79
80
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery
Table 6-1 Device Type Options for Discovery (Continued)
Product
Options
SNMP (products with SNMP server

Read Community—Enter the name here if it differs from
the default of Public
enabled)

Port—Magellan CCS Navigator discovers devices that use the
default 161 port only (you can change this after discovery in the
Properties pane of the Navigation window)

Timeout (sec.)—The period when the discovery will give up
on finding the SNMP device can range from 1 to 1000 seconds

Retries—The number of retries if the discovery fails can range
from 1 to 1000
HTTP (products with embedded HTTP web HTTP Port(s)—Enter the Port number(s)
server)
7
Click OK to close the Add Host dialog box, and then click OK to close the Discovery
Options dialog box. You are now ready to run a discovery.
See the following topics for more information:

Adding the Default IP Address for a Discovery on page 80

Adding Host IP Addresses for a Discovery on page 80

Modifying Host IP Addresses on page 82

Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options on page 82

Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses on page 83
Adding the Default IP Address for a Discovery
The default device IP address is 192.168.100.251 for control panels and 192.168.100.250
for all other devices.
The PC and the CCS devices you are discovering must be on the same subnet. To set the PC
to the same subnet as a CCS device, see Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet
of a CCS Device on page 130.
To add the default IP address for a discovery, complete these steps:
1
On the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box, click Add Default.
This adds the two default IP addresses to the list in the Hosts box.
2
Select the check boxes to the left of these two default IP addresses, if they are cleared.
3
Click OK to close the Discovery Options box.
4
Click start on the Discovery pane to start the discovery.
Adding Host IP Addresses for a Discovery
To add one host IP address for a discovery, complete these steps:
1
Point to Options on the menu bar and click Discovery, or click Options on the Discovery
pane’s button bar. The Discovery Options dialog box appears.
2
Click Add....
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
3
Select Add a host IP to add a single host IP or Add a range of host IPs to add more
than one.
Figure 6-2 Add Host Box
4
Highlight the first group of numbers in the default address, and then type new values in
place of the default numbers.
The cursor will automatically move to the second group of numbers in the address after you
type in three digits. When you enter less than three digits, press SPACE BAR to move to the
next field.
Fill in all four fields for the IP address in this manner. If you type 0 (zero) in the space for the
fourth group of numbers in the address, the Discovery tool will add all hosts
with the range from 1 to 254.
5
If you are adding a range of host IPs (see step 1 above), press TAB to move to the To box.
Type in only the fourth group of numbers from the highest IP address in the range of host IP
addresses.
6
Do either of the following:

Click OK to close the Add Host box and return to the Host tab of the Discovery
Options box.

Click Apply if you want to add more host IPs.
The new IP hosts now appear in the Hosts box on the left side of the Hosts page.
7
Place a check beside each IP address you would like to discover.
8
Click OK to use the existing Discovery Save Options; or set the Discovery Save
Options.
9
Click OK to close the Discovery Options box.
See the following topics for more details:

Modifying Host IP Addresses on page 82

Setting Discovery Save Options on page 83
81
82
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery
Modifying a Previously Used Discovery
Sometimes it will be more efficient to use a previously configured Discovery setup than to
create a new one from scratch. See the following topics:

Modifying Host IP Addresses on page 82

Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options on page 82

Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses on page 83
Modifying Host IP Addresses
To modify IP hosts for Discovery Options, complete these steps:
1
Point to Options on the menu bar and click Discovery, or click Options on the Discovery
pane’s button bar.
This shows the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box. Any previously added IP hosts
appear in the Hosts box on the left side of the Hosts tab.
2
Select an IP address that you want to modify.
This activates the Modify and Remove buttons.
3
Click Modify, or double-click on the IP address.
This shows the Modify Host box. (See Figure 6-2.)
4
Highlight the section or sections of the number you want to change, and type in the new
number.
5
Do either of the following:
6

Click OK to save the changes. This action closes the Modify Host box.

Click Cancel if you decide not to modify the address. This action closes the Modify
Host box.

Click Apply and then repeat the steps 2-5 above to change other Host IP addresses.
Click OK to close the Discovery Options box, or click the Save Options for a Discovery
tab to set the discovery save options and close the box.
Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options
When removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options, you can remove either
one or more Host IP addresses or all Host IP addresses.
To remove one or more Host IP addresses from Discovery Options, complete these steps:
1
Click Discovery on the Options menu, or click Options... in the Discovery pane.
The IP addresses for a new discovery list in the Hosts box on the left of the Hosts tab.
2
Select an IP address you want to remove, and then click Remove.
Repeat to remove other Host IP addresses.
You can also select multiple list entries by pressing and holding the SHIFT or CTRL key when
selecting entries, or select a single entry and drag the mouse to include more entries in the
selection.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Or you can remove all entries on the list by clicking Remove All, whether or not an entry
is selected. This action is followed by a box asking if you are sure. Click Yes to remove all
items on the list.
3
When you finish removing IP addresses, click OK to close the Discovery Options box;
or select the Save Options for a Discovery tab to set the Discovery Save Options.
Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses
To temporarily remove IP hosts for Discovery Options, complete these steps:
1
Click Discovery on the Options menu, or click Options... in the Discovery pane.
Any previously added IP hosts appear in the Hosts box on the left side of the Hosts tab.
2
To temporarily remove an IP address, clear the check box beside the IP address.
This IP address will not be used in the next discovery operation.
3
Repeat the step above to temporarily remove other Host IP addresses.
4
Click OK again to close the Discovery Options box, or select the Save Options for a
Discovery tab to set the save options and close the box.
Setting Discovery Save Options
To set the discovery save options, complete these steps:
1
Open the Discovery Options box by clicking Discovery on the Options menu, or clicking
Options... in the Discovery pane.
2
Select the Save tab.
Figure 6-3 Discovery Options Dialog Box Save Tab
3
In the Confirmation section of the Save tab, select the Show confirmation window
before saving discovery results check box.
To disable the feature, clear the check box.
4
In the Saving mode section of the Save tab, select one of these two options:
83
84
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery
Table 6-2 Saving Mode Options
Option
5
Function
Replace the contents of the User View’s Discovery
folder with the results of the discovery
Substitutes new discovery results
for previous results
Refresh the full User View with the results of the
discovery
Adds newly discovered devices
to previous contents
In the Save discovered device names as section of the same tab, select one of the four
options. Each option corresponds to a name template for newly discovered CCS devices
saved to the Discovery folder of the Navigation pane.
Here are examples of the four name options as applied to a DEC-6002:
Table 6-3 Device Naming Options
6
Name Template
Sample Device Name
Slot <n>-<Device Name>
(<Description>)
Slot 10-DEC-6002 (Digital Comb Filter Decoder)
Slot <n>-<Description> (<Device
Name>)
Slot 10-Digital Comb Filter Decoder (DEC-6002)
<Device Name> (<Description>)
DEC-6002 (Digital Comb Filter Decoder)
<Description> (<Device Name>)
Digital Comb Filter Decoder (DEC-6002)
Click OK to close the Discovery Options box and save the results.
Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device
To check a network connection to one of the CCS devices, you can “ping” the resource’s IP
address.
To ping an IP address, complete these steps:
1
Open a command prompt dialog box and type:
ping X
Where “X” is IP address of the device you are checking.
2
Press ENTER.
A ping command has two possible responses:

A Reply... message verifies that the device is connected to the CCS network.

A Request timed out message signals that the ping command failed. The device is
either not connected or not reachable on the CCS network.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Running a Discovery
Under Windows Vista or Windows 7, the following settings are required to enable scanning
of IP addresses during a discovery:
• Add a firewall rule allowing ICMP type 0 packets.
• User Account Control (UAC) must be disabled.
For more information, contact your network administrator.
If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main
menu. When docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan
CCS Navigator screen.
Once you have set your discovery options, you can begin the actual discovery process. You
have two choices of the type of discovery you would like to run.
A full discovery scans the entire network for controllable devices. See Running a Full
Discovery on page 85.
If you would rather scan specific sections of your network for specific types of devices, you
should run a partial discovery. See Running a Partial Discovery on page 86.
Running a Full Discovery
Full discovery is not supported for HTTP protocol. When you specify an HTTP server IP
address, the operation is automatically changed to a partial discovery. See Running a
Partial Discovery on page 86.
A full discovery is more simple to set up than a partial discovery, because it does not limit
the places on the network that are scanned. However, it may take longer than a partial
discovery.
If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main
menu. When docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan
CCS Navigator screen. The Discovery pane does not appear when Magellan CCS
Navigator is in Control mode.
To run a full discovery, complete these steps:
1
In Build mode, click Options... on the Discovery pane button bar to open the Discovery
Options dialog box.
2
Select the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box and ensure that there is a check beside
Enable scanning of IP addresses and Enable scanning of MAC addresses.
Figure 6-4 Start Options Section of Hosts Tab, Discovery Options Box
The Hosts list can be empty in order to run a full discovery. If there are items in the Hosts
list, they should not have a check mark in the left-most column.
85
86
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery
3
Select the Save tab of the Discovery Options box, and then select one of the discovered
device names formats.
For more information on Discovery Save options, see Setting Discovery Save Options on
page 83.
4
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Discovery Options box.
5
Click Start on the Discovery pane button bar.
The Discovery tool pings all IP addresses on the network, and then logs the IP addresses
and device IDs for all responding CCS-compliant devices in the Discovery pane’s Status
dialog box.
Figure 6-5 Discovery Pane Status Messages
If you do not click Stop, the discovery stops automatically when it finishes searching the
CCS Network.
6
When the discovery is complete, click Save on the Discovery pane button bar to transfer
the discovery results to the Discovery folder in the Navigation pane.
The Status box of the Discovery pane logs these actions.
Running a Partial Discovery
If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main
menu. When docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan
CCS Navigator screen.
To save time, you may want to discover only a subset of the IP addresses on your network
instead of scanning the entire network. To run a partial discovery, complete these steps:
1
Point to Tools on the menu bar, and then click Discovery to open the Discovery pane.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 6-6 Discovery Pane
2
Click Options... on the Discovery pane button bar to open the Discovery Options box.
3
On the Hosts tab, select the Enable scanning of IP addresses check box, if it is not
already selected.
Figure 6-7 Start Options Section of Hosts Tab
4
Add IP addresses for the devices you want to discover. See Setting Host IP Addresses for
a Discovery on page 77 for more information.
5
Set your Discovery Save options. See Setting Discovery Save Options on page 83 for
more information.
6
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Discovery Options box.
7
Click Start on the Discovery pane button bar.
The Discovery tool pings all IP addresses on the network, and then logs the IP addresses
and device IDs for all responding devices in the Discovery pane’s Status box.
Figure 6-8 Discovery Pane Status Messages
8
The button bar in the Discovery pane includes a Stop button. To halt the discovery, click
Stop.
87
88
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery
If you do not click Stop, the discovery will stop automatically when it finishes searching the
CCS Network.
9
When the discovery is complete, click Save on the Discovery pane button bar to transfer
the discovery results to the Discovery folder in the Navigation pane.
The Status box of the Discovery pane logs these actions.
IP Settings and Device ID Configuration
When equipment is first connected to a CCS network or is returned to its factory default
settings, many devices may have a common default IP address. You can perform IP address
configuration as part of a MAC address discovery.
If you have run a discovery using the Enable Scanning of MAC Addresses Start
option, and you have also selected Configure IP Settings and/or Device IDs, upon
completion of the discovery process, before being offered to save the results of your
discovery, the following window will open:
Figure 6-9. IP Settings and Device ID Configuration
Table 6-4 IP Settings and Device ID Configuration Options
Item
Function
Query Device Connection
Status
When checked, the dialog box contains an additional column (at the far right of
the dialog box) for Connection Status.
Per Discovered Device
Configure
(check) Magellan CCS Navigator will attempt to assign new IP address settings
and/or IDs to devices that are checked.
MAC Address
(Read-only)
Displays the device’s unique ENET identifier.
Device Type
(Read-only)
Displays the family the device belongs to.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Table 6-4 IP Settings and Device ID Configuration Options (Continued)
Item
Function
Device Name
The custom name of the device that is returned by the low-level discovery. This
name appears in the Navigation pane, and is not sent to the device.
This column is not available for some devices.
The New Settings options can be updated only if
Configure is checked at the start of the row.
Current Settings
(read-only)
ID
New Settings
(editable)
Subnet Mask
Server
Displays the current server IP address. This field is editable so that you can
configure it for router devices.
Status
Indicates the state of a re-assignment operation:
[x] indicates failure
[check] indicates success
If the field is empty, no change has been applied.
Connection Status
This column only appears when the Query Device Connection Status option in
the top left corner of the dialog box is checked.
IP Address
Gateway
This column updates every 30 seconds. Disconnected devices display red.
When you have completed the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration screen, click Apply.
A progress bar indicates which device is currently being updated.
When the update for a device is complete, the Status column indicates whether the update
was successful.
If you cancel out of this window without applying changes or clicking OK (to accept the
window the way it is), your discovery is considered to be cancelled. You will not be offered
the opportunity to save the results of the discovery, and the Navigation pane will not be
updated with the results of the discovery.
Finding a
Device
1
2
If you discover more than one of the same device using MAC addresses, you may need to
find out which specific hardware device is which. Follow these steps:
Right click one of the identical devices in the IP Settings and Device ID
Configuration dialog box.
Select Identify Device from the menu that appears.
The device responds by blinking a light on its control panel.
Not all devices are capable of responding to an Identify request. Se the documentation for
your product for more information.
3
To cancel the response, right click the row again and choose Cancel Identify Device.
Configuring Multiple Devices
Follow these steps to assign a range of IP address/Device IDs to a group of selected devices.
89
90
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery
1
On the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box, select a range of
devices by clicking the start of the range, holding down the Shift key, and clicking the end
of the range.
2
Click Setting Options.
A window similar to the following appears:
Figure 6-10 IP Settings and Device ID Options Dialog Box
3
Place a check beside each setting you want to apply to the devices, and then complete the
row for that item.
Table 6-5 describes the various options and their functionality.
Table 6-5 IP Settings and Device ID Options for Low-Level Discovery
Item
Function
Select All
Selects all checkboxes on the dialog box.
Clear All
Unselects all selected checkboxes on the dialog box.
IP Address Range
Enter the first IP address in the IP Address Range field, and the
last three digits of the last IP address in the To field. The IP
addresses are assigned sequentially to the selected devices.
Subnet Mask
Define the number range that can connect to the frame over
Ethernet.
Default Gateway
Define the server the connection happens over.
Server IP Address
This sets all the selected devices to share the same server.
Device ID Range
Device IDs apply to Platinum frames and some other routers.
Any item that is left unchecked uses the default setting
4
Click OK.
5
In the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box, click Apply.
A progress bar indicates which device is currently being updated.
When the update for a device is complete, the Status column indicates whether the update
was successful.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
6
Click OK to close the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box and
discover the devices at their new IP locations.
Rediscovery
When a device appears in the Navigation pane, you can rediscover it. This is especially
useful with routers, and with frames that may have their contents change. To rediscover a
device:
1
In Build mode, right-click on a device in the Network, Discovery, or Temporary folder,
and then select Rediscover.
A discovery starts, looking only for the device at that IP address. When the discovery is
complete, the device information is updated in the Navigation pane.
Copying Discovery Results
After a discovery runs, the set of resource icons contained in your Discovery folder is an
outline of your CCS network.
You can copy the resource icons in the Discovery folder into either the Network folder or
the Temporary folder. There you can customize the graphical representation of the
network in the application to make it more understandable and reflective of the actual
organization of your network.
1
Select a top-level device in the Discovery folder, point to File on the menu bar, and then
click Copy.
2
Do either of the following:

Select the resource icon of the target folder, either the Network folder or the
Temporary folder, then point to File on the menu bar, and then click Paste.

Select a top-level device icon and drag-and-drop it on top of the Network or
Temporary folder icon, and then click Yes to confirm.
Either action transfers the top-level device and its children into the Network or Temporary
folder.
3
Repeat this copy-and-paste or drag-and-drop action for each of the top-level devices in the
Discovery folder, until all have been copied into the Network or Temporary folder.
4
Click the Save icon on the toolbar to save the new layout.
91
92
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery
Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu
Right-click inside the Discovery pane to open a shortcut menu.
Table 6-6 Discovery Shortcut Menu
Command
Function
Allow
Docking
Toggles the docking feature on and off. If docking is off, the pane floats.
To float the pane, drag and drop its title bar. To dock it again, drag and
drop it to the border where you want to dock it.
Move
Enables you to move an undocked Discovery pane around.
Hide
Hides the Discovery pane. Reopen it by opening the Discovery tool
from the Tools menu.
You can dock the Discovery pane to the left or right border of the main panel or “float” it
anywhere on the computer screen.
Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View
The Navigation pane contains an optional Discovery column, which can provide valuable
information about devices found during a discovery.
The Discovery column shows only in Build mode. The Navigation pane shows other
columns when you change to Control mode. Here is a list of the possible comments in the
Discovery column and what they mean:
Table 6-7 Discovery Column Comments
Comment
Means
New
The Discovery tool found a previously undiscovered network
resource. This information will be updated in the Discovery folder.
Not Found
The Discovery tool did not find a previously discovered network
resource in the Navigation pane on the real network. The resource
could be off-line or disconnected from the network.
Found
The Discovery tool has discovered this network resource during a
previous discovery.
Not Searched
The Discovery tool did not find a previously discovered network
resource in the Navigation pane on the real network. This happens
when you have changed the Discovery options and removed that
resource from the list of IP hosts for a discovery.
ProcedureEnabling the Discovery Column
To show a Discovery column in the Navigation pane, you must enable this feature in the
Navigation Options box. The Discovery column appears only in Build mode.
See Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
93
7
Network View Construction
Network View Overview
The Navigation pane contains a hierarchical representation of the content and organization
of the CCS devices in your network. The hierarchy is made up of resource icons can be
nested into groups for different users in different ways, and modified with customized text
and optional columns.
The Navigation pane can only be altered by an administrator in Build mode on a Magellan
CCS Navigator Server install.
Figure 7-1 Hierarchy in the Navigation Pane
For Administrator users, the Navigation pane has a System tab and a User tab for each
defined user. The System view is a view of all the devices discovered or created on the
network, and each User view is a customized subset of the network.
Figure 7-2 Administrator’s View of Various Tabs
For each Operator user, the Navigation pane has one tab, showing just the devices that the
user has access to for monitoring, configuration, or control. This access is determined when
creating or modifying user accounts. For information on creating, deleting, and modifying
user accounts, see Managing User Accounts on page 32.
94
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Updating the Navigation Pane on a Client PC
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can alter the Navigation
pane. When resources on the Navigation pane are changed on a
NAVIGATOR-SRV-licensed PC, on all connected NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PCs the Reload
button will be enabled to indicate that a network resource has been updated. Click
Reload from the toolbar, or right click in the Navigation pane and click Reload, or select
View > Reload from the main menu to update the Navigation pane.
Resource
Folders
The Navigation pane contains folders that represent the physical hierarchy and
organization of the CCS devices.
Figure 7-3 Navigation Pane with all Folders Closed
The table below describes the folders in the resource tree.
Table 7-1 Folders in the Resource Tree
Folder
Description
Network
Contains the currently operational network organization and CCS
devices
Routers
Contains routing system configurations
Discovery
Contains resource icons representing the CCS devices found during
a discovery
Temporary
Stores currently unused network information; alarms for devices in
the Temporary folder are not forwarded like other alarm when alarm
forwarding is configured
Configuration
Contains configuration information for various CCS control panels
and NEO frames
This folder appears in the Navigation pane for administrators on a
Magellan CCS Navigator Server only; Client users will not see this
folder.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Table 7-1 Folders in the Resource Tree (Continued)
Folder
Description
Catalog
Contains lists of all CCS equipment that CCS Magellan CCS
Navigator supports, organized into subfolders for each compatible
product line
Preset
Contains preset files storing values for common control settings for
CCS devices
Virtual Device
Contains all virtual devices defined in the system; see Creating
Virtual Devices and Assigning Favorites to Virtual Devices on
page 166 for more information
This folder appears in the Navigation pane for administrators on a
Magellan CCS Navigator Server only; Client users will not see this
folder.
Sorting Items in the Resource Tree
If a folder contains a number of sub-folders, for ease of finding things within that folder,
you can put the items therein in alphanumeric order.
1
Right click on an item in the resource tree.
2
Select Sort Subnodes by Name.
If this option is not available, then the selected item does not have any sub-folders.
Resource
Icons
Administrator users on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can use resource icons to create
custom views of the devices on the CCS network, rename the icons and use them
to represent other objects. Magellan CCS Navigator Server must be in Build mode to effect
changes in the Navigation Pane.
The table below shows the resource icons that might appear in a tree view.
Table 7-2 Resource Icons
Icon
Node
What the Icon Represents
Configuration
Configuration information for a NEO frame or CCS control
panel and their assigned devices or modules
Control Panel
A hardware device that provides control to parameters of one
or more devices
Folder
A container for groups of devices
Frame
A chassis containing one or more CCS products or functional
blocks
Functional
Block
A CCS module controlled as a single unit
Signal Monitor
An input signal for monitoring
95
96
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Table 7-2 Resource Icons (Continued)
Icon
Node
What the Icon Represents
Gateway
A CCS device that translates between two languages, enables
devices to access and control CCS devices. Supported
gateways include the following:

CCS Protocol

CCS DPS-Gateway
Routing System A system to represent control and configuration of linked
routing devices
Tie-line
Configures tie lines and starts the Dynamic Routing Framework
Manager (DRFM)
Control View
Configures logical routing information
Multiviewer
System
Appears in your Navigation pane when you discover an
Imagine Communications Multiviewer; this icon is a parent
icon that will contain Layout Designer, PIP, and output module
icons.
Layout
Designer
Appears in your Navigation pane when you discover an
Imagine Communications Multiviewer; double click to start
Layout Designer, a configuration tool for the multiviewer’s
output module. This instance of Layout Designer will contain IP
address information for the multiviewer it started under.
PIP
A Picture-in-Picture associated with a multiviewer
Timer Control
An up or down counter that is normally associated with a
PredatorII multiviewer
HTTP Server
An HTTP Web server
Product
One or more CCS functional blocks controlled as one unit
Rack
An equipment rack containing one or more frames
Salvo
Preconfigured group of routing actions that can be executed
simultaneously
Server
A group of CCS products and functional blocks discovered
under the same IP address
Signal Path
The pathway of signals within a broadcast facility
Studio
A building, area, or room containing one or more racks of CCS
devices
Amino STB
Amino device copied from the Catalog folder, which can be
configured to monitor an AmiNET120 or AmiNET500 set-top
box
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Table 7-2 Resource Icons (Continued)
Icon
Node
What the Icon Represents
NEXIO System
Appears in your Navigation pane when you create a NEXIO
system using the NEXIO wizard; this icon is a parent icon that
will contain group, servers, data storage, and drivers icons.
After configuring an EDGE-DPS575 gateway, do not change the names of its associated
DPS-475/575 synchronizers. Do not remove the IP address that is part of a DPS-475/575
synchronizer’s name.
To rename a resource icon, perform one of these actions while in build mode:

Right-click the resource icon you want to rename, select Rename from the resulting
shortcut menu, and then type the new name in place of the selected icon name.

Right-click the resource icon you want to rename, select Properties from the resulting
shortcut menu, and then change its Name, Short Name, or Alternate on the
General tab of the resulting Navigation Properties box. See Setting Navigation
Properties on page 103 for more information.

Single-click the name of the resource icon twice in succession, with a slight pause
between clicks. Then type the new name in the place of the selected icon name.

Select the resource icon, press F2, and then type the new name in the place of the
selected icon name.
Navigating the Resource Tree
The resource icons in the Navigation pane can potentially contain or hold one or more
other CCS devices in much the same way that a file folder could contain one or more items.
The Discovery folder
contains items that
are being displayed.
The Temporary folder
contains items that
are not being
displayed.
The Configuration
folder does not
contain other items.
Figure 7-4 Resource Tree
The presence of a plus symbol (+) to the left of a folder or resource icon indicates that the
folder or resource icon contains other objects, but the resource tree is currently hiding its
contents.
To show the contents of a closed folder or container resource, click the plus (+) symbol to
the left of that folder or resource icon.
The presence of a minus (-) symbol to the left of a folder or resource icon indicates that the
folder or resource icon is showing its contents.
To hide the contents of a container resource, click the minus symbol
(-) to the left of the folder or resource icon.
97
98
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
The absence of either a plus (+) or minus (-) symbol to the left of a folder or resource icon
indicates that the folder or CCS device has no contents.
Finding Items in the Navigation Pane
Use the Find tool to search the Navigation pane for text that meets your search criteria -for example, searching for a resource by product name or type. Complete these steps:
1
Click Find... on the Edit menu.
Figure 7-5 Find Box
2
In the Find what box on the Find box, type the text you seek, or click the down arrow and
select an object from the list.
3
Check the Match whole word only box if you want to only search for whole words
containing the search text, or clear the Match whole word only box if you want to search
for mentions of the text that are part of other text.
4
Check the Match case box if you want to search only for text with matching case, or clear
the box if you want to search for the text in any case.
5
Select Up or Down for the direction of the search.
6
Click Find Next to start the search.
The application highlights the first instance of matching text in the Navigation pane.
7
Click Find Next repeatedly to find additional instances of the search text.
8
When you finish searching, click Cancel or Close.
Starting Software From the Navigation Pane
You can start various non-Magellan CCS Navigator software tools from within Magellan
CCS Navigator, including:

Layout Designer—Double-click a Layout Designer icon under a Multiviewer
system in the Discovery, Catalog, or Network folder.

DRFM—Double-click a Tie Line node in the Navigation pane’s Routers folder.
Amino STB—Double-click an Amino STB device in the Catalog > Third Party,
Discovery, or Network folder.

If the software does not start, and you receive an error message saying that the application
directory was not found, ensure that the software is installed correctly. To redirect Magellan
CCS Navigator to find the software at the correct location, see Setting the Command
Tab on page 107.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Adding Resources to the Navigation Pane
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can customize the contents
of the Navigation pane. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in build mode.
All modifications are done on the System tab, which shows all the devices discovered or
created on the network. Each User tab is a customized subset of the network that is based
on the devices that user has access to. For information on defining access privileges for
users, see Managing User Accounts on page 32.
If there are no devices populating the Navigation pane, you will start by adding devices.
You should update the System view of the CCS network whenever new CCS devices are
added to the network. You can either manually add resource icons representing the new
devices and then configure their IP addresses, or you can have the Discovery tool add the
relevant icons by running a full or partial discovery.
The following topics describe the methods of adding items to the Navigation pane:

CCS Device Discovery on page 75

Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon on page 99

Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon on page 100
You can use some of the resource icons—such as folders, signals, racks, and studios—to
group your devices into physical or logical hierarchies or divisions. You can also add, delete,
move, or rename resource icons.
Server icons, with the exception of HTTP and SNMP server icons, do not represent actual
devices but serve as place holders for the IP address for a child device or set of devices. The
plus sign (+) to the left of a server icon indicates that this server icon has undisclosed child
resources.
The usual hierarchy for resources in the Navigation pane is as follows:

Network icons contain studio, signal path, and folder icons.

Studio and folder icons contain rack icons.

Rack icons contain server icons.

Server icons contain frame, control panel, and gateway icons.

Frame icons contain product icons and/or functional block icons.

Signal path icons contain product icons and/or functional block icons.
Two examples of how resources can be organized are provided in the following examples:

Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User on page 114

Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User on page 114
Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon
You might create items such as server devices using the Create tool. To create a new
resource icon, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the resource icon that you want to parent or contain the new resource icon.
2
Select Create from the resulting shortcut menu.
3
Select the type of resource icon you would like to create from the Create submenu.
4
Rename this new icon.
99
100
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
5
Set its IP address and navigation properties.
See the following topics:

Setting Navigation Properties on page 103

Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device on page 129

Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device on page 130
Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon
You might copy and paste a resource icon that cannot be discovered, but which exists in the
Catalog, such as an Amino STB device.
To create a new resource icon by the copy-and-paste method, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the resource icon you want to copy, and select Copy from the resulting shortcut
menu.
The source icon can be in any folder on your network, including the Catalog folder.
2
Right-click the proposed container icon, then select Paste from the resulting shortcut
menu.
3
Rename the resource to distinguish it from the source icon.
You can use a copied device to configure control panels, create rules, etc., while a device is
unavailable, and when the device is available, paste that device’s data before completing
configuration of the device.
4
Configure the IP address of the new resource location by setting the Navigation properties.
You can add Device ID information manually, or you can copy and paste it from a like
device.
See the following topics:

Setting Navigation Properties on page 103

Setting the Device Tab on page 105

Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device on page 129

Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device on page 130

Editing an IP Address on page 100
Editing an IP Address
If you know the current IP address setting of a device in the Navigation pane, and would like
to change it (for example, if you have created an off-line device and have configured
favorites for it, and would now like to update with the actual IP address), follow these steps:
1
From the main menu, choose Edit > IP Address.
The Replace IP dialog box opens:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 7-6 Replace IP Dialog Box
2
In the Find IP Address field, enter the IP address the device is currently known at in the
Navigation pane.
For best results, when creating a device, you should change the IP address from the default
of 255.255.255.255. Editing an IP address replaces the address information for all devices
that have the same IP address.
3
In the Replace With field, enter the actual IP address of the device.
4
Click Replace.
Magellan CCS Navigator searches the Device tab of all devices in the Network and Discovery
folders of the Navigation pane. All devices with the IP address it searches for will be
replaced with the new IP address.
Deleting a Resource Icon
Choose either of these methods to delete a resource icon:

Right-click the resource icon you want to delete, and then select Delete from the
resulting shortcut menu.

Select the resource icon you want to delete, and then press the Delete key on your
keyboard.
This function is only available to Magellan CCS Navigator resource icons, linked graphical
objects, and Navigator pages that have been created in Navigator 1.7 or later.
Magellan CCS Navigator tracks the links of nodes that are dragged from the resource tree
and the resulting graphical objects in Magellan CCS Navigator pages (see Graphical
Navigation Page Creation on page 7 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in).
When you delete a node from the resource tree, if it is linked to any graphical objects, a
Confirm Delete box appears. This box lists all of the linked pages and their paths, and
gives you the option to either continue with the deletion or to cancel your request. If you
delete the node, any linked graphical objects will lose the double-click actions of their
parent, but will still retain any rules that you have defined for them.
101
102
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Figure 7-7 Confirm Node Deletion Box
Dragging and Dropping a Resource Icon
Drag-and-drop results depend on whether the resource icons involved in the operation (one
or more dragged icons and the target icon onto which the dragged icons are dropped) have
the same parent icon or different ones. If the icons have the same parent, they will remain
siblings after the move, but the dragged icons will be inserted after the target icon. If the
icons have different parents, they will become children of the target icon after the move.
To move a resource icon from one parent icon to another parent or to reorder a group of
sibling icons, complete these steps:
1
Select the resource icon you want to move.
2
Hold down the mouse button and drag the icon on top of the new parent or sibling icon.
3
Release the mouse button to drop the icon.
4
If a query box asks you to confirm the drag-and-drop action, click OK.
Cutting and Pasting a Resource Icon
To move a resource icon by the cut-and-paste method, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the resource icon you want to move.
2
Select Cut from the resulting shortcut menu.
3
Right-click the proposed parent icon.
4
Select Paste from the resulting shortcut menu.
Copying an Identical Resource Icon
To add resource icons to a network view by copying icons from another location in the
resource tree (such as the Catalog folder), complete these steps:
1
Copy the icon of an identical resource from an existing location in the resource tree.
The Catalog folder, located at the bottom of the tree in the Navigation pane, is the easiest
place to find an identical resource icon, since it contains an up-to-date list of all supported
CCS devices. However, you can instead copy a resource icon from elsewhere in your
resource tree if you have already installed an identical device elsewhere in the network.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
2
Select the target container resource for the copied resource icons and paste the copied
icons into the new container or parent resource.
3
To set the new resource's properties, including its IP address, so that the software
application can communicate with the new resource, right-click the resource icon and select
Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
See Setting Navigation Properties on page 103 for information on all the Navigation
Properties options.
4
Click Close.
Setting the Color of Text on a Resource Icon
You can only change the color of resource icons in the Navigation pane one at a time.
To set the text color in the Navigation pane, complete these steps:
1
Change to Build mode, if you are in another mode (see Setting the Operational Mode on
page 37).
2
In the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon whose text color you want to change,
and then click Text Color from the resulting shortcut menu.
3
In the Text Color box, clear the Use Default Text Color check box.
4
Select a color from the New Text Color box.
In the new Text Color box, select Other to select another color or specify a custom color.
5
In the Text Color box, click OK to accept the color selection.
See Setting Navigation Properties on page 103 for more information.
Setting Navigation Properties
You must be in Build mode to modify the Navigation Properties sheet.
Administrator users at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can alter the navigation properties
for a device. General users of Magellan CCS Navigator Clients can view but not modify
device properties.
To show the Properties sheet of a CCS device, In the Navigation pane, right-click the icon
of the network resource whose properties you want to check, and then click Properties
from the resulting shortcut menu.
103
104
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
The Navigation Properties dialog box for the selected network resource appears. it
contains one or more of the following tabs, depending on the resource:
Table 7-3 Navigation Property Sheet Tabs
Tab
Contains
Reference
General
Resource names, type, and description
Setting General Navigation Properties
for a Device on page 104
Command
Information about control and configuration
commands to start standalone applications for
items in the Network, Discovery, or
Temporary folder
Setting the Command Tab on page 107
HTTP
The URL of the Web page of a device with a Web
server
Setting HTTP Properties on page 108
Monitor Point
Information about the router source connected to
a device for signal monitoring
Setting the Monitor Point
Properties on page 108
Device
Information about the Device Class, Device ID,
Alarm Filtering, and Control Access Rights
of a network resource icon
Setting the Device Tab on page 105
Preset
Information about the Device ID of a Preset icon Viewing the Preset Tab on page 109
Shortcut
For informational purposes only -- data cannot be
entered in the fields on this screen
The target folder type (Network, Discovery,
Configuration, Temporary, Catalog, Virtual
Device or Preset) and target (path to the
resource through the Resource tree)
of a shortcut icon
Using Navigation Shortcuts on
page 124
SNMP
Properties that allow SNMP communication with
otherwise incompatible devices
Setting SNMP Navigation
Properties on page 110
Communication
Settings
When present, indicates whether you are
connected to a device using point-to-point or
broadcast communication
Viewing the Communication Settings
Tab on page 109
Amino STB
When present, provides configuration options for
an AmiNET120 or AmiNET500 set-top box.
Setting the Amino STB Tab on
page 111
Setting General Navigation Properties for a Device
On the General tab, you can set the device’s Short Name, Name, Alternate name, and
the resource’s Description.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 7-8 General Tab
To choose which name to view in the Navigation pane, see Setting Navigation
Options on page 120.
To change a name or description, select the current text and then type in new text. The
information in this dialog box is used as follows:
Table 7-4 Navigation General Properties
Option
Function
Short Name
An abbreviated form of the name, restricted to 20 characters for use
on control panels; also used when the device is in a Configuration
folder
Name
The current product name, or one which you assign to the device
Alternate
This product’s former name (if a former name doesn’t exist, this may
match the product’s Name)
Description
The product’s full title, as displayed in its product literature
Type
Description based on where within the Navigation pane the device is
found
Subnodes Count
Indicates the number of items in the next level below this node in the
Navigation pane; does not provide a count of all the items in all the
levels below
Setting the Device Tab
In some nodes, you cannot change the Device ID. In such a case, this field will be read-only.
On the Device tab of the Navigation Properties box, you can set the Device class (type
of resource), Device ID, and alarm filtering.
To set the Device tab for a resource in the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon,
select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu, and select the Device tab.
105
106
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Figure 7-9 Device Tab of Navigation Properties Box
Table 7-5 Navigation Properties Device Tab Options
Option
Function
Device Class
Defines the graphic that represents the resource in the Navigation
pane (The icons are shown and described in Table 7-2 on page 95)
Device ID
Defines the device so that Magellan CCS Navigator can communicate
with it, divided into four fields:

EP/IP - Communication protocol the device uses

IP address - Address where the item is found on your network

Device Hierarchy - System node, frame node, slot location (if
applicable), and sub-device number (if applicable) of the device

Family ID / Product ID - Product group and device catalog ID
When the IP address, Device Hierarchy, and Family or Product ID are
identical to other devices, the changes made on this window will be
updated to those other devices when this window closes or switches to
another device.
Set Default
Sets the IP address field to the factory default. Other fields remain
unchanged
Copy
Copies the Device ID information
Paste
Pastes previously copied Device ID information
Alarm Filtering
Indicates whether the software application is filtering the alarms for
this resource (Enabled when checked)
When alarms are filtered, they are stored in the alarms log database.
They will not show on any other tabs of the diagnostic database.
Control Window
Determines whether a custom or default Control dialog box will open
when the device is clicked on in Control mode; if there is not a custom
Control dialog box, and you have a Graphical Navigation license, click
the Browse button to select a Graphical Navigation page to launch.
Control Access
Rights
Indicates whether access to the resource is enabled. This box is read
only (See Assigning Access Rights on page 28 for information on
how Administrators can change control access rights)
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Setting the Command Tab
By default, when you click a resource icon in the Navigation pane in Build mode, a
Configuration dialog box opens. When you click the same resource icon in Control
mode, a Control dialog box opens. You can reconfigure a resource icon to launch a
non-Magellan CCS Navigator application instead.
Some resource icons are pre-configured to launch a specific application. For example, the
Imagine Communications Layout Designer icon in a Multiviewer folder
launches the Layout Designer software.
When you click this icon in the
Navigation pane, Layout
Designer launches outside
Magellan CCS Navigator.
Figure 7-10 Layout Designer Icon in the Navigation Pane
When various actions have been configured for a resource icon, the one that is highest
priority always launches.

In Build mode, the highest priority is a HTTP page, if one is configured, followed by any
item configured on the Command tab, with the lowest priority being the default
Configuration window.

In Control mode, the highest priority is the Custom page for a resource icon, if one is
configured. In the absence of a custom page, if there is a HTTP page, that will launch. If
there is no HTTP page, any item that is configured in the Command tab launches, and if
there is not one of those, then the default Control window launches when you
double-click the icon.
Starting Non-Magellan CCS Navigator Applications from the
Navigation Pane
You can also use application nodes, such as SuiteView, to start non-Magellan CCS Navigator
applications and to monitor SNMP traps.
To configure a resource icon, to start a non-Magellan CCS Navigator software application
from the Navigation pane, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the resource icon in the Navigation pane, and then select Properties
from the resulting shortcut menu.
The Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
107
108
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Browse
buttons
Figure 7-11 Control Operation Settings for the Command Tab
2
Select the Command tab.
3
Beside Operation select one of the following:

Configuration—to determine the resource icon’s behavior in Build mode.

Control—to determine the resource icon’s behavior in Control mode.
4
Beside Command, click the Browse button and then browse to the location of the
executable you want to launch.
5
Select the executable and click OK.
6
(Optional) Type the path to the default dialog box of the application in the Arguments box.
7
(Optional) Beside Initial Directory, clickhe Browse button and then browse to the
location of the initial data directory.
8
Select the folder and click OK, and then click Close to close the Properties dialog box.
You can create different commandsfor Build and Control modes for the same resource icon,
or you can create the same command for both modes.
You can also start non-Magellan CCS Navigator applications from objects in the Graphical
Navigation pane by creating Launch Application actions. See Setting Properties for a
‘Launch Application’ Action on page 75 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in for more
information.
Setting the Monitor Point Properties
The Monitor Point Properties tab appears when an item can be monitored. You must
set the router source before you can use the Signal Monitor tool to view the signal.
To set the Monitor Point properties, follow this procedure.
1
In the Navigation pane, right click on a routing view. The Navigation Properties
dialog box appears.
2
Click on the Monitor Point tab.
3
From the Router Source menu, choose a router source input.
4
Click the X in the top right corner of the dialog box to save your changes and close.
Setting HTTP
Properties
1
If the selected resource has a Web server, you can set the URL of the Web page by following
this procedure:
In the Navigation pane, right click on a device.
The Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
2
Select the HTTP tab.
3
Type in the URL of the Web page.
Viewing the
Preset Tab
Items in the Navigation pane’s Preset folder have a Preset tab. The Preset tab has one
read-only field.
To view the Preset tab, right click on an item in the Navigation pane and select
Properties from the menu that appears. The Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
Click on the Preset tab.
Presets are only available for the full version of Magellan CCS Navigator.
See Using Presets on page 270 for information on using presets.
Viewing the Shortcut Tab
A resource has a Shortcut tab if you have created a shortcut to the resource icon, or if the
resource has a pre-configured shortcut. For example, a virtual device in the
Configuration folder will have a shortcut to the Virtual Devices folder.
The Shortcut tab contains information about target folder type (Network, Discovery
Configuration, Temporary, Catalog, or Preset) and target (path to the resource through
the Resource tree) for the Shortcut icon.
To view the Shortcut tab for a device, right click on its icon in the Navigation pane, select
Properties, and then click on the Shortcut tab.
For information about shortcuts, see Using Navigation Shortcuts on page 124.
Viewing the Communication Settings Tab
Some devices have an extra tab in the Navigation Properties dialog box to show the
communication type. This tab is read-only and for informational purposes only. To view the
communication settings of such a device, right-click on its icon in the Navigation pane,
and select Properties, and then click on the Communication Settings tab.
Non-router devices have the following information:
Table 7-6 Communication Types
Communication Type
Meaning
Broadcast
(Default) Used when the client PC and the device are on
the same network subnet
Point-to-point
Used when the controlling PC and the device are on
different subnets
This setting is fixed per device and is determined when the device is discovered and saved.
For Routing Systems, the Communication tab is configurable for Connection type (Serial or
TCP/IP) COM Port and Baud rate. For more information, see Volume 6: Routing
Configuration.
109
110
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Setting SNMP Navigation Properties
To set the SNMP properties for server and application class nodes, follow these steps:
1
In the Navigation pane, right click on the server or application class node. The
Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
All server and application class nodes that you have given a device ID have an SNMP tab in
the Navigation Properties dialog box.
2
If there is not an SNMP tab, choose the Device tab, and in the field labeled Device
class, choose either Server or Application. Now, enter a Device ID. The SNMP tab
appears. Click on it.
Figure 7-12 SNMP Tab
3
Place a check beside SNMP enabled. This confirms that the server is in fact an SNMP
device, and can be status monitored.
4
Select the SNMP version, either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c.
5
If you want to monitor the status of the device, check Status Polling.
Even when Status Polling is disabled, the device is still queried for status when starting
Magellan CCS Navigator, when switching to Control mode, and with every Refresh or
RefreshAll command.
6
Enter the name of the Read Community, if different from the default of public.
7
Enter the name of the Write Community, if different from the default of private.
8
Enter the SNMP Port for the device.
The default port is 161. The port can number can range from 0 to 65535.
9
Enter the Timeout period, in seconds.
The allowable timeout period can range from 1 to 1000 seconds.
10 Enter the Number of Retries to be allowed.
The default number of retries is 1. The number of retries can range from 1 to 1000.
11 Enter the Polling Interval, in seconds.
The default polling interval is 30 seconds. The interval can range from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Magellan CCS Navigator will periodically poll all OIDs of the specified SNMP device.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Setting Navigation Properties for an SNMP Server
Because SNMP does not support the concept of alarm clearing, follow the steps at Limiting
the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64 to avoid excessive numbers of alarms
being triggered.
You can monitor SNMP servers on your network for SNMP traps. Magellan CCS Navigator
shows the content of the SNMP traps as alarm records in the Diagnostics dialog box.
To configure a device to send SNMP traps to a PC’s IP address, look for instructions in that
device’s user manual.
To set the navigation properties for an SNMP server that you want to monitor, complete
these steps:
1
In the Navigation pane, right click in the Network or Discovery folder and select
Create > Server from the shortcut menu, or select an existing server icon.
2
Right-click the server icon and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
This will show the Navigation Properties box.
3
Select the Device tab, and in the first field to the right of Device ID, select IP from the list
box.
In the second field to the right of Device ID, type in the device IP address.
4
Click Close.
If the device has been configured to send SNMP traps to the PC that houses Magellan CCS
Navigator, when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode, it will receive those traps as
alarms.
Setting the Amino STB Tab
The Amino STB tab of the Navigation Properties dialog box only appears for Amino
STB devices created in the Navigation pane.
When an Amino device is created and configured for Status monitoring and Magellan CCS
Navigator is in Control mode, if the Amino is not functioning correctly, it will have an alarm
indicator (red) in the Alarms column of the Navigation pane. The Status column will
indicate if the device is inactive. Malfunctioning Amino devices on Graphical
Navigation panels will display a red flashing border. An alarm and description will appear
in the Diagnostics pane.
To create an Amino STB module in the Navigation pane, follow these steps:
1
With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, copy Amino STB from the Catalog >
Third Party Devices folder of the Navigation pane.
111
112
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Copy Amino STB from Third Party
Devices folder
Figure 7-13 Third Party Devices Folder in Navigation Pane
2
Right click on the Network folder and click Paste.
An Amino STB icon appears in the Network folder of the Navigation pane.
3
Right click on the Amino STB icon in the Network folder, and then select Properties
from the menu that appears.
4
Click on the Device tab.
5
Enter the IP address of the Amino STB device.
6
If you change the location of the STB Utility program from its default, click the Control tab
and enter the path in the Command field.
7
Click on the Amino STB tab.
Figure 7-14 Amino STB Tab of the Navigation Properties Dialog Box
By default, Status Polling is checked. In this state, Magellan CCS Navigator will monitor
the Amino device’s status while in Control mode.
8
Click the Browse button beside Amino Keyfile Name, browse to the location of the
STBrc-KEY.private file, and then click Open.
The keyfile is provided by Amino.
9
Enter the Keyfile Access Key for the Amino device.
The access key is provided by Amino.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Other options that are available on this tab include the following:
Table 7-7 Amino STB Navigation Properties options
Option
Function
Time to Live (TTL)
Determines how many network switches can exist between your
device (in this case the Amino STB) and the Magellan CCS
Navigator PC. Normally you should leave this setting at its default.
Polling Interval (s)
The number of seconds between polls of the Amino device
Timeout Interval (s)
The minimum duration an error condition must be present in
order to trigger the error
10 Close the Navigation Properties dialog box.
You can now monitor the Amino STB device in Control mode, add it to Graphical
Navigation pages, etc.
Magellan CCS Navigator has no controls or alarm configuration tools for Amino devices. To
configure an Amino device, use the Amino STB Remote Configure Client.
When the Amino STB tab is correctly configured, you can double click on the Amino icon
in the Navigation pane or Graphical Navigation page, in Build or Control mode, and
open the Amino STB Remote Configure Client, if the Amino application has been installed.
Amino devices can generate four alarms, as described in the following table:
Table 7-8 Amino Alarms
Alarm Name
Description
STBConfigLib Keyfile not
found
The data in the Amino Keyfile Name field of the Amino
STB tab is not correct. Correct the location to clear the
alarm. If this does not clear the alarm, please contact Amino
customer support.
STBConfigLib key not
decoded
The Keyfile Access Key information on the Amino
STB tab is not correct. Re-enter the key to clear the alarm.
If this is unsuccessful, please contact Amino customer
support.
Loss of connection or
power failure
This alarm will clear when power resumes or connection to
the module is revived. After the Amino device is reconnected
or reactivated, it may take 30 seconds for the alarm to clear.
Device is not responding
properly. Please reboot the
device and refresh device
node to continue device
monitoring
This alarm occurs when the device loses connection and
requires a reboot in order to restore status monitoring.
Reboot the Amino device, and within 30 seconds, Magellan
CCS Navigator will status monitor the amino device.
See the following topics:

Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree on page 38

Network Event Diagnostics on page 237
113
114
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Sample Resource Tree Views
General users will each use a custom tree view in the Navigation pane, illustrating the
devices they have permissions to access on the CCS network. These resource trees are
created by an administrator on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server. Here are two examples:

Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User on page 114

Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User on page 114
Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User
The sample resource tree for an Engineer user identifies the modules occupying each slot in
the frames by slot number. In addition, a studio icon has been renamed “Leitch Signal
Processing and Acquisition Wall” and a rack icon has been renamed “Central Rack.”
Figure 7-15 Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User
Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User
In the sample resource tree for an Operator user, the operator wants to monitor which
signal lines flow to which equipment. The administrator has renamed several studio icons
to represent the “Signal Processing and Acquisition” process and three signal lines that
stream through the CCS devices he or she monitors.
The operator has no need to know which modules inhabit specific slots in a frame, but does
need to know how the signal flows from one device to the next.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 7-16 Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User
Example: FR6802+ Frames
Within the Navigation view, frames will contain modules.
When you connect a FR6802+ frame to your CCS network, that frame must contain an
ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module, or it must be connected to a frame that contains an
ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module. Up to eight secondary frames can be connected to the
FR6802+ frame that contains an ICE6800+ and up to three secondary frames can be
connected to a FR6802+QXF frame that contains a 6800+ETH module.
Figure 7-17 FR6802+ and ICE6800+ Possible Configuration
A QSEE6800+ module can have up to eight inputs. The inputs to the module would appear
as “contained” items beneath the QSEE6800+ module.
115
116
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Figure 7-18 QSEE6800+ Module With Inputs
Example: Multiviewer System
You must discover an Imagine Communications Multiviewer through the IP address of the
Ethernet connector on the output module in order to control the multiviewer, create
NUCLEUS configurations, etc.
In order to configure a CENTRIO panel for use with a NUCLEUS control panel, you must also
discover the Platinum frame in which the modules reside. See Volume 6: Routing
Configuration for more information.
Double-click to start Layout Designer software
The number of modules discovered under the Multiviewer system
corresponds to the physical output modules used to construct that
system. (Module-specific alarms will appear associated with the specific
module; while system-specific alarms are associated with the system
node.)
PIPs display their default System names.
In Build mode, all PIPs are listed. In Control mode, the PIPs used in the
current layout are listed.
The number of PIPs will depend on your system configuration, with 32
per display.
Figure 7-19. Multiviewer Components in Navigation Pane
Each Multiviewer system contains a Layout Designer node. Double click this node to
start Layout Designer. You must use Layout Designer to upload firmware to your Imagine
Communications Multiviewer modules, create and edit layouts, configure SNMP, etc. For
more information, see Starting Software From the Navigation Pane on page 98, and
your Layout Designer manual or online help.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
In Control mode, you can change the active layout for the Multiviewer system. When you
do this, the list of PIPs displayed in the Navigation pane will update to display only the PIPs
included in that layout. All PIPs are always listed in Build mode.
ProcedureOutput Module
Each Multiviewer system can be made up of several modules inside a Platinum frame. They
are listed in the Modules folder. Each module will display module-specific alarms, and has
Control and Configuration dialog boxes.
ProcedureMultiviewer PIPs
When you discover a multiviewer, PIPs will display their default System names. Each PIP is
treated as a device, and you can open Configuration and Control dialog boxes for individual
PIPs.
All PIPs are always listed in Build mode. In Control mode, only the PIPs included in the active
layout are listed in the Navigation pane. By default, each PIP displays its Live name (which
will update when the name designated on the hardware updates) and system name, but
you can change this using the Navigation Options settings.
See Setting Navigation Options on page 120. Table 7-13 on page 121 lists all the
naming options.
Using Navigation Shortcut Menus
When you right-click an object in the Navigation pane, a shortcut menu will appear. It
contains a list of commands related to navigation for the selected object.
The following table describes the available options found on navigation shortcut menus.
Some options are unavailable in some operational modes
Table 7-9 Navigation Shortcut Menu Commands
Command
Client/Server
Function
Help Reference
Control
Both
Shows the Control dialog box for a selected
resource
Status Bar on page 49
Control
Contents
Both
Shows the Control dialog boxes of the
container resource and all of its children
Status Bar on page 49
Configuration
Both
Shows the Configuration dialog box for a
selected resource (editable by Administrators of
Servers in Build mode only)
Opening and Closing a
Configuration Dialog
Box on page 128
Refresh All
Both
Updates the status of all devices (usually unnessary under normal operating
circumstances)
Refresh
Both
Updates the status of the selected Amino or SNMP device
Reload
Both
Updates the contents of the Navigation pane from the Magellan CCS
Navigator Server
Cut
Server only
Cuts to the Windows Clipboard
Copy
Server only
Copies the selected object to the Windows Clipboard
117
118
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Table 7-9 Navigation Shortcut Menu Commands (Continued)
Command
Client/Server
Function
Paste
Server only
Pastes the object currently residing on the Windows Clipboard
Delete
Server only
Deletes the selected object
Create >
Server only
Opens a dialog box for creating resource icons
to represent devices and shortcuts; and routers,
edge, HW/SW panel, salvo, and tie-lines
Rename
Server only
Lets you rename the selected object
Text Color...
Server only
Opens a dialog box where you can choose a
new text color
Setting the Color of
Text on a Resource
Icon on page 103
Preset >
Both
Opens a dialog box for loading, saving or
deleting of a preset for a device or devices
Using Presets on
page 270
Alarm Filtering Both
Turns on/off alarm monitoring on a CCS control
panel (individual alarm filtering)
Using Alarm
Filtering on page 236
Alarm Filtering
Contents
Both
Contains two options, which set the system to
ignore or view alarms for all child resources on a
CCS control panel
Using Alarm Filtering
Contents on page 236
Standalone
Tools >
Both
Provides options for adding or removing
standalone tools
Navigation Pane on
page 44
Options...
Both
Opens the Navigation Options box
Setting Navigation
Options on page 120
Favorites...
Server only
Opens a dialog box where you can create a
limited set of parameters for a CCS control
panel, or for configuring favorites in the
Parameters pane (with the NAVIGATOR-INT
license only)
Configuring Favorites
for a Device on
page 229
Copy Favorites Server only
Copies the favorites from the selected devices
Paste Favorites Server only
Pastes copied favorites to a like CCS device
Product Info
Both
Opens a product brochure for the selected
device in Adobe Acrobat Reader, if both
Acrobat Reader and the Magellan CCS
Navigator documentation are installed on the
PC
Help
Both
Shows the Online Help
Properties
Both
Shows the properties of a resource
Poll
Server only
See Volume 6: Routing Configuration
Download
Server only
Rediscover
Server only
Rediscovers an already-discovered device
Backup
Server only
See Volume 6: Routing Configuration
Restore
Server only
Execute
Both
Help Reference
Using the Create Tool
to Add a Resource
Icon on page 99 and
Creating a Shortcut on
page 125
Setting Navigation
Properties on page 103
Rediscovery on page 91
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Checking the Control Access Rights for a Device
To check the control access rights for a network resource, complete these steps:
1
In the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon whose access properties you want to
check, and then select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
This shows the General tab of the Navigation Properties box.
2
Click the Device tab.
Depending on the settings in the Control Access Rights box, the following situations may
occur:
Table 7-10 Possible Settings in the Control Access Rights Box
Setting
Outcome
Enabled
The application enables access to the resource.
Disabled
The Application prevents access to the resource.
Limited
The application prevents access to some parameters of the resource.
Administrators control access to a resource in setting up the access rights of the different
user groups. You acquire access to a resource through your membership in a specific user
group.
3
Click Close.
Showing Product Information for a CCS Device
To show a product brochure for a CCS resource, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the resource icon in the Navigation pane, and then select Product Info from
the resulting shortcut menu.
This starts Adobe Acrobat Reader and opens the CCS product brochure for the selected
resource.
Figure 7-20 A CCS Product Brochure in Adobe Acrobat Reader
2
Browse through this information, and print it if required.
119
120
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
3
Click Close when you have finished using the brochure.
Setting Navigation Options
The Navigation Options box has the following tabs: General, Name Properties, and
Tree View. Controls on the General tab govern the behavior of objects in the Navigation
pane, controls on the Name Properties tab determine how device names are displayed
in the Navigation pane, and controls on the Tree View tab govern what appears in the
Navigation pane.
To open the Navigation Options box, do one of the following:

Click Navigation on the Options menu.
OR

Right-click in the Navigation pane and click Options....
OR

Right-click the status bar and select Navigation.
Select the check boxes of options you want to enable, and clear those of options you want
to disable. The General tab has the following options:
Table 7-11 General Tab of Navigation Options
Check Box Option
Function
Allow drag-and-drop
operations in Build mode
Enables you to move or copy items by dragging them
from one place to another with the mouse, including in
and out of Graphical Navigation dialog boxes if you
have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license
Show confirmation window
for drag-and-drop operations
Shows a Confirmation dialog box after each
drag-and-drop operation
Perform full validation
for drag-and-drop operations
in the Configuration folder
during dragging process
Validates drop targets in the Configuration folder
during the dragging process and will not drop a
resource icon on an invalid target
Allow renaming of items
using mouse click
Enables you to rename a resource with a mouse click.
To rename a resource, right-click the resource icon, and
then select Rename from the resulting shortcut menu
Allow undo/redo of Load Preset
in Control mode
By default, the Navigation tool’s ability to undo and
redo the loading of presets is disabled, so the
Navigation tool can load presets more quickly.
However, the Control tool’s ability to undo and redo
the loading of presets is always enabled
from the Control dialog box
Show progress dialog when
loading presets
When checked, a progress bar displays during loading
of presets. This is especially helpful during loading of
large presets.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The Tree View tab has the following options:
Table 7-12 Tree View Navigation Pane Options
Check Box Option
Function
Show alarm level
Shows a column of color-coded alarm boxes to the right of the
resource icon's name in the Network and Discovery folders.
Show device status
Shows the status of the resource on the network in a column
that shows in both the Network and the Discovery folders.
Show monitor points
Shows a column of monitor icons to the right of the resource
icon names, for CCS devices that have a monitor point defined.
Show alarm filtering
Shows a check box in a column for each resource that has alarm
filtering.
Show discovery result
Shows the result of a discovery operation to the right of the
resource icon’s name in a column that shows in both the
Network and the Discovery folders in Build mode.
Default background
color
Opens a palette from which you can choose a different color for
the Navigation pane
Default text color
Opens a palette from which you can choose a different color for
the text in the Navigation pane (to change the color of the text
on individual resource icons, see Setting the Color of Text on
a Resource Icon on page 103)
The Name Properties tab has the following options:
Table 7-13 Name Properties Navigation Pane Options
Option
Function
Choose the type of
name to display
There are three options:

Name - The current product name or one you assign
to the device

Alternate Name - The former product name, if one exists

Short Name - An abbreviated form of the name that reflects
what shows on a control panel’s local display
To define these names for a resource icon, see Setting General
Navigation Properties for a Device on page 104.
Display live name
when feature is
available
When this option is checked, when a device has an assigned live
name, the live name will be used in Control mode. In order to
prevent confusion should two or more devices share a Live name,
the device’s system (discovered) name appears in brackets after the
live name.
Type of live name
to display:
If you choose Display live name when feature is available,
in Control mode you can have one of these four options appear:

Static: This name can be configured in Layout Designer and can
change after the device is discovered

Source Name: Designated by the router database

Dynamic: Configured using the UMD

Display Name: Indicates the display on which a PIP is currently
displayed
121
122
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Using the Optional Columns in the Navigation Pane
Optional columns will not appear for Administrator users on a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server when they view User tabs.
Depending on which operational mode CCS Magellan CCS Navigator is in and what
Navigation Options are on, the Navigation pane also may show one or more of the
optional columns.
To show these optional columns, you must activate or open these columns in the Navigation
Options box. See Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
The optional columns are described in the following topics:

Using the Alarm Column on page 122

Using the Status Column on page 122

Using the Monitor Column on page 124

Using the Filter Column on page 124

Using the Discovery Column on page 124
Using the Alarm Column
The Alarm column is available in Control mode only. It contains an Alarm-level box beside
each resource icon in the Navigation pane. The colors of the Alarm-level boxes indicate
the following:

Red— critical

Yellow—warning

Green—information

Orange—acknowledged

If there is no colored alarm box in the Alarm column for a resource, this indicates that
there is no alarm for that particular resource.
When you close a container resource, the Alarm-level box shows the color of the highest
alarm for that container and its children. When you open a container resource, the
Alarm-level box disappears if that container has no alarms.
Using the Status Column
The Status column is available in Control mode only. It contains comments that indicate the
operational status of each CCS device. The comments and their meanings are as follows:
Table 7-14 Navigation Status Column Comments for CCS Devices
Comment
Meaning
Network
Active
The CCS device is operational. The PC and software can communicate
with the device and remotely control it.
Error
The software has a problem communicating with a device. A module may
have been removed from a frame or replaced with a different type of
module.
Not Ready
The PC is querying the device. When the query ends, one of the other
comments will appear.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Table 7-14 Navigation Status Column Comments for CCS Devices (Continued)
Comment
Meaning
Local Active
The CCS device is operational, but it can only be controlled from its
module edge.
Inactive
The CCS device has been removed from its frame, or the software has lost
its TCP/IP connection to the CCS device. The device may be disconnected
from the network, powered off, or restarting. The PC may also be
disconnected from the network.
Disabled
Indicates that the device is not currently controllable
Invalid
The PC is trying to access module of a given product type, which has been
swapped in the frame with a card of a different type.
For SNMP devices, if Status Polling is activated, the Navigation Status column will indicate
whether the device is active or inactive. this status is updated when starting Magellan CCS
Navigator, when switching to Control mode, and after a Refresh or RefreshAll action is
performed.
Platinum routers display the status comments of CCS devices.
If there are routers involved in your system, the status column may contain router
communication port status messages:
Table 7-15 Router Communication Port Status
Comment
Meaning
Inactive
Communications port is not connected
Initializing
Initializing communications port
Connecting
Connecting to device(s)
Active
Communications port is connected and active
Reconnecting
Communication was interrupted, trying to reconnect to device(s)
Not Ready
Failed to connect to device(s)
Disconnecting
Terminating connection
Status indicators can also refer to a router device itself. Router status is listed in the
following table:
Table 7-16 Router Device Status
Comment
Meaning
Inactive
The device is not active
Initializing
The device is initializing
Downloading
The device is downloading
Active
The device is active and ready for commands
Busy
The device is busy processing commands
Terminating
The device is shutting down
123
124
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Table 7-16 Router Device Status
Comment
Meaning
Not Ready
The device is not ready or inaccessible
Needs Download
The device requires a configuration update to function properly
New
The device is newly discovered
Using the Monitor Column
The Monitor column shows the monitor icon for CCS devices that have their Monitor
Point properties set. It is available in both Build and Control modes. When you select a
resource in the Navigation pane that has a monitor point defined, the monitored video
signal of that resource will show in the Signal Monitor dialog box.
See Video Output Monitoring on page 287.
Using the Filter Column
The Filter column in the Navigation pane shows a check box for each CCS device that
has filtered alarms, in both Build and Control modes. Set the filtering of alarms for a CCS
device on the Diagnostics Filter tab or through the navigation shortcut menu.
When alarms are filtered, they are stored in the alarms log database. They will not show on
any other tabs of the diagnostic database. (See Setting Options for Offline Viewing of
Alarm Logs on page 253 to view the database.)
See Setting Alarm Filtering Options on page 249 for information on defining and using
alarm filtering options.
Using the Discovery Column
After you run a discovery and save its results in Build mode, the Discovery column shows a
short comment for each resource inside the Network, Discovery, and Temporary folders.
See the following related topics:

Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu on page 92

Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View on page 92
Using Navigation Shortcuts
A shortcut provides one-click access to a resource icon in the resource tree.
A Shortcut icon has a small boxed arrow in its bottom left corner. The name of the
shortcut, which shows to the right of the icon, is “Shortcut to {name of the resource}.”
Resources that have shortcuts will have a Shortcut tab in their Properties dialog box.
For more information see Viewing the Shortcut Tab on page 109.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
ProcedureFinding and Selecting an Object
To find and select an object in the Navigation pane from its shortcut icon, double-click
the shortcut icon.
The Navigation tool finds and highlights the icon of the target object in the resource tree.
If the object is in a closed folder, the folder will open to show the target object.
ProcedureCreating a Shortcut
To create a shortcut to an object in the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon for
the object to which you want to create a shortcut, click Create and select Shortcut. The
Navigation tool creates an icon for the object and places it at the bottom of the resource
tree.
ProcedureDeleting a Shortcut
Shortcuts can only be created or deleted by Administrator users of Magellan CCS Navigator
Servers in Build mode.
To delete a shortcut to a network resource, right-click the shortcut icon, and then select
Delete from the resulting context menu.
This removes the shortcut icon from your Navigation pane.
125
126
Chapter 7
Network View Construction
127
8
CCS Device Configuration
CCS Device Configuration Overview
Refer to Volume 6: Routing Configuration for Router-related configuration information.
If you have configuration access to a network of CCS-enabled devices, you can use the
Configuration tool to remotely configure those devices. You can also use it to access
component version information about CCS hardware and software modules, if your
CCS-enabled devices store such information. (Some older products do not store version
information.)
Each device has a Configuration dialog box with a series of tabs, on which you can
accomplish the following tasks:

Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for a CCS device.

List the contents of the file directory of a CCS device.

Delete or retrieve a file on the file system of a CCS device.

Transfer updated software to the remote CCS device.

Remotely restart the CCS device.

View product, hardware, and software version information.

Log all configuration activities and save them to a file.
Each CCS device has only one Configuration dialog box, but you can have multiple dialog
boxes open at the same time.
CCS Devices Requiring Special Configuration
Some CCS devices require special configuration. See these topics for specialized
configuration information:

NUCLEUS Configuration on page 161

NEO Frame Configuration on page 221

LCP and RCP Configuration on page 227

Introduction to Routing Components on page 1
128
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
Opening and Closing a Configuration Dialog Box
General users on Magellan CCS Navigator Clients must be assigned Configuration access to
a device to change its configuration settings. Only an Administrator on a Magellan CCS
Navigator Server can assign Configuration access. See Managing User Accounts on
page 32 for more information.
To open or show the Configuration dialog box for a CCS device, choose one of these
three methods:

Right-click the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane, and then select
Configuration from the resulting context menu.

Select the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane, and then click
Configuration on the Tools menu.

In Build mode, double-click the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane.

In a Graphical Navigation page, set an action (the effect component of a rule) to
open a Configuration dialog box. See Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’ Action
on page 73 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in for more information. You will
need a NAVIGATOR-SRV license to create this action.
To close a CCS device Configuration dialog box, choose one of these three methods:

Click Close in the upper right corner of the dialog box

Select the Configuration dialog box and then click Close on the Window menu

Right click in the Configuration dialog box and select Close from the menu that
appears
See Navigation Pane on page 44 for more information.
Using the Configuration Status Bar
The Status Bar stretches across the lower edge of the Configuration dialog box.
Table 8-1 Configuration Status Bar Columns
Column
Function
Status
Reports the status of configuration operations
Device ID
Matches device information to the specific device on the network
Access status
Indicates whether the user group has access to configure the CCS
device

Access Enabled means that the user group does have
configuration access to the device.

Access Disabled means that the user group lacks configuration
access.
Only an Administrator user can change the configuration access
to a device for a user group.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Configuring Network Settings for a CCS Device
Once you have discovered a device, you can adjust its network settings. This can be useful
when you are uploading software to that device, or so the network can recognize the
device.
Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device
When you change the IP address of a Platinum resource card, Magellan CCS Navigator will
immediately lose control of the Platinum frame. When Magellan CCS Navigator reconnects
to the new resource card’s IP address (which may require rediscovery of the frame), it will
again be able to control the Platinum frame. Rebooting the resource module is
recommended, but not required.
To communicate with a CCS device, the Navigation tool must know the IP address of the
device.
If a CCS device is already on the network and has a valid network IP address, then Magellan
CCS Navigator can dynamically discover the device. Then you can change the IP address on
the Network tab of the device’s Configuration dialog box.
However, if a CCS device is new and still has its factory-default network settings, you must
use the Magellan CCS Navigator PC to reset the network settings.
See the following topics for more information:

Summary of Discovery Tasks on page 76

Changing the Network Settings of a Device on page 129

Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device on page 130
Changing the Network Settings of a Device
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can run a discovery.
To change the network settings of a CCS device, complete these steps:
1
Use the Discovery tool to discover the CCS device at its default IP address—
192.168.100.250 for most CCS devices or 192.168.100.251 for a NEO control panel.
2
Open the Configuration dialog box for the discovered CCS device.
3
Select the Network tab, and then type in the new IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway for the device.
4
Click Write to transfer the new network settings to the device.
5
Restart the device to have the device implement the new settings.
Now you can connect the CCS device to the network and control it from any PC on the
same network.
See these topics:

Running a Full Discovery on page 85

Running a Partial Discovery on page 86

Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery on page 77
129
130
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration

Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device on page 84

Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device on page 130
Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device
If a CCS device still has its factory-default network settings, you must connect it to a PC to
change the default settings to valid network settings.
Table 8-2 Factory-Default Settings for CCS Devices
Device
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default
Gateway
NEO control panels
192.168.100.251
255.255.255.0
192.168.100.251
All other CCS devices
192.168.100.250
255.255.255.0
192.168.100.250
There are two methods for changing the factory default network settings of a device to
valid network settings. These topics describe those two methods:

Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of a CCS Device on page 130

Adding a Route to the PC Routing Table on page 132
Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of a CCS Device
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can run a discovery.
For a PC to communicate with a CCS device, you can temporarily set the IP address of the
PC to reside on the same subnet as the CCS device and have the same subnet mask.
To change the IP address of a PC, complete these steps:
1
Attach the new CCS device to the PC, using either an Ethernet hub or an Ethernet
crossover cable.
2
Write down the current IP address of the PC.
3
Change the IP address of the PC so that it is on the same subnet as the new CCS device.
Since the new CCS device has a default IP address of 192.168.100.250 (for most CCS
devices) or 192.168.100.251 (for NEO control panels), set the PC to reside on the same
subnet—for example, 192.168.100.2.
4
Set the subnet mask of the PC to 255.255.255.0, the same subnet mask
as the CCS device.
5
In Build mode, discover the new CCS device.
6
Open the device’s Configuration dialog box, and then click Read on the Network tab
to show the address.
7
To change the network settings for the device, select the text you want to change on the
Network tab and type in new text.
8
Click Write to transfer the new network address to the device.
9
Change the IP address of the PC back to its original value.
See the following topics for more information:

Summary of Discovery Tasks on page 76
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

Obtaining the IP Address of a PC on page 131

Setting the IP Address of a PC on page 131
Obtaining the IP Address of a PC
To determine the current IP address of a PC, complete these steps:
1
Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs), and click MS-DOS Command Prompt
to open an MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box on the PC.
2
Type the following command at the MS-DOS Command Prompt, and then press ENTER:
ipconfig
The PC shows its IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
3
Click Close to close the MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
See these topics:

Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device on page 130

Setting the IP Address of a PC on page 131
Setting the IP Address of a PC
To set the IP address of a PC, complete these steps:
1
Click Start, point to Settings, and click Network Connections.
2
Double-click the Network icon in the Network Connections dialog box.
3
Click Properties to open the LAN Properties dialog box.
Figure 8-1 LAN Properties Dialog Box
After changing the PC’s IP address, you must restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
4
Double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) in the This connection uses the following
items: list.
131
132
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog appears.
Figure 8-2 Portion of IP Address Tab
5
Select Use the following IP Address, and type new information in the IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway boxes.
6
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties box, and then click OK to
each of the dialog boxes that were opened during the process.
Adding a Route to the PC Routing Table
On a TCP/IP network, each computer has a routing table, composed of entries called routes.
Each route tells the computer where to forward TCP/IP packets on the network. You may
need to create a temporary route for the CCS device on the PC.
To add or delete a route to the PC routing table, you must have Administrator privileges.
To add a temporary route for the new CCS device to the PC routing table, complete these
steps:
1
Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs), and click MS-DOS Command Prompt
to open an MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box on the PC.
2
Type the following command at the prompt and then press ENTER:
route add 192.168.100.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.24.6.50
The generic command for adding a route is as follows:
route add {temporary route address} mask {device subnet
mask} {PC IP address}
The number after the word add is the new CCS device network address. The number after
the word mask is the default subnet mask of the device. The new CCS device network
address always ends in a 0 (zero).
The last IP address, 172.24.6.50 in this example, is the IP address of the PC.
This command adds a route to the routing table of the PC. The PC can now access the CCS
device, even though it is on a different subnet.
3
To verify that the new route has been added to the routing table, ping the CCS device from
the PC.
Referring to the table below, type the appropriate command at a MS-DOS command
prompt, and then press ENTER. A reply means the CCS device is now accessible from the
PC.
Table 8-3 Ping Commands for CCS Devices and NEO Control Panels
Device Type
Ping Command
For NEO control panels
ping 192.168.100.251
For all other CCS Devices
ping 192.168.100.250
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
4
Change the network settings of the CCS device to valid network settings.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can run a discovery.
You should now be able to discover the new CCS device.
5
Now you must remove the temporary route for the CCS device from the PC routing table.
Open an MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
6
At the prompt, type the following command, and then press ENTER:
route delete 192.168.100.0
In generic form, this command is:
route delete {temporary route address}
7
Click Close to close the MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
See Changing the Network Settings of a Device on page 129.
Changing the PC Network Settings
The network settings of the PC may need be changed so that they match those of a device
to correct a failed upgrade procedure. If you need to change the settings for such a
procedure, you will need to change it back again later.
You will probably require administrator privileges on your PC to change the IP address.
To change the IP address of the PC:
1
Click Start > Settings and then click Control Panel.
The Control Panel dialog box appears.
2
Double-click Network Connections, and then double-click Local Area Connection to
show the Local Area Connection dialog box.
3
Select the General tab, and then select Properties.
The Local Area Connection dialog box appears.
4
On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties...,
ensuring you are working on the correct Ethernet adapter for the CCS network.
The IP Address of the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties box appears.
The figure below shows the portion of the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties box where
you enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway of the resource module.
Figure 8-3 Portion of IP Address Box
5
If you are returning the Network settings to their original condition, and Obtain an IP
address automatically was selected, reselect it. Otherwise, select Use the following
133
134
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
IP address, and in the IP address box, type the original IP address, subnet mask and
gateway address.
OR
If you are changing the network settings to match a device on which the upgrade failed,
complete the following steps.
a
Note whether Obtain an IP address automatically is selected.
You may need to re-select this option later when you revert back to the original PC IP
address.
b
Select Use the following IP address, and in the IP address box, type a new
computer IP address to match the first three octets of the IP address of the resource
module, and then add a different fourth octet.
(For example, if the device’s IP address is 192.168.100.70, you could type
192.168.100.181).
c
In the Subnet Mask field, type: 255.255.255.0
d
Enter the same default gateway as the one on the device, or leave it blank.
6
Click OK to close the TCP/IP Properties box, and then close the two Local Area
Connection boxes.
7
On older versions of Windows, you may need to restart the computer.
Reading the Network Configuration from a Device
To read the network configuration of a CCS device when you have set the IP address
manually or determined the address from a discovery, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the resource icon for the device, and then select Configuration from the
resulting shortcut menu.
The Network tab shows by default.
2
Click Read.
The Configuration tool will retrieve the network information from the device.
If you have not previously configured the Configuration tool to remember Telnet login
information, a Telnet Login box will ask for the Telnet user name and password for the
CCS device.
3
The Telnet login box has a Remember Telnet login check box. Select the check box to
enable the remember feature, or clear the box to disable it.
The Configuration tool responds by filling in any additional address information that it
reads from the CCS device.
Only one person at a time can connect to a CCS device through Telnet. The default Telnet
user name is leitch and the password is LeitchAdmin. The password is case-sensitive, so type
carefully.
4
The Configuration tool reports its “read” activity to the Log tab. You can save the log to a
*.txt file.
5
When you are finished with the Configuration dialog box, click Close.
See Logging Configuration Activity on page 154.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Writing Network Information to a CCS Device
To write the network configuration of a CCS device, when you have set its IP address
manually or determined the address through a discovery, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the resource icon for the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the
resulting shortcut menu.
The Network tab shows by default.
2
Click Read to show the current network settings.
3
If you want to change these settings, select the text in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway boxes and type in new numbers.
4
The Ethernet (MAC) Address of the server is a read-only field. Skip this box.
5
Select the Reboot device and update the Navigation tree after writing Network
settings check box.
For best results, restart a CCS device after changing its network settings.
6
Click Write.
If you have not previously configured the Configuration tool to remember Telnet login
information, a Telnet Login box will ask you to type in the Telnet user name and password
for the CCS device.
Only one person can connect to a CCS device through Telnet at a time.
The default Telnet user name is leitch and the default password is LeitchAdmin. The
password is case-sensitive, so type carefully.
7
Type in the user name and password for the device, select the check box to enable the
Configuration tool to “remember” the Telnet login information of the device for future
logins, and then select OK.
8
When a Network Configuration query box asks you to confirm that you want to write the
new network settings to the CCS device, click Yes.
9
If the Configuration tool succeeds in writing the new settings to the CCS device, a
Network Configuration Information box will appear, confirming the transfer.
Click OK to close the Network Configuration Information box.
10 The write operation will require from 10 to 20 seconds. The Configuration tool will then
show a box confirming the write activity and then report this activity to the Log tab.
You can save the information on the Log tab to a *.txt file.
11 When you are finished with the Configuration dialog box, click Close.
See Saving a Configuration Log to a File on page 155.
Upgrading
Software
The Software Upgrade tool allows you to select one or more devices of the same type (X75,
X75-RCP, NEO, NEO LCP/RCP, NUCLEUS, 6800+, etc.) to be upgraded in parallel using the
transferred software package. It automates the backup and upgrade process to run in the
background, and includes event and error logging.
Devices you cannot upgrade using this procedure include the following:
135
136
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration

Older CCS devices, such as DPS-575,must be upgraded using the File Transfer tab. See
Using the Configuration Dialog Box’s File Transfer Tab on page 143.

Imagine Communications Multiviewer systems must be upgraded using Layout
Designer. See Starting Non-Magellan CCS Navigator Applications from the
Navigation Pane on page 107.
You can upgrade one device or multiple devices of the same type receiving the same
upgrade package (ZIP file).
1
From the Tools menu, select Software Upgrade.
The Software Upgrade dialog box appears, or if it is already open, it is brought to the
foreground.
Select a row and
click here to delete
that row.
Figure 8-4. Software Upgrade Dialog Box
2
On the New Transfer tab, click Add.
The Device Selection dialog appears.
3
Click on a device to upgrade, and then click Apply.
You can select other devices of the same type to receive the same upgrade package,
clicking Apply after each device.
The system will not prevent you from adding items that are not of the same device type in
this phase of the upgrade procedure. However, when you submit the file transfer task (in
step 12), if the upgrade package does not apply to all selected items, an error message will
be displayed and the transfer will not continue.
4
Click OK to close the Add Device dialog box.
The selected devices appear in the table on the New Transfer tab of the Software
Upgrade dialog box. A single row appears for each IP address to receive the upgrade.
If you have multiple 6800+ modules that are at the same IP address (in the same 6800+
frame), all modules at that IP address will appear on the same line.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Normally, 6800+ modules can only upgrade one device per IP address during a single
transfer task (i.e., one module per frame). Some packages may state they can upgrade
multiple devices per IP address during a single transfer task. This feature is known as
“parallel upgrade”. To fully support parallel upgrade, your 6800+ETH module must be
version 4.5 or higher. ICE6800+ modules do not support parallel upgrade.
For each device in this table, you can highlight its position in the Tree View by clicking Find
Device. If multiple devices are selected for a single IP address, then this finds the
first-selected device.
You can check the software revision numbers, etc., by clicking Version Info.
5
For each device you intend to upgrade, click Device Options.
Figure 8-5 Device Options
If they are not already entered, add Telnet user name and password and FTP user name and
password.
6
Place a check beside Automatic Backup.
This creates a backup of the current software installed on the CCS device. The backup is
saved to the file name and location stated unless you click Browse to change.
Automatic Backup is not available for 6800+ devices other than the ICE6800+.
7
Click OK to close the Software Upgrade Device Options dialog box.
8
Click Options.
Figure 8-6 Software Upgrade Options
137
138
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
The software options apply to all transfers, not just the specific device type currently being
upgraded. these options are described in Table 8-4.
Table 8-4 Software Upgrade Options
9
Option
Description
Warn if the upgrade package
does not have an XML script
Many firmware upgrades will fail if there is no XML
file in the ZIP package. Unselect this option to disable
warnings.
Transfer files even if file version is
same or older than the version on
the server
When this option is not checked, you can’t
downgrade your module.
Number of devices to
simultaneously upgrade
Choose a number between 1 and 10 (the default is
5). This determines the number of IP addresses that
are upgraded per batch. If the network load is too
high, choose a lower number.
On the New Transfer tab, click Browse.
A standard Windows File Selection dialog appears.
10 Choose the upgrade ZIP file on a local or network drive.
The selected file’s path name is displayed in the edit box to the left of the Browse button.
11 Click Package Info. This opens a dialog box containing version information and a list of
the components contained within the ZIP file.
The extraction process on the ZIP file is handled as part of the upgrade process. You do not
need to extract the files yourself.
12 Click Submit Transfer...
A dialog box appears, requesting confirmation that you want to proceed with the request. If
you have multiple devices selected, multiple transfer tasks are submitted—one per device.
The transfer now progresses. You may close the Software Upgrade dialog box, or
continue with other tasks.
Closing the Software Upgrade dialog box does not effect any of the transfer processes
that may be running in the background.
Or you can switch to the Progress tab to view the status of the transfers. See Using the
Software Upgrade Progress Tab on page 140 for more information.
If you try to log off or exit Magellan CCS Navigator while a transfer is underway, a
notification dialog box will alert you that processes are still active and will ask if you want to
terminate these processes.
13 Click on the Log tab and look at the Progress column to ensure that all files have correctly
updated. See Using the Log Tab on page 141 for more information.
The CCS device is automatically rebooted following an upgrade procedure.
In rare circumstances, the upgrade may be unsuccessful. For information about correcting
an unsuccessful upgrade procedure, see Correcting a Failed Upgrade Procedure on
page 142.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Stopping a Transfer Task
The Resume button is not available in this release. Its functionality will be implemented in
a future release.
To stop a transfer task, select the task from the grid, and then click Stop. If the selected
task is currently executing, it is placed into a an Aborted state. If the task has not yet
started, it is placed into a “Waiting to Resume” state. A confirmation dialog box appears to
confirm that you want to stop as aborting the task will put the module into an inconsistent
state the next time it is rebooted.
Upgrading a NEO SuiteView Using the Wizard
If you are upgrading your firmware from version 1.x to version 2.x or later, during the
upgrade you will need to set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode. Instructions
about how and when to do this are provided in your NEO SuiteView documentation.
Using the Software Upgrade tool, you can upgrade the entire NEO SuiteView frame
including all modules. Because of the extensive nature of this upgrade, it can take
considerably longer than other upgrades—minutes rather than seconds. Ensure that you
have sufficient time to complete the upgrade.
You will need to be able to physically access your NEO SuiteView frame to complete the
upgrade process.
Preparing your NEO SuiteView System for a Firmware Upgrade
To upgrade a NEO SuiteView, follow this procedure:
1
Backup all your layouts stored on the NSV-OUT.
If you do not backup customized layouts they will be lost forever, because the upgrade
utility performs a factory recall on the system. See your NEO SuiteView Installation and
Operation Manual for more information.
2
If you have an audio module installed in the slot directly below the NSV Output Module on
the NEO SuiteView frame that you are presently attempting to upgrade, remove the audio
module from the frame before proceeding.
Failure to remove this audio module will cause the upgrade to fail.
3
In CCS Magellan CCS Navigator, choose Tools > Software Upgrade from the main menu.
The Software Upgrade tool appears.
4
Click Add and select the NSV-OUT module.
5
Click Browse... and select the software upgrade package (ZIP file).
If the upgrade package shows that you are upgrading from firmware version 1.x to version
2.x or later, you will need to set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode. For more
information, see Setting the NSV-OUT Module to Fail-Safe Loader Mode on page 140.
If the upgrade package shows that you are upgrading from a firmware version later than
2.x, proceed to Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade Wizard on page 140.
139
140
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
Setting the NSV-OUT Module to Fail-Safe Loader Mode
If you are upgrading from firmware version 1.x to version 2.x or later, you will need to set
your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode.
To set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode, follow these steps:
1
Remove the NSV-OUT module from the NEO frame.
2
Press the NAV switch down while simultaneously pressing both the Escape and Enter
buttons.
3
While still pressing the buttons and the Nav switch, reinsert the module into the frame and
hold for approximately three seconds until the display on the module reads Offline-H (or
Offline-L) Upload Required.
4
Now, proceed follow the instructions contained in Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade
Wizard on page 140.
Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade Wizard
After you have either set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe mode, or determined that you
do not need to (because your current firmware version is 2.x or later) you can run the
Upgrade Wizard.
To run the Upgrade Wizard, click Submit Transfer.
The NEO SuiteView Upgrade wizard appears.
The wizard will take you through the steps of upgrading your NEO SuiteView and all the
modules in it. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
Modules will only be updated as required, and in the following order:

NSV-OUT module

NSV-IN module

NSV-AUD module(s)
To check the state of your upgrade during the process, you can switch between the wizard
and the Progress tab of the Software Upgrade tool to view your progress.
In the event that an upgrade does not complete correctly (perhaps because of a power
failure), modules can be upgraded individually. See your NEO SuiteView Installation and
Operation Manual for information on correcting a failed software upgrade.
Individual audio modules can have their firmware upgraded using the Software Upgrade
tool. See Upgrading Software on page 135 for more information.
If you backed up your layouts to a computer, you can now use Layout Manager to transfer
them back onto the NSV-OUT module. See your NEO SuiteView Installation and Operation
Manual for more information.
Using the Software Upgrade Progress Tab
The Resume button is always unavailable in this release. Its functionality will be
implemented in a future release.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Use the Progress tab to monitor the status of all the transfer requests in the queue. The
grid displays the status of each transfer task, with each row in the grid representing a single
device-package combination (transfer task).
Figure 8-7 Progress Tab of the Software Upgrade Dialog Box
The table below describes the buttons on the Progress tab.
Table 8-5 Progress Tab Buttons
Button
Description
Stop
Aborts a selected transfer task
Clear
Removes a selected transfer task from the grid; the task must be
in a Waiting to Resume, Aborted, Failed, or Completed state in
order for this button to be enabled
Stop All
Aborts all tasks in the queue; you will be asked to confirm
Clear All
Removes all stopped tasks from the queue; these tasks must be
either Waiting to Resume, Aborted, Failed, or Completed
Resume
Restarts a task that is in the “Waiting to Resume” state
Using the Log Tab
The Log tab displays a running log of all the transfer operations completed since
application startup. It contains information such as the package filename, versions being
transferred, start times, errors during transfer, and so on. The log text is selectable, allowing
you to copy and paste log information to another application.
Software Upgrade Options
Right click in the Software Upgrade dialog box to open an Options dialog box.
141
142
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
Figure 8-8 Software Upgrade Options Dialog Box
Table 8-6 Software Upgrade Options
Option
Result
Warn if upgrade package
does not have an XML script
File transfer is not supported without an XML
script, so this will warn you before aborting.
Transfer files even if file
version is same or older than
the version on the server
When this is checked, you can potentially upgrade
the software to an older revision. However, this
may be useful for returning to your backed up
version.
Number of devices to
simultaneously upgrade
Limits the number of files that can be added to the
table on the New Transfer tab to the number in the
dialog box, which you can change.
Correcting a Failed Upgrade Procedure
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server install can perform this
procedure.
A firmware upgrade may fail in the event of a network interruption or power failure. If one
of these events occurs, you will be able to ping the device, but Magellan CCS Navigator will
not be able to discover it.
See the documentation for the specific CCS device whose upgrade has failed for
information on fail-safe mode, and if there are instructions for putting the device into
fail-safe mode, follow them.
After a failed upgrade, some CCS devices will automatically go into a fail-safe mode where
new software can be loaded but other functions are not enabled. If an upgrade fails,
remove and then reapply power to the CCS device. You can then try the upgrade procedure
again.
When you are performing the fail-safe upgrading procedure, check the readme file to
confirm which files are needed. Use care to ensure that you transfer the correct files to the
intended device.
1
Ensure that the CCS device is in fail-safe mode.
2
Change the network addresses on your Magellan CCS Navigator PC to match the default
network addresses.
3
In Magellan CCS Navigator’s Build mode, drag or copy and paste the device’s icon from the
Catalog folder to the Network or Discovery folder.
4
Right click on the device icon and then select Properties.
Do not make changes in the third field (located above and to the right of the Set Default
button).
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
5
On the Device tab of the Navigation Properties box, click Set Default, and then click
Yes.
6
Follow the software upgrade procedure for the device as laid out in Upgrading
Software on page 135.
7
Return the upgraded device to its normal operating mode, including returning the fail-safe
and Default IP switches to their up position. For information on doing this, please refer to
the device’s installation and operation manual.
8
Return the PC network settings to their original states. See Changing the PC Network
Settings on page 133.
Using the Configuration Dialog Box’s File Transfer Tab
Some older devices, such as DPS-575, may not be able to use the Software Upgrade tool.
To upgrade the software on these devices, use the File Transfer tab of the Configuration
dialog box.
When using the File Transfer tab, take care to ensure that files are properly downloaded.
The File Transfer tab also appears on 6800+, NEO, NEO LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U, X75,
and X75-RCP devices. On these devices, you should do routine file updates using the
Software Upgrade tool. See Upgrading Software on page 135.
Before youtransfer files using the File Transfer tab of a device’s Configuration dialog box,
you should download and unzip the most recent appropriate files from our website. Save
the unzipped files in the computer that has Magellan CCS Navigator installed.
For a successful file transfer to take place, the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway on the
CCS device and PC should match. See the following topics for information on setting these
numbers:

Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device on page 129

Setting the IP Address of a PC on page 131
You should always back up the files to be replaced. This is included in the updating
procedure.
Always restart a CCS device after transferring files.
Backing Up Files From a CCS Device
Backing up files can not be done on 6800+ devices except for the ICE6800+.
Before replacing a file on a CCS device, copy the old file back to the PC—if possible—before deleting
the old file from the CCS device. Transfer the new file to the device, and then refresh the device.
Always restart a CCS device after replacing files on it.
1
Right-click the CCS device icon, and then select Configuration from the resulting shortcut
menu.
2
Select the File Transfer tab.
143
144
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
3
Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and select the
directory of the file you want to replace. The list of directories differs from device to device.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box is blank, indicating that this is the root
directory of the remote device.
4
Click List Files.
The Configuration tool lists the files residing in the remote directory in the List of files in
this directory box.
After replacing files, you may need to re-discover some CCS devices so that they appear in
your Discovery folder.
To see if this applies to your CCS device, please refer to the device's user manual, or the
instructions in the ZIP package for transfer. Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS
Navigator Server can run a discovery.
An FTP Login box may ask you to enter the FTP user name and password
for the CCS device.
5
Select a file to update from the List of files in this directory box, and then click Get File.
This feature retrieves the file from the remote directory and saves it to the PC. You can
select and retrieve only one file at a time.
Some products do not support the “Get File” feature.
6
On the PC, rename the transferred file, so that the device name and out-of-date status are
clear.
To get another file, repeat steps 4-6. You can get only one file at a time.
Transferring Files With the File Transfer Tab
6800+, NEO, NEO LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U, X75, and X75-RCP devices should be
upgraded using the Software Upgrade tool. See Upgrading Software on page 135.
Using the File Transfer tab of the Configuration dialog box, you can transfer individual
files to a CCS device.
Before you transfer firmware or software on a CCS device, you should back up the old files.
See Backing Up Files From a CCS Device on page 143.
1
If you are in the Configuration dialog box of either a master NEO 3901RES-E Resource
Module installed in a 3RU frame or a FR-3903 3RU frame itself, you can choose to update
both master and slave redundant resource modules simultaneously.

Select the “Transfer” or “Reboot” applies to master and slave check box at the
bottom of the File Transfer tab if you want changes made to the master resource
module to be transferred automatically to the redundant slave module.

If you later reboot the master resource module, the slave module will also reboot
automatically.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

Clear the check box if you want to transfer information to the slave resource module at
a different time, or if you do not want to transfer files or reboot the slave at the same
time as the master module.
This check box is only available for master 3901RES-E resource modules installed in a
NEO FR-3903 or FR3923 3RU frame. For more information about NEO 3901RES-E
resource module redundancy, see “Appendix E” in your NEO FR-3901 and FR-3903
Mounting Frames Installation and Operation Manual.
2
Click Add....
3
In the Add files for transfer to device box, click Browse... or type in the path to the file
to file for transfer.
4
Select the file, and then click OK.
5
Select the Reboot device after transferring files check box to enable the software to
restart the CCS device so that the device loads the new file(s).
6
Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and then select a
directory from the list options.
Components of this list are device-specific, so refer to the instructions for the CCS device to
determine which directory to choose for this transfer.
7
Click Perform Transfer.
Once the file transfer begins, the Configuration status bar shows the index and name of
the transferring file, and a progress bar indicates the percentage completion of the file
transfer.
If the Configuration tool cannot connect to the CCS device, an error box appears, the
transfer task aborts and the Configuration tool reports errors to the Log tab. You can save
the contents of the Log tab to a *.txt file.
8
After the file transfer finishes, wait 30 seconds for the CCS device to reboot.
9
Click Close on the Configuration dialog box.
The transfer process is complete.
See the following topics for more information:

Saving a Configuration Log to a File on page 155

‘Remembering’ FTP Information on page 157
Correcting a Failed Upgrading Procedure
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server install can perform this
procedure.
Firmware upgrades may fail in the event of network interruptions, power failures, or if too
much data is uploaded to the CCS device. Often, uploads of too much data can occur for
one of the following reasons:

Too many files were sent to the resource module.

The wrong files were sent to the resource module.

The upgrade .zip file was mistakenly sent to the module.
If one of these events occurs, you will be able to ping the device, but Magellan CCS
Navigator will not be able to discover it.
145
146
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
If your device has a fail-safe mode (for example, if it is a NEO frame), you can rectify the
problem by re-installing the firmware while in this mode. You will need an Ethernet
crossover cable (not an Ethernet straight-through cable) for the fail-safe procedure. This
crossover cable must be connected directly to the affected resource module you are
working on.
When you are performing the fail-safe upgrading procedure, check the readme file to
confirm which files are needed. Use care to ensure that you transfer the correct files to the
intended device.
1
Refer to your CCS device’s documentation for instructions on how to place the device in fail
safe mode. Follow those instructions.
2
Change the network addresses on your Magellan CCS Navigator PC to match the default
network addresses.
See Changing the PC Network Settings on page 133.
3
rag or copy and paste the device’s icon from the Catalog folder to the Network or
Discovery folder.
4
Right click on the device icon and then select Properties.
Do not make changes in the third field (located above and to the right of the Set Default
button).
5
On the Device tab of the Navigation Properties box, click Set Default, and then
click Yes.
6
If the Device ID field starts with IP, in the last field, enter the slot number of the module
and then close the dialog box. If the Device ID field starts with EP, set the last number of
the third field to the slot number of the module and then close the dialog box.
7
Double click the device icon that you want to upgrade.
The Configuration... dialog box appears. On the Select the device directory to transfer
to: field of the File Transfer tab, select the directory of the file you want to update. The list
of directories differs from device to device.

For NEO modules, the /Resource/boot directory appears.

For 6800+ modules, you will see a /frameX/slotY directory, where X refers to the
number of the frame with respect to the frame containing an ICE6800+ or
6800+ETH module, and Y refers to the slot number in that frame.
8
Click Add, and in the Add files for transfer to device box, browse and select the boot
folder from the location where you saved the unzipped file.
9
Select the file and then click OK.
10 Select Reboot devices after transferring files.
11 Click Perform Transfer and then click Yes.
This may take several minutes.
12 Wait for the message Reboot command was issued in the status bar.
13 Wait 30 seconds, and then close the Configuration... box.
The CCS device has now been upgraded.
14 Return the device to its normal operating mode. For information on doing this, please refer
to the CCS device’s installation and operation manual.
15 Return the PC network settings to their original states. See Changing the PC Network
Settings on page 133.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Listing the Files Installed on a CCS Device
To list the files installed on a CCS device on your Magellan CCS Navigator screen, complete
these steps:
1
Right-click resource icon for the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the
resulting shortcut menu.
2
Select the File Transfer tab.
3
Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and then select one
of the directory options. The list of directory names differs from device to device.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box may be blank. Leaving a box blank means
that this is the root directory of the remote device.
4
Click List Files.
The Configuration tool shows the list of files currently in the specified remote directory in
the List of files in this directory box.
If you have not previously instructed the Configuration tool to “remember” FTP login
information, an FTP Login box may ask you to enter the FTP user name and password for
the CCS device.
5
If you want to look at the list of files in another directory, click Clear List to clear the current
list of files and then repeat Step 3, choosing another directory.
6
Click Close.
See ‘Remembering’ FTP Information on page 157.
Copying a File from a CCS Device
This feature is not available for 6800+ devices.
To copy files from a CCS device to Magellan CCS Navigator, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the resource icon of the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the
resulting context menu.
2
Select the File Transfer tab.
To safely update a file on a CCS device, first create a backup of the old file by copying it
back to Magellan CCS Navigator —if possible—before deleting the out-dated file from the
CCS device. (Some NEO resource modules and processing modules do not support this “Get
File” feature.) Then transfer the replacement file to the device and refresh the device.
3
Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and then select one
of the directory options in the list box.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box may be blank, indicating that it is the root
directory of the remote device.
4
Click List Files.
The Configuration tool lists files currently in the specified remote directory in the List of
files in this directory box.
An FTP Login box may show, asking you to enter the FTP user name and password
for the CCS device.
147
148
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
5
Select one file in the List of files in this directory box, and then click Get File to retrieve
the file from the remote directory and save it to the local directory.
You can select and retrieve only one file at a time.
6
Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to back up files from other directories.
7
When you are finished, click Close.
See ‘Remembering’ FTP Information on page 157.
Deleting a File from a CCS Device
This feature is not available for 6800+ devices.
To delete a file from a CCS device, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the resource icon for the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the
resulting context menu.
2
Select the File Transfer tab.
To safely update a file on a CCS device, first create a backup of the old file by copying it
back to Magellan CCS Navigator —if possible—before deleting the out-dated file from the
CCS device. (Some NEO resource modules and processing modules do not support the “Get
File” feature.) Then transfer the replacement file to the device and refresh the device. See
Copying a File from a CCS Device on page 147.
3
In the Select the device directory to transfer to box, click the down arrow to select one
of the directory options in the list box.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box is blank. This is the root directory of the
remote device.
4
Click List Files.
The Configuration tool lists the files in the remote directory in the List of files in this
directory box.
An FTP Login box may advise you to enter the FTP user name and password for the
CCS device. (See ‘Remembering’ FTP Information on page 157.)
5
Select a file in the List of files in this directory box, and then click Delete File.
You can only delete one file at a time.
6
Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to delete additional files.
7
When you are finished deleting files, click Close.
Restarting a CCS Device from the PC
To restart a CCS device from the PC, complete these steps:
1
Open the CCS device’s Configuration dialog box.
The Network tab of the Configuration dialog box shows by default. (See Changing the
Network Settings of a Device on page 129.)
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
2
Click Reboot Device.
3
If the Telnet Login box shows, type in the Telnet user name and password, select the
Remember Telnet check box, and then click OK. (See ‘Remembering’ Telnet
Information on page 157.)
Selecting the Remember Telnet check box enables the “remember” feature for future logins
to this device.
4
The device will take from 10 to 20 seconds to restart. Then the Configuration tool will
show a box confirming the restart.
The Configuration tool reports the restart on the Log tab.
You can save the information on the Log tab to a text file. See Saving a Configuration
Log to a File on page 155.)
5
Click Close.
Setting Device Options
Some devices may have a Device tab in their Configuration dialog box. The options in
the Device tab are outlined in the table below.
Table 8-7 Configuration Dialog Box’s Device Tab Options
Option
Function
Mute Keep Alive
When unselected (the default setting), configures the device
to send Keep Alive messages; these messages are used to
detect if a device gets disconnected from the network
Custom Name
If you enter a name here, when an Administrator on a
Magellan CCS Navigator Server subsequently runs the
discovery tool, the device will be discovered with this name
Mute Device
When set to No (the default setting), configures the device to
send notification of parameter value changes and alarms
Report Alarms with Priority
Greater Than or Equal To
Determines alarm filtering (whether alarms are displayed
when triggered) for the device, so as to not report alarms
unless their priority meets or exceeds a pre-defined level
License Key
Stores a license key on the device, which enables optional
device features

Click Read to read any license key stored on the device

Click Validate to ensure that a license key is entered
correctly before writing it to the device

Click Write and Reboot to send a new license key on
the device and reboot it; the writing process includes a
validation step to prevent you from writing an invalid
license key
Please contact sales to purchase optional licensed features on a product. License keys are
generated by Imagine Communications at the time an order is placed.
Please contact customer service to resolve any problems with license keys.
149
150
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
Setting SNMP Options
Devices that support SNMP will have an SNMP tab in the Configuration dialog box.
To configure Magellan CCS Navigator as an SNMP agent, see SNMP Agent Configuration
Using Magellan CCS Navigator on page 70.
To configure a device that supports SNMP, follow these instructions.
1
In the Configuration dialog box, click the SNMP tab.
2
Click the Read button.
The CCS network polls the SNMP device and retrieves its current settings. It fills in all the
fields on the SNMP tab of the Configuration dialog box with the settings that are on
the device.
Figure 8-9 SNMP Tab on device Configuration Dialog Box
In the top left portion of the dialog box are SNMP Agent settings.
Table 8-8 SNMP Agent Fields of SNMP Tab
Field
Function
Port Number
(Can be from 0 to 65535) The network port used by the SNMP
agent
Read Community
SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a “Get” operation
has to match this setting in the MIB browser in order to read
information from device)
Write Community
SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a “Set”
operation has to match this setting in a MIB browser in order to
write information to that device)
Enable Authentication
Traps
When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read or write
community doesn’t match between the SNMP agent and MIB
browser
Enable SNMP Agent
When checked, SNMP support is available; if not checked, SNMP
support is disabled
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Below the SNMP Agent settings are System settings. The information in these fields
describes the device that is currently selected in the Navigation pane. This is user-defined
information that, once provided by an administrator, is available on the device when it is
retrieved by a MIB browser.
Table 8-9 System Fields of SNMP Tab - MIB-2 System Information
Field
Explanation
Description
The default is “Harris SNMP Agent”
Location
The physical location of the device
Contact
The contact person for this device
Name
Name of the device
The Trap Destination IP Addresses field contains a list of IP addresses that will
receive SNMP traps. It is in the format IP Address:Port Address:SNMP version.
3
To add new Trap Destination IP Addresses, see Adding New Addresses for SNMP
Traps on page 151. To modify them, see Modifying an SNMP Trap Destination on
page 152.
The device must be rebooted before changes will take effect.
4
(Optional) If you want the device to reboot automatically when you send the new
configuration to it, place a check beside Reboot device after performing transfer.
5
Click Write to send the new configuration to the device.
6
If you did not place a check beside Reboot device after performing transfer in step
6, click Reboot now and your changes to the configuration will take effect.
Adding New Addresses for SNMP Traps
To add a new SNMP trap destination, follow this procedure:
1
Click Add beneath the Trap Destination IP Addresses field. The Add Trap
Destination dialog box appears.
Figure 8-10 Add Trap Destination Dialog Box
2
Choose the SNMP version that you would like to use for traps.
3
Choose the IP address of that trap destination.
4
Choose the port number. The default is 162, but an administrator can set this to any
number between 0 and 65535.
5
Click Apply. A new line is added in the Trap Destination IP Addresses field.
6
Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add more rows to the dialog box.
151
152
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
7
Click OK to return to the SNMP tab of the Configuration dialog box.
Modifying an SNMP Trap Destination
To modify a trap destination, follow this procedure:
1
In the Trap Destinations IP Addresses list, click on the item you would like to
modify.
2
Click the Modify button. The Modify Trap Destination dialog box appears.
Figure 8-11 Modify Trap Destination Dialog Box
3
Choose the SNMP version of the traps using the radio buttons at the top of the dialog box.
4
Enter the IP address of that trap destination in the IP Address field.
5
Enter the port number in the Port Number field.
The default value is 162.
6
Click Apply. The selected entry in the Trap Destination IP Addresses field is
updated.
7
Repeat steps 2 through 6 to further update the row.
8
Click OK to close the Modify Trap Destination dialog box.
Getting Version Information
You can retrieve version information from CCS devices that maintain version information
(Some older devices do not) and have valid IP addresses. This information, which displays on
the Version tab of the device’s Configuration dialog box, can help you determine
whether a device needs a hardware or software upgrade.
On some devices you can use a Refresh button to manually force a device to resend its
version information, if for example the device was powered off when the dialog box was
opened. This feature is not needed on most devices.
The Version tab contains a tree control with two columns—Item Name and Value. This
tree is very similar to the tree and folder structure of the Navigation pane. The Item Name
column contains three top-level folders—Product, Hardware, and Software—
representing the three components of the CCS device.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 8-12 Version Tab of Configuration Dialog Box
The top-level Product folder typically contains the following subfolders: Name,
Description, Product Family, and Interface Version.
Figure 8-13 Product Information Retrieved from a NEO Resource Module
The top-level Hardware folder contains sub-folders for hardware information on a specific
product. For example, a frame controller module may show sub-folders for Hardware
Version, Serial Number, and Mac Address.
Figure 8-14 NEO Resource Module Hardware Information
The top-level Software folder contains subfolders for information on software
components of a product. For example, a frame controller module may show sub-folders
for the vxWorks.lzs file version number, Version string, and Build Date.
153
154
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
Figure 8-15 Software Version Information from a NEO Resource Module
The Value column contains a short description for each final or leaf icon in the first column.
Logging Configuration Activity
The Configuration tool logs all configuration activity for a CCS device on Log tab of the
device’s Configuration dialog box.
Figure 8-16 Excerpt from a Configuration Log
Viewing a Configuration Log
To view the configuration log for a device, complete these steps:
1
Open the CCS device’s Configuration dialog box by right clicking on the device in the
tree view and selecting Configuration.
2
Select the Log tab.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Saving a Configuration Log to a File
To save a configuration log to a text file, complete these steps:
1
Right-click inside the Log tab of the Configuration dialog box, and then select Save Log
As... from the resulting context menu.
2
In the Save As box that appears, accept the default directory or select another directory
for the log file.
3
Type a name into the File Name box or accept the default name.
4
Click Save.
Clearing a Configuration Log
To clear a CCS device configuration log, right-click inside the Log tab of the its
Configuration dialog box and select Clear Log from the resulting shortcut menu.
Setting Configuration Options
To set Configuration options, complete these steps:
1
Click Configuration on the Options menu, or right-click in a Configuration dialog box
and then click Options....
Figure 8-17 Configuration Options Dialog Box
2
In the Configuration Options box, set the Timeouts settings for the Telnet and FTP
sections to no fewer than 5,000 milliseconds; however, you can increase this time setting.
Timeouts are time limits for the software’s attempts to connect to a CCS device via Telnet or
FTP. If the Configuration tool cannot connect within the time limit, it will report that
information.
Click OK to close the Configuration Options box.
155
156
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu
The configuration shortcut menu enables you to manage a number of configuration tasks.
Table 8-10 Configuration Shortcut Menu Commands
Command
Function
Reference
Find Device
Finds the resource icon associated with a
CCS device’s Configuration dialog box in
the Navigation pane and highlights it
Finding the Resource
Icon for a CCS Device on
page 156
Default Size
Returns the Configuration dialog box to its
default size
Returning a
Configuration Dialog
Box to its Default Size on
page 156
Remember
Telnet
Toggle control that instructs the
Configuration tool to remember the Telnet
login information for a device
‘Remembering’ Telnet
Information on page 157
Remember
FTP
Toggle control that instructs the
Configuration tool to remember the FTP
login information for a device
‘Remembering’ FTP
Information on page 157
Save Log As... Saves the text on the Log tab as a *.txt file
Saving a Configuration
Log to a File on page 155
Clear Log
Clears the text on the Log tab
Clearing a Configuration
Log on page 155
Options...
Opens the Configuration Options box
Setting Configuration
Options on page 155
Help
Shows the Online Help contents page
Getting Help With
Magellan CCS
Navigator on page 320
User Manual
Shows the user manual for the selected CCS
device
Showing the User
Manual for a CCS
Device on page 157
Close
Closes the Configuration dialog box
Opening and Closing a
Configuration Dialog
Box on page 128
Finding the Resource Icon for a CCS Device
To find the resource icon of a CCS device in the resource tree, right-click inside the CCS
device’s Configuration dialog box, and then select Find Device from the resulting
shortcut menu. The Navigation tool will highlight the icon in the resource tree.
Returning a Configuration Dialog Box to its Default Size
To return a CCS device’s Configuration dialog box to its default size, right-click inside the
Configuration dialog box, and then select Default Size from the resulting shortcut menu.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
‘Remembering’ Telnet Information
Only one person can be connected to a CCS device through Telnet at once.
To set the Configuration tool to remember the Telnet information (user name and
password) for a device, right-click inside the Configuration dialog box, and then select
Remember Telnet from the resulting shortcut menu. The Configuration tool remembers
the user name and password for the specified CCS device, not for all CCS devices.
The default Telnet user name is leitch, and the default password is LeitchAdmin. The
password is case-sensitive.
‘Remembering’ FTP Information
Only four people can use FTP simultaneously to connect to the same CCS device.
To set the Configuration tool so that it remembers the FTP information (user name and
password) for a device, right-click inside the Configuration dialog box, and then select
Remember FTP from the resulting shortcut menu. The Configuration tool remembers the
user name and password for the specified CCS device, but not for all CCS devices.
The default FTP user name is leitch, and the default password is LeitchAdmin. The password
is case-sensitive.
Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device
To show the user manual for a supported CCS device, right-click inside the CCS device’s
Configuration dialog box, and then select User Manual from the resulting shortcut
menu.
Adobe Acrobat Reader opens and shows the user manual for a device in Acrobat Reader.
You can search the manual for relevant information and print it out.
Using the Configuration Folder
For proper configuration of NEO frames and CCS control panels, you must create a
configuration file in the Configuration folder and then transfer the file to the device—in
addition to setting values in the device’s Configuration dialog box.
Resource icons that belong to a control panel configuration show their short name in the
Configuration folder. The short name matches what a control panel can show on its
display, to a maximum of 20 characters per device name.
If a default short name does not adequately identify a resource, you can change the name
in the Navigation Properties box—taking out spaces, abbreviating words, or including
the last four digits of an IP address.
All three names appear in the Navigation Properties box.
See also these topics:
157
158
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration

Setting Navigation Properties on page 103

Creating Configuration Hierarchies on page 158

Ordering Devices in a Configuration Hierarchy on page 159

Renaming Configurations on page 159
Getting Help with Configuration Hierarchies
To help you create valid device hierarchies in the Configuration folder, select the third Build
mode option on the General tab of the Navigation Options box. Enabling this option will
ensure that the application fully tests the validity of all drag-and-drop operations in the
Configuration folder.
Figure 8-18 Build Mode Option on General Tab of Navigation Options Box
See Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
Creating Configuration Hierarchies
The configuration of a NEO frame or CCS control panel requires the creation
of a configuration file in the Configuration folder and the transfer of that file to the
remote device— in addition to setting values in the device’s Configuration dialog box.
If you right-click an object in the Configuration folder, a context menu appears, with
Create as one of its menu options. The enabled Create submenu options are valid for both
the device and the folder it resides in.
For example, if you right-click a NEO frame in the Configuration folder, you can use the
resulting shortcut menu to create a Configuration for the NEO frame; but if you right-click
a non-NEO frame in the Configuration folder, the resulting shortcut menu does not have
options to create a configuration for that frame, since that frame does not support
configuration.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Ordering Devices in a Configuration Hierarchy
The resource icons representing CCS devices and configurations follow this hierarchy in the
Configuration folder:
Table 8-11 Icon Hierarchy in the Configuration Folder
Level
Top Level—Parent
CCS devices
Icon
Purpose
Represents
Configuration
Parents
Control panel icon
Gateway Icon
NEO Frame Icon
Middle Level
Configuration Node
Configuration Node Icon
Bottom Level
Configuration
Children
CCS devices contained or
controlled by the parent
CCS device
Renaming Configurations
If you try to edit the label of a CCS device or configuration in the Configuration folder, the
Navigation tool first will determine whether the proposed name already exists under the
same parent CCS device. If the proposed name exists, an error message appears,
the renaming operation aborts, and the name remains unchanged.
The Navigation tool automatically renames a CCS device icon when the same name exists
at the same level of the resource tree. The name assigned by the Navigation tool is either
“Copy of [Device Short Name]” or “Copy (x) of [Device Short Name].” You can rename
the configuration, provided the proposed new name also does not exist.
Resource icons that belong to a control panel configuration show their short name in the
Configuration folder. The short name matches what a control panel can show on its
display, a maximum of 20 characters per device name.
If a default short name does not adequately identify a resource, change the short name
in the Navigation Properties box—take out spaces, abbreviate words, or include the last
four digits of an IP address. All three names appear in the Navigation Properties box.
See the following topics for more information:

Deleting a Resource Icon on page 101

Setting Navigation Properties on page 103
159
160
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
161
9
NUCLEUS Configuration
NUCLEUS Configuration Overview
A NUCLEUS configuration defines:

The devices the NUCLEUS control panel monitors and controls

The functions of the 16 LCD buttons, four adjustment knobs, and four adjustment
buttons on the NUCLEUS control panel when it is controlling those devices, including
the positions of the navigation layers and the layout of devices and/or parameters on
the display

The destinations and sources accessible when controlling a routing system

The PIPs and sources when controlling a CENTRIO system

The organization of layers of menus when navigating buttons
All NUCLEUS control panels are sold with one or more options enabled. Some devices are
configured using Magellan CCS Navigator, and other devices are configured on the control
panel itself.
Devices Configured using Magellan CCS Navigator
following devices need to be configured using Magellan CCS Navigator:
Table 9-1 NUCLEUS Configurations Defined in Magellan CCS Navigator
Controlled Devices
Applicable
License
Configuration Details
Parameters and alarms on CCS devices,
including 6800+ modules in Ethernetconnected frames, CENTRIO modules and
PiPs, NEO modules, X50, X75, and X85
NUCLEUS-PROC
Adding Processing or SNMP Devices
to a NUCLEUS Configuration on
page 165.
Sources, Destinations, and crosspoints on a
routing system based on a Routing panel
NUCLEUS-RTR
Creating Routing Panels for a
NUCLEUS Configuration on page 171.
Parameters and alarms on SNMP devices
NUCLEUS-SNMP
Creating Routing Panels for a
NUCLEUS Configuration on page 171.
Makes the NUCLEUS-PROC and
NUCLEUS-RTR licenses work together to
switch the controlled processing device when
a router switch happens.
NUCLEUS-TRAX
Configuring Router TRAX for
NUCLEUS on page 202.
PIPs and Layouts on a CENTRIO multiviewer
(similar to router control)
NUCLEUS-MV
Adding CENTRIO Systems to a
NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164.
162
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
After creating a configuration for NUCLEUS using Magellan CCS Navigator, you can
transfer the configuration to the control panel and then control the connected devices. The
NUCLEUS control panel communicates in real time with compatible devices to set
parameters and crosspoints.
Devices Configured Using the Control Panel Interface
The following devices do not require configuration using Magellan CCS Navigator before
they can be controlled using NUCLEUS control panel:

IconLogo (NUCLEUS-LOGO license)

IconStation (NUCLEUS-IS license)

PredatorII and QVM6800+ (NUCLEUS-MV license)
These system-generated configurations are created automatically when the license is
enabled on the NUCLEUS control panel itself. See the Configuration and Operation Manual
for the license for information on setting NUCLEUS up to connect to and control these
devices.
When you use Magellan CCS Navigator to view the list of configurations on a NUCLEUS
control panel, these configurations will not appear on the list.
Activating NUCLEUS License Keys
A NUCLEUS license key allows you to access different types of device control. Before you
can activate your NUCLEUS license key, you must discover NUCLEUS and save the results of
your discovery in the Navigation pane.
To activate your NUCLEUS license key, follow this procedure:
1
Right-click the resource icon for the device in the Navigation dialog box, and then select
Configuration from the resulting context menu.
2
Select the Device tab.
3
In the License Key field, type your number string. A NUCLEUS license key contains 16
characters.
4
Click Write and Reboot to send a new license key on the device and reboot it.
The writing process includes a validation step to prevent you from writing an invalid license
key to the NUCLEUS control panel.
See Setting Device Options on page 149 for more information.
To activate the license key at the NUCLEUS panel itself, see your NUCLEUS Network Control
Panel Installation and Operation Manual.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel Using Magellan CCS Navigator
The general steps for configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel using Magellan CCS Navigator
include the following:
1
Discover the NUCLEUS control panel.
See CCS Device Discovery on page 75.
2
Add the NUCLEUS control panel to the Configuration folder.
See Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder on page 163.
3
Add items for control to the Configuration folder.
The folder you will add devices to will depend on the device to be controlled. See the
following topics:
4

Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164

Adding a Routing View to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164

Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 171
Create panels for devices that need them.
Devices that need panels include the following:

Routing panels
See Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard on page 171.

CENTRIO panels
See Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard on page 180.
5
Run the Configuration Wizard, and assign devices, menus, and parameters to the control
panel’s buttons and knobs.
6
Transfer the configuration to the panel or save it to a USB device or network location for
backup.
See Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files on page 205 and Exporting a
NUCLEUS Configuration file to XML on page 208.
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder
NUCLEUS control panels can only be configured by an Administrator user of a Magellan
CCS Navigator Server.
To create a NUCLEUS configuration folder, follow these steps:
1
Discover the NUCLEUS control panel and save the results of the discovery. See CCS Device
Discovery on page 75.
2
In the Discovery folder of Magellan CCS Navigator’s Navigation view, select the NUCLEUS
control panel you want to configure and drag it to the Configuration folder.
3
Click on the + to open the child resources of the control panel.
Below the NUCLEUS control panel are three folders:
Router/Centrio Views, Devices, and Configurations. When your configuration is
complete, there will be one or more devices in the Devices folder, and at least one
configuration in the Configuration folder. There may also be routing panel configurations
in the Router/Centrio Views folder, if you have the NUCLEUS-TRAX and/or routers option.
163
164
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
You are now ready to add devices to your configuration.
Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration
With a NUCLEUS-MV license, you can add a CENTRIO System for control following the steps
here. Otherwise, with a NUCLEUS-PROC license you can add CENTRIO PIPs and modules for
processing control. See Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS
Configuration on page 165.
To add a CENTRIO system to a NUCLEUS Configuration folder, follow these steps:
1
Add the Routing view that is associated with your CENTRIO system to the Configuration >
NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views folder.
You can get the routing view associated with your CENTRIO system by discovering the
Platinum router (use the IP address of the PT-RES module) that the CENTRIO system is
housed in.
2
Copy a CENTRIO system node from the Discovery or Network folder to the
Configuration > NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views folder.
If you have not discovered a CENTRIO system, see Running a Discovery on page 85 for
details.
There is no limitation on the number of CENTRIO systems you can add, as long as they all
share the same router database.
3
Select, and then right-click the CENTRIO system icon, and select Create > CENTRIO Panel.
Routing view
CENTRIO system
CENTRIO panel
Figure 9-1 Selecting a CENTRIO System
The CENTRIO Panel Configuration wizard opens.
For information on using this wizard, see Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS
Configuration on page 180.
Adding a Routing View to a NUCLEUS Configuration
You can only have one routing view in the NUCLEUS Router/Centrio Views folder of the
Navigation pane. To switch to another routing view, first delete or copy and paste a
pre-existing routing view to a different location.
Do not make changes to the Routing View associated with a NUCLEUS panel while the
Configuration dialog box is open. This could make routing panels become invalid.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
To associate a Routing Control View with a NUCLEUS control panel, do one of the
following:

Drag and drop the Routing View onto a NUCLEUS control panel under the
Configuration > NUCLEUS folder. The Routing View icon appears under the Router/
Centrio Views sub-folder.

Copy the Routing View, right click on the NUCLEUS control panel in the Configuration
folder and select Paste from the shortcut menu.
Routing view
Routing panel (which can be
added to a Configuration)
Figure 9-2 Routers in NUCLEUS Folder of Navigation Pane
When your configuration is complete, there will be one or more Routing panels in the
Router/Centrio Views folder, and at least one configuration in the Configuration folder.
There may also be devices in the Devices folder, if you have the NUCLEUS-TRAX option.
For NUCLEUS configuration and control, router systems are divided into router sub-views
called routing panels. Each routing panel can be custom configured and then added to the
NUCLEUS configuration. Routing panels are similar to devices and virtual devices, with the
exception that they have no parameters to assign to panel controls.
Routing panels are created using the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. See Starting
the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard on page 171.
Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration
To add devices to your NUCLEUS configuration for processing control (for use with a
NUCLEUS-PROC or NUCLEUS-SNMP license), drag and drop devices into the Devices folder
of the NUCLEUS icon in the Configuration dialog box.
When you drag and drop a CENTRIO system into the Devices folder, the PIP sub-devices
are not dragged with it. To add PIPs, you must drag them specifically to the Devices folder.
A NUCLEUS control panel can control Virtual devices (see Creating Virtual Devices and
Assigning Favorites to Virtual Devices on page 166), 6800+, NEO, CENTRIO, and X75
devices from Magellan CCS Navigator’s Network folder.
Any NUCLEUS configurations that include DPS-475/575 synchronizers must be updated
every time you re-configure their associated EDGE-DPS575.
165
166
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
You can also add offline devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration for Processing Control. See
You must have the NUCLEUS-SNMP license key to assign SNMP traps to NUCLEUS
LCD buttons and control knobs. on page 166.
You must have the NUCLEUS-SNMP license key to assign SNMP traps to NUCLEUS LCD
buttons and control knobs.
Adding Off-Line Devices
You can add devices to the Virtual Device or Configuration folder while they are off-line
by copying and pasting them from the Catalog folder. This can be useful when devices are
unavailable due to being retasked for other purposes, if they are in a different network
(such as a mobile truck) at the time, etc.
If you add devices that are off-line, the specific devices must be defined before you can
control them using a NUCLEUS control panel. To add the Device ID information to a device
in a configuration that was off-line during creation of the configuration, follow these steps:
1
Discover the device that you actually wish to monitor/control (if it has not been discovered
already), and save the results of your discovery.
2
Right click on the device and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3
On the Device tab of the Properties dialog box, click Copy.
4
Right click on the identical device that has been copied from the Catalog folder, and
choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
5
On the Device tab, click Paste.
Parameters on an off-line device may not perfectly match those on the actual device. The
device catalog information stored in Magellan CCS Navigator may be older or newer than
that stored on the actual device. If the parameter lists do not match, some assigned
parameters may not be available in the configuration.
For best results, you should check your configuration with the actual device before
uploading it to your NUCLEUS control panel.
Creating Virtual Devices and Assigning Favorites to Virtual
Devices
The NUCLEUS control panel uses virtual devices to group parameters from up to ten X75,
NEO and 6800+ devices into a single addressable entity. You can then access the controls
for those devices by clicking a single button on the control panel. Devices do not have to be
from the same product line, nor do they need to share the same IP address. You can use the
same virtual device on multiple NUCLEUS control panels.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create and modify
virtual devices.
To create a virtual device, ensure that Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode, and then
follow these steps:
1
Do either of the following:

Right-click on the Virtual Devices folder in the Navigation pane and select
Create > Virtual Device from the shortcut menu.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

2
Drag the first stand-alone device you would like to include in your virtual device
from the Network, Discovery, or Catalog folder to the Virtual Device folder. A
new virtual device containing that stand-alone device appears in the Virtual
Device folder.
Right-click on the new virtual device and choose Rename from the shortcut menu, and
then type a name for the virtual device.
Figure 9-3 Navigation Pane With Virtual Devices
3
Drag up to ten NEO, 6800+ and X75 devices from the Network, Discovery, or Catalog
folder and drop them onto the newly created virtual device.
4
Right-click on a device in the virtual device and select Favorites….
The Favorites dialog box opens. The parameters that you select here are the parameters
that will be available to the control panel configuration.
This dialog box displays the parameters of the selected device.
167
168
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Configure appears for SNMP
devices only
Figure 9-4 Favorites Dialog for a Typical Device
If you have a NAVIGATOR-INT license, you can also configure favorites in the Parameter
pane. Changes made to device favorites in either place will be updated in both places. See
Volume 5 for more information.
5
Place a check mark beside each parameter you would like to appear in the virtual device’s
parameters list. By default, no parameters are selected.
The Alias field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational
language, your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry in this
field. If you switch the keyboard back to data entry in an alternate language, data
corruption could occur.
You can change the name by which a selected parameter appears by clicking in its field in
the Alias column. Use the Delete key to remove the default or old alias and type your new
parameter name.
By default, the control panel will display the alias. However, if you switch to “Leitch Name
Mode” in the NUCLEUS control panel’s parameter settings, the control panel will display the
default names of favorite parameters.
6
Repeat steps 4 -6 for other standalone devices included in the virtual device.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Configuring Favorites for an SNMP Device
For SNMP devices only, the Favorites dialog box has a Configure button. This button
allows you to add multiple Object ID (OID) root nodes to the favorites for this device. The
Parameters pane will display all Object IDs (OIDs) listed under these root SNMP nodes (in
case the SNMP-managed device provides access to other OIDs implemented in different
branches of the SNMP MIB).
1
In the Favorites dialog box, click Configure.
Figure 9-5 SNMP Device Configuration Dialog Box
2
Click MIB.
If the Object ID you want to include is not listed in the MIB tree, you need to add the MIB
that contains this definition before proceeding. Click the Load MIB button, as shown in
step 3.
3
In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to the specific Object (parameter) or Trap
(alarm).
SNMP devices from third-party manufacturers appear according to their own hierarchy. See
the documentation for that SNMP-enabled device for more information.
169
170
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Figure 9-6 SNMP MIB Browser in Magellan CCS Navigator
4
Click OK.
The ID is added to the table in the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box.
5
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box contains all the
OIDs that you would select as favorites for that SNMP device.
6
Click OK to close the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box, and then OK to close the
Favorites dialog box.
New variables appear in the Parameters tab of the Parameters pane, and new traps
appear in the Alarms tab of the Parameters pane.
Copying Favorites Between Virtual Devices
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create or edit Favorites
for a device.
You can copy all the favorites for all the devices in a virtual device when both virtual devices
contain the same modules (device types), and these modules are arranged in the same
order.
You can also copy the favorites list from one member of a virtual device to another identical
unit (for example, from one X75 to another).
To copy and paste control panel display favorites for a device or virtual device, follow these
steps:
1
In Build mode, right click a device or virtual device in the Virtual Device folder and select
Copy Favorites.
2
Right click on the second identical device or virtual device in the Virtual Device folder and
select Paste Favorites.
The parameter/alarm selection created previously will be replicated in the second
standalone or virtual device.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
If the device you have chosen to paste favorites to is unsuitable -- for example, it is a virtual
device in which the various component devices are not identical -- the Paste Favorites
option will not be available. However, you can copy and paste favorites between individual
component devices of different virtual devices.
Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration
To control a router with NUCLEUS, you need the NUCLEUS-RTR option. This option allows
NUCLEUS to control routers, including Platinum, Panacea and Integrator series routers. For
more information about purchasing routing features, contact your sales representative. If
your license key has not yet been added to the control panel, see Activating NUCLEUS
License Keys on page 162.
Magellan CCS Navigator uses Router Control Views to describe entire routing systems.
These files are created when routing systems are configured. (See Volume 6: Routing
Configuration for more information.) Router Control Views provide essential information
about available sources and destinations that are associated with the router system.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create a NUCLEUS
Router panel or NUCLEUS configuration.
After you have created your Router Control View, you must import it into Magellan CCS
Navigator. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration for more information.
When a router system is added to NUCLEUS, the source and destination names, categories
and indexes become available on the control panel. If salvos have been created for the
router system, they are also available on NUCLEUS. Only one Router System View can be
assigned to a NUCLEUS control panel at a time; however, many routing panels that are
derived simultaneously from this router system can be added to NUCLEUS.
Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard
The routing portion of a NUCLEUS configuration is created from a routing view using the
Routing Panel Configuration wizard. To start the wizard, follow these steps:
1
Right click on an existing Router View node under the Router/ Centrio Views folder of
the NUCLEUS device.
2
Select Create > Routing Panel from the menu that appears.
The Routing Panel Configuration wizard opens.
171
172
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Figure 9-7 Page 1 of the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard
3
Enter a descriptive name for your Routing panel. The name can be up to 10 characters long.
4
Choose the type of Routing panel you want to make.
Table 9-2 Routing Panel Types
Device Type
Description
Single Bus Device
Assign a source to a single pre-determined destination
X/Y Device
Select a single destination and then assign a source
Multi Bus Device
Select any number of destinations and then assign a
source; this panel type includes destination statuses
See your NUCLEUS Router Control Option Configuration and Operation Manual for
information on operating in these modes.
5
Choose a destination and source selection type from the following options.
Table 9-3 Destination/Source Selection Types
Option
Description
Discrete Port
Selection
Select this option if you want to identify the routing
panel destinations and sources by their logical names
Category/Index
Selection)
With category indexing, both a category (i.e., VTR, CAM,
MIC, etc.) and an index (i.e., 21, 2, 36, etc.) are required
to identify a device. The first click of a button selects the
category; subsequent clicks select the index.
This selection method allows many destinations and
sources to be accessed using few buttons.
There are four extra screens in the Routing Panel
Configuration wizard when you choose this option.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
6
Click Next to proceed to the Source screen.
See Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 173.
Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel
The Sources page appears after you have selected the type of Routing panel you will be
making in the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard. (See Starting the Routing Panel
Configuration Wizard on page 171.)
The choices you make on the Sources page determine the number and order of router
sources when using this Routing Panel Configuration on your NUCLEUS control panel. If
you place the most frequently used sources early in the list, they will be most easily
accessible.
The wizard can have
as few as three steps
or as many as seven,
depending on the
type of panel you
want to create.
Type partial text in
the Filter field to
limit the contents of
the Available column
to only the items that
start with the
characters you have
entered.
Figure 9-8 Selecting Sources in the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard
Items can either appear in the Available field or in the Selected field, but not in both. The
order of items in the Selected list is the order they will appear on the NUCLEUS control
panel. By default, all items appear in the Selected column in logical database order.
To move an item between the Selected and Available fields, first click on it to highlight it.
If you click a single item, and then click another item, the first item you clicked on is
un-highlighted. To highlight multiple items at the same time, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL
key on your keyboard.
With items highlighted, you can perform the following functions:

Click > to add highlighted items from the Available field to the Selected field. New
sources always appear at the bottom of the Selected list.

Click >> to move all visible sources from the Available field to the Selected field. If
you have applied filtering to the Available field, only those items that are visible will be
moved.

Click < to remove highlighted items from the Selected field.
173
174
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration

Click << to remove all items from the Selected field.

Click Up to move highlighted items up one position in the Selected field.

Click Down to move highlighted items down one position in the Selected field.

Click the A-Z button to place all items in alphanumeric order.

Click the Z-A button to place all items in reverse alphanumeric order.

Click Top to place highlighted items at the top of the list.

Click Bottom to place highlighted items at the bottom of the list.
To leave this screen, you have four options:

Click Next >> to move on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item
must appear in the Selected field for this option to be available.

Click << Back to return to the previous page in the wizard.

Click Close to exit the wizard without creating a panel.

Click Finish to select the defaults on all the following pages, close the wizard and
create a panel. At least one item must appear in the Selected field for this option to be
available.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Destinations
for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 174.
Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel
The Destinations page appears after you have defined the sources in the Routing Panel
Configuration wizard. (See Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on
page 173.)
The choices you make on the Destinations screen determine the number and order of
router destinations when using this Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel. If you
place the most frequently used destinations early in the list, they will be most easily
accessible.
The tools for filling out the Destinations screen are the same as those on the Sources
screen. See Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 173 for more
information.
If you are creating a Single Bus Routing panel, you will have a modified version of the
Destinations screen. Because in a Single Bus Routing panel you only have one pre-defined
destination, you can only select one destination on this screen. When you click the > button
to add a highlighted item from the Available field to the Selected field, the new
destination will replace any destination already in the Selected list.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to the next screen. You must
have at least one destination in the Selected Destinations field in order to proceed.
Depending on the type of Routing panel you are making, this may be the last screen of your
Configuration wizard. Or, you may proceed to one of the following:

Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus
Only) on page 175

Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) on page 175

Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 178
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus
Only)
The Destination Statuses page does not appear when you are creating an X/Y or Single
Bus routing panel.
The available destination statuses are the same as the destinations selected in the previous
screen. (See Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 174.)
When you select a destination for statusing, this means that the source(s) connected to that
destination will be listed on the NUCLEUS screen and LCD buttons.
The controls for this page are described in Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing
Panel on page 173.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to the next screen. See
Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) on page 175 or Selecting
Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 178.
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel
The Levels page appears after you have defined the Destinations (or Destination Statuses)
in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. (See Selecting Destinations for your
NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 174.) The choices you make on the Levels screen
determine the number and order of router levels when using this Routing panel on your
NUCLEUS control panel.
Defining less than the total number of levels for your panel can be a good way to avoid
doing the same breakaway take over and over, or to limit access for certain users of the
panel. Because NUCLEUS can hold up to 16 configurations containing any number of
Routing panels, you could, for example, create another panel that includes only the
excluded levels from this panel, or that includes all levels.
The tools for filling out the Levels screen are the same as those on the Sources screen. See
Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 173 for more information.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to the next screen. You must
have at least one destination in the Selected Destinations field in order to proceed.
Depending on the type of Routing panel you are making, this may be the last screen of the
wizard. Before you can use the Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel, you must
add it to a configuration using the Configuration tool, and then transfer that configuration
to the control panel. See Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 186.
If you are creating a Catalog/Index style of panel, the next screen will beSelecting
Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) on page 175.
Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only)
If you chose a Cat/Index mode for your Routing Panel Configuration file, the Destination
Categories page will follow one of these sections:

Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 174

Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus
Only) on page 175
175
176
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Categories are a navigational tool that help you find specific ports on a large router. When
using categories, devices are normally divided by type. You select the type of port you want
to use, and then you select the alphanumeric identifier, or index, for a specific port from
that subset.
The available categories and indexes are provided by the Router Control View. The default
router contains one destination category. You can relabel destinations and create multiple
categories. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration for more information.
The controls for this page are described in Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing
Panel on page 173.
At least one category must appear in the Selected field of this screen (it will not affect the
output if you are creating a Single Bus Routing panel) before you can proceed. When you
have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Destination Indexes
(Cat/Index mode only) on page 176.
Selecting Destination Indexes (Cat/Index mode only)
If you chose a Cat/Index mode for your Routing panel, the Destination Indexes page
follows the Destination Categories page. See Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/
Index mode only) on page 175 for more information.
Indexes are the characters assigned to a category. For example, you may have a category
called CAM, and within that you have four cameras with index labels 1, 2, 3, and 4. You
can have multiple levels of indexes, where your four cameras could be labeled 1A, 1B, 2A,
and 2B. In that case, in order to select the destination or source on the NUCLEUS panel, you
would click first CAM, and the NUCLEUS LCDs would refresh to offer you 1 and 2. You
would make your selection, and be presented with A and B, from which you would choose
the device you want.
For information on assigning indexes to destination devices, see Volume 6: Routing
Configuration.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The wizard can have
as few as three steps
or as many as seven,
depending on the
type of panel you
want to create.
Figure 9-9 Selecting Indexes for a NUCLEUS Routing Panel Configuration
By default, there are 16 indexes, numbered hexidecimally 0 - F.
To add an index, enter the index label in the Add New Index field and click Add. The index
appears at the bottom of the List of Added Indexes field.
Click Delete to remove the selected index from the List of Added Indexes.
The order of indexes in the List of Added Indexes field is the order that the indexes will
appear on the buttons on your NUCLEUS control panel. To rearrange their order, use the
following buttons:

Click Up to move highlighted items up one position in the Selected field.

Click Down to move highlighted items down one position in the Selected field.

Click Top to place highlighted items at the top of the list.

Click Bottom to place highlighted items at the bottom of the list.
To leave this screen, you have four options:

Click Next>> to move on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item
must appear in the Selected field for this option to be available.

Click Back to return to the previous page in the wizard.

Click Close to exit the wizard without creating a panel.

Click Finish to select the defaults on all the following pages, close the wizard and
create a panel. At least one item must appear in the Selected field for this option to be
available.
If you are creating a Single-Bus Routing panel, something must be in the Selected field of
this screen. However, it will not affect the final panel.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Source
Categories (Cat/Index mode only) on page 178.
177
178
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Selecting Source Categories (Cat/Index mode only)
If you chose a Cat/Index mode for your Routing panel, this screen will follow Selecting
Destination Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) on page 176.
Categories are a navigational tool that help you group sources on a large router. When
using categories, sources are normally divided by type. You select the type of source you
want to use, and then you select the alphanumeric identifier, or index, for a specific source
from that subset.
The default router contains one source category. You can relabel source and create multiple
categories. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration for more information.
The controls for this page are described in Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing
Panel on page 173.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Source
Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) on page 178.
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only)
If you have chosen categories and indexes as your organizational model, during NUCLEUS
operation you will choose a source type from a series of buttons, one for each category.
Once you choose a category, you will select from the members of that category. The
members are called Indexes.
Source indexes are set using exactly the same methods as destination indexes. For
information on completing the Source Indexes page, see Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/
Index mode only) on page 178.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Levels for
your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 178.
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel
The Levels page is the second-last page in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. (See
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) on page 178.)
Use this screen to determine the router levels that will be available on this particular routing
panel configuration. Levels are the different components that make up the complete signal
to be routed -- for example, video and audio.
For instructions on filling out the Levels screen, see Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS
Routing Panel on page 173.
Selecting Salvos for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel
The Salvos page is the last page in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. (See
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) on page 178.)
Use this screen to determine the router Salvos that will be available on this particular
routing panel configuration. Only salvos for which access rights have been provided are
included in the Available Salvos list. By default, no salvos are selected.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
For instructions on filling out the Salvos screen, see Selecting Sources for your
NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 173.
When you have completed this page, click Finish. Your Routing panel will appear in the
Configuration > NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views folder in the Navigation pane.
Before you can use the Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel, you must add it to a
configuration using the Configuration tool, and then transfer that configuration to the
control panel. See Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 186 for more
information.
Editing a Routing Panel
To edit a Routing panel, open it in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard (Right click on
it in the Navigation pane and select Configuration).
The Routing Panel Configuration wizard opens with all the settings of the Routing panel
you created. You can change the settings on any page and click Finish to save. The changes
will overwrite the Routing panel, unless you change its name on the first page.
A red circle with a slash through it on a routing panel indicates that the Routing System
Control View the panel is associated with has been changed since the panel was created.
Routing System Control View
Routing View that needs to be
updated using the Routing
Configuration Wizard
Figure 9-10 Routing Views in NUCLEUS
If you attempt to open a configuration that includes this routing panel, or transfer that
configuration to or from a NUCLEUS panel, you will be prompted to run the Routing
Configuration wizard to update the panel.
Auto
Validation
Routing and CENTRIO panels can become invalid in the following circumstances:

When a Routing View node is modified (i.e. the name of a source or destination has
changed).

When a new Routing View node is associated with a deleted Routing View system.
Once a Routing View node is modified, any routing or CENTRIO panels corresponding to
that Routing View node are automatically validated with the "Automatically Validating
Panels" progress bar. The wizard is automatically launched in the background to re-validate
the panel.
There may be discrepancies between the Routing Views. An algorithm is applied to validate
as much of the Routing View as possible, so your NUCLEUS control panel will continue to
operate correctly. Some connections may be lost.
179
180
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Configuration
This section requires a NUCLEUS-MV license. To acquire NUCLEUS licenses, contact your
Sales representative.
Use the CENTRIO Panel Configuration wizard to create CENTRIO panels for NUCLEUS. You
can select the available sources and PIPs of a CENTRIO system (as defined by its Logical
Database file) to create customized sub-views (individual CENTRIO panels). Each CENTRIO
panel can be assigned a unique name and can be configured to function as a X/Y device or
multi bus device.
When you add a CENTRIO panel to a NUCLEUS configuration, it is automatically assigned
an LCD button. After the CENTRIO panel is activated on NUCLEUS, the CENTRIO sources
and PIPs are assigned LCD buttons for quick activation/selection.
The steps involved in creating a CENTRIO panel are described in the following sections:

Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164

Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard on page 180

Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 186
You can also add CENTRIO PIPs and devices if you have a NUCLEUS-PROC license. See
Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 165 for
more information.
Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard
Before you can create a CENTRIO panel for use in a NUCLEUS configuration, you must add
a CENTRIO System and Routing View to your NUCLEUS Configuration folder. See Adding
CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164 for more information.
To open the CENTRIO Panel Configuration wizard, right-click the CENTRIO system icon
under Configurations > NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views, and select Create >
CENTRIO Panel.
A dialog box similar to the following appears.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 9-11 CENTRIO Control Panel Configuration Dialog Box
To complete this page, follow these steps:
1
Enter a name for the CENTRIO panel.
2
Select a CENTRIO panel type.
There are two options:
3

X/Y Device—Assigns a source to one CENTRIO PIP at a time. You can select this PIP
from a configured list of available PIPs.

Multi Bus—Assigns a source to multiple PIPs simultaneously. You can select these PIPs
from a configured list of available PIPs.
Select the source and PIP selection type that you want to use for your CENTRIO panel.

Discrete port selection—Identifies the CENTRIO panel sources and PIPs by their
logical names.

Category/Index selection—Identifies the CENTRIO panel sources by category and
indexes.
In the case of CENTRIO, the term “category” refers to a Display, and the term “index”
refers to a specific PiP on a Display. With this type of CENTRIO Panel, you can select a
Display to narrow down the list of available PIPS to choose from, because PIPs can be
moved from one display to another.
4
Selecting PIP
Attributes
Click Next to proceed to the PIP Attributes screen, and Selecting PIP Attributes on
page 181.
In this step of the wizard, you can select the attributes that the PIPs will display. All of the
attributes are listed. From this list, select an option, and then click the > button.
181
182
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Figure 9-12 Selecting PIP Attributes
The selection you make determines how PIPs will be selected on the panel.
Table 9-4 Selecting PIP Attributes
PIP Selection Attribute
Description
PIP Name
System level name that a PIP has when it
is discovered by Magellan CCS
Navigator
PIP Static name
Name that is designated in Layout
Designer
PIP Source Name
Name that is designated in the router
database
PIP Dynamic name
UMD text from the TSL external protocol
When you have chosen an option, click Next to proceed to the next page of the wizard.
Selecting the Sources and PIPs for Your CENTRIO Panel
In the next two steps of the wizard, you can select the sources and PIPs that you want the
CENTRIO panel to control.
All of the sources that are established by the Router System Control View are listed under
Available sources. From this list, select the sources you want to add to the CENTRIO panel,
and then click the > button. You can filter the Available sources list by entering a keyword
in the Filter box.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 9-13 Selecting Routing Panel Sources
Selected sources now lists the sources that you can control with the CENTRIO panel.
You can determine the order in which the sources appear on NUCLEUS by using the
following buttons:

Up—Moves the selected items up one position in the list

Down—Moves the selected items down one position in the list

Top—Moves the selected items to the top of the list

Bottom—Moves the selected items to the bottom of the list

A–Z—Organizes all items in the list by alphanumeric order

Z–A—Organizes all items in the list by reverse alphanumeric order
When have completed organizing your Selected sources list, click Next to go to the
Selected PIPs screen.
All of the discovered PIPs are listed under Available PIPs. From this list, select the PIPs you
want to add to the CENTRIO panel, and then click the > button. You can filter the
Available PIPs list by entering a keyword in the Filter box.
Selected PIPs now lists the PIPs that you can control with the CENTRIO panel.
To determine the order in which the PIPs appear on NUCLEUS, use the same buttons as
described for Selected Sources.
When have completed organizing your Selected PIPs list, depending on the CENTRIO panel
type you are configuring, either click Next or Finish.
Selecting Displays for Your CENTRIO Panel
If the Router System Control View you are using to create the CENTRIO panel has categories
and indexes to identify sources and PIPs, you can select the displays that you want the
CENTRIO panel to control.
183
184
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
If no display names are entered, all displays are included. You will have to know the names
of the displays available in order to add them to the list.
Figure 9-14 Adding and Deleting Indexes
To add a display to the list, enter text or a display name in the Enter New Display Name
box and click Add. To delete an display, select it from the list, and then click Delete.
When have completed organizing your Added Displays list, depending on the CENTRIO
panel type you are configuring, click Next or Finish.
Selecting Source Categories for Your CENTRIO Panel
If the Router System Control View you are using to create the CENTRIO panel has categories
and indexes to identify sources, you can select the categories that you want the CENTRIO
panel to control.
Source categories are selected in the same way as sources. All of the source categories that
are established by the Router System Control View are listed under Available Source
Categories.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 9-15 Adding Source Categories
When have completed organizing your Selected Source Categories list, depending on the
CENTRIO panel type you are configuring, click Next (if you are creating a Source Category
panel; see Selecting Source Indexes for Your CENTRIO Panel on page 185) or Finish.
Selecting Source Indexes for Your CENTRIO Panel
If the Router System Control View you are using to create the CENTRIO panel has categories
and indexes to identify sources, you can select the indexes that you want the CENTRIO
panel to control.
Source Indexes are based on a predefined list, and have no correlation with real router
indexes. Similarly to the Display name entry for PIP category is a free list for you to enter any
text that is part of your indexing scheme.
You can choose to add or delete indexes from the list. All of the indexes that are established
by the Router System Control View are listed under List of Added Indexes.
185
186
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Figure 9-16 Adding and Deleting Indexes
To add indexes to the index list, enter text or a display name in the Enter New Index box
and click Add. To delete an index, select it from the list, and then click Delete.
After you complete your new CENTRIO panel, you can add it to a NUCLEUS configuration.
For more information, see Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration.
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create and edit
NUCLEUS configurations.
1
In the Configuration folder in the Navigation pane, right click on the icon that represents
the NUCLEUS control panel you want to configure and select Configuration.
For information on the other tabs of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, see CCS
Device Configuration on page 127.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
2
Click on the Control Panel tab.
List of stand-alone and virtual
devices available to the NUCLEUS
control panel. Click the + to the left
of each device to view the list of
favorites (parameters) for that
device.
A Routing Configuration has no
parameters or other items to assign.
Tree view of the
selected configuration
Button assignment in
the selected page of
this configuration
Assignments for the
selected page of this
configuration. Click on
the Device and LCD
tabs to switch
between portions of
the control panel.
Figure 9-17. NUCLEUS Configuration Dialog Box’s Control Panel Tab
Do not make changes to the Routing View associated with a NUCLEUS panel while the
Configuration dialog box is open. This could make routing panels become invalid.
3
Select (new configuration) from the Configuration menu in the top right corner of the
dialog.
The New Configuration dialog box opens.
187
188
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
A password is
not required.
Passwords must
be numeric.
Figure 9-18 New Configuration Dialog Box
4
Enter a name for your configuration.
5
Select a configuration type.
The four options here affect how your devices and parameters will appear in your NUCLEUS
configuration (If you have a NUCLEUS-PROC and/or NUCLEUS-SNMP license). If you are
creating a configuration that will control router or CENTRIO panels, you must choose LCD
Assignment, Split navigation, or Device category.

LCD assignment - Uses a wizard to organize device navigation by device names,
with each device accessible through the first level of the control panel’s LCD button
assignment.
On NUCLEUS, the first level of an LCD Assignment configuration contains virtual
and stand-alone devices assigned to the LCD buttons. You can navigate down
through the control panel’s assignment level hierarchy using indexes and LCD
buttons, and back up using the control panel’s Exit button.

Split navigation - Uses a wizard to place devices on the first row of LCD buttons,
with menus for a selected device on the second row of LCD buttons.

Device category - Uses a wizard to organize devices and virtual devices, including
Routing panels and CENTRIO panels, into categories, which are accessible through
the first level of the control panel’s LCD button assignment hierarchy.
The first screen of a configuration created with this wizard has categories assigned
to the control panel’s LCD buttons. Each category is also assigned an index value
that can be entered into the control panel to access the category.
The second assignment level contains virtual devices, devices, CENTRIO panels and
Routing panels that are part of a category. LCD buttons at each assignment level
navigate forward through the control panel’s assignment level hierarchy, where you
can access device parameters. Use the control panel’s exit button to navigate back
through the hierarchy.
To add routing and CENTRIO panels to your configuration, you must use the wizard.

Blank configuration - Does not use a wizard, and creates a blank configuration.
This can only be used with a NUCLEUS-PROC and/or NUCLEUS-SNMP license, and
cannot be used to add CENTRIO or Router panels to a configuration.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
6
In the Address field, give the configuration an unique address between 0 and 127. This
address is used to control access to locked, protected, or restricted crosspoints. Each panel’s
address should be unique, so as not to interfere with another’s operations.
7
Click OK.
If you chose a wizard to help create a configuration, the appropriate wizard will start.
Otherwise, a blank configuration loads. See Creating a Configuration Without Using a
Wizard on page 193 for more information.
If you are creating a Split Mode or LCD Assignment wizard, proceed to Step 12.
If you are creating a Device Category configuration, you must now create categories.
Categories in a configuration file are menus that are used to group device assignments.
To change a
category’s
name, right
click on it and
choose
Rename, then
type the new
name.
Figure 9-19 Device Category Wizard’s Step 1 of 4 Screen
8
Use the Add button to create categories.
The Category field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational
language, your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry in this
field. If you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7, you will have to switch our keyboard to
English manually from the Language taskbar. If you switch the keyboard back to data entry
in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
To change a category’s name, select the entire name and press the DELETE key on your
keyboard, and then type a new name.
The order of categories determines the order they will be placed on the LCD buttons in your
final configuration. Use the Up and Down buttons to move the selected category with
respect to the other categories. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on
page 201 for more information.
9
Click Next> to advance to Page 2 of 4.
189
190
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
On the second screen of the Device Category wizard, you must add at least one virtual or
stand-alone device, CENTRIO panel, or Routing panel to each category.
Only devices that are currently
assigned to the control panel
appear in the Adding Devices
dialog box. To add other devices,
see Adding Processing or SNMP
Devices to a NUCLEUS
Configuration on page 165.
The order of devices in this list
determines how they will be laid
out on the LCD screen. Use the
Up/Down buttons to adjust their
order.
A device with a category listed in
parentheses indicates that the
device is already assigned to that
category.
Figure 9-20. Device Category Wizard’s Step 2 of 4 Screen
10 To add devices to the categories, first select a Category from the field on the left, then select
a device from the Available Devices field, and finally click the > button.
< removes the selected device from the Devices in this Category list.
<< removes all devices.
>> adds all devices from the Available Devices list to the Devices in the Category list.
The device is added to the Devices added in the category list.
The order of categories determines the order they will be placed on the LCD buttons in your
final configuration. Use the Up and Down buttons to move the selected category with
respect to the other categories. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on
page 201 for more information.
The Next button will not be available until each category contains at least one device in the
Devices in the Category field.
11 Click Next.
The left side of the next screen lists all the devices that are available to the configuration.
12 Delete any devices you do not want to appear in this configuration, and then if your
configuration contains Routing and CENTRIO panels, but no processing devices, click Next
on this screen.
If your configuration contains processing devices, see Assigning Parameters With
NUCLEUS Configuration Wizard on page 191.
The last page of the Configuration wizard contains options you can add to any
Configuration file.
If you want to change the default settings, see the following topics for more information:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

Adding Home and Unity Buttons on page 198

Defining Access Options on page 199

Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on page 201
13 Click Finish to close the Configuration wizard.
The Panel Configuration pane of the Configure Control Panel tab displays the menu
structure for the control panel. The Properties pane displays the button assignments for
the currently selected level in the configuration. The Panel Layout pane shows the button
and knob assignments as they will appear on your control panel when the configuration file
is loaded.
Your configuration is now ready to transfer to the NUCLEUS control panel. See
Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files on page 205.
Assigning Parameters With NUCLEUS Configuration Wizard
You need the NUCLEUS-PROC or NUCLEUS-SNMP option to add favorite parameters and
menus (“processing”) from individual or virtual devices. To add devices to a configuration,
see Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 165.
To start the NUCLEUS Configuration wizard, see Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on
page 186.
All devices, including Routing and CENTRIO panels, that are present in the Configuration >
NUCLEUS folders, will appear in the left panel of this dialog box. Delete any devices you
do not want to include in the configuration.
The NUCLEUS Configuration wizard contains a What do you want to do now? page. If
the navigation pane in the left side of this screen contains solely Router and CENTRIO
panels, click Next to proceed to the final page of the wizard. Router and CENTRIO controls
and menus are added to the configuration in the CENTRIO and Routing Panel Configuration
wizards. See Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 180
and Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 171 for more
information.
To complete this page of the wizard, select a device or menu from the left side of the
screen.
191
192
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
The Assign Parameters to Panel Controls and Create Device Menu(s) buttons become
active.
Drag parameters from the
left frame and drop them on
the controls on the Display
tab (drop controls onto the
programmable knobs, toggle
buttons, and LCD buttons).
Toggle
buttons
(1 0f 2) in LCD Wizard
(3 of 4) in Device
Category Wizard
Programmable
knobs
Click Add to
create a menu
Figure 9-21. Adding Parameters and Device Menus
See the following topics to complete the screens.

Adding Menus on page 192

Adding Parameters on page 193
Adding Menus
To add menus below a device or menu on your configuration, do one of the following:

Click on the device or menu, click Create Device Menu(s)..., and then click Add.

Right click on the device or menu and then select Create Device Menu.
or
When adding menus, the order they appear in the list determines the order they will be
assigned to LCD buttons. Move them on the New Device Menu(s) screen with the Up and
Down buttons, or on the Navigation pane by right clicking and selecting Move up or
Move down.
You can add a total of 5500 device menus to a configuration. This total includes the
number of categories and sub-menus added to the configuration.
If you are creating a Split Navigation type of configuration, you can add a maximum of
eight device menus/sub-menus to each device in your configuration (less if you add Unity
and Home buttons to your configuration).
Menu names can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language,
your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry for menu names. If
you switch the keyboard back for data entry in an alternate language, data corruption
could occur.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Adding Parameters
To assign parameters within the device or menu, click Assign Parameters to Panel
Controls....
The Parameter Assignment dialog box opens.
Drag parameters from the menu on the left to the following areas on the Panel Layout:

The four programmable knobs

The four toggle buttons

16 LCD buttons
To delete an assignment, right click on the assignable button or know and select Delete
from the shortcut menu.
When assigning an SNMP value parameter to a control, the following dialog box will
appear:
Figure 9-22 SNMP Parameter Instance ID Dialog Box
Enter the instance ID of the device that you intend to control with this parameter.
SNMP table parameters do not require you to enter the instance ID to identify the device to
be controlled. Table parameters instead provide an LCD for each possible device for that
parameter. When you select a device, the display shows the individual control(s).
If you leave a category or menu with nothing assigned to it, an error message will appear
when you leave this screen. You can continue, but your configuration will have a Menu
button that leads to an empty destination screen.
When you are done adding menus and parameters, click Next> to continue on to the next
page of the wizard, described in Step 12 of Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration
Folder on page 163.
Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard
If you would prefer not to use a wizard, you can create a blank configuration, and then
customize it on the Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab. To create a new blank
configuration, see Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 186.
When you click OK to close the New Configuration dialog box, the selected configuration
(in the Configuration menu) is the one that you just created. Nothing is assigned to any
button, there are no menus or categories, and no devices are assigned.
To fill in your configuration, see the following topics:
193
194
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration

Adding Menus above Devices on the Control Panel Tab on page 194

Adding Devices to a Configuration on the Control Panel Tab on page 194

Adding Menus Below Devices on the Control Panel Tab on page 196

Adding Parameters on the Control Panel Tab on page 196

Assigning Configuration Options on the Control Panel Tab on page 198
You cannot add Routing panels or CENTRIO panels to a NUCLEUS configuration via a blank
configuration. To add these panels to a configuration, add them to a LCD assignment, Split
Navigation, or Device category panel via a wizard. See Creating a NUCLEUS
Configuration on page 186 for more information.
Adding Menus above Devices on the Control Panel Tab
Category menus in a configuration file are used to group devices. To create a category
menu, right click on the root node or a category menu in the Panel Configuration pane
and choose Create Category Menu. The new category menu appears as a child of the
selected resource in the pane.
You can add a total of 5500 device menus to a configuration. This total includes the
number of categories and sub-menus added to the configuration. You can create categories
five levels deep from the root of the configuration file.
Menu names can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language,
your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry for menu names. If
you switch the keyboard back to data entry in an alternate language, data corruption could
occur.
To rename your category menu, right click on it and choose Rename. Type a new name for
your category menu. This is the name that will appear on an LCD in your completed
configuration.
To change the selected item’s position in the hierarchy with respect to the other items on its
level and in its directory, click Move Up or Move Down. The order of items in this menu
determines their position on the LCD buttons (in co-operation with the auto-assignment
selection. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on page 201).
Adding Devices to a Configuration on the Control Panel Tab
Parameters in a NUCLEUS configuration are always added below devices. Devices can be
placed either below the category menus, if you have created those, or below the root of the
configuration. You cannot add a device below another device. You can add a Routing or
CENTRIO panel below the root of the configuration, or below a category menu. You cannot
add a device or device menu below a Routing or CENTRIO panel.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Router in a Category Menu
Device in a Category menu
Virtual device
in a Category menu
Device in the Configuration’s Root
To add a device to the configuration:

Drag a device from the Devices/Parameters pane and drop it on top of the root node
or a category node in the Panel Configuration pane.
OR

Drop a device on an LCD in the Panel Layout while the correct Category menu is
selected in the Panel Configuration pane.
Switch between the
Display and LCD
portions of the Panel
Layout by clicking on the
tabs at the top left of
the Panel Layout.
Click the Pg Up and Pg
Dn buttons to view
more than 16
assignments in this level.
Sixteen programmable
LCDs.
Figure 9-23 Programmable LCDs
If you have more than 16 items to assign to a page, right click on the page and choose
Create Page. The LED assignments page clears, and the Page Up button lights to indicate
that there are multiple pages in this assignment. If you click the Page Up button, you will
see the previous assignments. From the previous page, if you click Page Dn, you can return
to the new page.
To delete a page, right click on it and choose Delete Page. If you have assignments on a
page, Delete Page will be greyed out. If you remove all assignments from that page, the
option will become available.
You can add a total of 5500 device menus to a configuration. This total includes the
number of categories and sub-menus added to the configuration.
195
196
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Adding Menus Below Devices on the Control Panel Tab
You cannot add a menu below a routing device on a NUCLEUS panel.
Menus represent the lowest level in the NUCLEUS configuration assignment hierarchy. You
can add a total of 5500 menus to a configuration. This total includes the number of
categories and sub-menus added to the configuration. However, to ensure that important
parameters can be accessed quickly, try to keep device menus to one level deep.
Maximum of
five nested
device menu
levels
The total number of device
menus and sub-menus
cannot exceed 5500
Figure 9-24 Nested Categories, Devices, and Menus in a Configuration

To add a menu, in the Panel Configuration pane, right click on the device (or menu
below a device) where you would like to add a menu, and then select Create Device
Menu.
The new menu is added below the selected device or menu.

To remove a menu, click Remove.
Menu names can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language,
your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry for menu names. If
you switch the keyboard back to data entry in an alternate language, data corruption could
occur.

To change the name of a menu, double click on it, delete the current name and type a
new one. Menu names are limited to ten characters.

To change the position of a menu in the list of objects at a level, right click on it and
select Move Up or Move Down from the shortcut menu. Menus are automatically
assigned to LCDs in the final configuration based on their order on this screen and your
chosen auto-assignment setting. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on
page 201.
Adding Parameters on the Control Panel Tab
To add parameters to a configuration, first select the device or menu level at which you
want to add parameters on the Panel Configuration pane. You can only add parameters
to a device or a device menu.
When you’re operating a NUCLEUS control panel, you will first select a device, and then
either select menus below that device or directly adjust parameters for that device.
Therefore, you can only assign parameters below menus that have a device assigned to
them already.
If you want to add parameters for multiple devices in one menu, you should first group
those devices into a virtual device. See Creating Virtual Devices and Assigning
Favorites to Virtual Devices on page 166.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
There are two ways to add parameters to a configuration:

Drag parameters from the list under the correct device in the Devices/Parameters
pane and drop them onto the empty programmable knobs, LCD buttons, and toggle
buttons on the Display tab.
OR

Drag parameters from the selected device’s list of parameters in the Devices/
Parameters pane and drop them onto the desired control on the Properties pane.
Whichever method you choose, both the Panel Layout and Properties pane update as
you make changes.
When assigning an SNMP value parameter to a control, the following dialog box will
appear:
Figure 9-25 SNMP Parameter Instance ID Dialog Box
Enter the instance ID of the device that you intend to control with this parameter.
SNMP table parameters do not require you to enter the instance ID to identify the device to
be controlled. Table parameters instead provide an LCD for each possible device for that
parameter. When you select a device, the display shows the individual control(s).
Whichever method you choose, both the Panel Layout and Properties pane update as
you make changes.
If you drag and drop a parameter that is from the wrong device, the action will not be
allowed.
To delete a mis-assigned parameter from a button or knob, right click on that control and
choose Delete.
You cannot add parameters below a routing device on a NUCLEUS panel.
Modifying an Index Item in a Properties Pane
Items placed at the Devices level have an Index row in the Properties tab. When you are
operating the panel, you can press the number associated with a device to go to its page,
bypassing the normal navigation aids.
Numbers are automatically assigned sequentially starting from 1 within a configuration. To
change the number, click in the Properties pane Index row and type a new number on
your keyboard.
197
198
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Assigning Configuration Options on the Control Panel Tab
The same configuration options that are available to a configuration created by a wizard are
also available when you create a configuration without the wizard.
To access the Auto-assignment, Access and Auto Boot options, right click in the Panel
Layout pane of the Control Panel Configuration dialog box.

For information on the Access options, see Defining Access Options on page 199.

For information on the Auto Assignment options, see Defining the LCD
Auto-Assignment Order on page 201.

For information on defining Other configuration options, see Defining Other
Configuration Options on page 200.
In the Properties dialog box, you can click in the row for any LCD button, and then on the
browse button that appears in the assignment field to access Home and Unity button
options for that LCD. See Adding Home and Unity Buttons on page 198.
Adding Home and Unity Buttons
If you add Home and Unity buttons to your Processing configuration, they appear on every
page of the configuration.
Device Unity and Menu Unity buttons will not appear on pages associated with a Routing
or CENTRIO panel.
On the last page of the NUCLEUS Configuration wizard, you can add Home, Menu Unity
and Device Unity buttons to your configuration.
To add these buttons to a configuration from the Control Panel tab, click an LCD row in
the Properties pane, and then click on the browse button that appears in the assignment
field.
This dialog box opens:
Figure 9-26 Properties Pane’s LCD Assignment Dialog Box
The options are as follows:

If you set Home Location, pressing this button on the control panel will take the
panel’s buttons to a pre-selected home page. This location can only be determined
from the panel itself. See your NUCLEUS installation and Operation Manual for more
information.

If you assign Menu Unity, pressing this button on the control panel will reset the
selected device menu’s parameters to unity values.

If you assign Device Unity, pressing this button will reset the selected device or virtual
device’s parameters to unity values.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
From the drop-down menu beside each item, choose the LCD button to assign it to. Unity
and Home buttons will appear in these locations on every layout of the configuration,
including pages accessible with the Pg Up and Pg Dn buttons.
From this dialog box, adding a Home or Unity button removes any parameters assigned to
the chosen button on any other pages in the configuration file. If a page has an
auto-assigned item (a device menu below the current level, or a real or virtual device), the
auto-assigned item is bumped to the next available LCD position.
If all LCD positions are already filled, the auto-assigned item may be placed on a new page
within the device menu.
If the configuration is a Split Navigation configuration, then you can only assign Home and
Unity buttons to LCD 9 - LCD 16 (the bottom row).
Defining Access Options
There are two ways to access the Access Options dialog box:

Click the Access Options button which appears on the last page of all NUCLEUS
control panel configuration wizards.

Right click in the Panel Layout dialog box and select Options from the shortcut menu.
The Options dialog box opens.
Click Access Options.
This dialog box opens:
If you assign a password to a configuration,
you will be required to enter this password
before the configuration can be accessed on
the control panel.
This number initially matches the address on
the New Configuration screen. It is a number
used to control access to locked, protected, or
restricted crosspoints. Each panel’s address
should be unique, so as not to interfere with
another’s operations.
Figure 9-27 Access Options Dialog Box
199
200
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
The permissions options are outlined below:
Table 9-5 Permissions Options
Permission
Effect When Selected
Copy data to/
from from
panels
You can copy the current configuration between the
NUCLEUS control panel and a USB storage device. See
the File Manager feature description in your NUCLEUS
Network Control Panel Installation and Operation
Manual for more information.
Enable
destination lock/
protect
You can lock a routing destination (allowing no one to
change the destination’s source) or protect a routing
destination (allowing only this NUCLEUS configuration to
change the destination’s source).
Overwrite/delete
existing data
You can access the NUCLEUS USB File Manager to delete or
overwrite configurations on the panel. For more
information about deleting configuration files from
NUCLEUS, see your NUCLEUS Network Control Panel
Installation and Operation Manual.
Defining Other Configuration Options
When you click Other Options, either on the last page of the NUCLEUS Configuration
Wizard, or on the Options dialog box, the following dialog box appears:
Figure 9-28 NUCLEUS Other Configuration Options Dialog Box
The General options are:

Nucleus panel will automatically boot to this configuration during startup—
When checked, this this configuration will start automatically when the NUCLEUS
control panel is turned on.
When a configuration with this setting is transferred to the NUCLEUS Control Panel,
this option will override any previous Auto Boot to Configuration settings previously
applied to the control panel either from a configuration file or at the control panel.

Number of pages to jump—Indicates the number of LCD pages to jump over when
pressing Shift Pg Up (previous pages) or Shift Pg Dn (next pages). The default is 5 pages.
The Router options only have an effect when a router configuration is in use on the
NUCLEUS Control Panel.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

Do not reset last selected destination when switching between source and
destination selection views—When this option is selected, the NUCLEUS control
panel will store the last selected destination when it returns to a router page (rather
than resetting to destination 1).

TAKE button not required when performing a crosspoint (Discrete Port
Selection)—When this option is selected and you make a source selection and a
destination selection, the switch happens automatically (you do not need to push the
TAKE button). This does not work for Category/Index panels.
The Router Protocol option determines the default communication protocol to use.

If the selected router protocol fails, please try with the other protocol—The
options are XY and LRC.
Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order
Categories, devices, and menus are automatically positioned on the LCD buttons in a
configuration. All pages within a configuration use the same method.
Assignment options are not supported with Split Navigation configurations.
There are two ways to access the LCD Auto-Assignment dialog box:

Click the Assignment Options button on the last page of a NUCLEUS control panel
configuration wizard.
OR

Right click in the Panel Layout dialog box and select Options > Assignment
Options.
The Auto-assignment selection options appear on this dialog box:
This option only
appears if you access
the dialog box from
the Panel Layout
dialog box.
Figure 9-29 LCD Auto-Assignment Order Dialog Box
Menus and devices are assigned on the LCDs using the options described below:
Table 9-6 Auto-assignment Options
Option
Effect
Over, then down
From left to right across the entire top row, and
then the second row
Down, then over
From left to right across half the top row and then
half the bottom row, then the second half of the
top row and the second half of the bottom row
201
202
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Table 9-6 Auto-assignment Options
Option
Effect
Down, over,
down, then over
From left to right, places one item on the top row
and the next item directly beneath it, then the next
item beside the first on the top row, etc.
Custom
Leaves buttons where they are; you can drag and
drop items and move them using tools such as Cut
and Paste, Page up and Page down
When items are auto-assigned, the assignment keeps its pattern while skipping over
positions where items have already been assigned. If there are more items for a device
menu than will fit on a single page, then a new page is created and items are automatically
assigned in the same pattern as the first page.
Editing a Panel Configuration
You can update your configuration either manually on the Control Panel tab, or by using a
wizard.

If the configuration is stored in Magellan CCS Navigator, reopen it using one of the
following methods:

In the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab, select the
configuration you want to modify from the Configuration menu.
OR

In the Navigation pane, navigate to the Configuration folder, select the
NUCLEUS the configuration is saved under, open the Configurations folder, and
double-click on the configuration you want to modify.
The Configuration dialog box opens with the configuration you have selected.

If the configuration is on your NUCLEUS control panel, you can retrieve it for
modification. See Getting a Configuration File From a NUCLEUS on page 208.

If the configuration is archived as an XML file, you can reopen it in Magellan CCS
Navigator. See Importing a NUCLEUS Configuration file from XML on page 208.
Once you have opened your configuration, you can modify it using the wizard, if you
created it using the wizard. Click the Wizard button to open the wizard, and then make
the alterations on the pages as you desire. When you are finished modifying the
configuration, click Finish on any page. Your changes are saved.
You can also modify it directly on the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box’s Control
Panel tab. See Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard on page 193 for a
description of the tools you will use.
Configuring Router TRAX for NUCLEUS
NUCLEUS-TRAX, sometimes referred to as Router Follow, is an add-on option for your
NUCLEUS control panel. To use NUCLEUS-TRAX, you must also have both Router
(NUCLEUS-RTR) and Processing (NUCLEUS-PROC) or SNMP (NUCLEUS-SNMP) options. For
more information about purchasing TRAX features, contact your Imagine Communications
sales representative. See Activating NUCLEUS License Keys on page 162 for information
on activating license keys.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
When TRAX is enabled on a NUCLEUS panel, and you connect a source to a destination, if
devices have been assigned, controls for those devices appear on your NUCLEUS control
panel. TRAX settings are assigned for an entire configuration.
TRAX works in two different modes:

Single Destination mode is designed to have the selected destination as a QC station.
Devices connected to the sources are displayed in NUCLEUS.

Multiple Destination mode shows the input (upstream) and output (downstream)
devices in a ‘vertical split mode’ scenario. This allows easier adjustment of parameters
on either side of the router which will allow operators to quickly adjust video without
having to specifically key in a given device.
See the manual accompanying your control panel for information about enabling and
turning on NUCLEUS-TRAX.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create configurations
for NUCLEUS.
To configure NUCLEUS-TRAX, follow these steps:
1
In the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab, under Panel
Configuration, select a configuration from the list.
2
click the Trax button.
The Trax Configuration dialog box opens.
Displays the routing view the configuration is based on.
Figure 9-30 Contents of the Trax Tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration
3
Select a Destination Follow mode.
203
204
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Table 9-7 Destination Follow Mode Options
Option
Function
Single Destination
mode
The Logical to Device Mapping table contains one tab: Sources.
Multiple Destination
mode
4

Click Select to choose the destination.

Click Options to determine how crosspoint following on that
destination will be managed. See Setting Destination Mode
Options on page 205 for more information.
The Logical to Device Mapping table contains two tabs: Sources
and Destinations.
Select a row in the Map Logical Source to Device table.
To remove a link to a device, click a row in the Logical Source to Device table on the
TRAX tab, and then click Clear. This deletes the link from the Menu Entry column of the
selected row. You can make multiple selections to remove several assignments at one time.
5
Click Modify…
The Device Selection dialog box opens. The contents of this box are the same as the Panel
Configuration pane, and show the menu structure of the current NUCLEUS configuration.
Figure 9-31 Device Selection Dialog
6
Select the device that you would like to open when the source is connected to the
destination, and then click OK.
You can only select a non-routing device or virtual device.
The menu’s name appears in the Menu Entry field of the Map Logical Source to Device
table.
7
Repeat steps 2 - 4 for each row in the configuration.
In Multiple Destination mode, complete both the Source and Destination tabs.
When you load this configuration file to your NUCLEUS control panel and switch an input
to a destination, the control panel will load the assigned menu or menus.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Setting Destination Mode Options
Destination Mode options allow you to set the conditions that determine whether or not a
TRAX jump occurs based on the available levels. These settings apply to both single and
multiple destination modes.
To open the NUCLEUS TRAX Options dialog box, from the Trax Configuration dialog
box, click Trax Options....
Figure 9-32 TRAX Options Dialog Box for NUCLEUS
The selection you make on this screen determines which level or levels must be switched to
the target destination in order to trigger TRAX to update the menu that appears on your
NUCLEUS control panel.
Table 9-8 TRAX Options
Option
Result
Source Change must match
all Destination levels
configured
TRAX is triggered when all of a router
destination's levels are included in a crosspoint
take. If any destination level is in a breakaway
state, the TRAX jump does not execute.
Source Change must match
on the levels specified (e.g.,
0,1,2)
TRAX is triggered only when the specified level(s)
is included in the crosspoint take. When you enter
a level in the Level box, the TRAX jump executes
on this level.
Source Change must match
on the lowest Destination
level configured
TRAX is triggered only when the lowest level is
included in the crosspoint take.
Source Change must match
on the highest Destination
level configured
TRAX is triggered only when the highest level is
included in the crosspoint take.
Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can transfer configurations
to and from a NUCLEUS control panel. Before you can use a NUCLEUS configuration, you
must transfer it to the control panel. You can transfer a total of 16 configurations to the
NUCLEUS control panel (depending on their size).
205
206
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Depending on the size of the flash memory in your NUCLEUS control panel, it may not be
able to hold 16 configurations. If the flash memory holds too many configurations, then
firmware upgrades to the NUCLEUS control panel may fail.
You can store un-needed configurations for later transfer on your Magellan CCS Navigator
system, or archive them as XML files (see Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file to
XML on page 208).
If a panel configuration file contains presets, those presets will be written to all control
panels during the transfer process. If a panel already has a preset with the same name as
the added preset, that preset will be overwritten.
To transfer a configuration to the NUCLEUS control panel, follow these steps:
1
In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Perform
Transfer.
The Perform Transfer dialog box opens.
All the available
configurations stored in
Magellan CCS Navigator
All the configurations
currently stored on the
control panel
Transfers configurations to
multiple panels (see page 207)
Figure 9-33 Perform Transfer Dialog Box
2
Do either of the following:

From the Local Configurations list, select the configuration(s) you would like to
transfer, and then click Send to Panel to send the currently selected configuration
to the Panel, or Send All to Panel to send all configurations in the Local
Configurations list.
Hold down the shift key to select a range of configurations, or the control key to
select multiple individual configurations.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

Drag a configuration from the Local Configuration list and drop it onto the
Control Panel Configurations list.
3
Click OK to send the file to NUCLEUS.
4
Reboot the NUCLEUS panel.
If you are transferring a configuration that contains a Routing panel, the Gateway Settings
file is transferred with the NUCLEUS configuration.
If your configuration contains the setting NUCLEUS panel will auto-boot into this
configuration during startup, the newly transferred configuration will load.
If your configuration file includes devices intended to be controlled using SNMP, you also
need to transfer MIBs for those devices. See Transferring MIBs to NUCLEUS on page 209.
Magellan CCS Navigator’s List Configurations option does not show system-generated
configurations, such as those for Multiviewers (QVM6800+ and PredatorII) and IconLogo
devices.
Transferring Configurations to Multiple Control Panels
You can transfer the same configuration file to multiple NUCLEUS control panels. Follow
these steps:
1
In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Perform
Transfer.
The Perform Transfer dialog box opens.
2
From the Local Configurations list, select the configuration(s) you would like to transfer.
Hold down the shift key to select a range of configurations, or the control key to select
multiple individual configurations.
3
Click Send to Other Panels.
Figure 9-34 Transferring Configuration to Multiple Panels
4
For each panel you want to send the configuration to, click New and then enter the IP
address of the panel.
The Multiple Transfer utility does not check that the control panels have less than 16
configurations already installed. When preparing to transfer a configuration to multiple
panels, ensure that each panel has adequate storage space for the additional configuration.
207
208
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
The Send to Other Panels list cannot include the local panel IP (the panel for which the
configuration window is open). Use Send to Panel to transfer a configuration to the local
NUCLEUS control panel.
5
Click Start Transfer.
If a selected panel is unavailable or offline, a message will appear indicating that Magellan
CCS Navigator failed to ping the specified device. When you click OK, Magellan CCS
Navigator attempts to transfer the configuration to the next device on the list.
If a panel configuration file contains presets, those presets will be written to all control
panels during the transfer process. If a panel already has a preset with the same name as
the added preset, that preset will be overwritten.
Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file to XML
You may want to save a NUCLEUS configuration in order to modify it or for archival
purposes. To store a configuration file, follow these steps:
1
In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Perform
Transfer.
The Perform Transfer dialog box opens.
2
Select the configuration you want to export from the Local Configuration list, and click
Export To.
3
Browse to the designated local or network drive and click Save.
You can use Export To to export configurations to a USB key for transfer to a NUCLEUS
control panel. See your NUCLEUS Network Control Panel Installation and Operation Manual
for information on formatting a USB key.
Importing a NUCLEUS Configuration file from XML
To retrieve a NUCLEUS configuration from an XML archive, follow these steps:
1
In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Import from....
The Load From dialog box opens.
2
Use the standard Windows browsing tools to find and select the configuration you want to
import, and then click Open.
Getting a Configuration File From a NUCLEUS
To get a configuration from a NUCLEUS control panel in order to modify it or for archival
purposes, follow these steps:
1
In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Perform
Transfer.
The Perform Transfer dialog box opens.
2
Do either of the following:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
3

Select the configuration you want to export from the Control Panel
Configurations list, and click Get from Panel to get the currently selected
configuration, of Get all from Panel to get all the configurations that are on the
panel.

Drag a configuration from the Control Panel Configuration list and drop it onto
the Local Configuration list.
Browse to the designated local or network drive and click Save.
When you get a configuration file from a NUCLEUS control panel, if that configuration
contains presets, those presets will be copied to the Magellan CCS Navigator PC. If you then
transfer that configuration file to another NUCLEUS control panel, those presets will be sent
to the control panel. If a panel already has a preset with the same name as the added
preset, that preset will be overwritten.
Transferring MIBs to NUCLEUS
The NUCLEUS control panel must have all the MIBs for all the devices it is being used to
control. See the documentation for individual devices to find out the MIBs required for each
device. MIBs are normally provided by a device’s manufacturer.
Transfer MIBs to the NUCLEUS control panel using the File Transfer tab of the NUCLEUS
Configuration dialog box.
\
Figure 9-35 File Transfer Tab of NUCLEUS Configuration Dialog Box
To transfer MIBs to NUCLEUS, follow these steps:
1
In the File Transfer tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, under Select the
device directory to tranfer to, choose snmp/mibs.
2
Remove pre-existing files that are in the Add upgrade files to transfer to device list, if
there are any, by selecting each file and then clicking Remove.
3
Click Add.
A Browse dialog box opens, automatically with the CCS/files/MIBs folder selected.
4
Choose the MIBs you need to transfer.
209
210
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
Hold down the SHIFT key to select a range of files, or the CTRL key to select multiple
individual files.
5
Click OK.
The files appear in the Add upgrade files to transfer to device list.
6
Click Perform Transfer.
Deleting a Configuration File from a NUCLEUS
To delete a configuration from a NUCLEUS control panel, follow these steps:
1
In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Perform
Transfer.
The Perform Transfer dialog box opens.
2
Select the configuration you want to delete from the Control Panel Configurations list,
and click Delete.
Listing the Configuration Files on a NUCLEUS
To list the configuration on a NUCLEUS control panel, follow these steps:
1
In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Perform
Transfer.
The Perform Transfer dialog box opens.
2
Click List.
The configurations currently stored on the NUCLEUS control panel appear in the Control
Panel Configurations list.
Configurations that are generated on the NUCLEUS control panel itself do not appear in the
Control Panel Configurations list. See Devices Configured Using the Control Panel
Interface on page 162 for a list of panel-generated configurations.
211
10
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway
Configuration and Control
EDGE-DPS575 Overview
The EDGE-DPS575 acts as a protocol translator between CCS and up to 20 DPS-475/575
digital processing synchronizers on the gateway’s subnet. The EDGE-DPS575 gateway has no
parameters of its own, but provides access to DPS-475/575 synchronizers for CCS software
and control panels. This provides operational safeguards over local control, including locking
out inappropriate combinations of control settings.
Before you can control DPS-475/575 synchronizers via the EDGE-DPS575, you must discover
the EDGE-DPS575 and create a configuration file, which defines the synchronizers the
gateway controls. Once you transfer the configuration to the gateway and rediscover the
gateway, you are ready to control and monitor the DPS-475/575 synchronizers. See
Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File on page 211.
You can use the DPS HTML Interface dialog box to access DPS-575 control parameters that
the CCS control interface does not directly support. See Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP
Control and Monitoring on page 216.
See your DPS-575 Digital Processing Synchronizer Installation and Operation Manual for a
complete list of parameters. (The DPS-575 manual can also be used with DPS-475
synchronizers.)
Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File
An EDGE-DPS575 configuration file contains the IP addresses of up to 20 DPS-475/575 units
that the gateway will control and monitor.
Using the DPS-575 control dialog box’s HTML Interface, you can access and change control
parameters that the CCS software itself does not support. The link to the synchronizer’s Web
controls is discovered separately. See Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and
Monitoring on page 216.
Only an Administrator on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can configure an EDGE-DPS575
gateway. To create an EDGE-DPS575 configuration file, complete these steps:
1
In Build mode, discover your EDGE-DPS575 gateway, and then save the results of the
discovery. See Running a Discovery on page 85 for more information.
212
Chapter 10
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and Control
A virtual Gateway server icon appears in the Discovery folder as a placeholder
for the EDGE-DPS575’s IP address. An EDGE-DPS575 icon appears as the child of this virtual
Gateway server icon. Icons of any DPS-575 synchronizers on the gateway’s subnet appear
as the gateway’s children. If the EDGE-DPS575 gateway has no configuration file, it will find
every DPS-475/575 synchronizer on the network, up to 255 synchronizers.
Whether the synchronizer is a DPS-475 or a DPS-575, it will appear as a DPS-575 in the
Navigation pane.
2
Drag-and-drop the EDGE-DPS575 Gateway icon from the Discovery folder
into the Configuration folder.
Drag this item to the
Configuration folder.
A New Configuration
folder
Figure 10-1 EDGE-DPS575 Gateway in Configuration Folder
A New Configuration icon appears in the Configuration folder as the child of the
EDGE-DPS575 icon. DPS-575 icons appear as children of the New Configuration icon.
To change the name of the New Configuration icon (which will change how the
configuration is named in subsequent steps), see Resource Icons on page 95.
3
This folder can contain a maximum of 20 synchronizers. Customize which DPS-475/575
synchronizer you want to control through the EDGE-DPS575 gateway. This can be done by
deleting unwanted DPS-575 synchronizer icons from the New Configuration folder. To
delete a synchronizer icon, right click on it and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
Each DPS-475/575 synchronizer can only be controlled by one EDGE-DPS575 gateway.
4
Double-click the resource icon for the EDGE-DPS575 from the Discovery folder of the
Navigation pane.
This opens the EDGE-DPS575 Configuration dialog box.
5
Select the Gateway tab.
All the available configurations for this EDGE-DPS575, including the one you have just
created, appear in the Choose the device configuration to transfer box of the
Gateway tab.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
When selected, after transferring
a configuration, the gateway will
automatically read the
configuration information. If this
is not selected, you will have to
restart or refresh the gateway
Click to abort a
transfer in
progress.
An EDGE-DPS575 can contain one
configuration at a time. The
configuration stored on the
gateway is always called
dpsconfig.xml.
Click to list the
configurations on the
selected EDGE-DPS575.
Figure 10-2 Gateway Tab of EDGE-DPS575 Configuration Dialog Box
6
Click Perform Transfer on the Gateway tab, and then click Yes to confirm the transfer.
7
If you did not select Refresh device after transferring the configuration, click Refresh
Device, and then click Yes to confirm.
The gateway configuration has the name dpsconfig.xml and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Gateway tab.
The Configuration tool’s Status bar and Log provide feedback information during
configuration uploading. For more information, see Logging Configuration Activity on
page 154.
8
Rediscover the EDGE-DPS575 and save the results of the discovery. Now, in the Discovery
folder, the EDGE-DPS575 lists only the synchronizers that it controls.
The EDGE-DPS575 will read the configuration information and report the status of the
identified DPS-575 modules on its subnet. See Editing an EDGE-DPS575
Configuration on page 213.
Editing an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration
You may wish to edit a configuration file, for example to remove devices from one
configuration and add them to another, optimizing your system resources. To edit a
configuration file, follow these steps:
1
Open the configuration file, using one of the following methods:
213
214
Chapter 10
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and Control

In the EDGE-DPS575 Configuration dialog box’s Gateway tab, select
dpsconfig.xml in the List of all configurations on the device box, and then click
Get Configuration.
This copies the configuration from the EDGE-DPS575 gateway so it can be
modified. The configuration also remains on the EDGE-DPS575 gateway.

2
Copy a configured EDGE-DPS575 gateway from the Network or Discovery folder
to the Configuration folder of the Navigation pane.
Edit the configuration file, using the following tools:
Each DPS475/575 can only be controlled by one EDGE-DPS575.
3

Drag DPS-475/575 synchronizers from other configuration files, or from the
Discovery folder, and drop them onto the Configuration folder you are editing.

Right click on any DPS-475/575 synchronizers you want to remove from the
Configuration folder, and choose Delete from the menu that appears.
Transfer it to the EDGE-DPS575 gateway, following steps 4 - 8 in Creating an
EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File on page 211, or reserve it for future use. Your
configuration file is automatically when you close Magellan CCS Navigator or switch
between modes, if you click Yes on the System view was modified. Save Changes?
dialog box.
Deleting a Configuration from an EDGE-DPS575
When an EDGE-DPS575 has no configurations on it, you can discover it to find all DPS-475/
575 synchronizers (up to 255 in total) on your network. To delete configuration information
on an EDGE-DPS575, complete these steps:
1
Open the EDGE-DPS575 Configuration dialog box, and then select the Gateway tab.
2
Click List Configurations to view the configuration information stored on the
DPS-Gateway.
The EDGE-DPS575 configuration information is named dpsconfig.xml when stored on the
gateway.
3
Select the configuration in the List of all configurations on the device box, and then
click Delete Configuration.
4
When a query box asks you to confirm the deletion of the file dpsconfig.xml, click Yes.
The List of all configurations on the device box immediately shows that no
dpsconfig.xml file remains on the gateway.
5
Click Refresh Device on the Gateway tab.
Adding DPS-575 Parameters to NUCLEUS Configurations
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create and edit
NUCLEUS configurations.
When creating a NUCLEUS configuration, you can add a DPS-475/575 or an EDGE-DPS575.
If you add the EDGE-DPS575 device, you will be able to add any parameter for all devices
that the gateway controls.
Any parameter that can be accessed on the DPS-475/575 via CCS Pilot or Magellan CCS
Navigator can also be added to a NUCLEUS configuration file.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Any NUCLEUS configurations that include DPS-475/575 synchronizers must be updated
every time you re-configure their associated EDGE-DPS575.
See Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 165
for more information.
Controlling an EDGE-DPS575 Gateway
The EDGE-DPS575 has no controllable parameters.
It has one alarm, Gateway not configured properly. This alarm triggers to indicate that
the EDGE-DPS575 is not configured, or is configured with more than 20 DPS/475/575
synchronizers.
SeeNetwork Event Diagnostics on page 237 for information on retrieving and
diagnosing alarms.
Using the DPS-575 Control Interface
The types of devices you can control depends on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
You can open a Control dialog box for each DPS-575 that is part of a configuration file on
an EDGE-DPS575.
Each DPS-575 Control dialog box shows a condensed version of more than 200 local
controls organized by function.
To open a Control dialog box for a DPS-475 or DPS-575, with Magellan CCS Navigator in
Control mode, double click on the synchronizer in a Network or Discovery folder in the
Navigation pane.
The Control dialog box has a Parameters tab and an Alarms tab.
215
216
Chapter 10
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and Control
Figure 10-3 DPS-575 Control Dialog Box
For information on parameters that can be adjusted in the Control dialog box, see your
DPS-475 or DPS-575 Installation and Operation Manual.
Three DPS-575 alarms are supported:
Table 10-1 DPS-575 Alarms That Appear in Magellan CCS Navigator
Fully Supported by
Magellan CCS
Navigator
Supported in Magellan
CCS Navigator via HTTP
Loss of Video
(Alarm Critical)
Yes
No (LED)
Loss of Genlock
(Alarm Critical)
Yes
No (LED)
Video Freeze
(Alarm Warning)
Yes
No (LED)
DPS-575 Parameter or
LED Name
Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and Monitoring
Using the DPS-575 control dialog box’s HTML Interface, you can access and change control
parameters that the CCS software itself does not support. The link to the synchronizer’s
Web controls is discovered separately.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can complete this
procedure.
Some DPS-575 controls cannot be accessed through the CCS interface. To access those
controls remotely, you must use the HTML interface. The HTML interface can be accessed
through CCS software in Control mode.
To create an Index item for accessing these controls, follow these steps:
1
With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, click Options in the Discovery pane.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The Discovery Options dialog box opens.
2
Click Add.
The Add Host dialog box opens.
3
Under Add a Host IP, enter the IP address of the DPS-575 device you want to control.
4
Under Select Products for Discovery, place a check beside HTTP, and then click Apply.
5
Click OK to close the Add Host dialog box.
6
Under Start Options, ensure that Enable Scanning of IP addresses is selected, and then
click OK to close the Discovery Options dialog box.
7
In the Discovery pane, click Start to commence a discovery.
8
When the discovery has run successfully and has found your HTTP host, click Save.
In your Navigation pane, an Index is added to the Discovery folder.
Double click this item
to open the DPS-575
Welcome page
Figure 10-4 HTML Web Server in the Navigation Pane
9
Switch Magellan CCS Navigator to Control mode.
If the DPS HTML Interface dialog box shows an error message when you switch screens,
the network has lost its connection to the synchronizer.
10 Double click the new Index item in the Discovery folder to open the HTML web server
controls for the DPS-575.
Figure 10-5 Welcome Page to the DPS-575 Over HTTP
See your DPS-475 or DPS-575 manual for information on using this interface.
217
218
Chapter 10
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and Control
Using the DPS-575 Updater
The EDGE-DPS575 cannot send software updates or images to DPS-575 digital processing
synchronizers. To do these tasks, you must use the DPS Uploader Utility.
If you have installed the DPS-575 Uploader Utility on the same PC as your CCS software,
you can start it from within Magellan CCS Navigator. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in
Build mode to open the Uploader utility.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can start the Uploader
Utility from inside Magellan CCS Navigator.
To open the DPS-575 Uploader Utility program, follow these steps:
1
Right click a DPS-575 resource icon and select Configuration.
2
Click on the File Transfer tab.
Figure 10-6 File Transfer Tab for DPS-575
3
Click Launch “Uploader.exe” to configure DPS.
If the DPS-575 Uploader Utility has been run on this PC before, it will start.
If the DPS-575 Uploader Utility has not been run on this PC before, or if it has been moved
since the last time it was started, a Browse dialog box will open.
Browse to the location of the DPS-575 Uploader Utility, select it and click OK, and a dialog
box similar to this will appear:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 10-7 DPS-575 Uploader Utility Application
You are now ready to upload files to the selected DPS-575 device.
Connecting the DPS Uploader Utility to a Specific DPS-575
When the DPS-575 Uploader Utility opens, it is configured to upload files to the DPS-575
unit that you clicked on. You do not need to restart it to connect to a different DPS-575
device.
To connect the DPS-575 Uploader Utility to a specific DPS-575 synchronizer, complete the
following steps:
1
Select Ethernet in the Connection Type section of the Upload File tab.
2
Type the synchronizer’s IP address in the field to the right of the Ethernet button.
3
Type in the Web Password for the DPS-575 synchronizer.
4
Click Save Settings.
219
220
Chapter 10
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and Control
221
11
NEO Frame Configuration
Frame Configuration Overview
See your NEO FR-3901, FR-3903 and FR-3923 Mounting Frames Installation and Operation
Manual for specific information relating to NEO devices, including NEO 3901RES-E resource
modules.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create a NEO Frame
configuration.
A NEO frame configuration describes which type of module, if any, should appear in each
frame slot. NEO frames can report alarms for the following events:

When someone removes a module from a slot that is configured to contain a certain
module

When someone inserts a module in a slot that formerly contained a module of a
different type
If you insert a module into a NEO frame slot that a frame configuration describes as
“empty,” the frame will not generate any alarms if the module is removed or a module of
another type replaces it. However, if someone inserts a different type of module in a slot
than the type that a frame configuration describes, Navigator will issue an “invalid”
message for the slot. And if a module is removed from a slot for which a frame
configuration describes a module’s presence, Navigator will issue a “missing” message for
the slot. These statuses will not appear in Navigator device tree, only in the Frame Specific
Control dialog box. To see the current status, open the NEO Frame’s Specific Control dialog
box. See Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes on page 257 for more
information.
By default, Navigator does not report these types of module changes for frames, and if
monitoring these events is not important for your installation, then you do not need
to configure your NEO frames. However, if you would like Navigator to notify you of these
types of module changes, then you must use Navigator to configure the frame.
The steps in creating a configuration file and saving it to a NEO frame are described in the
following topics:

Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame on page 222

Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO Frame on page 223
222
Chapter 11
NEO Frame Configuration
Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame
While a NEO frame only stores one frame configuration at once, you can save as many
frame configurations as you want in the Configuration folder. And then you can
download alternate frame configurations to the NEO frame as needed.
In build mode, configure those devices for which the user group has configuration rights. To
configure a NEO frame or CCS control panel for remote software control, you must create a
configuration file in the Navigation pane’s Configuration folder and transfer it to the
remote device—in addition to settings values in the device configuration dialog box.
To configure a NEO frame’s module assignments, complete these steps:
1
Discover the NEO frame and save the discovery results. (For information on running a
discovery, see Running a Partial Discovery on page 86)
The saved discovery results appear in the Discovery folder. The Discovery tool creates a
virtual NEO server icon as a place holder for the frame’s IP address. This NEO server icon
does not represent any actual physical device—just the IP address information
The NEO frame appears as the child of the virtual server icon. Any modules the NEO frame
contains appear as children of the frame icon.
The NEO server icon is a place holder for the
frame’s IP address and not a physical device.
Figure 11-1 Discovered NEO Frame
2
Drag-and-drop the NEO frame icon—not the NEO server icon—from the Discovery
folder into the Configuration folder.
A New Configuration icon appears in the Configuration folder as the child of the new
NEO frame and the virtual parent of any modules found during the discovery.
3
Ensure that all the modules you want to configure in the NEO frame now appear under the
New Configuration folder.
New Configuration Icon
Figure 11-2 NEO Frame Configuration after Drag-and-Drop Operation
4
Open the Configuration dialog box for the NEO frame, and then select the Frame tab.
The default “New Configuration” appears in the Choose the device configuration to
transfer box of the Frame tab.
5
In the Configuration folder of the Navigation pane, rename the New Configuration
icon.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
This name could include the creation date and intended use of the configuration or an
abbreviated form of its IP address.
The NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box immediately shows the new name in the
Frame tab’s Choose the device configuration to transfer box.
The configuration now exists in the Navigation pane. The next step is to transfer the
configuration to the NEO frame for the frame to use in managing its modules and slots.
Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO Frame
If you select Both NEO Resource Modules from the Configuration For: box, then you
are able to transfer configurations to both master and slave resource modules, but you are
not able to list configurations for them.
If you are in a Configuration dialog box for a NEO FR-3903 3RU frame with redundant
master and slave 3901RES-E resource modules installed in it, then this box is enabled. If
your NEO FR-3903 3RU frame only contains one 3901RES-E resource module, or if you are
in a Configuration dialog box for a NEO FR-3901 1RU frame, then this box is disabled.
To transfer a frame configuration to a NEO frame, complete these steps:
1
Open the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box and then select the Frame tab.
2
On the Frame tab, locate the Configuration For: box in the top right corner, and then
click the arrow to choose a NEO 3901RES-E redundant resource module to transfer
configurations to or list configurations for (choose between master, slave, or both).
3
On the Frame tab, select the configuration you want to transfer in the Choose the device
configuration to transfer list.
4
Click Perform Transfer on the Frame tab.
5
When a query box asks you to confirm the configuration transfer, click Yes.
6
After the transfer finishes, click Refresh Device on the Frame tab.
7
When a query box asks you to confirm the refresh, click Yes.
The configuration file has the name neo_device_policy.cfg and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Frame tab.
When the frame restarts or refreshes, the frame software reads the new configuration file
and, based on its content, reports the status of the frame and its modules to Navigator.
See the following topics:

Cancelling the Transfer of a NEO Frame Configuration File on page 223

Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log on page 224

Refreshing the NEO Frame Configuration on page 224
Cancelling the Transfer of a NEO Frame Configuration File
To cancel the transfer of a frame configuration file to a NEO frame, click Cancel on the
Frame tab of the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box.
223
224
Chapter 11
NEO Frame Configuration
If the file has already finished transferring to the frame, the Cancel option will no longer be
available. However, you can use commands in the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box
to delete the configuration file from the NEO frame.
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log
The Configuration tool reports the progress of frame configuration activity to the status
bar and logs the activity to the Log tab of the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box.
To view the configuration log, select the Log tab.
To save or clear the configuration log, right-click inside the Log tab and use the resulting
shortcut menu.
Refreshing the NEO Frame Configuration
To instruct the NEO frame to load a newly transferred frame configuration file, complete
these steps:
1
Open the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Frame tab.
2
Click Refresh Device.
3
When a query box asks you to confirm the refresh, click Yes.
The configuration file has the name neo_device_policy.cfg and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Frame tab.
Working With Configurations on a NEO Frame
Once you have transferred a configuration file to a NEO frame, you can perform the
following actions on it:

Listing the Configuration File Stored on a NEO Frame on page 224

Getting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame on page 225

Deleting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame on page 225
Listing the Configuration File Stored on a NEO Frame
The configuration file stored on a NEO frame has the name neo_device_policy.cfg.
The Configuration tool can retrieve and show the file name in the List of all
configurations on the device box of the Frame tab of the NEO frame’s Configuration
dialog box.
To list the configuration file stored on a NEO frame in the NEO frame’s Configuration
dialog box, complete these steps:
1
Open the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Frame tab.
2
Click List Configurations to list the one configuration file stored on the frame.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The NEO frame stores only one configuration at once, but you can store multiple NEO
configurations in the Configuration folder and then download them to the frame as
needed.
If no file lists, then the frame has no stored configuration information.
Getting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame
To get a configuration file from a NEO frame for use in the Navigation pane, complete
these steps:
1
Open the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Frame tab.
2
Click List Configurations to view the list of configurations stored on the frame.
3
Select the configuration file, neo_device_policy.cfg, and then click Get Configuration.
A Save As box appears with the list of any NEO frame configurations in the List of
configurations box.
4
Select an existing configuration in the Save As box’s List of Configurations box; or type a
new name in the Name box, and then click OK.
The retrieved file will now list both in the Choose the device configuration to transfer
box of the Frame tab and in the Configuration folder.
Deleting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame
To use the Configuration tool to delete a configuration file stored on a NEO frame,
complete these steps:
1
Open the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Frame tab.
2
Click List Configurations to view the configuration file stored on the frame.
NEO frame configurations are named neo_device_policy.cfg when stored on the frame.
3
4
Select the configuration file in the List of all configurations on the device box, and then
click Delete Configuration.
When a query box asks you to confirm the deletion of the file neo_device_policy.cfg, click
Yes.
The List of all configurations on the device box immediately shows that no files remain
on the frame.
5
Click Refresh Device on the Frame tab.
Once refreshed, the frame will now behave as an unconfigured frame. That is, it will not
report alarms if a module is removed or a replaced with a module of a different type.
Clearing the Configurations List from the Frame Tab
To clear the frame configuration list on the Frame tab of a NEO frame’s Configuration
dialog box, click Clear. This deletes the text in the tab’s List of all configurations on the
device list.
225
226
Chapter 11
NEO Frame Configuration
227
12
LCP and RCP Configuration
LCP and RCP Configuration Overview
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create an LCP or RCP
Control Panel configuration.
The Imagine Communications RCP-CCS-1U remote control panel and the LCP-3901-1U local
control panel provide control, monitoring, and secure access to a number of CCS devices on
a network.
A configuration defines the devices a control panel can control, and the menus on that
control panel when it is controlling those devices. You can create multiple control panel
configurations. As the needs of the network change, you can transfer a new configuration
to the panel, restart or refresh it, and view the status of its assigned devices based on the
content of the configuration.
An LCP or RCP configuration can contain two additional features: Favorites and CCS Trax.
When you configure Favorites for a device, you create a limited selection of parameters to
display on the control panel. When you configure CCS Trax, you set the panel to display a
specific device when a router switches to a specific destination.
See the following topics for more information:

Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP on page 227

Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP on page 231

Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP on page 235

Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and RCPs on page 236
Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create an LCP or RCP
Control Panel configuration.
ou can configure those devices for which your user group has configuration rights. For
NEO frames and CCS control panels, you must create configurations in the Navigation
pane’s Configuration folder, in addition to settings values in the device’s Configuration
dialog box.
228
Chapter 12
LCP and RCP Configuration
Configuration for a NUCLEUS control panel is described in NUCLEUS Configuration on
page 161.
To configure a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:
1
Discover the CCS LCP or RCP control panel and save the discovery results. For information
on running a discovery, see Running a Discovery on page 85.
The saved discovery results appear in the Discovery folder. The Discovery tool creates a
virtual NEO server icon as a placeholder for the control panel’s IP address. The CCS control
panel appears as the child of this virtual server icon.
Figure 12-1 Discovery Result For CCS Remote Control Panel
2
Drag-and-drop the CCS control panel icon—not the NEO server icon—from the
Discovery folder into the Configuration folder.
A New Configuration icon appears in the Configuration folder as the child of the
new CCS control panel icon.
New Configuration icon
Figure 12-2 New CCS Control Panel Configuration
3
Open the Configuration dialog box for the CCS control panel, and then select the
Control Panel tab.
The default “New Configuration” appears in the Choose the device configuration
to transfer box of the Control Panel tab.
Figure 12-3 Unnamed New Configuration
4
In the Configuration folder of the Navigation pane, rename the New
Configuration icon.
Figure 12-4 Configuration Renamed “Studio A June 22”
The CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box immediately shows the new name in
the Control Panel tab’s Choose the device configuration to transfer box.
5
Drag-and-drop the set of devices that you want the control panel to manage from the
Network folder to the control panel’s Configuration icon in the Configuration folder.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Configuration for CCS
Remote Control Panel
Configurations for NEO
frames
Figure 12-5 CCS RCP Configuration in the Configuration Folder
Resource icons that belong to a control panel configuration show their short name in the
Configuration folder. The short name matches what a control panel can show on its
display, a maximum of 20 characters per device name. If a default short name does not
adequately identify a resource, you can change it in the resource’s Navigation
Properties box—taking out spaces, abbreviating words, or including the last four digits of
an IP address.
6
Configure the alarm monitoring for CCS control panels by right-clicking a resource icon,
and then selecting Alarm Filtering or Alarm Filtering Contents from the resulting
shortcut menu.
7
If you want, you can now configure Favorites for your device.
8
The next step is to transfer the configuration to the CCS control panel for the control
panel’s use in managing its devices.
See these related topics:

Configuring Favorites for a Device on page 229

Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP on page 231
Configuring Favorites for a Device
Your CCS software can only configure parameter information for devices that are available
in the CCS database. The devices must be on line and discovered.
Favorites are your most commonly used parameters for a device. When you configure
favorites for a device you can send the configuration to a local or remote control panel.
Then when you select that device on the control panel, you can look at just those
parameters on the control panel, rather than having to scroll through the entire operator’s
list.
Note: the Favorites feature is not supported by older LCP and RCP panels. Only an
Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can configure favorites.
Configuring Favorites for a NUCLEUS control panel is described in NUCLEUS
Configuration on page 161.
229
230
Chapter 12
LCP and RCP Configuration
Setting Parameter Favorites
The Favorites menu option is disabled if the selected item is not a CCS device, for example
a folder.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can set Parameter Favorites.
To set parameter favorites for a device, follow these steps:
1
While in Build mode, right-click the device in the Configuration folder in the
Navigation pane.
The shortcut menu appears, with Favorites as one of its menu options.
2
Click on Favorites to open the Favorites dialog box, which displays the parameters of
the selected device in the form of a table.
Figure 12-6 Favorites Dialog Box
3
Place a check mark beside each parameter you would like to appear in the device’s favorite
parameters list. You can also select multiple rows simultaneously in order to toggle the
Favorite checkbox on or off. Toggle the checkbox on or off using the spacebar.
The Alias field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational
language, your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry in this
field. If you switch the keyboard back to data entry in an alternate language, data
corruption could occur.
If you check the Use Default Favorites checkbox, the device will use the entire operator
parameter list. Checking Use Default Favorites overrides any selections you may make
in the parameter list.
Click in the Alias column of a selected Favorite to change the name by which that
parameter appears on the control panel.
Before you see the change on the control panel device, you must transfer the configuration
to that control panel.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
For more information, see Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP on
page 231.
Copying Parameter Favorites
The device you copy favorites to must be an identical device to the one you copied favorites
from.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can copy Parameter
Favorites.
You can also copy parameter favorites from one device to another. There are three methods
of copying and pasting control panel display favorites for a device:

In Build mode, right click a source device in the control panel configuration to access
the shortcut menu. Select the Copy Favorites menu item to copy the favorites of
the selected device. Then select a target device in a control panel configuration that you
want to copy the favorites to. Right-click to access the shortcut menu again and then
select the Paste Favorites menu item in order to paste favorites from the source
device to the target device.

In Build mode, use the Copy/Paste functionality of the Navigation pane to copy and
paste device icons within the Configuration folder. The favorites of a selected device
are included as part of the Copy/Paste operation.

Drag-and-drop a device icon. The favorites of a selected device are included as part of
the drag-and-drop operation.
When copying parameter favorites to a device, they must still be loaded to a control panel
before the change can take effect.
Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP
The procedure for transferring a configuration file to a NUCLEUS control panel is described
in NUCLEUS Configuration on page 161.
To transfer a control panel configuration to a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these
steps:
1
Open the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box and select the Control Panel
tab.
2
On the Control Panel tab, select the configuration you want to transfer in the Choose
the device configuration to transfer list.
231
232
Chapter 12
LCP and RCP Configuration
Figure 12-7 Left Half of the Control Panel Tab
If you do not click Refresh device after transferring the configuration, you will need to
manually refresh the control panel by clicking Refresh Device after the transfer, or the
new settings will not take effect.
3
(Optional) Click Refresh device after transferring the configuration. This will
cause the panel to automatically refresh after the transfer.
4
Click Perform Transfer on the Control Panel tab.
5
When a query box asks you to confirm the configuration transfer, click Yes.
6
After the transfer finishes, if you did not select the Refresh device after transferring
the configuration check box, you must refresh the control panel, so that the control
panel loads the new configuration.
Click Refresh Device on the Control Panel tab.
The configuration file has the name control_panel.xml and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Control Panel tab.
Figure 12-8 Upper Right Portion of Control Panel Tab
Canceling the Transfer of an LCP or RCP Control Panel
Configuration File
To cancel the transfer of a control panel configuration to a CCS control panel, click Cancel
on the Control Panel tab of the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box.
If the file has already finished transferring to the control panel, the Cancel option will no
longer be available. However, you can use commands in the CCS control panel’s
Configuration dialog box to delete the configuration file from the CCS control panel.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log
The Configuration tool reports the progress of LCP or RCP control panel configuration
activity to the status bar and logs the activity to the Log tab of the CCS control panel’s
Configuration dialog box.
Status bar
Figure 12-9 Log Tab of Configuration Dialog Box
To view the control panel configuration log, select the Log tab of the control panel’s
Configuration dialog box.
To save the control panel configuration log, right-click inside the text box, and then select
Save Log As... on the resulting shortcut menu.
To clear the control panel configuration log, right-click inside the text box, and then select
Clear Log on the resulting shortcut menu.
Refreshing a CCS Control Panel Configuration
To instruct the CCS LCP or RCP control panel to load a newly transferred control panel
configuration, complete these steps:
1
Open the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Control
2
Panel tab.
Click Refresh Device.
3
When a query box asks you to confirm the refresh, click Yes.
The configuration file has the name control_panel.xml and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Control Panel tab.
Using the Configuration List on a CCS Control Panel
The configuration list on a CCS LCP or RCP control panel can help you perform various
functions. See the following topics:

Listing the Configurations Stored on a CCS Control Panel on page 234
233
234
Chapter 12
LCP and RCP Configuration

Clearing the Configurations List from the Control Panel Tab on page 234

Retrieving a Configuration File from a CCS Control Panel on page 234

Deleting a Configuration File from a Control Panel on page 235
Listing the Configurations Stored on a CCS Control Panel
The configuration file stored on a CCS LCP or RCP control panel has the name
control_panel.xml. You can retrieve and list the filename in the List of all
configurations on the device box of the Control Panel tab of the CCS control
panel’s Configuration dialog box.
Figure 12-10 Right Half of Control Panel Tab
To list configuration file information stored on a CCS control panel in the CCS control
panel’s Configuration dialog box, complete these steps:
1
2
Open the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Control
Panel tab.
Click List Configurations to view the list of configurations stored on the control panel.
If no file appears, then the control panel has no stored configuration information.
Clearing the Configurations List from the Control Panel Tab
To clear the list of configurations on the Control Panel tab of a CCS LCP or RCP control
panel’s Configuration dialog box, click Clear List.
This deletes the text in the List of all configurations on the device on the Control
Panel tab.
Retrieving a Configuration File from a CCS Control Panel
CCS Trax configuration data is part of a control panel configuration. When you import a
control panel configuration, Both CCS Trax and router configuration data will be
automatically imported as well, if it exists.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
To retrieve a configuration file from a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:
1
Open the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Control
Panel tab.
2
Click List Configurations to view the list of configurations stored on the control panel.
3
Select the configuration file, control_panel.xml, and then click Get Configuration.
A Save As box appears, listing any CCS control panel configurations in the List of
configurations box.
4
Select an existing configuration in the Save As box’s List of Configurations; or type a
new name in the Name box, and then click OK.
The retrieved file will now appear in the configuration list both in the Choose the
device configuration to transfer box of the Control Panel tab and
in the Configuration folder.
Deleting a Configuration File from a Control Panel
To delete a configuration file on a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:
1
Open the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Control
Panel tab.
2
Click List Configurations to view the configuration file stored on the control panel.
The CCS control panel configuration is named control_panel.xml.
3
Select control_panel.xml in the List of all configurations on the device box, and
then click Delete Configuration.
4
When a query box asks you to confirm the deletion of the file control_panel.xml, click Yes.
5
Click Refresh Device on the Control Panel tab.
Once refreshed, the control panel will behave as an unconfigured control panel.
Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP
Alarm filtering enables you to turn off the listing of alarms for CCS devices. Set the filtering
of alarms for a CCS device on the Diagnostics Filter tab or through the navigation
shortcut menu. The Filter column in the Navigation pane shows a check box for each
CCS device that has filtered alarms.
You can use the alarm filtering function to configure a control panel so that it can filter
(ignore) alarms from certain devices, but still control or navigate to all devices in your
system. Normally, a control panel has a limited number of frames and associated traffic that
it can manage; if you exceed this limit, you may receive an error message when you attempt
to perform a transfer. To get around the limit, you can filter frame and device alarms to
reduce the alarm traffic to the control panel.
You can either filter alarms from a single device (Alarm Filtering option) or filter alarms
from a parent resource and all of its contents (Alarm Filtering Contents option).
See these topics:

Using Alarm Filtering on page 236
235
236
Chapter 12
LCP and RCP Configuration

Using Alarm
Filtering
Using Alarm Filtering Contents on page 236
To filter a resource’s alarms, right-click the resource icon, and then select Alarm Filtering
from the resulting shortcut menu—if the option is not already selected.
Figure 12-11 A ‘Selected’ Alarm Filtering Option
If a check mark appears to the left of Alarm Filtering in the context menu, then the
feature is enabled. This means that alarms from this selected device will be ignored. When
alarms are filtered, they will only appear in the alarms log database. They will not show on
any other tabs of the diagnostic database.
If no check mark appears, then Alarm Filtering is disabled. This means that alarms from
this selected device can be received.
Using Alarm Filtering Contents
To set up the alarm filtering for a resource and all of its contents, right-click a parent
resource icon, and then select Alarm Filtering Contents from the resulting shortcut
menu.
A submenu appears with these two selections: Ignore Alarms and Enable Alarms.
Figure 12-12 Alarm Filtering Contents submenu

Choose Ignore Alarms to turn on alarm filtering for the parent device and all the
child resource icons below it.

Choose Enable Alarms to turn off alarm filtering (receive alarm messages) for the
parent device and all the child resource icons below it.
Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and RCPs
For information on using the password protection feature, see the manual that
accompanied your control panel.
If you forget your password for accessing the Setup menu on your control panel, you can
delete it using Magellan CCS Navigator. Follow these steps:
1
Using your CCS Magellan CCS Navigator software, manually delete the pw.txt file from the
Software Upgrade /f10 folder.
2
Reboot the panel.
The Setup menu can now be accessed without a password. Follow the password setup
procedure set out in your LCP or RCP Installation and Operation manual to configure a new
Setup menu password.
237
13
Network Event Diagnostics
Diagnostics Overview
The types of devices you can control depend on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
In Control mode, the Diagnostics tool monitors the CCS network for unusual events and
operating conditions. Alarms appear in the Diagnostics dialog box when the following
events and conditions occur:

Input conditions, such as video status

Frame conditions, such as power supply

Device instance conditions, such as the insertion, removal, or failure of modules

CCS host communications

CCS device settings

SNMP traps and SNMP status monitoring
By default, all alarms for devices you have monitoring access to appear in the Diagnostics
dialog box. However, you can filter or disable specific alarms. And you can configure an
e-mail service to notify you or others of alarms, if the network has an enabled e-mail service.
The Diagnostics tool supports time- and size-based alarm log management and enables the
automatic deletion of old logs. You can filter alarms by time period and configure the alarm
notifications to interrupt the PC’s screen saver. See the following topics for more
information:

Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box on page 248

Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64
Alarm queries are optimized to conserve network resources, so only outstanding alarms
report at start-up.
Showing the Diagnostics Dialog Box
To open the Diagnostics dialog box, click Diagnostics on the Tools menu.
238
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
The default location for the Diagnostics dialog box is across the bottom of the main
application dialog box. However, you can drag this dialog box to other locations and dock it
to the top or bottom border of the interface.
The Diagnostics dialog box is the interface to the Diagnostics tool. It has multiple pages
that show as tabs inside the Diagnostics dialog box. The four tabs, or pages, in the
Diagnostics dialog box are Monitor, Selected, Logged, and Offline.
As the CCS devices generate alarms, these alarms list in the appropriate place on these
pages. You receive notice of an alarm in these ways:

In Control mode, as a color-coded icon in the Alarm column of the Navigation pane

As a record or row in the Diagnostics dialog box’s alarm lists
The Diagnostics dialog box has four tabs. See the following sections for descriptions of
each tab:
Table 13-1 Tabs in the Diagnostic Dialog Box
Tab
Function
Monitor
Displays a list of all outstanding (uncleared) alarms from all
monitored CCS devices
Selected
Displays a list of all outstanding alarms for a device whose resource
icon you have selected in the Navigation pane. If you change the
selection of resource icons in the Navigation pane, the content of
this tab updates to reflect the alarms for the newly selected device
Logged
Displays a list of all alarms received since you started this session of
Magellan CCS Navigator on this PC
Offline
After you load an alarm file, displays the contents of that file;
otherwise, empty
For more information on using the tabs in the Diagnostic dialog box, see Using Alarm
Tables on page 238.
Using Alarm Tables
Alarms in an alarm table are organized into rows and columns.
You can reorder, resize and sort columns in the alarm list. Once you are happy with your
changes, you can save them so whenever you return to the list it appears as you set it.
Selecting a Row in an Alarm Table
To select a row in an alarm table, hover the cursor over the cell containing the Alarm icon
(a bell) until the cursor turns into a right arrow. Click the mouse button to select the row.
The selected row will have white text with a black background.
Figure 13-1 Selecting a Row in a Table
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The cursor changes to a right arrow when the mouse hovers over the Alarm icon. Click the
mouse to select the row.
Figure 13-2 Selected Row
Opening a Device Control Dialog Box from an Alarm Record
To open a resource’s Control dialog box from an alarm record in the Diagnostics dialog
box, double-click a cell in the alarm record. (A record is one row in an alarm list.) This will
open the Control dialog box of the CCS device that generated the alarm.
Reordering Columns in the Alarm List
To reorder the columns in an alarm list, complete these steps:
1
Click a column header to select the column.
Figure 13-3 Column Selected for Move
2
Drag the selected column left or right to the new location and release the mouse button to
drop the column into place.
Figure 13-4 Moved Column in New Location
Saving Column Order Changes
To save the changes you make to the order of the columns in an alarm list, complete these
steps:
1
Click Diagnostics on the Options menu.
This shows the Diagnostics Options box. The General tab tops the page order by default.
2
Select the Save column ordering check box (place a check in it).
3
Click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
239
240
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
Resizing
Columns
1
To change the width of a column in the alarm tables in the Diagnostics dialog box,
complete these steps:
Position the cursor over the right column divider so that the cursor turns into a bar with a
double-headed arrow bisecting it.
In the below example, to resize the ID column, the mouse hovers over the right column
divider.
Double-headed arrow
Figure 13-5 Resizing a Column
2
Click and drag the double-headed arrow to the right or left until the column is the width
you want.
If a column is too narrow, enlarge it by the same method described above or double-click
the right column divider.
Sorting
Columns
By default, the alarms in the Diagnostics dialog box list by order of occurrence. However,
you can sort the list by any field in the list and in either ascending or descending
alphanumeric order.
Table 13-2 Sorting Columns
Ascending
Descending
To sort an alarm list by a column heading in the alarm list, complete these steps:
1
Move the cursor inside the column heading cell.
The cursor will turn into a down-pointing arrow.
2
Double-click inside the column header cell.
The list automatically regenerates, sorted by that field.
3
To reverse the order of the sort, double-click a second time inside the column header cell.
The list automatically regenerates in the reverse sort order.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Interpreting Fields in the Alarm Lists
The Diagnostics dialog box shows alarm lists on each of its tabs. Each resource on the
network can generate one or more alarm records. Each row in an alarm list consists of a
separate alarm record. Each column in an alarm list consists of a different category or
“field” of information about the alarm.
The different alarm lists in the Diagnostics dialog box can have different fields (columns) of
information and you can configure each of them to display in different ways.
Table 13-3 Fields in the Alarm Lists
Information
Meaning
ID
Number that indicates the alarm’s order of occurrence
Time Issued
The time the PC received the alarm
Description
Details of the alarm
Error ID
Number that uniquely identifies an alarm condition
when different alarm conditions can occur for the same device
parameter
Error Level
Alarm level (critical, warning, information, or cleared)
Device ID
Identifying code of the CCS device that generated the alarm,
including the IP address of the device reporting the error
Device Name
The name of the device for which the alarm occurred
Parameter Name
The parameter name that triggered the alarm
Parameter Value
The parameter value that triggered the alarm
E-mail Sent
“Yes” indicates that an e-mail was sent; “No” indicates that
no e-mail was sent. See Setting Diagnostics Options on
page 247
User Info
Additional alarm information
Error Alias
This is an alternate name for the alarm that can be searched
when you export to a database. Aliases are configured in the
Favorites dialog. See Volume 5 for more information.
Ignored
“Yes” indicates that a user has signalled notice of the alarm;
“No” indicates the user has not signalled notice of the alarm.
Ignored alarms disappear from the Monitor and Selected
tabs, but remain on the Logged tab. See Ignoring Alarms on
page 244.
Comments
Displays comments that were configured in the Forward
Alarms and Individual Device Alarms dialog boxes (found
through the SNMP Agent Configuration dialog’s Trap
Selection tab)
Interpreting Alarm Colors
Color codes indicate the severity of alarms that are logged while monitoring the network.
Most alarms are messages about potential problems that may require user intervention.
241
242
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
The color coding occurs in three locations within the Magellan CCS Navigator interface:

The Diagnostics dialog box lists the alarms against color-coded backgrounds.
Figure 13-6 Color-Coded Alarm List in the Diagnostics Dialog Box

The Navigation pane shows colored boxes representing alarm levels, if you activate
this column in the Navigation Options box.
Figure 13-7 Color-Coded Alarm Column in the Navigation Pane

The Slot Status section of frame Control dialog boxes show color-coded
representations of alarm status for each occupied slot. See Setting Navigation
Options on page 120 and Setting Diagnostics Options on page 247.
Figure 13-8 Color-Coded Slots in a Frame Control Dialog Box
Table 13-4 Color Indicators in Control Dialog Boxes
Color
Means
White
Cleared or resolved
Red
Critical
Yellow
Warning
Green
Information
Orange
Acknowledged
Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus
A shortcut menu, which shows when you right-click an object, contains commands or
options that relate specifically to the right-clicked object as well as to the active operational
mode and dialog box.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
In the table below are the shortcut menu options available on tabs in the Diagnostics
dialog box. Not all options are available for each tab.
Table 13-5 Diagnostics Shortcut Menus
Option
Function
Help Reference
Find Device
Finds and highlights the resource icon for
a CCS device in the Navigation pane
Finding a CCS Device
from an Alarm
Record on page 243
Local
This option is only available for SNMP
Acknowledge devices and it locally acknowledges the
selected trap, changing the color of the
alarm to orange
Locally
acknowledging
SNMP traps on
page 244
Ignore (F4)
Clears selected alarms from the Monitor
and Selected tabs
Ignoring Alarms on
page 244
Ignore All
Clears all alarms from the Monitor and
Selected tabs
Ignoring All
Alarms on page 244
Refresh
Regenerate the lists of alarms shown on Refreshing the
each page of the Diagnostics dialog box Alarm Lists on
page 245
Clear
Clears selected alarms from the Logged
and Offline tabs
Clearing Alarms on
page 245
Clear All
Clears all alarms from the Logged and
Offline tabs
Clearing Alarms on
page 245
Save Alarms
to...
Saves alarms to a specific offline alarm
log file
Saving Alarms to a
File on page 245
Save Alarms
Saves alarms to the default alarm log
Saving Alarms to the
Default Alarm
Log on page 246
Load Alarms
Loads alarms in an offline alarm file into
the Offline tab
Loading an Archived
Alarm Log into the
Offline Tab on
page 246
Properties...
Enables the editing of properties
associated with an alarm
Setting Diagnostics
Properties for an
Alarm Message on
page 246
Options...
Opens the Diagnostics Options box
Setting Diagnostics
Options on page 247
Finding a CCS Device from an Alarm Record
To find the resource icon for a CCS device from one of its alarm records, complete these
steps:
1
In the Diagnostics dialog box, right-click a cell in the alarm record. (A record is one row
in an alarm list.)
2
Select Find Device from the resulting shortcut menu.
The Navigation tool highlights the resource icon in the Navigation pane, opening any
closed folders required to show the resource icon.
243
244
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
Locally acknowledging SNMP traps
To locally acknowledge a trap for a SNMP device, complete these steps:
1
In the Diagnostics dialog box, right-click a cell in the trap record (a record is one row in an
alarm list).
2
Select 'Local Acknowledge' from the resulting shortcut menu.
In the case of acknowledgement, an email is sent to report that the alarm has been
acknowledged (if the system is configured to send emails). The Diagnostic dialog box (log
entry) and Navigator page with the device on it are highlighted in orange (this is the color
that indicates "acknowledged"). If there is another critical notification for the device, the
color remains red (highest alarm level).
Opening a Device Control Dialog Box from an Alarm Record
To open a resource’s Control dialog box from an alarm record in the Diagnostics dialog
box, double-click a cell in the alarm record. (A record is one row in an alarm list.) This will
open the Control dialog box of the CCS device that generated the alarm.
Ignoring
Alarms
You can ignore alarms individually, or you can ignore all alarms. See the following for more
information:

Ignoring an Alarm on page 244

Ignoring All Alarms on page 244
Ignoring an Alarm
All alarms are listed on the Diagnostics dialog box's Logged tab. However, when you
ignore an alarm, the alarm disappears from lists on the Monitor and Selected tabs and
from the Navigation pane’s Alarm column, if you have activated the column in the
Navigation Options box. However, the alarm still appears on the Logged tab and the
Ignored field for that alarm changes from No to Yes.
To ignore an alarm on one of the Diagnostics dialog box’s tabs, select an alarm record (a
row in the alarm list), and then either press F4 or right-click and then select Ignore from the
resulting shortcut menu.
You could instead right-click in a cell of an alarm record, and then select Ignore
from the resulting shortcut menu.
To select an alarm to be ignored, see Using Alarm Tables on page 238.
Ignoring All Alarms
To ignore all outstanding alarms, right-click anywhere in the Diagnostics dialog box, and
then click Ignore All from the resulting shortcut menu.
This clears all alarms from the Diagnostics dialog box’s Monitor or Selected tab, as well
as from the Navigation pane’s alarm column if the column has been activated in the
Navigation Options box.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Additionally, the Ignore field for all outstanding alarms in the Logged tab changes from
“No” to “Yes.”
Refreshing the Alarm Lists
Use this procedure only if you have ignored alarms and want to review the outstanding
alarms for all devices on the CCS network. If the network has many CCS devices, the list of
all outstanding alarms may take several minutes to regenerate.
To refresh or regenerate the lists of alarms shown on each page of the Diagnostics dialog
box, right-click anywhere inside the Diagnostics dialog box, and then click Refresh
from the resulting shortcut menu.
Clearing Alarms
Because SNMP traps do not generically support “alarm clearing”, you can limit the number
of traps sent. See Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64 for more
information.
You can clear selected alarms on the Logged and Offline tabs and remove them from the
tabs. To clear a record, right-click inside an alarm record, and then select Clear from the
resulting shortcut menu.
You can clear all alarms on the Logged and Offline tabs and remove them from these tabs.
To clear all records, right-click inside an alarm record, and then select Clear All from the
resulting shortcut menu.
Saving Alarms to a File
You can save the current alarm list to either a specified offline alarm log or the default alarm
log.
Saving Alarms to a Specified Offline Alarm Log
You can save a snapshot of the current alarm lists in the Diagnostics dialog box to a
Microsoft Access database file for archival purposes.
To save an alarm list to a specific offline alarm database file, instead of the default file for
the tab, complete these steps:
1
Right-click in an alarm list in the Diagnostics dialog box.
2
Click Save Alarms to from the resulting shortcut menu.
3
When a Save As box appears, either accept the default filename or select another. Then
click Save.
If a file with that name already exists, an alert box appears, asking you to confirm that you
want to replace the contents of the database.
4
Click OK to replace the current content.
245
246
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
Saving Alarms to the Default Alarm Log
To save a snapshot of the current alarm list to the default alarm log file, complete these
steps:
1
Right-click an alarm item in an alarm list in the Diagnostics dialog box.
2
Click Save Alarms from the resulting shortcut menu.
If you have not yet established the name of the default alarm log file, a Save As box
appears.
3
Either accept the default file name or select another. Then click Save.
If there is another file by that name, an alert box appears, asking you to confirm that you
want to replace the current content of the database.
4
Click OK to replace the content.
Loading an Archived Alarm Log into the Offline Tab
You can view current or previous alarm files by loading them into the Diagnostic dialog
box’s Offline tab. By default, these files reside in the subfolders at this location:
c:\Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\Users
To load a previously saved alarm log file into the Offline tab, complete these steps:
1
Right-click anywhere inside the Diagnostics dialog box’s Offline tab.
This shows the shortcut menu for the Offline tab.
2
Point to Load Alarms on the shortcut menu and click Load....
This shows the Open box, showing the list of alarm logs that you have saved to files. These
files are all in Microsoft Access database (*.mdb) file format.
3
Select the file name of the alarm log you want to open and click Open.
The file shows on the Offline tab.
If you have set the Offline tab of the Diagnostics Options box to show only a partial
alarm list, you can move forward and backward in the list by using the Previous and Next
commands in the diagnostics shortcut menu.
To show the next set of alarms in the entire list on the Offline tab, right-click inside the
page to show the shortcut menu for the Offline tab. Point to Load Alarms on the shortcut
menu, and then click Next.
To show the previous set of alarms in the entire list on the Offline tab, right-click inside the
page to show the shortcut menu. Point to Load Alarms on the menu, and click Previous.
Setting Diagnostics Properties for an Alarm Message
You can view and edit the properties associated with an alarm in the Diagnostics
Properties box. For example, you can add additional user information for an alarm stored
in the alarm log.
To set or review diagnostic properties of an alarm message, complete these steps:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
1
Right-click the alarm in an alarm list in the Diagnostics dialog box.
This shows the diagnostics shortcut menu.
2
Click Properties.
This shows the Diagnostics Properties box. You can only modify the User Info and
Ignored fields.
Figure 13-9 Diagnostics Properties Box
3
To change the User Info box, select the box and then type in the new information.
4
Select the Ignored check box to ignore an alarm.
5
Click Close.
Setting Diagnostics Options
See Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64 to determine how many
SNMP alarms can appear in the Diagnostics dialog box.
You can set alarm acknowledgement, logging, filtering, and reporting options in the
Diagnostics Options box.
To set diagnostics options, complete these steps:
1
Click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or right-click in the Diagnostics dialog box and
then click Options....
The Diagnostics Options box has six tabs—General, Filter, E-Mail Forwarding Service,
Log, and Offline—show at the top of the box.
See the following topics to complete these six tabs:
2

Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box on page 248

Setting Alarm Filtering Options on page 249

Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms on page 251

Setting Alarm Log Options on page 252

Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs on page 253
After completing these six tabs, click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
247
248
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box
To set options on the General tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these steps:
1
If the Diagnostics Options box is closed, then click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or
right-click in the Diagnostics dialog box and then click Options....
2
Select the General tab if other tabs are hiding the options on the General page.
Figure 13-10 Diagnostics Options General Tab
The General tab of the Diagnostics dialog box contains four options, each with a check
box. The options and their functions are as follows:
Table 13-6 General Tab Options and Their Functions
Option
Function
Show Diagnostics
dialog box on top
when an alarm occurs
Makes the Diagnostics dialog box visible when
an alarm occurs
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Table 13-6 General Tab Options and Their Functions(Continued)
Option
Function
Play sound when an
alarm is received
Generates an audible signal when an alarm occurs.
There are two options:

Use Default sound—The default sound has no
loop and plays for warning, critical, and
informational alarms.

Use Custom sound—Click Browse to choose a
WAV or MP3 audio file. You can select Loop, and
you can assign the type of alarms that trigger the
sound.
The alarm sound can be shut off by disabling,
ignoring, or filtering the alarm. It shuts off by itself if
the alarm condition is resolved.
Save column ordering
Saves the changes to the order of columns in
Diagnostics dialog box beyond one software session
Turn off screen saver
when an alarm is
received
Enables the software to turn off a screen saver when
an alarm occurs, so that an alarm notification
message shows on the screen
3
Select the check box of each option you want to enable, and clear the check box of each
option you want to disable.
4
Select another tab to continue setting Diagnostics Options, or click OK to close the
Diagnostics Options box.
Setting Alarm Filtering Options
To set the options on the Filter tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these steps:
1
If the Diagnostics Options box is closed, then click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or
right-click in the Diagnostics dialog box and then click Options....
2
Select the Filter tab.
249
250
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
Figure 13-11 Diagnostics Options Filter Tab
The alarm filtering capabilities enable you to turn off the listing of alarms in the
Diagnostics dialog box for less-critical devices. Filtered alarms do not show on any tabs
in the Diagnostics dialog box, but are stored in the Alarms log database. (See Setting
Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs on page 253 to view the database.)
3
The Show alarms for section lists four error types—Critical, Warning, Information, and
Acknowledged—for which you can either enable or disable alarm filtering.
Select the check box of each error type for which you want to enable alarm filtering, and
clear the check box of each type of error for which you want to disable filtering.
4
In the Ignore alarms during the following time periods section, you can create ranges
of time in which alarms are ignored.
a
To add a new time period for CCS Magellan CCS Navigator to ignore alarms, click Add
and then type a Filtering start time and Filtering end time into the resulting Add
Alarm Filtering Time Period box.
b
To modify a time period, select the time period in the Ignore alarms during the
following time periods box and then click Modify. Then type new times into the
Alarm Filtering Time Period box.
c
To delete a time period from the list, select the time period and then click Delete.
d
To delete all time periods from the list, click Delete All.
5
In the Ignore Alarms from Selected Devices section, select the check box of each
network resource for which you want to enable alarm filtering, and then clear the check
box of each resource for which you want to disable filtering.
6
Select another tab to continue setting Diagnostics Options, or click OK to close the
Diagnostics Options box.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms
The network must have an enabled e-mail messaging service for the E-mail Forwarding
Service to work. If the network does not have e-mail support, then no e-mails will reach
their destinations.
To set the options on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab of the Diagnostics Options
box, complete these steps:
1
If the Diagnostics Options box is closed, then click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or
right-click in the Diagnostics dialog box and then click Options....
2
Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
Figure 13-12 Diagnostic Options E-mail Forwarding Service Tab
You can enable or disable the e-mail notification, add or remove e-mail recipients, and set
the severity levels for the generation of alarms on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
3
Select the E-mail Forwarding Service check box to enable the CCS application to send
e-mail notifications of resource errors.
4
In the Send an E-mail for section, select the check box beside each error type for which
you want to receive e-mail notification. Clear the check box beside each error type for
which you do not want e-mail notification.
The five error types are Critical, Warning, Information, Acknowledged, and Error Level
Change.
5
In the E-mail Send Options section, click the arrow and select the method in which you
want to send the e-mail.
Choose from MAPI (your Outlook mail profile settings) or SMTP (configured server).
6
Click Properties.
Depending on the e-mail sending method chosen in step 5, either the MAPI Mail
Properties or SMTP Properties dialog box opens.
7
To configure the settings in the MAPI Mail Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a
Click the arrow from the Profile Name box, and then select a profile name from the
list.
b
If the required name is not in the list, click Add to add a new profile name to the list.
The Add Profile Name box opens.
c
Type a sender profile name in the Add Profile Name box, and then click OK.
251
252
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
8
9
To configure the settings in the SMTP Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a
Specify the SMTP server name, port number, and reply e-mail addresses in the
corresponding fields.
b
If your SMTP server requires authentication in order to send external e-mail, complete
the Authentication section of this dialog box.
In the E-mail Addresses of Recipients section, click Add... to show the Add Recipient
box.
10 Type the e-mail address of a proposed error notification recipient in the box, and then click
OK.
This closes the Add Recipient box and lists the new e-mail recipient in the E-mail
Addresses of Recipients box.
11 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the e-mail addresses of other proposed recipients of
notification e-mails.
12 Select another tab to continue setting Diagnostics Options, or click OK to close the
Diagnostics Options box.
Setting Alarm Log Options
Alarms log to a Microsoft Access database file, created according to setting on the Log tab
of the Diagnostic Options box.
1
If the Diagnostics Options box is closed, then click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or
right-click in the Diagnostics dialog box and then click Options....
2
Select the Log tab.
Figure 13-13 Diagnostic Options Log Tab
On the Log tab, you can set options for saving alarms to an alarm log, set limits for the
alarm log’s size and longevity, and create a policy for deleting old alarm logs.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
3
Select the Save alarms to database check box to enable the alarm log. Clear the check
box to disable the log.
4
To determine how often a new alarm database is created, complete the Create a new
alarm log when database section:
a
In the Is Larger Than box, leave the default value, or select the default number and
type in another number, or click the arrows to increase or decrease the number.
The default maximum size of the alarm log file is 1 megabyte.
b
In the Or Is Older Than box, leave the default value or select the number and type in a
different value.
c
In the units of time box, leave the default selection or click the arrow and select from
the list: days, hours, weeks, months, or years.
Magellan CCS Navigator creates a new alarm database at the specified interval, and
renames previous copies for archival purposes.
5
If you want to delete logs that are older than a particular age, in the Log Policy section,
complete these steps:
a
Select the check box to implement a log deletion policy.
b
Type an integer value into the next box.
c
Click the arrow in the third box and select a unit of time: days, hours, weeks,
months, or years.
If you do not check in this section, logs will be kept indefinitely, or until they are manually
deleted.
6
7
In the Logged Tab Options section, complete one of these actions:

To list all alarms on the Logged tab, select the Display all alarms on Logged tab
check box.

To set a maximum number of alarms to list on the Logged tab, clear the Display all
alarms on Logged tab check box. Then either accept the default maximum number
of alarms to list, or select the default and then type in another maximum number. This
determines the number of alarms that will show at once on the Logged tab,
up to a maximum of 1,000 alarms. When the limit you set is reached, the content of
the Log tab clears.
Select another tab to continue setting Diagnostics Options, or click OK to close the
Diagnostics Options box.
Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs
To set the options on the Offline tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these
steps:
1
If the Diagnostics Options box is closed, then click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or
right-click in the Diagnostics dialog box and then click Options....
2
Select the Offline tab to determine how an alarm log loads into the Diagnostics dialog
box’s Offline tab for viewing offline.
253
254
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
Figure 13-14 Diagnostics Options Offline Tab
You can either view all alarms or set a maximum number of alarms to view. If you have set a
Maximum number of alarms to load, you must use the Load > Previous and Load >
Next commands in the dialog box’s shortcut menu to move forward and backward in the
alarms list.
3
Complete one of these actions:

To load all alarms at once, select the All alarms in database check box.
OR

To set a maximum number of alarms to load at once, clear the All alarms in
database check box, and then type a number in the Maximum number of
alarms to load box.
The default maximum number of alarms to load is 100, but you can select the number and
type in a different one.
4
Select another tab to continue setting Diagnostics Options, or click OK to close the
Diagnostics Options box.
255
14
Control
Overview
CCS Device Control
When Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode (the indicator in the bottom right of the
screen is green and says Control) and you double-click an item in the Navigation pane, a
Control dialog box opens for that device.
The types of devices you can control depend on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
Only an Administrator user can set control and configuration access rights to specific CCS
devices. Group membership determines an individual user’s control access to individual
devices.
The Control dialog box contains either generic or product-specific graphical representations
of each device parameter.
In Control mode, you can control the parameters of devices whose resource icons appear in
the Network and Discovery folders. These are the devices to which you have Control
access. For information on assigning access permissions to devices, see Managing User
Accounts on page 32.
The Control tool also offers simple HTTP control for devices that have a Web server, such as
the DPS-575 Multifunction Analog/Digital AV Synchronizer. You can view the device’s Web
page in a Web browser dialog box on the application desktop. See Device Control
through HTTP on page 293.
Opening and Closing Control Dialog Boxes
There are no controls for an X75-RCP in this release of Magellan CCS Navigator.
To show a Control dialog box for a specific CCS device, choose one of these three options:

Double-click the CCS device’s resource icon in the Navigation or Graphical
Navigation pane; or if the device is a module, double-click the slot of the frame in
which the module resides.

Right-click the CCS device’s resource icon in the Navigation or Graphical Navigation
pane and then select Control from the resulting navigation shortcut menu.
256
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control

Click the CCS device’s resource icon in the Navigation or Graphical Navigation pane
and then point to Tools on the menu bar, and then click Control..

In a Graphical Navigation page, set an action (the effect component of a rule) to
open a Control dialog box. See Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action on
page 74 for more information.
Control dialog boxes are available depending on the licenses available in the system. For
example, if you have ISCP, you will not have the Control dialog box that controls a NEO
frame.
All parameter fields on a Control dialog box are unavailable—even LED colors—until the
Control tool has fully established a connection with the device. If the PC loses the
connection with the CCS device, the parameters are unavailable and appear dimmed in the
Control dialog box.
When the status bar reads “Access Disabled” or “Ready” (no remote control), all
parameters on the Control dialog box show their current value but you cannot modify
them.
Specific parameters in a Control dialog box may also become read-only when the status
bar reads “Limited Access,” or when the setting of one parameter causes the disabling of
another.
When you click on a Selenio module or frame to in either Build or Control mode, this
launches the HTTP application for the Selenio frame. See your Selenio documentation for
more information on the control panel.
Showing a Hidden Control Dialog Box
The name of each open Control, Configuration and Signal Monitor dialog box appear
on a list at the bottom of the Window menu.
To show a hidden, but open, Control dialog box, click on the Window menu on the menu
bar, and then click the name of the hidden dialog box. The Window menu lists the CCS
device’s name and a Control icon appears to the left of the name. If you are using
Workbook mode, select the tab that includes both the CCS device’s name and a Control
icon. (The same device may have open Configuration or Signal Monitor dialog boxes
listed on the Window menu.)
Closing a Control Dialog Box
To close a CCS device’s Control dialog box, choose one of these three methods:

Click Close in the upper right corner of the dialog box

Select the Control dialog box and then click Close on the Window menu

Right click in the Control dialog box and select Close from the menu that appears
Configuring Custom Control Views
When you double-click on a device in the Navigation pane in Control mode, by default
Magellan CCS Navigator opens a Control dialog box. To configure Magellan CCS Navigator
to open a Navigator page instead, follow these steps:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
1
Right-click on a device, and then select Properties from the context menu that appears.
2
Select the Device tab.
Figure 14-1 Device Properties Dialog Box
3
From the Control dialog box drop-down box, choose Custom.
4
Click Browse.
Figure 14-2 Choosing a Page to Open
5
Click a row in the Select Page table, and then click Open.
The Navigation Properties dialog box updates to indicate the name of the page that
opens when you click on this device in Control mode, in the Navigation pane and on icons
associated with this device in Graphical Navigation pages.
Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes
Depending on your system configuration, you may not have access to all devices.
The Control tool provides both specific and generic control dialog boxes. The design of a
specific Control dialog box reflects the control parameters found on the individual CCS
device it controls; however, a generic Control dialog box can control any type of CCS
device.
The Control tool offers both a specific and a generic Control dialog box for most
CCS devices, but some devices have only generic Control dialog boxes. The generic
interface obtains information from the CCS device on the fly, and then organizes and
presents the device’s control parameters into a number of groups. See the following topics
for more information:
257
258
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control

Navigating the Generic Control Tab on page 258

Using Older Generic Control Dialog Boxes on page 263
A specific Control dialog box shows automatically if it exists. If it doesn’t, the generic
Control dialog box appears.
If a device has both types of Control dialog boxes, you may want to switch back and forth
between them, since they can offer different ways of organizing and viewing a device’s
control parameters.
Checking the Active Window Type
To find out what types of Control dialog boxes a device has and which type is active,
right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box to show a control shortcut menu.
Two options near the top of the menu are Specific Control and Generic Control. A check
mark appears to the left of the active window type.
If Specific Control is unavailable on the control shortcut menu, then the device does not
have a specific Control dialog box. You must control the device with a generic Control
dialog box.
To activate a CCS device’s specific Control dialog box, right-click inside the device’s generic
Control dialog box and then select Specific Control from the resulting control shortcut
menu.
To activate a CCS device’s generic Control dialog box, right-click inside the device’s specific
Control dialog box and then select Generic Control from the resulting control shortcut
menu.
Showing a Container Device’s Control Dialog Boxes
To open the Control dialog boxes for a container resource and of all its children, right-click
the resource icon, and then select Control Contents from the resulting shortcut menu.
Control dialog boxes have Control and Alarm tabs or pages.
The Control tabs allows you to browse and set parameters for the CCS device. In the top
right corner of some devices you can view a streaming thumbnail which displays the current
output for the CCS device. See Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Control
Dialog Box on page 259 for more information.
The Alarms tabs allow you to set alarm preferences for the alarms on the CCS device. For
more information, see Setting Alarms on page 261.
The X75 Control dialog box also includes a third tab. The Video Streaming tab contains a
streaming thumbnail and the URL for the streaming output. For more information, see
Streaming in a Control Dialog Box on page 278.
Navigating the Generic Control Tab
When you select the Control tab, it will always open to the top level of the parameter list.
As you browse the parameter pages, information at the top of the screen updates to allow
you to see the path you have travelled and the current page of parameters.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Current page
Path to current parameter page
Figure 14-3 X75 Control tools
To view a list of parameters you have recently navigated to, right click in Control mode and
choose Parameter Info from the shortcut menu. To sort the list, click on any of the column
headers.
See your CCS device’s installation and operation manual for a complete explanation of its
parameters. A parameter list is available from our website, or on your installation DVD.
The generic Control tab contains two methods to search for any parameter that is available
on the unit.

Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Control Dialog Box on page 259

Navigating Parameters Using the Tree View on page 260
Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Control Dialog Box
By default, the Controls tab organizes parameters into folders.
Current level
Folders in the current
level
Click here for the rest of
the folders at this level
Figure 14-4 X75 Control Tab
If a particular folder level contains more items than can be viewed in the width of the
Control panel, a down arrow appears at the right edge of the screen. To see the rest of the
menu items, you have two options: Make the panel wider, or click the down arrow to open
a menu that shows the hidden items.
259
260
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
When you click on a folder, the row of folders refreshes to display the sub-folders in that
folder, at the same time that the path to the current parameter page updates, and the
parameters at that level in the folder structure appear. If there are more parameters than
can fit in the page, a scroll bar will appear at the right edge of the panel. Use that to view
the other parameters.
Ascending Levels in the Controls Tab
The buttons in the top left corner of the Controls tab allow you to navigate through the
parameter list.
Up one
level Home
Figure 14-5 Control Tab Levels
You can also use the Home and Up one level buttons to navigate upward in the Controls
tab’s tree view.
Click Home to go back to the top level, or right click in the toolbar and select Navigate
Home.
Click Up one level to go one step higher in the parameter hierarchy, or right click in the
toolbar and select Navigate Up.
Click in the path to go to that level in the parameter list.
Navigating Parameters Using the Tree View
The tree view offers another way to navigate through the devices’s parameters in the
Control tab.
To open a tree view on the Control tab, right click in the navigation area near the top and
select Tree View from the shortcut menu.
A nested list of all the controls appears on the left side of the screen. The parameters
available at the currently selected level of the list appear to the right of this list, and across
the top the currently selected level, and the path to that level, continue to be displayed.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Tree view
Selected level
Parameters
available at
that level
Figure 14-6 Control Dialog Box with Tree View Open
A plus symbol (+) to the left of an item in this list indicates that there is another layer of
parameters below this one, but the contents are currently hidden. To show the contents of
a closed level, click the plus (+) symbol to the left of that level.
A minus (-) symbol to the left of an item in this list indicates that the level has contents, or
children, and is showing its contents. To hide the contents of that level, click the minus
symbol (-) to the left of it.
The absence of either a plus (+) or minus (-) symbol to the left of a level indicates that the
level has no contents. If you click on a level with no plus or minus symbol in the tree view,
you should always see parameters or controls in the right section of the Control dialog box.
When an upper level of the Tree View is expanded, there may be more open contents in the
Tree View than can be displayed in the dialog box. In this case, the tree view also has scroll
bars at the right bottom of the dialog box that allow you to navigate up and down the list
of parameters.
Setting Alarms
The alarm feature operates only in Control mode, when the Control tool is communicating
with the CCS device.
To adjust the settings of the available alarms for a CCS device, complete these steps:
1
Double-click the resource icon for the CCS device in the Navigation pane to open the
device’s Control dialog box.
2
Select the Alarm tab to show the list of alarms.
261
262
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Navigate through
alarm pages with
these buttons
Figure 14-7 Alarms Tab of X75
Each alarm represents a different alarm condition.
To display a list of alarms you have recently navigated to, when in Control mode, right click
and choose Alarm Info from the shortcut menu. To sort the list, you can click on any of the
column headers.
3
If you know the page of the alarm you are looking for, click the page number below the
Alarm tab’s banner at the top of the dialog box to go to that page. Or, use the four buttons
to the left of these numbers to navigate to the first page, the previous page, the next page
or the last page.
To the right of each alarm name is a Status column. The colors in this column indicate the
alarm’s current status:
Table 14-1 Alarm Status Colors
Alarm Color
Meaning
Red
Major alarm
Yellow
Minor alarm
Black
Not active
The alarm status is read-only.
Not all Alarm Options are available on all devices.
4
To adjust the settings for an alarm, click the field you want to adjust.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Table 14-2 Alarm Settings
Alarm Option
Effect
Enable/Disable
Determines whether the alarm will trigger or not; if the
label shows the word “Enabled,” an alarm condition
will generate an alarm; but if the label shows
“Disabled,” an alarm condition will not generate
an alarm
Alarm priority
Determines the alarm priority that will be reported when
this alarm condition is triggered
Trigger (s)
Determines how quickly the alarm will trigger (in
seconds); if the alarm level is reached for less time than
the Trigger duration, then the alarm will not trigger
Clear (s)
Determines how long the alarm condition has to be off
(in seconds) in order for the alarm to clear
Ack
When checked, allows other users on the network to
see that you have acknowledged the alarm
You will use the Navigation and Diagnostics tools in using alarms. For information on
using alarm tools, please see Network Event Diagnostics on page 237 and Network
View Construction on page 93.
Using Older Generic Control Dialog Boxes
Older CCS devices use a slightly different Control dialog box. It still has a Control page and
an Alarms page.
The Control tab lists all the controllable parameters for a device. This tab has two parts:

a parameter-classification pane on the left

a parameter-control pane on the right
When you select an item in the parameter-classification pane, the second pane shows the
parameters grouped under the selected item.
263
264
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Figure 14-8 Control Tab Showing Video Analog Composite Parameters
The Alarms tab shows all the parameters for which the device supports alarm monitoring.
To confirm that the device can
send an alarm for a parameter,
click the Test button that
corresponds to it.
The alarm appears for
approximately 10 seconds in
the Diagnostics dialog box.
Then it is automatically cleared
and it will disappear from the
alarm lists in the Diagnostics
dialog box.
Figure 14-9. Alarms Tab
Creating Hierarchical Domains
The shortcut menu for the parameter-classification pane enables you to create hierarchical
domains from the existing device domains. Right-click to show the shortcut menu, which
has options to add, modify, and delete user-defined domains.
With this feature, you can create up to four levels of hierarchical domains.
You can modify the user-defined domains and delete them from the
parameter-classification pane as needed.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 14-10 Domain Grouping Box
Checking a Device’s Control Status
Magellan CCS Navigator can show individual Control dialog boxes for each device assigned
to you for monitoring. You can determine the control status of each device and its network
connection by reading the message in the Control dialog box's status bar. The status bar,
which appears in the bottom left corner of the Control dialog box, changes color when an
alarm condition occurs.
Table 14-3 Status Messages in the Control Dialog Box Status Bar
Message
Meaning
Loading control
The Control tool is trying to establish a connection
with the selected CCS device.
Control
unavailable
No control is available for the CCS device.
Not ready,
reading
The Control tool has connected to a CCS device and
is reading its control settings. However, the device is
not yet ready for remote control.
Ready
The CCS device is ready to receive control
commands.
Connected
A connection to the CCS device has been
established.
Not ready,
retrying
The connection to the device has been lost.
This occurs when the physical connection
to the network is broken, or when a device loses
power. The Control tool automatically attempts
to reconnect with the CCS device.
Operation failed A control operation of a CCS device has failed.
Ready (No
remote control)
The CCS device is ready, but can only be controlled
locally from the module edge. However, the Control
tool shows the current parameter values of the CCS
device.
265
266
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Using the Control Shortcut Menu
If you right-click a Control dialog box, a control shortcut menu appears. Some shortcut
menu options are only available in Control mode. Below is a table describing the control
shortcut menu options, with references to related topics:
Not all commands will always be available. Depending on the current selection, some
commands might be disabled. Specifically, the Specific Control, Generic Control, Load
Preset, Copy Preset, Save Preset and Delete Preset commands may not be available.
Table 14-4 Control Shortcut Menu
Command
Function
Reference
Find Device
Finds a device’s resource icon in
the Navigation pane
Using a Control Dialog Box
to Find a Resource Icon on
page 267
Specific
Control
Activates a specific CCS device
Control dialog box
Opening and Closing
Control Dialog Boxes on
page 255
Generic
Control
Activates a generic CCS device
Control dialog box
Using Older Generic Control
Dialog Boxes on page 263
Load Preset...
Loads a preset to a CCS device
Loading Presets in the
Navigation Pane on page 273
Copy Preset...
Copies a preset to a designated
preset folder
Copying Presets in the
Navigation Pane on page 274
Save Preset...
Saves a preset for a CCS device
Saving Presets in the
Navigation Pane on page 272
Delete Preset...
Deletes a preset from the
Preset folder
Deleting Presets in the
Navigation Pane on page 274
Undo
Undoes the last action
Redo
Redoes the last action
Refresh
Refreshes the connection status
for a CCS device
Default Size
Returns a Control dialog box to
its default size
Tree View
Available on some devices when
Generic Control is available.
Selecting Tree View will show or
hide the Tree View on the left
side of the Generic Control
dialog box.
Options...
Shows the Control Options
box
Refreshing the Connection
Status of a CCS Device on
page 267
Setting Control Options on
page 268
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Table 14-4 Control Shortcut Menu(Continued)
Command
Function
Reference
Help
Shows Help for the Control
tool
Getting Help with the
Control Tool on page 267
User Manual
Shows the user manual for a
CCS device
Showing the User Manual
for a CCS-Enabled Device on
page 268
Close
Closes the Control dialog box
Closing a Control Dialog
Box on page 256
Using a Control Dialog Box to Find a Resource Icon
If you discover an alarm for a CCS device in one of the Control dialog boxes or in an alarm
list in the Diagnostics dialog box, you must find the physical location of the malfunctioning
CCS device in the Navigation pane so that someone can troubleshoot the problem. The
location of the CCS device icon in the Navigation pane indicates where the CCS device
resides on the network.
To use a device Control dialog box to find the device’s resource icon in the Navigation
pane, complete these steps:
1
Right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box to show the device control shortcut menu.
2
Click Find Device.
The Navigation tool will highlight the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane.
If necessary, the Navigation pane scrolls up or down to show the location of the device
icon in the Navigation tree.
Refreshing the Connection Status of a CCS Device
To update the connection status of a CCS device, follow this procedure:
1
Right-click inside the CCS device’s Control dialog box.
2
Select Refresh from the resulting shortcut menu.
Under normal conditions, this procedure is unnecessary. However, if you reboot a device
connected to several PCs running Magellan CCS Navigator, the alarm traffic hitting the
network may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail. While the query does not
automatically retry, an “Alarm query failed” message posts to the Diagnostics dialog box.
Clearing an ‘Alarm Query Failed’ Message
To clear an “Alarm query failed” message, right-click inside the Diagnostics dialog box,
and then select Refresh from the resulting shortcut menu.
Getting Help with the Control Tool
To get help for the Control tool, right-click inside a Control dialog box and select Help
from the resulting shortcut menu; or click inside the Control dialog box, and then press F1
on the keyboard.
267
268
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Showing the User Manual for a CCS-Enabled Device
To show an Acrobat PDF file of the user manual for a CCS-enabled device, do one of the
following:

Right-click inside the CCS device’s Control dialog box, and then select User Manual
from the resulting shortcut menu
OR

Click inside the CCS device’s Control dialog box, and then press F1 on the PC keyboard
Adobe Acrobat Reader will open and show the user manual for the selected CCS
device on the computer screen. You can search the user manual and print information
from it. To close the PDF file, click the Close button in the upper right corner of the file.
Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device
Magellan CCS Navigator shows individual Control dialog boxes for each CCS device you
are monitoring. By default, all user groups can control the parameters of a CCS device.
However, the Administrator user may restrict access rights to certain devices or to some
parameters of a device. If you cannot control a parameter, it be unavailable for changes on
the Control dialog box.
You can determine the access rights of each CCS device by reading the access message in
the far right cell of the Control dialog box’s status bar. The status bar shows in the bottom
left corner of the Control dialog box.
Below is a list of access messages that appear in the Control dialog box status bar and
what they mean:
Table 14-5 Control Access Rights
Access Right
Meaning
Access Enabled
You can control all parameters of the CCS device.
Access Disabled
You cannot control any parameter of the CCS
device, but you can still view the value of the
parameter.
Limited Access
You can control only some parameters of the CCS
device, but you can still view the current value of
other parameters that have their access disabled.
When showing Access Disabled and Limited Access,
the background color of the far right cell is yellow.
Otherwise, it is grey.
Setting Control Options
Control options apply universally to all devices, not to individual devices.
To access Control dialog box options, point to Options on the menu bar and click Control;
or right-click inside an open Control dialog box, and then click Options... on the resulting
shortcut menu.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
This shows the Control Options box.
Figure 14-11 Control Options Dialog Box
Table 14-6 Control Dialog Box Options
Section
Option
Function
Tracking
Options
(choose one)
Dialog box contents change
as you select devices in the
Navigation tool
Note: The X75 streaming
dialog box is not displayed
when this option is selected.
When you select a resource icon, if the
device’s Control dialog box is open, it
will move to the front of the dialog box
tab order. Otherwise, the content
of the active Control dialog box shows
control information for the selected
device.
Dialog box contents do not
change as you select NROs
in the Navigation tool
Selections in the Navigation pane will
not affect the contents of any device’s
Control dialog box.
Slider Options Device parameter changes
(choose one) as slider is moved
Device parameter changes
as slider is released
Provides real-time changes in the control
value as you move the slider
Sets the new control value after you
release the slider control
269
270
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Table 14-6 Control Dialog Box Options (Continued)
Section
Option
Function
Alarm Enable/ Allow enabling or disabling
Disable
of alarms for devices in Local
Options
Active state
When a device such as a NEO module is
in local active state, Magellan CCS
Navigator cannot remotely control the
module. It can show the module’s
parameter values and receive alarms, but
controls in the control dialog box are
dimmed (and therefore unavailable
for use).
This option enables you to indicate that
you want the controls allowing you to
enable or disable alarms to still be
available.
Preset
Options
Allow undo/redo of Load
Preset operation
Applies to all Control dialog boxes that
support presets (including X75).
Window
Options
Maximum number of open
Control dialog boxes
By default, the maximum number of
dialog boxes to be open is 21; more may
slow down your system
HTTP Options Auto-refresh enabled
When checked, any device Control
dialog boxes that show a Web page will
automatically refresh.
The default auto-refresh rate is every five
seconds, but you can change the rate.
Select the default 5 in the Auto-refresh
rate (seconds): box and type in another
number
Using Presets
Presets are not available for all devices. For example, you cannot create a preset for a
CENTRIO System. Some devices, such as QSEE6800+ modules, cannot be combined with
other devices in a preset.
A preset is a set of predefined control settings. Presets can save common control settings
for the devices under your control, so that you can quickly reactivate these control settings
as needed.
Since presets are a control element, you can only save, copy, load, or delete presets in
Control mode. You can create, load, and save a preset using shortcut menu commands
associated with the Navigation c or a target device’s Control dialog box.

When you right click in a Control dialog box, you can load, save, or delete a preset for
a single CCS device.

When you right click in the Navigation pane, you can create, load, save, copy, delete,
or modify the presets for any number of devices.
There are options for making presets load faster in the Navigation and Control Options
dialog boxes. See Setting Navigation Options on page 120 and Setting Control
Options on page 268.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Careful naming of presets will help you avoid making errors in identifying the correct preset
for the correct device set. Give the preset a name that provides as much detail as possible to
help you distinguish it from other presets in the preset folder.
Presets are organized into folders. An entire folder (series of presets for individual devices)
can be loaded or saved at the same time.
Preset folder in
Navigation pane
Preset sub-folder
Preset for an
individual device
Figure 14-12 Sample Preset Folder
Presets can be created by any user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Client or Magellan CCS
Navigator Server. Presets are stored on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server only. If a preset is
changed by a user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server or Client, all other users will receive
notification that a network resource has been updated. When they Reload (by clicking
Reload from the toolbar, or by right clicking in the Navigation pane and clicking Reload, or
by selecting View > Reload from the main menu), the preset is updated.
Working With Presets in a Control Dialog Box
When you right-click in a Control dialog box for a device, there are three preset options, as
described below:
ProcedureSaving a Preset in a Device Control Dialog Box
You cannot alter preset access settings when saving a preset. Access settings are set per
user or user group. See Logging In and Account Administration on page 23 for more
information.
To create a preset, you must save the device’s settings. To use a device’s Control shortcut
menu to save a preset, complete these steps:
1
Set the device’s control parameters in its Control dialog box.
2
Right-click inside the Control dialog box, and then click Save Preset... from the resulting
shortcut menu.
This shows the Save Preset box.
3
Type a name for the preset in the Name box, or select an existing name from the List of
Presets box to modify an existing preset.
4
Click OK.
The preset appears in the Preset sub-folder you selected or created.
271
272
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
ProcedureLoading Presets in a Control Dialog Box
You cannot undo or redo the loading of presets in the device Control dialog box unless you
have activated this feature in the Control Options box. By default, this feature is disabled
so you can load presets more quickly. See Setting Control Options on page 268.
To use a device’s control shortcut menu to load a preset, complete these steps:
1
Right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box, and then select Load Preset... from the
shortcut menu that appears
This shows the Load Preset box.
If there are no presets in the Load Preset box, that is because there are no presets for that
specific device.
2
Select the preset from the Load Preset box, and then click OK.
The preset will load to its target device or devices.
ProcedureDeleting Presets in a Control Dialog Box
To use a device’s Control shortcut menu to delete a preset, complete these steps:
1
Right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box and select Delete Preset... from the
shortcut menu that appears.
A Delete Preset box appears, listing the names of any existing presets for that device.
2
Select the preset you want to delete from the list of existing presets, and then click OK.
Working With Presets in the Navigation Pane
In the Navigation pane, you can work with groups of presets, which are stored in
sub-folders. See the following topics:

Saving Presets in the Navigation Pane on page 272

Loading Presets in the Navigation Pane on page 273

Copying Presets in the Navigation Pane on page 274

Deleting Presets in the Navigation Pane on page 274
Saving Presets in the Navigation Pane
You cannot alter preset access settings when saving a preset. Access settings are set per
user or user group. See Logging In and Account Administration on page 23 for more
information.
When you create a preset in the Navigation pane, you can select multiple devices. Each
individual device will create a separate file in the preset’s parent folder. You can then
simultaneously apply, or load, all the presets in that folder, or you can apply an individual
preset to a single device.
To save a preset using the Navigation shortcut menu, complete these steps:
1
In Control mode, set the control parameters for the device or devices you want to include in
the preset in their Control dialog boxes.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
2
In the Navigation pane’s Network or Discovery folder, select the resource icons of the
devices you want to include in the preset.
To select more than one device, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting other
devices.
3
Right-click inside the Navigation pane and select Presets.
In the resulting shortcut menu, one or both of the following options may be available:

Save - If the device you have selected has parameters, or if you have selected one
or more devices
This option will save the parameters for the selected device(s) only.

Save Contents - If the device(s) you have selected contain child devices that have
parameters
This option will save the parameters for the parent device(s), if there any, and the
parameters for each child device.
4
Choose either Save or Save Contents.
The Save Presets dialog box opens.
Figure 14-13 Save Presets Dialog Box
5
Enter the name of a preset in the Preset Name field, or choose a preset from the List of
Presets.

If you select a preset name from the list of presets, then new items will appear in
that preset’s sub-folder.
If the folder contains a preset for a device already, you will be asked if you want to
save over it. This is how you modify a preset.

6
If you type a new name, a new preset sub-folder now appears in the Preset folder.
That folder will contain an item for each selected device.
Click OK to save the preset.
Loading Presets in the Navigation Pane
When you load a preset, this applies the control settings contained in that preset to the
device(s).
On most platforms, when you load a preset, this can potentially change the values of all
parameters, including parameters your user group does not have permission to write to.
To use a navigation shortcut menu to load one or more presets, complete these steps:
273
274
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
1
Select the presets that you want to load from the Navigation pane’s Preset folder.
To select more than one preset, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting presets,
and/or select a sub-folder that contains more than one preset.
2
Right-click inside the Navigation pane, and then select Presets > Load from the resulting
shortcut menu.
The selected presets load to their target devices.
The Navigation tool will not undo or redo the loading of presets unless you have activated
this feature in the Navigation Options box. By default, this feature is disabled so the
Navigation tool can load presets more quickly. See Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or
‘Redo’ a Preset Load on page 318.
Copying Presets in the Navigation Pane
Presets can be copied to like devices using the Navigation shortcut menu. To copy a preset,
complete these steps:
1
Right-click a preset (this option is not available for preset sub-folders) and select Copy to....
the Copy Preset dialog box opens.
Figure 14-14 Copy Preset Dialog Box
Only devices that are similar to the device for which the preset was made will be listed.
2
In the Copy column, place a check beside the device.
3
Determine the sub-folder the preset will be added to.
4

If you leave the Destination Preset Folder name at its default, the copied preset
will be saved in the same sub-folder as the preset it is a copy of.

If you type the name of another preset sub-folder, the preset will be added to that
sub-folder.

If you type the name of a new sub-folder, this sub-folder will be created.
Click OK.
The new preset will appear in the designated preset sub-folder.
Deleting Presets in the Navigation Pane
From the Navigation pane, you can delete one or more presets or preset sub-folders. To
delete presets or preset sub-folders, complete these steps:
1
Select the presets or preset sub-folders to delete from the Preset folder.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
To select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting items.
2
Right-click inside the Navigation pane and select Presets > Delete from the shortcut
menu that appears.
3
Click Yes to confirm the preset deletion.
275
276
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
277
15
Streaming
Overview
Streaming in Control Windows
Magellan CCS Navigator control windows can display two types of video streaming:
thumbnails and MPEG-4.
Thumbnails are small images that refresh at a low rate (maximum of two frames a second)
and at a low resolution. The following hardware options can provide Magellan CCS
Navigator with streaming video thumbnails:

A QSEE6800+ module shows a page of thumbnails on its Control dialog box, with one
thumbnail for each input on the module (to a maximum of eight per module). Each
input to the QSEE6800+ module has its own Control dialog box with a thumbnail (for
that input) on it. These thumbnails display alarms (if present), a VU meter, and buttons
to display a waveform or vectorscope. See QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes on
page 278 for more information.

A FR6802+QXF frame equipped with a 6800+ETH resource module shows a thumbnail
page in its Control dialog box. A thumbnail is displayed for each thumbnail-capable
module installed in that frame. In addition, those modules display a thumbnail on a
Video Streaming tab on their own Control dialog box. See Viewing Thumbnails from
FR6802+QXF Frames on page 282 for more information.
Not all 6800+ modules are capable of displaying thumbnails. Some modules may require a
firmware update in order to display thumbnails.

An X75 equipped with an X75OPT-STR option shows a thumbnail on its Control dialog
box. For more information, see Viewing an X75 Streaming Source on page 285.

Modules in a SELENIO frame
MPEG-4 streaming is higher in quality, and uses more system resources. MPEG-4 streaming
is available on an X75 equipped with an X75OPT-STR module, and on QSEE6800+ modules
with the QSEE6800+HS option. Magellan CCS Navigator can display one MPEG-4 stream
per X75 or QSEE6800+HS module, to a maximum of four MPEG-4 streams. An X75 or
QSEE6800+HS module can show MPEG-4 video on its Control dialog box, in a standalone
dialog box on your desktop, or as part of a Graphical Navigation panel (if you have a
NAVIGATOR-SRV license). See Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page on page 29 for
more information.
Adding a License Key for MPEG-4 Streaming in QSEE6800+
For assistance with a license key, or to purchase a license key, please contact your sales
representative.
278
Chapter 15
Streaming in Control Windows
To enter a license key to activate MPEG-4 streaming, your CCS Software must be in Control
mode. Follow these steps:
1
Select the QSEE6800+ module in the Navigation pane, right click and select Control to
open the module’s Control dialog box.
2
If it is not already selected, click on the Streaming tab.
3
Type your license key in the Key field.
If your license key is valid, then the Options field will display High-End Streaming.
Multicasting
QSEE6800+ modules use multicasting to stream thumbnails and/or MPEG4 video
simultaneously to multiple devices. Using multicasting means that a QSEE6800+ module
uses the same amount of bandwidth regardless of the number of clients it transmits data
to, rather than using bandwidth proportionally to a module’s number of clients, as in
point-to-point communication.
If you have multiple QSEE6800+ modules, you must ensure that each module has a unique
Multicast IP address. This is done using the Multicast IP parameter on the module’s
Control dialog box.
Any IP address from 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255 is treated as a valid multicast address
input.
The Multicast TTL (Time-to-live) parameter determines how many network switches can
exist between your device (in this case a QSEE6800+ module) and your client. Normally you
should leave this setting at its default.
Streaming in a Control Dialog Box
You can stream both thumbnails and MPEG-4 video in an X75 (with the X75OPT-STR
option) or QSEE6800+ Control or Input Control dialog box.
For more information, see the following topics:

QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes on page 278

Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames on page 282

Viewing an X75 Streaming Source on page 285
QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes
If your QSEE6800+ module has firmware 2.0 or higher, you can discover it using
point-to-point streaming (i.e., when it is on a different subnet) and still stream video from
the module. The module can have up to six point-to-point connections.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
When you discover a QSEE6800+ module, it will appear as a child resource of the frame in
which it is installed. The QSEE6800+ module will also have child resources, one for each
input to the QSEE6800+ module.
Double click the QSEE6800+
module to view thumbnails for
all inputs.
Double click any input to set
alarms and parameters for that
input only.
Figure 15-1. QSEE6800+ Module In Navigation Pane
When you are in Control mode, you can open a Control dialog box for a QSEE6800+
module to view the thumbnails for all inputs to that module and adjust parameters that will
affect the output of the card as a whole. See Using a QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Box on
page 279 for more information
You can also open a Control dialog box for each input to the module (by clicking on the
input in the Navigation pane). This dialog box shows a thumbnail for the input only,
parameters for this input, and a wide array of alarm options for this input. See Using a
QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box on page 282 for more information, and see your
QSEE6800+ Installation and Operation Manual for more information on QSEE6800+ alarms
and inputs.
For general information on Control dialog boxes, see Using Generic and Specific Control
Dialog Boxes on page 257.
Using a QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Box
When you reboot the module, the input stream on this dialog box will always revert to
Input 1.
279
280
Chapter 15
Streaming in Control Windows
The QSEE6800+ module has a Specific Control dialog box, which provides access to
parameters via its Network and Stream tabs (where you can also view MPEG-4 video, if
enabled).
MPEG-4 stream is optional;
see your sales
representative for more
information.
Without the streaming
option, a grey box will
appear
Figure 15-2. Control Dialog Box Display Tab for QSEE6800+
The QSEE6800+ specific Control dialog box also contains a Display tab. This tab displays
thumbnails for all the inputs into the module.
MPEG-4 stream is optional—
box will appear empty if it is
not available.
The contents of the MPEG-4
stream are determined by the
MPEG-4 Video Source and
MPEG-4 Audio Source
parameters on the QSEE
module.
By default, the audio for the
stream is off. Click the speaker
icon to activate streaming
audio.
Figure 15-3. QSEE6800+ Streaming Tab
If an input is not connected, the thumbnail or MPEG-4 stream dialog box will indicate this
status.
Each thumbnail has a variety of controls:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The outer region of the thumbnail
changes color to indicate an alarm
level
Toggles Vector Display mode
Toggles Waveform Display mode
Audio Meters
Figure 15-4 QSEE6800+ Thumbnail Buttons
If you click Vector Display or Waveform Display, the button turns white to indicate that
it is currently selected. Click the same button again to display the thumbnail again. Vector
and waveform displays are only available on thumbnail images, not on an MPEG-4 image.
Click the W again to
return to thumbnail
display
Figure 15-5 Waveform Display on a Thumbnail
To determine the line that is analyzed by the waveform or vectorscope, set the Line Number
parameter in the subdevice’s Control dialog box.
ProcedureAudio Monitoring
When opening QSEE6800+ Control dialog boxes while listening to audio, the sound may
drop out momentarily.
When monitoring MPEG-4 streaming video, you can turn on the audio monitoring by
clicking the speaker icon to the lower right of the MPEG-4 stream.
When audio is active, you can turn it off by clicking the same button.
281
282
Chapter 15
Streaming in Control Windows
Using a QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box
To open a Control dialog box for an input to a QSEE6800+ module, double click on an
input in the Navigation pane.
Thumbnail for the
selected QSEE6800+
input
Figure 15-6. Control Dialog Box for an Input to a QSEE6800+
The controls on this screen affect the individual input only. They do not affect the rest of the
functionality for the module that is providing the input. See the QSEE6800+ Installation and
Operation Manual for a complete description of the parameters and alarms.
Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames
Not all 6800+ modules are capable of displaying thumbnails. Check our website to
determine if your module can be thumbnails-enabled.
If a FR6802+QXF frame contains a 6800+ETH module, then that frame can stream
thumbnails for every other module in the frame. Thumbnails can appear in the following
places:

On the 6800+ETH module’s Control dialog box (see 6800+ETH Control Dialog Box
Streaming Tab on page 282)

On an individual module’s Video Streaming tab (see Using the Video Streaming Tab
on a Control Dialog Box on page 284)

On a Graphical Navigation panel (see Playing MPEG-4 Video from the Navigation
Pane on page 285)
6800+ETH Control Dialog Box Streaming Tab
If a FR6802+QXF frame contains a 6800+ETH module, then that frame can stream
thumbnails for other modules in the frame. Not all 6800+ modules are capable of
displaying thumbnails. Some modules may require a firmware update in order to display
thumbnails. Check our Website at www.imaginecommunications.com to determine if your
module is thumbnail-enabled.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The 6800+ETH’s Control dialog box contains a Video Streaming tab. This tab contains
thumbnails for all slots in the frame, for a maximum of 20 thumbnails.
Figure 15-7 6800+ETH Streaming Tab
If the module in a particular slot does not support streaming, that slot’s thumbnail will
contain a “Not Supported” message.
If the module in a slot provides streaming, an active thumbnail will be displayed.
Thumbnails update at a rate set through the Rate parameter on the 6800+ETH module.
If a module uses two slots, then the thumbnail would appear to belong to the first slot only,
and the second thumbnail will display a box that contains the text Empty Slot.
If a module is present, supports streaming but is not sending a signal, then the thumbnail
for that slot will contain the text No Data Available.
If a module is present but does not support streaming, the space for that module will
contain the text Not supported.
If a slot is empty, the thumbnail for that position in the frame will contain the text Empty
Slot.
If no connection is established between the 6800+ETH module and the application (for
example, if it is temporarily disconnected from the network), then all thumbnails will be
gray.
283
284
Chapter 15
Streaming in Control Windows
Using the Video Streaming Tab on a Control Dialog Box
Each 6800+ module that supports streaming, when installed in a FR6802+QXF frame that
contains a 6800+ETH module, will have an additional Video Streaming tab on its Control
dialog box. This tab will not appear when the module is installed in a frame that does not
support streaming. Nor will it appear if the card does not support streaming. Some modules
may require a firmware update in order to display thumbnails. Check our Website at
www.imaginecommunications.com to determine if your module is thumbnail-enabled.
Figure 15-8 Video Streaming Tab of an HDC6800+ Control Dialog Box
The name that appears on the thumbnail is provided by the 6800+ETH card.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Viewing an X75 Streaming Source
If your X75 has an optional X75OPT-STR module, its Control dialog box will have an extra
Video Streaming tab. In addition to showing a thumbnail, it displays the source URL for
the web stream, and the frame rate, as shown in the image below.
Streaming thumbnail
High-end streaming
Figure 15-9 X75 Streaming Tab
The HTTP URL field is for information purposes only. You can take the information here and
type it into a web browser to view the streaming data from a remote location.
The Refresh Interval indicates the rate at which all this X75’s thumbnail images are
updated, measured in seconds. Type a number in the field to change the refresh rate.
See Adding a Streaming Icon on page 35 for more information on streaming.
Playing MPEG-4 Video from the Navigation Pane
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can complete this
procedure.
To stream MPEG-4 video out of your QSEE6800+ module, you must have the QSEE6800+HS
option. When monitoring an MPEG-4 stream from QSEE6800+H by starting a QuickTime
player, you can hear monitoring audio in addition to viewing the video stream.
Magellan CCS Navigator is compatible with QuickTime version 7.1.
To add a device icon to start streaming video from the Navigation pane, follow these steps:
1
With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, under the Network, Discovery, or
Temporary folder of the Navigation pane, right-click and select Create > Server.
This will create a Server icon in the Navigation pane.
2
Right-click on the server icon and select Properties... from the menu that appears.
The Navigation Properties dialog box opens.
3
Select the Command tab, and fill it in with the following information:
285
286
Chapter 15
Streaming in Control Windows
Operation: Control
Command: c:\program files\quicktime\quicktimeplayer.exe
(Or the complete path to your QuickTime Player installation, if it differs from the above)
Arguments: rtsp://[IP Address]:554/streaming
(Replace [IP Address] by the IP address of the QSEE6800+ module)
You can leave the Initial Directory field blank.
4
Close the Navigation Properties dialog box by clicking the X in the top right corner.
When you enter Control mode, double-click on the server icon. This will open a QuickTime
Player and play MPEG-4 streaming video from the specified source.
287
16
Video Output Monitoring
Signal Monitoring Overview
The types of devices you can control depends on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
The Signal Monitor tool can perform confidence monitoring of the video signals from CCS
devices within the broadcast facility. Before using the Signal Monitor tool, you must have
all of the following:

A video card compatible with Microsoft DirectX 8.1 or later installed in the PC, or an
external monitor

One or more CCS devices with video (or audio) to monitor connected to input ports
of an Imagine Communications router

One output port of an Imagine Communications router connected to a Microsoft
DirectX 8.1 (or later) compatible video card or to the external monitor of the PC
Using the Signal Monitor Tool
To use the Signal Monitor tool, complete these steps:
1
Use the Discovery tool to discover a routing system. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can complete this step.
2
Set the Signal Monitor Options. See Setting Signal Monitor Options on page 290.
3
Define monitor points for the CCS devices you want to monitor.
Defining monitor points associates the sources of the routing system with the CCS devices
you want to monitor.
After you have defined the monitor points, little monitor icons will show in the Monitor
column of the Navigation pane. See Setting Navigation Properties on page 103 and
Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
4
In Control mode, open the Signal Monitor dialog box. See Showing the Signal Monitor
Dialog Box on page 288.
5
Also in Control mode, start monitoring the video signal of CCS devices. See Monitoring
Video Signals on page 288.
288
Chapter 16
Video Output Monitoring
Showing the Signal Monitor Dialog Box
To show the Signal Monitor dialog box, point to Tools on the menu bar and click Signal
Monitor.
When you open the Signal Monitor dialog box, it will show the monitored video of the
CCS device that is currently selected in the Navigation pane. If that device has no
monitored video and you have previously defined a Color Black Signal in the Signal
Monitor Options box, you will see the Color Black Signal.
If you resize the Signal Monitor dialog box, its content will also resize. Its default aspect
ratio is 4:3.
Monitoring Video Signals
You can only monitor video signal in Control mode.
According to the settings you choose in the Signal Monitor Options box, the Signal
Monitor tool can send the video output from monitored devices to either the Signal
Monitor dialog box in the application dialog box or to an external monitor. See Setting
Signal Monitor Options on page 290 for more information.
To determine the current setting for the video output, point to Options on the menu bar
and click Signal Monitor. Go to the Video Output Selection section, which has three
radio buttons. The buttons and their functions, when selected, are as follows:
Table 16-1 Options for Video Output Selection
Option
Function
Signal Monitor
Window
Sends the video output to the Signal Monitor
dialog box
External Monitor
Sends the video output to an external monitor
Disabled
Sends no signal
You can set the Signal Monitor’s tracking options so that the signal output to the Signal
Monitor dialog box or external monitor changes as you select different devices in the
Navigation pane. The signal output will be that of the currently selected device. See
Setting Signal Monitor Options on page 290.
To monitor a video signal, select a resource in the Navigation pane that has a monitor icon
showing in the Monitor column. You should see the video signal change in your output
device, whether it is the Signal Monitor dialog box or an external monitor.
If the resource you selected has no monitored video and you have previously defined a
Color Black Signal in the Signal Monitor Options box, you will see the Color Black
Signal on the video output device.
The title of the Signal Monitor dialog box changes as the selected CCS device changes.
Note also that the second cell of the Signal Monitor dialog box’s Status Bar shows the
Device ID of the CCS device selected in the Navigation pane.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
The first cell of the Status Bar will show a “Ready” message if the video signal successfully
changes as you select resource icons in the Navigation pane. If an error occurs, the Status
Bar instead shows an “Error” message against a red background.
If you are using an external monitor, an Error box appears. Error messages may occur if you
lose a connection with the routing system.
Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu
If you right-click inside the Signal Monitor dialog box, a shortcut menu appears.
The menu options and their functions are as follows:
Table 16-2 Commands on the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu
Command
Function
4×3
Resizes the dialog box to its default 4:3 aspect ratio
16 × 9
Resizes the dialog box to a 16:9 aspect ratio
Full Screen
Makes the monitored video signal occupy the full
screen
To return the Signal Monitor dialog box to normal
screen size from full-screen mode, right-click
the mouse.
Configure
Video...
Configures the video settings for the Signal Monitor
See Setting Video Properties for the Signal
Monitor on page 289 for more information
Find Device
Finds the resource icon for CCS device you are
monitoring (highlights the device’s resource icon in the
Navigation pane)
Options...
Opens the Signal Monitor Options box for revision
See Setting Signal Monitor Options on page 290 for
more information
Help
Shows help topics for the Signal Monitor tool
Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor
To set the Signal Monitor’s video properties, complete these steps:
1
Right-click inside the Signal Monitor dialog box, and then select Configure Video from
the resulting shortcut menu.
289
290
Chapter 16
Video Output Monitoring
Figure 16-1 Configure Video Box
2
In the TV Tuner Card section of the screen, select a TV tuner card for signal monitoring.
3
In the Video Connector section of the Configure Video box, select the type of video
input used.
The usual choice is Composite. If you select Camera, check the S-Video box for “camera
with S-video,” and clear the box for “camera without S-video.”
4
In the Signal Standard section, select the standard of the video signal connected to the
PC.
5
In the Color section, move the slider controls left or right to set the brightness, contrast,
saturation, and hue of the video signal shown in the Signal Monitor dialog box, or click
Default at the bottom of the box to use the default settings.
6
Click OK to confirm the changes and close the box.
Setting Signal Monitor Options
To set the Signal Monitor options:
1
Click Signal Monitor on the Options menu, or right-click in an open Signal Monitor
dialog box and click Options....
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure 16-2 Signal Monitor Options Dialog Box
2
In the Video Output Selection section of the Signal Monitor Options box, select one of
these radio buttons:
Table 16-3 Video Output Options
3
Option
Function
Disabled
Disables signal monitoring
External Monitor
Enables the signal monitor output to
show on an external monitor.
Signal Monitor Window
Enables the signal monitor output to
show in the Signal Monitor dialog box
When you are using signal monitoring, you will set the User Router Settings.
To set the User Router Settings, click browse (...), select the router’s device ID from the
resulting Router Selection box, and then click OK.
If an alert box advises you that no routers are currently configured, click OK. Discover and
configure a router in build mode, and then return to this procedure.
4
Select a router output from the Router Destination list that corresponds to the PC or an
external monitor.
5
If you have a Color Black Signal connected to the router, select the corresponding
Defined check box, and then select a router source from the Router Source list.
6
If you have an Audio Mute Signal connected to the router, select the corresponding
Defined check box and select a router source from the Router Source list.
7
Under Tracking Options, select one of these options:
291
292
Chapter 16
Video Output Monitoring
Table 16-4 Tracking Options
Option
Function
Signal changes as you
select devices in the
Navigation tool
The Video Output Selection tracks
changes in the selection of resource
icons in the Navigation pane.
Signal does not change
as you select devices in
the Navigation tool
The Video Output Selection will not
track changes in the selection of
resource icons in the Navigation
pane.
293
17
Device Control through HTTP
HTTP Device Control Overview
Figure 17-1 Web-Based Controls for DPS-575
The types of devices you can control depend on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
Magellan CCS Navigator can use HTTP to control any device that has a Web server
for control (e.g.,a DPS-575 digital processing synchronizer, Selenio frames, Magellan control
panels, and various video servers). Many of these products automatically open a default
browser when you click on their icon in the Navigation pane. Other, older devices may
require you to open a Web browser from within Magellan CCS Navigator to view
the device’s Web page.
Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a Web Browser
Only an Administrator user can complete this procedure. It cannot be done on a PC with a
NAVIGATOR-CLI license.
294
Chapter 17
Device Control through HTTP
To manually configure Magellan CCS Navigator to open a Web browser for an HTTP device
(a device with a Web server for control), follow these steps:
1
In Build mode, create a new HTTP server icon in the Navigation pane.
Figure 17-2 New Server Icon
2
Rename the server icon with the name of the device. See Deleting a Resource Icon on
page 101.
3
Open the Navigation Properties dialog box for that server icon. See Setting Navigation
Properties on page 103.
4
Select the HTTP tab.
5
Type the URL for the device in the URL box.
Figure 17-3 HTTP Tab of the Navigation Properties Box
6
Click Close.
See Controlling an HTTP Device on page 294 for control information.
Alternatively, you can use HTTP discovery to automatically identify all the HTTP servers in the
network and their associated HTTP URL addresses. (See CCS Device Discovery on page 75
for more information.) After discovering an HTTP device, its URL addresses will display in the
HTTP tab of the Navigation Properties box. Change this address at any time.
Controlling an HTTP Device
To open a Web browser Control window for an HTTP device, place Magellan CCS Navigator
in Control mode, and then double-click the HTTP server icon for the device that has a Web
server. Alternatively, you can right-click the icon and select Control from the resulting
shortcut menu.
See Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a Web Browser on page 293 for HTTP
server node configuration information.
295
A
Troubleshooting
Suggested Troubleshooting Steps
Please follow these steps in troubleshooting problems:
1
Depending on your specific problem, there may be a solution. Check Common
Problems on page 295 and choose the area your problem falls under for options.
2
Search the CCS product manuals for troubleshooting suggestions. See Showing the User
Manual for a CCS Device on page 157.
Contact Imagine Communications Customer Service. See Getting Help from Customer
Service on page 321.
Common
Problems
Problems are grouped by function. See the referenced heading and page for problems with
these areas of Magellan CCS Navigator:

Installation Problems on page 295

Problems at Startup on page 299

Configuration Problems on page 307

Control Problems on page 316

Alarm Problems on page 312
Installation Problems
If you are having problems with installation, please refer to the following topics:

InstallShield Errors on page 296

Magellan CCS Navigator Install Fails during Router Database Upgrade on
page 296

Installation Exits without Finishing on page 296

Installation Cannot Update Users Database on page 297

Module Firmware Needs to be Upgraded on page 297

SQL Server Re-installation Needs Authentication on page 298

Windows Message Queuing Requests Installation CD on page 298

Cannot Install Magellan CCS Navigator on Windows XP or Windows 2003 on
page 299
296
Chapter
During installation, you may see one of the following messages:
InstallShield
Errors

Setup has detected that uninstallshield is in use. Please
close uninstallshield and restart setup. Error 432
This error has two possible causes:

The InstallShield un-installation file (IsUninst.exe) is either in use or corrupted.

The currently active user account does not have administrative privileges on the PC.
Because InstallShield copies its uninstaller to the Winnt\System32 system directory,
the account used to install the software must have write access to this directory.
If you see this error message, ensure that no other InstallShield applications are
running, and that you have administrative privileges to the system. Then restart your
installation process.

There is no disk in the drive. Please insert a disk into
drive D:.
This error is caused by InstallShield leaving temporary files on your system drive during a
previous install or uninstall.
If you see this error message, click Continue.
Magellan CCS Navigator Install Fails during Router Database Upgrade
During Magellan CCS Navigator installation, Sometimes the existence of a database lock file
prevents the upgrading of the router database from succeeding. To correct this situation,
follow these steps:
1
Search for RouterSys.ldb using Windows Explorer.
2
Delete any instances of this file that you find.
3
Restart the Magellan CCS Navigator installation.
You will have to restart the Magellan CCS Navigator installation from the beginning.
Installation Exits without Finishing
Consider these questions:

Are you attempting to install Magellan CCS Navigator in a compressed drive?
Magellan CCS Navigator cannot be installed in a compressed drive. Choose an
uncompressed drive, and then attempt your installation again.

Have you installed all the required third-party programs?
You must install all the required third-party programs before you can install Magellan
CCS Navigator.

What error message shows when the installation program aborts?
After you remove the InstallShield Installation Information folder, programs that stored data
in this folder may not work correctly. Therefore, only remove the InstallShield Installation
Information folder if you have no other option to resolve the issue.
If the message says file _INS5576._MP is unavailable, you may need to remove the
InstallShield Installation Information folder. Follow these instructions:
a
Click Start > Run.
b
In the Run dialog box, type:
c:\program files
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
c
Click OK.
d
In the Program Files dialog box, right-click InstallShield Installation Information,
and then click Cut.
e
Close all dialog boxes, right-click anywhere on your desktop, and then click Paste.
See Required Operating System and Software on page 9 and Installing Other
Required Software on page 10.
Installation Cannot Update Users Database
The installation program will usually upgrade database files in the Users folder during a
software upgrade unless you have compressed the Users folder and its files. To enable the
installation program to upgrade this folder and its files, you must first decompress the
folder and repeat the installation program.
To decompress files in the Users folder, complete these steps:
1
Right-click Start and select Explore from the resulting shortcut menu.
This opens the Windows Explorer.
2
Find the Users folder in the All Folders list. The usual path to this folder is as follows:
c:\Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\Users
3
Right-click the Users folder icon and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
4
This shows the Users Properties box.
5
Find the Attributes section of the General tab and clear the Compress check box.
6
Click OK to close the Users Properties box and then close Windows Explorer.
Module Firmware Needs to be Upgraded
This version of the Magellan CCS Navigator software requires that you first upgrade your
NEO 3901 RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U and ICE6800+ products to version 3.0 or later
before installing Magellan CCS Navigator. See the following topics for more information:

Upgrading NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to Version 3.0 or
Later on page 297

Upgrading an ICE6800+ to version 3.0 or Later on page 298
Upgrading NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to
Version 3.0 or Later
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can complete this
procedure.
To upgrade NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, or RCP-CCS-1U to firmware version 3.0 or later,
follow these steps:
1
Begin a normal discovery procedure, following steps 1 - 3 of Running a Discovery on
page 85.
2
On the Add screen of the Discovery Options dialog box, instead of selecting X75, NEO,
6800+, CCS Control Panel, select Selenio, LCP-CCS-1U.
3
Complete your discovery and save the results.
297
298
Chapter
4
For each of the discovered NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U products, follow
the software upgrade procedure. See Upgrading Software on page 135 for more
information.
Upgrading an ICE6800+ to version 3.0 or Later
To upgrade your ICE6800+ module to firmware version 3.0 or later, follow these steps:
1
Download the latest version greater or equal to 3.0 of the ICE6800+ software from our
website.
2
Unpack the contents of the zip file in your C:\tmp directory.
3
From your Windows Start menu, select Run, and enter cmd to open a Command dialog
box.
4
Type C: (to make sure you are accessing files on your C: drive), and then type "CD \tmp"
followed by the command:
upall
and specify the IP address of your ICE6800+ module.
For example:
C:CD/tmp upall 172.24.128.50
(This will upgrade your ICE6800+ module at IP address 172.24.128.50.)
SQL Server Re-installation Needs Authentication
If installing the Server to a computer with a pre installed SQL Sever 2005 instance already
there, user needs to enable TCP/IP connections and SQL Server Authentication. To enable
TCP/IP remote connections, follow these steps:
1
From the Start menu, select All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2005 >
Configuration Tools > SQL Server Configuration Manager.
The SQL Server Configuration Manager opens.
2
In the left pane, expand SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration by clicking on the +
beside it.
3
Click on Protocols for SQLEXPRESS.
4
In the right pane, right click on TCP/IP and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The TCP/IP Properties dialog box opens.
5
In the Protocol tab, select Yes to the right of Enabled.
6
In the IP Addresses tab, select Yes to the right of each Enabled option (there will be one
for each available IP).
7
Click OK to close the IP Addresses tab, and then close the SQL Server Configuration
Manager.
Windows Message Queuing Requests Installation CD
During installation, if the Windows Message Queuing component is required, it will usually
install automatically. There are few cases where the installation of this component will
require the user to insert the Windows OS CD to install this component.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
If you do not have a Windows OS CD available, cancel this installation and follow these
steps:
1
From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
2
Select Add or Remove Programs.
3
Click on Add/Remove Windows Components (this is in the button bar on the left of the
screen).
4
Click on Message Queuing in the list of components, and then click Details.
5
Place a check beside Common in the Message Queuing Subcomponents, and then click OK
to close each open dialog box in the Control Panel.
You can now restart the Magellan CCS Navigator install.
Cannot Install Magellan CCS Navigator on Windows XP or Windows 2003
ProcedureWindows XP
Before installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software on a PC running Windows XP
Service Pack 3, contact Customer Service.
ProcedureWindows 2003
If your PC is running the Windows 2003 operating system with Service Pack 2, before you
install Magellan CCS Navigator, you must remove MSXML6 sp2. To remove this file, use the
Add/Remove Programs tool.
To use Add/Remove Programs to prepare your PC for Magellan CCS Navigator installation,
follow these steps:
1
From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2
From the list that appears, choose MSXML6 SP2, and then click Remove.
3
When the process is finished, close the window.
You are now ready to install Magellan CCS Navigator.
Problems at Startup
If you are having problems with starting Magellan CCS Navigator, please refer to the
following topics:

CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Start after Setup on page 300

Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure on page 300

Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure on page 300

PC Running CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Operates Sluggishly on page 300

Password Has Been Lost or Forgotten on page 302

Password Does Not Work on page 303

File Permissions Prevent Use of Magellan CCS Navigator on page 303

File Share Handling From Magellan CCS Navigator Clients on page 303

Managing Permissions on page 304

PC Turned Off While ‘On Air’ on page 304
299
300
Chapter

Online Help Hangs After User Selects ‘Properties’ on page 304

"Windows Security Alert" Dialog Appears on page 304

PC Work Space Settings Need to be Returned to Default on page 305

Serial Connection Error at Startup on page 306

Menus or Tools Not Available on page 306

Clearing the Internet Explorer Cache Closes Magellan CCS Navigator on
page 307
CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Start after Setup
If CCS Magellan CCS Navigator fails to start after setup, take these actions:
1
Install all the third-party software that Magellan CCS Navigator requires for installation on
the PC operating platform.
2
Close all open programs and restart the operating system to fully register the software. See
Installing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software on page 12.
Launch application actions are configured differently in the Navigation pane than in the
Graphical Navigation page. See Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action on
page 75 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
Magellan CCS Navigator Starts up with Build Mode Only
If your Magellan CCS Navigator install starts up with Build mode only, and you can run
discoveries but not switch to Control mode or open Control dialog boxes, this is because
your license has expired.
After the initial 30-day trial period, your Magellan CCS Navigator install reverts to a Build
mode only state, and you must purchase a Magellan CCS Navigator license in order to
continue to control devices using Magellan CCS Navigator. For more information on various
Magellan CCS Navigator license options, see Navigator Licenses on page 2. To add a
license, see Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19.
Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure
After a power failure, frames require sufficient time to recover and restore communication
with the PC.
To restore communications between the PC and the frames, ensure that the frames have
three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and
log back on.
PC Running CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Operates Sluggishly
Two Windows services can cause sluggish operation of CCS applications: E-mail services
and ODBC tracing services.
E-mail services can create slow memory leaks, leading to unusually large memory usage for
programs using e-mail services. If you notice that Magellan CCS Navigator is operating
sluggishly, use the Task Manager to check memory usage of the Magellan CCS
Navigator.exe process.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
If you suspect that E-mail services may be creating the sluggish system operation,
see Viewing the Size of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe Process on page 301.
However, if you suspect that ODBC tracing services are on and causing the sluggish system
operation, see Turning Off ODBC Tracing on page 302.
Viewing the Size of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe Process
To use the Task Manager to view the size of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe process,
complete these steps:
1
Press CTRL + ALT + DELETE.
This shows the Windows Security dialog box.
2
Click Task Manager....
3
Select the Processes tab.
4
Use the scroll bars to locate the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe image name on the list
of open applications.
5
Look at the value for the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe file in the Mem Usage column to see
how much memory the process is using.
6
Click Close.
Reducing the Size of the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Process
If the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe process has grown to more than 200 MB, take one
or more of these actions to reduce the size of the process and speed up the software:
1
Restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
2
Turn off CCS e-mail notification of alarms. See Turning Off E-mail Alarm Notification on
page 301.
3
Shorten the e-mail alarm notification list. See Deleting Addresses from the Alarm
Notification List on page 301.
ProcedureTurning Off E-mail Alarm Notification
To turn off e-mail notification of alarms, complete these steps:
1
Point to Options on the menu bar and click Diagnostics....
2
Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab in the Diagnostics Options box.
Figure A-1 Diagnostics Options Box, E-mail Forwarding Service Tab
3
Clear the E-mail Forwarding Service check box to disable the sending of e-mail
notifications of alarms.
4
Click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
ProcedureDeleting Addresses from the Alarm Notification List
To delete e-mail addresses from the alarm notification list, complete these steps:
301
302
Chapter
1
Point to Options on the menu bar and click Diagnostics....
2
Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab in the Diagnostics Options box.
Figure A-2 Diagnostics Options Box, E-mail Forwarding Service Tab
3
In the E-mail Addresses of Recipients section, select the e-mail address of a recipient you
want to delete, and click Remove.
4
Repeat the last step to delete other e-mail recipients.
5
Click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
Turning Off ODBC Tracing
To turn off ODBC tracing, complete these steps:
1
Click Windows Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2
In the Control Panel dialog box, double-click Administrative Tools.
3
In the Administrative Tools dialog box, double-click Data Source (ODBC).
4
In the ODBC Data Source Administrator box, select the Tracing tab.
5
In the When to trace section, if the label on the left button reads “Stop Tracing Now,”
click the label so that it toggles to read “Start Tracing Now.”
You have now stopped ODBC tracing.
6
Click OK to close the ODBC Data Source Administrator box.
Password Has Been Lost or Forgotten
If you lose or forget the password, an Administrator user must reset it, using the following
procedure. Then you can change the password that the Administrator assigns to you. See
Changing a Password on page 34.
To change a lost or forgotten user password, complete these steps:
1
Click Options on the menu bar and select User Accounts.
This shows the User Accounts tab of the Login Options box.
2
Select the name of the user whose information you want to change.
3
Click Modify User.
This opens the User Account box for the selected user.
4
Type a new password into both the New and Confirm boxes of the Password section of
the User Account box.
Use the same combination of upper- and lower-case characters in both instances of the
password, since passwords are case-sensitive.
5
Click OK to close the User Account box and save the changes.
6
Click OK to close the Login Options box.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Password Does Not Work
Unlike user names, passwords are case-sensitive. If you have both upper- and lower-case
letters in the password, ensure that you use the appropriate case for each character that
you type into the Password box on the Logon box.
File Permissions Prevent Use of Magellan CCS Navigator
When Magellan CCS Navigator is installed on a PC, the network or PC administrator must
set file permissions so that users have full access to the Magellan CCS Navigator
program files.
To set file permissions on the Magellan CCS Navigator folder:
1
Log on to the PC as the administrator.
2
Use the Windows Explorer to find the Program Files\Harris\Magellan CCS Navigator
folder.
3
Right-click the Magellan CCS Navigator folder, and then select Properties
from the resulting shortcut menu.
4
Select the Security tab of the Properties box.
The Security tab has top and bottom panes. The top pane shows the list of available user
groups; and the bottom pane shows the list of Allow and Deny permissions.
5
Select the name of the group you want to change from the top list.
6
Select all check boxes in the Allow column in the bottom pane to enable the selected users
group to have full rights to the files.
7
Click the Advanced button. The Advanced Security Settings dialog box appears. Select
the Inherit from parent the permission entries that apply to child objects box. Click
OK to close the Advanced Security Settings dialog box.
8
Click OK to close the Properties box.
9
Log out of Windows, and then log back in as a user.
10
Start Magellan CCS Navigator.
File Share Handling From Magellan CCS Navigator Clients
Files need to be transferred, or shared, between Magellan CCS Navigator Server and
Magellan CCS Navigator Client. Magellan CCS Navigator Client installs must have access to
the Magellan CCS Navigator Server through File Sharing in order to retrieve Navigator
Pages, resource tree information, etc.
1
To determine if a Magellan CCS Navigator Client PC can contact the server, follow these
steps:
a
From the Start menu choose Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
b
Type
PING <IP address of the Magellan CCS Navigator Server>
If the connection fails, you have a network problem. Contact your systems administrator.
2
To determine if you have file sharing access to a specific Magellan CCS Navigator Server,
from the Start menu, select Run and enter \\<SERVERNAME>\HarrisCCSShare
If you are denied access, you do not have access to the server.
303
304
Chapter
3
4
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can turn on file sharing. To
turn Simple File Sharing on, follow these steps:
a
Double-click My Computer on your PC desktop.
b
On the main menu, select View > Folder Options.
c
Click the View tab, and then select Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended).
(Windows Vista and Windows 7 only) From the Control Panel select the Network and
Sharing Center.
The following settings should be selected:
5
Managing
Permissions

Discovery ON

File sharing ON

Password protected sharing OFF
(Windows XP Only) To turn on File Sharing for the Magellan CCS Navigator Server’s
database folder, follow these steps:
a
Double click on My Computer on your PC desktop.
b
On the system drive where your Magellan CCS Navigator Server software is installed,
browse to the location where the database files are stored.
c
The typical path is: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\Harris\CCS\Files
d
Right-click the Files folder icon and then select Properties from the resulting shortcut
menu.
e
Ensure that Share this Folder is selected.
In order to access devices, pages, and presets, each user on a Magellan CCS Navigator
Client must have been assigned permissions to do so. For information on assigning
permissions, see Assigning Access Rights on page 28. Only an Administrator user on a
Magellan CCS Navigator Server can change access permissions.
PC Turned Off While ‘On Air’
Turning off the PC running Magellan CCS Navigator during a broadcast will cause no
changes to the CCS devices on the network or their settings. When you restart the software
application, it will query the devices and update their status, including outstanding alarms.
Online Help Hangs After User Selects ‘Properties’
On some occasions, Online Help may hang or freeze after a user right-clicks on a Help topic
and selects Properties from the resulting shortcut menu. To unfreeze the Online Help,
right-click the Welcome to Magellan CCS Navigator Help icon on the Windows task
bar at bottom of the screen.
"Windows Security Alert" Dialog Appears
If you are running Windows XP Service Pack 3, you may encounter a dialog similar to the
following when you start Magellan CCS Navigator, or when you switch modes:
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure A-3 Windows Security Alert Dialog
Select the "Unblock" button. Selecting any other button may prevent Magellan CCS
Navigator from working properly.
You may also receive similar messages for the programs "btserver" and "Imagine
Communications Router Engine Service Module". In each case, select the "Unblock"
button.
Unblocking Magellan CCS Navigator
If the Windows Firewall is blocking Magellan CCS Navigator or any of the applications it
depends on (btserver and Router Engine Service), then some features may not work
properly. To unblock these applications:
1
Open the Control Panel (go to Start > Settings > Control Panel).
2
Double-click on Windows Firewall. Another dialog box appears.
3
On the General tab, ensure that the Don't allow exceptions checkbox is clear.
4
On the Exceptions tab, locate the application in the Programs and Services list.
5
Ensure the checkbox beside the application name is checked. If the program does not
appear in the list, click Add Program..., select the program from the list and click OK.
6
Click OK to dismiss all dialogs, then close the Control Panel.
For more information, consult your Windows XP documentation.
PC Work Space Settings Need to be Returned to Default
To return the work space settings for a CCS application to the original desktop settings,
complete these steps:
1
Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs for Windows XP), and click the MS-DOS
Command Prompt icon from the Programs menu.
This shows the MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
305
306
Chapter
Figure A-4 MS-DOS Command Prompt Dialog Box
2
Change to the directory in which the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe file is installed. Use the
Microsoft Windows Find application to find the file.
Typically, you will type in the following command and then press ENTER:
cd Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\bin
3
Type in the following command and press ENTER:
Magellan CCS Navigator /w default
The Magellan CCS Navigator login box appears. When you log on, the default work
space settings will be in effect.
Serial Connection Error at Startup
If your default router configuration uses a serial connection, during startup you may see an
error message informing you of this fact.
The error is for informational purposes only. When your default router configuration uses a
serial connection, COM 1 will not be available for other purposes.
Menus or Tools Not Available
There are two reasons why menu items or tools may not be present or available in your
Magellan CCS Navigator install.

You do not have a license for the desired tool or option. See Managing Magellan CCS
Navigator Licenses on page 19 for information on purchasing and installing licenses.
Magellan CCS Navigator Client does not have a Build mode. Any feature that is described as
working in Build mode only will not work on a Magellan CCS Navigator Client.

Magellan CCS Navigator is not in the correct state for accessing a specific menu item or
tool. Some tools, such as the Discovery pane, are only available in Build mode. Other
tools, such as the Diagnostics dialog box, are only available in Control mode. For
descriptions of the different modes of operation, see Setting the Operational
Mode on page 37

The feature you are looking for is a Server option, and you are using Magellan CCS
Navigator Client, or it is a Client option, and you are using Magellan CCS Navigator
Server.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Clearing the Internet Explorer Cache Closes Magellan CCS Navigator
When Internet Explorer 10’s cache is cleared and Navigator is open, regardless whether it is
in Build or Control Modes, Navigator closes. The cache needs to be cleared in various
circumstances, including upgrading IP3 Controller and upgrading Platinum SX Pro modules.
The RouterService must be manually stopped and restarted in order to fully restartMagellan
CCS Navigator.
To resolve the Internet Explorer bug that causes this problem, try the following:
1
Install any pending windows updates (Control panel -> Windows Updates).
2
Install a registry cleaner to clean your registry.
3
If that does not work, then re-install Windows entirely.
For best results, use Internet Explorer 9 or earlier, or close Magellan CCS Navigator prior to
clearing the Internet Explorer 10 cache.
Configuration Problems
User manuals for CCS devices include information on device configuration and are available
on the Documentation and Product Resources DVD and as part of the optional installation
components for Magellan CCS Navigator.
See these sections or topics:

CCS Device Configuration on page 127

Getting Version Information on page 152

Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device on page 157

NEO Frame Configuration on page 221

LCP and RCP Configuration on page 227
For general troubleshooting tips during device configuration, see the following topics:

Telnet Fails During Device Configuration on page 308

Discovery Fails to Find a Device on page 308

Magellan CCS Navigator Hangs While Discovering 6800+ Devices on page 308

Magellan CCS Navigator Has Problems Discovering a 6800+ Frame on page 308

Discovery Takes Too Long on page 309

FTP Fails During Device Configuration on page 309

Broadcast Communication Fails on page 310

Broadcast Communication Fails on page 310

Device Can’t Be Controlled or Has No Version Information on page 310

IP Address Disappears from Icon Name on page 310

Detection of a Lost Network Connection Takes Too Long on page 311

Difficulty Configuring an NSM card on page 311

Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations on page 311

Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations on page 311

Serial Port Conflict on page 311

Folder Browser Dialogs Do Not Show Network Drives in Windows 8 on
page 312
307
308
Chapter
Telnet Fails During Device Configuration
Magellan CCS Navigator uses Telnet to send commands to a device during configuration
of the device. Only one user at a time can connect to a device using Telnet. Wait a few
minutes and try again.
Discovery Fails to Find a Device
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can discover devices.
Consider these questions:

Have you correctly configured the IP addresses of the devices on the network?
Check the configurations for the IP addresses.

Are both the PC and the devices connected to the same network?
Try pinging the IP address of the device to determine if it is connected to the network.
See Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device on page 84.

Is the PC on the same subnet as the device that you are attempting to discover?
If not, the network administrator must assign a default gateway to the IP settings for
the CCS devices and the PC running the discovery. Generally, devices should have IP
addresses that are all within a similar range; e.g. 192.168.100.250 and
192.168.100.245.
This is more likely to be a problem when a device is set to its default IP address, for
example when it is first installed. See Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet
of a CCS Device on page 130

Is the PC directly connected to a CCS device, such as the NEO frame?
If so, you will need an Ethernet crossover cable, hub, or switch between the PC and the
CCS device.

Is the device an X75 or X75-RCP?
If you can ping the device IP address but can't discover it, try setting the discovery
option of this device to use point-to-point. See Setting Host IP Addresses for a
Discovery on page 77.
Magellan CCS Navigator Hangs While Discovering 6800+ Devices
Occasionally when logging in, Magellan CCS Navigator will hang while discovering 6800+
devices. This is caused by the previous instance of btsvr2.exe not being shutdown the last
time Magellan CCS Navigator exited.
To shut down the previous instance of btsvr2.exe, follow this procedure:
1
Start Task Manager by pressing CTRL-ALT-DEL on your keyboard.
2
Click on the Processes tab. If there are two instances of btsvr2.exe running, click on the
instance that displays a 0% CPU time in the CPU column and click End Process. Magellan
CCS Navigator will resume.
Magellan CCS Navigator Has Problems Discovering a 6800+ Frame
Occasionally after saving the results of a discovery of a 6800+ frame, the Navigation pane
will contain a single 6800+ server node with no frames and no modules, or some modules
in the frame will be missing from the discovery.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
There are two possible causes:

A back module is defective

A back module is not well-inserted and attached with screws to the frame
To determine which back module is causing the problem:
1
Check all back modules

Make sure no pins are damaged.

Ensure each back module is well inserted and attached with screws.

Ensure that all modules are properly inserted.
A series of networked FR6802+ and FR6802+QXF frames can contain an ICE6800+
module, or a 6800+ETH module, but not both.
2
If that does not fix the problem, remove all modules and back modules. Only leave the
ICE6800+ module and its back module (or 6800+ETH) in the frame. (The ICE6800+ back
module also needs to be properly attached).
3
Discover the ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module. In the case of an ICE6800+, ensure that it is
discovered in its proper slot. If it is not, try moving it to another slot (in case the frame slot is
damaged).
4
Reinsert the front and back modules into the frame one by one, doing a discovery after
each module is inserted, to find which front module, slot, or back module may be
damaged.
Discovery Takes Too Long
This problem occurs when the TCP/IP DNS Service Search Order list in the PC’s Network
settings includes invalid IP addresses.
To remove invalid IP addresses from the PC’s DNS Service Search Order list, complete these
steps:
1
2
Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.
Click the Network icon in the Control Panel dialog box.
This opens the Network box, containing the network settings.
3
Select the Protocols tab in the Network box.
4
Select TCP/IP Protocol from the Network Protocols list, and then click Properties....
This opens the Microsoft TCP/IP Protocol box.
5
Select the DNS tab of the Microsoft TCP/IP Protocol box.
6
Select invalid IP addresses in the DNS Service Search Order list, and then click Remove.
7
Click OK to close the Microsoft TCP/IP Protocol box.
FTP Fails During Device Configuration
Magellan CCS Navigator software uses FTP to transfer software and device configurations.
Only four users can connect simultaneously to a device using FTP.
In addition, FTP failure could occur if another PC running the application has a Telnet
session open for the same device. In this case, the Log tab reports: “System is engaged.”
309
310
Chapter
In either case, wait a few minutes and try to start the FTP session again.
NUCLEUS Device Firmware Upgrade Fails
Magellan CCS Navigator 4.6.1 and NUCLEUS 2.1 software and firmware support hardware
with 16 MB or more of flash memory. If you attempt a firmware upgrade to NUCLEUS and
the upgrade fails, this could be due to a lack of flash memory space on NUCLEUS.
To determine the size of the flash memory, on the Options menu on the NUCLEUS control
panel, choose Version info. If the flash size is 8MB then the following can be done to do a
successful firmware upgrade:

Reduce the number of configurations on Nucleus. (Take a backup to a USB Flash of the
configurations and MIB files and remove the configurations and MIB files from Nucleus
and then try the firmware upgrade).

Replace your NUCLEUS control panel with a NUCLEUS control panel with a larger Flash
memory (recommended).
Broadcast Communication Fails
If broadcast communication fails, make sure the device and the PC have the same subnet
mask if the devices are on the same subnet.
Device Can’t Be Controlled or Has No Version Information
If you change the IP address on the computer, but do not restart Magellan CCS Navigator,
you may see the following problems:

In the Version tab of the Configuration dialog box of a discovered device, all folders
are empty

In Control mode, a discovered device keeps toggling between Network Available and
Inactive status
Solution:
After changing your PC’s IP address, restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
IP Address Disappears from Icon Name
The name or alternate name of a resource icon may include the resource’s IP address or
other information. However, all resource icons belonging to a control panel configuration
show their short name when they are in the Configuration folder. The short name matches
what the control panel can show on its display, a maximum of 20 characters.
However, you can change a resource’s default short name in the resource’s Navigation
Properties box so that the short name better identifies the resource—taking out spaces,
abbreviating words, or including only the last four digits of an IP address. See Deleting a
Resource Icon on page 101 and Setting Navigation Properties on page 103.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Detection of a Lost Network Connection Takes Too Long
When a device becomes disconnected from the network, Magellan CCS Navigator may take
up to 45 seconds to detect the disconnection, even though the Connection Idle Time for
Keep Alive is set to 10,000 ms in the Communication Options settings.
The length of the delay reflects the type of network connection. CCS devices are connected
to the network through Ethernet devices, such as hubs, switches and routers.
While Magellan CCS Navigator only needs 15 seconds to detect a CCS device connection or
disconnection through a hub, it needs more time to detect a connection or disconnection
through a switch or router. This is a limitation of a normal LAN configuration.
However, you can configure a switcher or router for Fast Reacquire to improve on this
45-second delay. See also Setting Communication Options on page 59.
Difficulty Configuring an NSM card
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can configure routing
devices in Magellan CCS Navigator.
To configure an NSM card, you should configure it as another routing device. After
configuring the NSM card, you should import this into Magellan CCS Navigator. See
Volume 6: Routing Configuration for more information:
Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations
A Router Control dialog box may fail to unlock or unprotect destinations that were locked
or protected by a router control panels (Multi-Bus, Single-Bus, and Matrix Panels).
When performing locking/protecting operations on destinations, Router Control dialog
boxes use the ID of the user currently logged onto the system, whereas the Router Control
Panels use the Panel Address defined when creating these panels. This ID is used to identify
the owner of the operation, which can only be undone by this same owner. By default, the
Panel Wizard uses the ID 127 (the Address field of the Panel Identifier group found in the
first screen of the wizard).
To resolve the issue, select the address of the panel that matches your user ID. Your user ID
is shown in the Login Options box, in the User Accounts tab (Menu Options -> User
Accounts...).
Serial Port
Conflict
The default routing configuration that is shipped within Magellan CCS Navigator is set to
use the COM1 port.
By running a Discovery on Magellan CCS Navigator, you may have this configuration added
into the Navigation pane. If you do not plan to use this configuration, you have two
options:

Delete it from the Navigation pane.
OR

Unselect Discover Routing System in the Discovery pane before running a discovery.
311
312
Chapter
The port is opened immediately after switching to control (activate) and it is not closed or
released until you remove it from the Navigation pane (deactivate). So, if you have this
configuration in the Navigation pane and when you try to use a SuiteView or Serial port
action in Magellan CCS Navigator, you will get a message stating that the port is busy
(unless you are using COM 2 for these actions).
If you have another routing system that is configured to use the same COM port, you will
get status as well as be able to control this routing configuration. Only one routing
configuration that uses a specific COM port can be activated at a time.
Validating Routing/CENTRIO Panels After Upgrading
If you create a database with invalid routing/CENTRIO panels in an older version of
Magellan CCS Navigator, and then upgrade to a newer version, the panels remain invalid
after the upgrade. To automatically validate the panels after the upgrade, follow these
steps:
1
Double-click on a Routing View node .
2
Close the router configuration window without making any changes.
An “Automatically Validating Panels” progress bar appears. When it is complete, the panels
are automatically validated.
Folder Browser Dialogs Do Not Show Network Drives in Windows 8
In Windows 8, network drives do not display in folder browser dialogs. When restoring
content such as router databases, first copy them to a drive local to the computer running
Magellan CCS Navigator.
Alarm Problems
The types of devices you can control depend on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
If you are having problems with alarms, please refer to the following topics:

Alarms Behave Differently on Card Edge than in Magellan CCS Navigator on
page 313

Disabled Alarm Remains Listed in Diagnostics Dialog Box on page 313

Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots on page 313

Module Alarm is Difficult to Identify in Control Dialog Box on page 313

Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms on page 313

Diagnostics Dialog Box Fails to List Alarms for SNMP Traps on page 314

SNMP MIB Load Errors Appear on page 314
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Alarms Behave Differently on Card Edge than in Magellan CCS Navigator
The local alarm enable/disable feature on NEO modules has no relationship to the remote
alarm enable/disable feature in Magellan CCS Navigator. The NEO enable/disable alarms
feature affects only the local reporting of alarms on the NEO card edge, while this enable/
disable alarms feature affects only the remote reporting of alarms to Magellan CCS
Navigator.
Disabled Alarm Remains Listed in Diagnostics Dialog Box
When an alarm is disabled in a Control dialog box, the device will stop sending information
for that particular alarm to all installations of Magellan CCS Navigator on the CCS network.
However, disabling an alarm in a Control dialog box does not remove the alarm from the
alarm lists on the Monitor and Selected tabs of the Diagnostics dialog box. To remove
the alarm from the Monitor and Selected tabs, you must acknowledge the alarm, using
the shortcut menu for the Diagnostics dialog box. See Ignoring Alarms on page 244.
Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots
When you reboot a device connected to several PCs running Magellan CCS Navigator,
the alarm traffic hitting the network may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail.
While the query does not automatically retry, it will post an “Alarm query failed” message
to the Diagnostics dialog box.
To clear an “Alarm query failed” message, right-click inside the Diagnostics dialog box and
select Refresh from the resulting context menu.
Module Alarm is Difficult to Identify in Control Dialog Box
To open the Generic Control dialog box and determine the nature of an alarm entry:
1
Double-click the alarm entry in the Diagnostic dialog box.
This action highlights the device alarm in the Navigation pane and opens the Control
dialog box.
2
Right-click in the Control dialog box, and then select Generic Control from the shortcut
menu.
The Generic Control dialog box opens.
3
Return to the alarm entry in the Diagnostic dialog box, scroll through the entry, and locate
the parameter name in the corresponding column.
4
Return to the Generic Control dialog box, and then click All Categories from the
Parameter Classification section of the dialog box.
5
In the parameter-control section on the right side of the dialog box, look for the parameter
name identified previously in the Diagnostic dialog box (step 3).
This is the specific parameter generating an alarm.
Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms
Card alarms for a module slot do not appear in a Frame Control dialog box unless you build
the hierarchy in the Navigation pane with the modules as children of the frame in which
they reside.
313
314
Chapter
Diagnostics Dialog Box Fails to List Alarms for SNMP Traps
When the Diagnostics dialog box fails to list alarms for SNMP traps, check the following:
1
Ensure that a server icon for the SNMP device appears in either the Network or Discovery
folder.
2
Create a server icon for the SNMP device if there is no server icon, and name it for the
SNMP device. See Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon on page 99 and
Deleting a Resource Icon on page 101.
3
Set or check the navigation properties of the SNMP server icon. See Setting Navigation
Properties for an SNMP Server on page 111.
Figure A-5 Navigation Properties Box for an SNMP Device
SNMP MIB
Load Errors
Appear
4
Select the Device tab and ensure that the first field of the Device ID is set to IP and the
second field is set to the device’s IP Address. Other fields of the Device ID should be blank.
5
Verify that the monitored SNMP device has been properly configured to send SNMP traps to
the IP address of the PC running the application.
6
Verify that the Windows SNMP and SNMP Trap services are not running on your PC, then
run net stop snmptrap and net stop snmp in a Command Prompt dialog box
and restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
For the procedure for loading SNMP files into Magellan CCS Navigator, see Setting
Communication Options on page 59. Errors may occur as MIB files attempt to load. To
view MIB file load errors, click View Log. This will load the last SNMP log file in Notepad,
which will show any errors. Read the log file carefully.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
315
When you review your SNMP MIB log file, you may get an error message. The table below
describes potential error messages and the causes.
Table A-1 SNMP Error Messages
Error Message
Cause
The mib description doesn’t seem
to be consistent.
Some nodes couldn’t be linked
under the “iso” tree.

Some nodes not properly defined in the MIB file

One or more referenced MIB files are missing

MIB file not saved with line breaks
Line xx: Unknown label - label:
videoMode bla
(xx represents the line number
of the MIB file)
Syntax error in the specified line of the MIB file
Defining Nodes Correctly in an SNMP MIB File
Make sure that the nodes specified in the error message as not being able to be linked
under the iso tree are properly defined in the MIB. Do this by checking that each node, and
its parent, have the following clauses:

OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX

ACCESS

STATUS

DESCRIPTION
Correct any errors that you find in these descriptions of the MIB, and then try loading the
file again.
Checking for Missing MIB Files
If files are missing, look at the IMPORT section of the MIB files you are trying to load, if there
is one. Make sure that you are also loading the MIB files that are being referred to in that
section.
Adding Line Breaks to MIB Files
If your file was saved without line breaks, follow these steps:
1
Open your ASCII file in Microsoft Word.
2
From the File menu select Save As, and then select the Text Only with Line Breaks
option.
This converts the file into a Windows text file.
3
Copy the .txt file(s) to the directory
C:\Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\mib.
4
Start Magellan CCS Navigator, and then select SNMP from the Options menu.
5
In the SNMP Options dialog box, click the Add button.
6
Select your .txt filename from the list, and then click Open.
7
In the SNMP Options dialog box, click OK.
The file should now load properly.
316
Chapter
Correcting SNMP MIB File Syntax Errors
To find and correct any syntax errors in the SNMP MIB file that you loaded, follow these
steps:
1
Find the line that was specified as having an error.
2
Look for syntax errors on that line, and correct any errors that you find.
3
Try loading the file again.
Network is Overloaded With Duplicate SNMP Traps
When devices in an network are configured to send and receive traps, and a device receives
the traps it originated, it will send them on. This can create an excess of network traffic.
Do not configure your SNMP agent settings such that the traps for a device wind up being
returned to that device, whether directly or through a chain of forwarding devices.
SNMP Traps Do Not Appear to be Received
Due to a limitation in NET SNMP, the Agent Address (Agent IP) field in a SNMPv1 trap is
always filled with the IP of the system on the default or primary network adapter instead of
the adapter the trap was broadcast on. If the SNMP agent has more than one network IP
adapter, receiving devices may not recognize the traps that are sent.
To resolve this issue, there are two options:

Change the primary network card on the SNMP agent

Configure the device listening for SNMP traps to receive them from the primary IP
address of the sending device
Alarms Not Appearing Correctly in Japanese or Chinese Language Interface
When Magellan CCS Navigator is the recipient of forwarded alarms or traps containing
Unicode text description, you need to configure Windows Regional and Languages
Options (in the Control Panel settings) for the alarm listening PC, in order to display
Unicode text properly. Select the corresponding language in the Language for
non-Unicode programs setting.
Control Problems
The types of devices you can control depend on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
If you are having problems with controlling an item in your Magellan CCS Navigator system,
please refer to the following topics:

Magellan CCS Navigator Cannot Control a Module in the Navigation Pane on
page 317
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

No Alarms, Status, or Changes in Parameter Values Reported for an X75
Device on page 317

Device Status is Not Reported for X75 or X75-RCP Devices on page 317

Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Load on page 318

Problems With Presets in QSEE6800+ Modules on page 318

Device Status Column Reports No Status or ‘Not Ready’ on page 318

Frame Control Dialog Box Shows Error or Warning for Slot on page 319

‘Unable to Open a New Control Window’ Message Appears on page 319

No Video Shows in the Signal Monitor Dialog Box on page 319

Unable to get Streaming Video in Navigator Page or Device Control Dialog
Box on page 320
Magellan CCS Navigator Cannot Control a Module in the Navigation Pane
Consider these questions:

Did you physically configure the module for local control?
If so, then you must instead configure the device for remote control.

Is the module properly seated in the frame?
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the frame.

Does the status bar on the resource control window indicate that the device is ready?
The device may be powered off or disconnected from the network.

Do you have access rights to control the module and its parameters?
Contact the network administrator or an Administrator user to obtain permission to
control the module. See Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device on page 268.
No Alarms, Status, or Changes in Parameter Values Reported for an X75
Device
The Mute Device option must be set to No for an X75 device to report any alarm, status,
or parameter value changes. To set an X75’s Mute Device option, follow this procedure:
1
Make sure you are in control mode.
2
Right click on the X75 device in the Navigation pane, and then choose Configuration.
The X75 Configuration dialog box appears.
3
On the Device tab, make sure that Mute Device is set to No.
When Mute Device is set to No, the device asynchronously reports any changes in terms of
alarms, status, or parameter value changes.
Device Status is Not Reported for X75 or X75-RCP Devices
The Keep Alive setting must be checked in order for an X75 or X75-RCP device to report
device status. To set the Keep Alive check box, follow this procedure:
1
Make sure you are in Control mode.
2
Right click on the X75 device in the Navigation pane, and then choose Configuration.
The X75 Configuration dialog box appears.
317
318
Chapter
3
On the Device tab, make sure that Keep Alive is checked.
When Keep Alive is checked, the application will be able to report device status such as
Active or Inactive.
Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Load
By default, the Navigation tool’s ability to undo or redo the loading of presets is disabled.
This allows the Navigation tool to load presets more quickly. However, you can re-activate
this feature in the Navigation Options box.
To enable the Navigation tool to undo or redo the loading of presets, complete these
steps:
1
Point to Options on the menu bar and select Navigation from the menu.
The Navigation Options box appears.
2
In the Preset Options section of the General tab, select the Allow undo/redo of Load
Preset in Control mode check box.
You can only load presets in Control mode.
Problems With Presets in QSEE6800+ Modules
Due to the number of parameters and alarms on QSEE6800+ modules, you can only save or
load one QSEE6800+ preset at a time. You cannot create presets that contain a QSEE6800+
module in combination with any other modules.
The time to complete a “Load Preset” operation for QSEE6800+ modules will vary
according to the number of modules present in the frame. If you have problems loading or
saving a QSEE6800+ preset, set the QSEE6800+ module’s Audio Average Level
Reporting parameter to Disable.
Device Status Column Reports No Status or ‘Not Ready’
If the Device Status column in the Navigation pane fails to report a device’s network
status or reports a “Not Ready” status, ensure the the following conditions are met:

Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Control mode. If it is not, change to Control mode.
Magellan CCS Navigator can only detect the status of device connections in Control
mode.

All resource modules must be properly seated in their frames. Check the position and
seating of the resource modules in the frame.

The frame must be connected to the network. Check the device’s network connection
by “pinging” the assigned IP address. See Pinging the IP Address of a CCS
Device on page 84.
If the Device Status column still reports no status or “Not Ready” for the device, try
restarting Magellan CCS Navigator. See also Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
Checking the Connection Status of a Device
Magellan CCS Navigator reports each device’s connection status in two ways:

The bottom of a device’s Control dialog box shows operational status messages.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

In Control mode, the Navigation pane has an optional column that shows status
messages for each CCS device.
To show the column, set the Navigation options to show device status. See Setting
Navigation Options on page 120.
Frame Control Dialog Box Shows Error or Warning for Slot
The Control dialog box for a frame shows its slots and what resource modules each
contains. Each slot shows the color of its most critical outstanding alarm.
To check an alarm for a slot, select the part of the frame’s Control dialog box that
represents the slot and then select the Selected tab of the Diagnostics dialog box. The
Selected tab lists all outstanding alarms for that slot.
‘Unable to Open a New Control Window’ Message Appears
Close one or more of the open Control dialog boxes and then try reopening the new
Control dialog box. Magellan CCS Navigator’s limit on open Control dialog boxes does not
affect the number of devices that Magellan CCS Navigator can discover or monitor.
No Video Shows in the Signal Monitor Dialog Box
If no video shows in the Signal Monitor dialog box, complete these steps:
1
Ensure that an icon for the routing system shows in either the Network or Discovery
folder.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can run a discovery.
If it doesn’t, discover the routing system. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
In Build mode, configure the routing system. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
3
Select the routing view you want to monitor by clicking the Browse button. Compare the
Router Device ID setting that appears in the Signal Monitor Options box with the Device
ID of the discovered router view in the device’s Navigation Properties box.
Figure A-6 Matched device Instance IDs
319
320
Chapter
4
Ensure that you have selected a router destination in the Signal Monitor Options box that
matches the video connection between the router device or router module and the PC.
5
In Control mode, open the Control dialog box for the routing view.
6
In the Control dialog box, perform a take from a valid source to the router destination set
in the Signal Monitor Options box. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
If you get no video, check all video cabling from the device to the PC.
7
Right-click inside the device’s Signal Monitor dialog box, and select Configure Video...
from the resulting shortcut menu.
Ensure that you have selected the correct composite video connector (usually composite
video). See Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor on page 289.
8
If all else fails, reinstall the video card/drivers. See Requirements for Using the Signal
Monitor Tool on page 12.
Unable to get Streaming Video in Navigator Page or Device Control Dialog
Box
If streaming video is missing in either in a Thumbnail dialog box or in an MPEG4 streaming
dialog box, check the following configuration items:

Streaming device stream server IP setting
While in Control mode, open the streaming device’s Control dialog box. In the control
parameter list, ensure that the Streaming IP, Subnet Mask, and Gateway parameters
are set to the same subnet as the Magellan CCS Navigator PC.

Streaming dialog box property setting
If a streaming dialog box is configured in a Navigator page, make sure IP Address of
Target Server is set to the streaming device stream server IP.
Getting Help With Magellan CCS Navigator
There are many ways to access the Help files for CCS Magellan CCS Navigator.

To get help with most tools, dialog boxes, and menus, you can right-click on the object
that is giving you trouble and then select Help from the resulting context menu.

Click inside the portion of the Magellan CCS Navigator interface that interests you and
then press F1 on the PC keyboard.

Click on Help in the main menu.

Some dialog boxes, including the Property dialog box, have a button to access help.
Click the Context-Sensitive Help icon to open the Help file to a relevant topic.
Figure A-7 Context-Sensitive Help Icon
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
321
The Help menu offers access to information needed to operate the software efficiently and
to learn or review common tasks. The Help menu commands are as follows:
Table A-2 Help Menu Commands
Command
Purpose
Contents
To show the contents of a book (or chapter) on the Contents tab,
click the plus (+) sign to the left of the Book icon.
This expands the Contents tree and shows the list of topics contained
in the chapter. If there is a minus (-) sign to the left of the Book icon,
the book is open. If there is no sign by the Book icon, the book is
empty.
To show a Help topic in the Help Topic Viewer, found to the right
of the Contents frame, click the Help Topic icon (a page
with a question mark on it) to the left of the topic title.
Index
Type a keyword into the Type in keyword to find box at the top
of the frame and click Display, and any topics containing that
keyword will show in a Topics Found box
Search
Type a keyword into the Type in keyword to find box at the top
of the frame, and then click List topics; any topics containing that
keyword will show in the Select Topic to display box; to select a
topic to show, click its title and then click Display; the selected topic
shows in the Online Help Topic Viewer frame on the right side
of the Help dialog box
Imagine
Communications
on the Web
If the PC has an Internet connection, select this option to move quickly
to our website
About Magellan
CCS Navigator
Select this option to view the Magellan CCS Navigator software
version number and copyright dates
Getting Help from Customer Service
We are committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour service to our customers around
the world. Contact our website or the Customer Service team
Table A-3 Customer Service
Phone Toll Free: 1-888-LEITCH6 (534-8246)
Fax: 1-416-445-9020
E-mail: [email protected]
Expediting a Software Solution
If you have a software problem, capture a screen image that illustrates the problem, if
possible, and save that image as a 16-color bitmap. Send that image to Customer Service
with a summary of what you were attempting to do when the problem occurred. This may
help our customer service staff determine the exact nature of the difficulty.
Capturing a Screen Image and Saving It as a Bitmap File
To capture a screen image and save it as a bitmap file, complete these steps:
322
Chapter
1
Press PRINT SCRN on the keyboard when the application is running and the problem is
occurring. This will capture the entire computer screen.
Or click in the interface, and press ALT+PRINT SCRN. This will capture only the active dialog
box.
2
Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs for Windows XP), select Accessories, and
then click Paint.
This opens the Windows Paint program.
3
Select Paste from the Edit menu in the Paint application. The screen capture opens as a
graphic image.
4
Select Save As from the File menu and save the captured image as a 16-color bitmap
(BMP) file.
5
E-mail or fax the captured image to the Leitch service center with a description of the
hardware and software configuration and a summary of what you were attempting to do
when the problem occurred.
323
B
Frequently Asked Questions
What are the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Licensing Options?
When CCS Magellan CCS Navigator is installed, its 30-day free license has all options
enabled. When this license expires, you can purchase just the options you need. To review
the licenses currently installed on your Magellan CCS Navigator system, see Viewing Your
License Key on page 20.
License options for Magellan CCS Navigator are described in Navigator Licenses on
page 2.
Can I use CCS Software to Configure my Devices?
Yes. See these topics:

CCS Device Configuration on page 127

Volume 6: Routing Configuration

NUCLEUS Configuration on page 161

NEO Frame Configuration on page 221

LCP and RCP Configuration on page 227
Can I use Magellan CCS Navigator to Build a Graphical Network Model?
Yes. Even without any optional licenses, an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server can build a graphical hierarchical model of all CCS devices on the broadcast network.
This model can also include non-CCS devices to which CCS has communication gateways.
See Network View Construction on page 93.
What is the Navigation Pane?
The Navigation pane is the interface to the Navigation tool. This pane contains the
resource tree. Administrator users on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server use the Navigation
tool to customize the hierarchical resource tree, a representation of the CCS network, using
resource icons presenting the devices and their environments.
324
Chapter
What is Graphical Navigation?
The NAVIGATOR-SRV license contains tools to create custom graphical pages that represent
your network and its various environments around the world. You can associate objects on
these pages with network events, user-defined actions, and other pages. You can
consolidate, simplify, and centralize the status monitoring of the network's many devices
and environments on a few easy-to-use and -understand pages. This can lead to more
efficient and economical operation of your network.
Magellan CCS Navigator comes with a collection of buttons, symbols, and images,
for creating the custom graphical pages. However, you can also import a business logo,
map, engineering drawings, or other image files in *.bmp or *.jpg format for use in
creating your custom graphical pages.
Magellan CCS Navigator Clients, which require a Magellan CCS Navigator Server on the
network, can control and monitor Graphical Navigation pages and devices to which they
have been granted access.
What is the Graphical Navigation Window?
A Graphical Navigation window is the interface to the Graphical Navigation tool. In
Build mode, you will use the Graphical Navigation tool to create custom graphical pages
that represent your network and its various environments in the Graphical Navigation
window. In Control mode, these pages enable you to monitor network events across the
various network environments and implement user-defined actions affecting them.
What is a Magellan CCS Navigator Page?
A Magellan CCS Navigator page is a document containing graphics that represent
a network environment. The page, which can be saved as a file with the extension *.nav,
uses the following objects to represent network devices and their environment: symbols,
images, buttons, links, and text. All these objects can be clicked, have shortcut menus, and
can have user-defined actions associated with them.
You can associate two pages together by associating a “load page” action with an object
on one of the pages. The user-defined action identifies the other page as the target page to
load.
Can I Create my Own Magellan CCS Navigator Pages?
Creating and using Graphical Navigation pages is described in depth in Magellan CCS
Navigator CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in. Administrator users of Magellan CCS
Navigator Servers can create pages.
What are Magellan CCS Navigator Actions?
Magellan CCS Navigator actions are activities that occur when defined events and
conditions happen. Administrator users of Magellan CCS Navigator Servers can define these
actions, events, and conditions as rules for Magellan CCS Navigator objects and pages. See
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 59.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
325
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor the Overall Status of
Network Devices?
Yes. With a NAVIGATOR-CLI, NAVIGATOR-DEV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-SRV
license, CCS Magellan CCS Navigator can report the overall status of the devices
on the network.
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor Network Device Environments?
Yes, CCS Magellan CCS Navigator can report on network device environments, whether
they are beside the PC, in the next room, or on the other side of the world. You can create
summary pages to which a number of alarms will bubble up, so you can consolidate the
status monitoring of the network on just one or a few summary pages.
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Perform Router Operations?
With NAVIGATOR-CLI, NAVIGATOR-RTR, and NAVIGATOR-SRV licenses, Magellan CCS
Navigator can perform many router operations, including the following:
Table B-1 Router-Specific Actions Available
Action
Function
Clear Selected Salvo
Clears the current salvo selection
Clear Selected
Clears the current router selection
Execute Salvo
Sets up and immediately takes a router salvo
Execute Selected Salvo
Performs a router salvo
Lock Selected
Destination
Locks the selected router destination
Protect Selected
Destination
Protects the selected router destination
Query Destination
Status
Queries the status of the router destination
Query Signal Presence
Status
Queries the signal presence status
Restrict Crosspoint
Sets up and prevents a particular source and
destination from being taken
Restrict Selected
Crosspoint
Prevents a selected source and destination
from being taken
Select Destination
Presets the desired destination in preparation
for a Take command
Select Salvo
Presets the desired salvo in preparation for
Execute Selected Salvo command
Select Source
Presets the desired source in preparation
for a Take command
326
Chapter
Table B-1 Router-Specific Actions Available (Continued)
Action
Function
Set Crosspoint Match
Type
Sets the matching algorithm type used by the
On Crosspoint Status event
Swap Destinations
Swaps the crosspoints of two specified
destinations
Take Crosspoint
Sets up and immediately takes a router
crosspoint
Take Selected
Takes the selected router source and
destination
For more information on router events and actions, see Router Rule Creation on page 89 of
CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
Can I Keep the Application Always on Top?
Due to how the Windows operating system handles window positioning, using the Always
On Top feature does not guarantee that this application’s interface will always be on top.
Some other Windows applications with the Always On Top feature selected may take
precedence.
By selecting the Always On Top menu entry of the Window menu, the Magellan CCS
Navigator application interface is always on top of other applications. When this option is
set, if you start another application within or outside of the application, the new application
will appear below the current application. To have Magellan CCS Navigator always appear
on top, in the Window menu select Always On Top.
Figure B-1 The Always On Top Menu Entry
Can I Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once?
Sometimes columned grids have multiple check boxes that you are required to select or
clear. You can use common Windows methods for selecting multiple adjacent or
nonadjacent check boxes, and then select or clear them simultaneously.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Figure B-2 Sample Grid with Multiple Check Boxes
1
2
To select multiple rows, complete one of these steps:

To select multiple adjacent rows, press and hold SHIFT on your keyboard, and then
click the first and last row within the column you want to select.

To select multiple nonadjacent rows, press and hold CTRL on your keyboard, and
then click each row within the column you want to select.
To select or clear the highlighted check boxes simultaneously, press the SPACEBAR on your
keyboard.
327
328
Chapter
329
C
Copyright, Trademark, and
Warranty Information
Copyrights
Copyright 2003-2014, Imagine Communications. All rights reserved.
Portions © 1981-1999, Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Portions © 1994-1996, QLogic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2004-2007 Amino Communications Ltd. All rights reserved.
Portions © 1989, 1991, 1992, 1998 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Portions © 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the
University of California. All Rights Reserved
Portions © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California
95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network. All rights reserved.
Portions © Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
CCS, CCS CoPilot, Magellan CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, Command Control System,
CineTone, CinePhase, CineSound, DigiBus, DigiPeek, Digital Glue, DigiWorks, DTV Glue,
EventWORKS, EZ HD, Genesis, HDTV Glue, Icon, Iconlogo, IconMaster, IconMaster Nav,
IconSet, IconStation, Image Q, Inca, Inca Station, InfoCaster, Inscriber, Inscriber CG—FX,
Integrator, LeFont, Leitch, LogoMotion, MediaFile, MIX BOX, NEO, the NEO design,
330
Appendix C
<$paratextAppTitle]
NEOSCOPE, NewsFlash, Nexio, Opus, Panacea, PanelMAPPER, Platinum, Portal, PROM-Slide,
RouterMAPPER, RouterWORKS, Signal Quality Manager, SpyderWeb, SuiteView,
TitleMotion, UNIFRAME, Velocity, VelocityHD, VideoCarte, Videotek, and X75 are
trademarks of Imagine Communications, which may be registered in the United States,
Canada, and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows
7, Windows, ODBC, and Visual FoxPro are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Software User License and Warranty Agreement
Carefully read all of the terms and conditions of this license agreement before using
Magellan CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, or CCS CoPilot. By using this software, you indicate
your complete and unconditional acceptance of these terms and conditions.
This document constitutes a legal agreement between you and Imagine Communications,
concerning the use of CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, or CCS CoPilot. This agreement constitutes
the complete agreement between you and Imagine Communications.
License
Imagine Communications grants the licensee a non-exclusive license to use the software
in this package on one server or workstation in a single network installation, which
installation shall consist of no more than 1,000 servers or workstations. A network is
defined as any continuously connected group of computers on one cabling scheme without
software or hardware bridges.
You may make up to two copies of the software for backup purposes only. Imagine
Communications retains title to and ownership of this copy and all backup copies and all
proprietary rights related to the software and the accompanying manuals. You may not
copy any part of the accompanying manuals, copy the software except as permitted above,
make alterations or modifications to the software, or attempt to decompile or discover the
source code of the software.
The software may not be transferred, sublicensed, rented or leased. Both the license and
your right to use the software terminate automatically if you violate any part of this
agreement. In the event of termination, you must immediately destroy all copies
of the software or return them to Imagine Communications.
Limited
Software
Warranty
If you discover physical defects in the media on which the software is distributed or in the
accompanying manuals, Imagine Communications will replace the media or manuals for a
period of ninety (90) days after purchase by you. You must return the disk or manuals to
Imagine Communications, prepaid, within the warranty period, accompanied by proof of
purchase.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
This warranty does not apply to defects due directly or indirectly to misuse, abuse,
negligence, accident, repairs, or alterations made by the customer or another party or if the
serial number has been removed or defaced.
Imagine Communications disclaims all implied warranties, including without limitation
warranties of merchantability, performance, and fitness for a particular purpose. Imagine
Communications will not be liable for any bug, error, omission, defect, deficiency, or
nonconformity in any software. As a result, the software is sold “as is,” and the purchaser
assumes the entire risk as to its suitability, quality and performance.
Limitation of Liability
Imagine Communications shall in no event be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental,
contingent, or consequential damages resulting from any defect in the software or its
documentation, including damages from loss of data, downtime, goodwill, damage to or
replacement of equipment or property, and any costs of recovering, reprogramming, or
reproducing any program or data used in conjunction with Imagine Communications
products, even if Imagine Communications has been advised of the possibility
of such damages.
You agree that Imagine Communications liability, arising out of contract, negligence, strict
liability in tort or written or oral information or advice given by Imagine Communications
employees, dealers, or agents will in no way increase the scope of this warranty. Nor may
you rely on any such written or oral communication.
The laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada, shall govern this agreement.
NET SNMP
License
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please
make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) ----Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University
of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific written permission.
331
332
Appendix C
<$paratextAppTitle]
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA
OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual

The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY,WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California
95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc
333
334
Appendix C
<$paratextAppTitle]
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor
the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
[email protected]
Author: Bernhard Penz
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.

The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or
product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
335
336
Appendix C
<$paratextAppTitle]
337
D
Glossary
Index to Terms
A
Acknowledge
A command that clears a selected alarm from the Diagnostics tool’s Monitor
and Selected tabs. The command also changes the status of the alarm’s
Acknowledged field from No to Yes.
Action
Component used to perform specific tasks within the Graphical Navigation tool.
CCS actions perform Magellan CCS Navigator-related tasks, router actions perform
router-specific tasks, and Magellan CCS Navigator actions perform GUI-related
tasks.
Administrator
A software user with special access rights to set up a software application
at a user site. An administrator generally works in a company’s computer support
department.
Advanced Router
Control plug-in
An optional plug-in that adds to Magellan CCS Navigator tools for controlling and
monitoring routers.
Administrators
A user group responsible for installing, configuring, and supporting the CCS
software at a company.
Alarm
A message that CCS software generates to alert users when an extraordinary
event occurs on the CCS network, such as a loss of input, loss of power, loss of
connection, or a malfunctioning or removed card.
API
Application Program Interface. The specification describing how a programmer
writing an application accesses the behavior and state of classes and objects.
AuthenticationFai
lure
An SNMP trap generated by an agent on an SNMP-managed device that
indicates that an instance of authentication failure has occurred.
B
BO/S
Broadcast Operating System. The operating system created by Leitch
Technology to manage its Command Control System (CCS) products over a
CCS network.
Breakaway
switch or
breakaway take
Occurs when a logical source is partially switched to a logical destination.
338
Chapter
We can define a router system to have two levels, video and audio, because the
video and audio signals typically are electrically distinct and not transmitted on
the same wire. Two routers or router modules must operate in tandem across
the two levels to switch the audio and video. (One router frame may support
multiple levels through different modules in the same physical router frame.)
Magellan CCS NavigatorImagine a router system that has two logical sources, VR1
and VR2, and two logical destinations, SAT1 and SAT2. Each of these logical
sources and destinations has two levels of signals (both audio and video), which
comprise the complete “logical” signal.
If you switch, or take, the logical source VR1 to the logical destination SAT1,
you actually take two crosspoints to switch the complete logical source VR1
signals to the logical SAT1 destination. One is the crosspoint for the video level
and the other is the crosspoint for the audio level.
If you want the SAT1 logical designation to carry the video component of the
VR1 source and use the audio component from the VR2 source (for example,
during a voice-over of a news story, when the reporter narrates over stock
footage), you take the crosspoint on the video level of VR1 to SAT1 as usual, but
then take the crosspoint on the audio level of VR2 to SAT1. This partial switch, in
which only part of a logical source appears at a logical destination, or a logical
output carries signals from two or more logical sources, is called a breakaway
switch or a breakaway take.
Browse sequence
A group of related Help topics that guide users through a software application’s
process or a set of information. Users navigate browse sequences with
Previous and Next buttons.
Build mode
An operational mode in a CCS software application that is used to discover
CCS devices, build hierarchical views of the network, and configure
individual devices.
C
Catalog folder
A folder in the Navigation pane that contains icons representing each of the
devices that a CCS software product supports.
CCS
Command Control System. Hardware and software connected together
over a BO/S network.
CCS CoPilot™
A CCS configuration tool for installation on Windows-based PCs that offered
a quick, easy way of installing and upgrading CCS devices. CoPilot worked only
in Build mode, and had similar functionality to Magellan CCS Navigator without
any license keys. CoPilot was integrated into the high-end CCS software and
also available as a standalone product.
CoPilot can scan your network to find devices residing on the network. Then you
can configure their network settings, transfer software upgrades, look up version
information for the device’s hardware and software, and perform other
configuration tasks specific to the device, such as restarting the device after you
make configuration changes.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
CCS
DPS-Gateway
A device that translates the DPS Communications Network (DCN) language into
Command Control System (CCS) language, the language understood
by Magellan CCS Navigator, and CCS into DCN, the language of Leitch’s
popular DPS-575 digital processing synchronizers. This enables Magellan CCS
Navigator, Pilot, and CoPilot software to communicate with Leitch DPS-575 digital
processing synchronizers, which are not CCS devices. Magellan CCS Navigator
also offers some degree of remote monitoring of the synchronizers via the
gateway.
Magellan CCS
Navigator™
A CCS software application for installation on Windows-based PCs that enables
you to easily create custom browser pages that represent your network and its
various environments around the world. You can associate objects on these
pages with network events, user-defined actions, and other browser pages.
These pages consolidate, simplify, and centralize the status monitoring of the
network's many devices and environments on a few easy-to-use and
-understand browser pages. This can lead to more efficient and economical
operation of your network.
Magellan CCS Navigator comes with a gallery of buttons, symbols, images, and
page templates for creating the custom browser pages. However, you can also
import your business logo and other image files for use in creating your custom
browser pages.
CCS Pilot™
A CCS software application for installation on Windows-based PCs that enabled
a user to discover, navigate, control, monitor, and secure access
to CCS-enabled devices on a network. Features included remote control of all
CCS components, centralized or distributed monitoring of all CCS components,
and network and component topology management. This product was replaced
with the NAVIGATOR-DEV license.
CCS Protocol™
Command Control System Protocol. A binary/ASCII protocol used to connect
existing control and automation systems to CCS-compliant devices. It is a simple
protocol accessed via a serial port or TCP/IP sockets.
CCS RouterNAV
A CCS software application based on Magellan CCS Navigator, which only
provides control and configuration functionality for routers.
CCS software
applications
Software that implements the Command Control System of device control.
These applications currently include the Magellan CCS Navigator, Pilot, and CoPilot
software.
Check box
An element used in forms in which users select choices by clicking a box.
When a check box shows a check mark or X, the feature is selected or on.
When the check box is blank or clear, the feature is not selected or off.
Child resource
A resource contained by the parent resource.
Clipboard
A temporary storage place for retaining information that was selected and copied
or cut from a file.
Coaxial cable
A type of copper cable. It includes one channel that carries the signal,
surrounded first by a layer of insulation and then by another concentric physical
channel running along the same axis. The outer channel serves as a ground.
Coldstart
An SNMP trap generated by an agent on a managed device that indicates that
the sending agent is re-initializing with significant changes to its configuration.
339
340
Chapter
Command
Control System™
(CCS)
A distributed real-time command and control system used to configure,
provision, and monitor CCS and third-party equipment. CCS provides open and
scalable access via standard communication protocols
(TCP/IP, SNMP, HTML, and serial) to all components of a networked studio.
CCS components include the following:

Monitoring and control applications

Discovery and inventory management applications

Network and device configuration applications

Local and remote device control panels

Gateways to interface to third-party and existing CCS networks

Web browser interfaces
Condition
Part of a rule. Some actions only trigger an event when a condition is met.
Conditions are used by rules when the Magellan CCS Navigator installation
includes a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
Conditional event
An event that must happen in a specific way for an action to be triggered.
Conditional events are used by rules when the Magellan CCS Navigator installation
includes a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
Configuration
folder
A folder in the Navigation tool in which a CCS software user creates
configurations for frames, control panels, and gateways.
Configuration
node
A resource icon that appears as a descendant of the top Configuration folder
and represents configuration information for a frame or control panel and its
assigned functional blocks (resource cards).
Configuration
dialog box
An interface to the Configuration tool.
Configuration tool
A CCS software tool for configuring CCS devices connected to a CCS network.
Contents
The table of contents for the Help file that shows the structure of the Help file
in an expandable and collapsible hierarchy. Use it to move through the
application’s Help system and find information. Book and Help Topic icons
represent topic destinations.
Shortcut menu
A menu that shows when you right-click an object. The menu contains a list
of commands specific to the right-clicked object.
Control mode
An operational mode in CCS software used to control CCS devices.
Control panel
A device that regulates the control parameters of one or more devices.
Control tool
A CCS software tool for controlling CCS devices connected to the CCS network.
Control dialog
box
An interface to the Control tool.
Cross-reference
A keyword linked to another keyword in the index. When you select
the cross-reference in the index, your cursor jumps in the file to the related
keyword.
Crosspoint
A physical connection between a router input (I) and a router output (O).
For each of the outputs in a router, the number of crosspoints is equal
to the number of inputs. Only one crosspoint, however, may be active
at any given time. When a crosspoint is active, the input and output pair (I, O)
associated with the crosspoint are connected, and the signal present at input I is
sent to output O of the router.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Custom property
A variable that holds a temporary value that defines or triggers events. Custom
properties are used by rules when the Magellan CCS Navigator installation includes
a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
D
DBMS
Database Management System.
Device Control
license
The NAVIGATOR-DEV license supports the remote discovery, configuration,
monitoring, control and diagnostics of supported devices.
Device hierarchy
Logical organization of devices.
Diagnostics tool
A CCS software tool for locating and diagnosing problems with CCS devices connected
to a broadcast network.
Diagnostics
dialog box
An interface to the Diagnostics tool.
Dialog box
A Windows-based box containing command buttons and options to carry out
a particular command or task.
Discovery
The process of finding devices on a network.ADD detail.
Discovery folder
A folder containing the results of a discovery, a process in which the CCS
software locates all CCS devices attached to each of a network's IP addresses.
Discovery tool
A CCS software tool used to find devices connected to a CCS network, using the
devices’ IP addresses.
Discovery pane
An interface to the Discovery tool.
DLL
Dynamic Link Library.
DNS
Domain Name System.
Drag-and-drop
operation
A technique for moving an object from one location to another using the mouse.
Drop-down menu
An element in forms that enables you to make a selection from a hidden list. You
click an arrow to the right of the list field and then select an item from the
resulting list.
E
EgpNeighborLoss
An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed device generates that indicates that
the agent's EGP protocol has lost an EGP peer relationship.
Engineer user
A CCS software user responsible for building, configuring, installing, and
repairing the component devices that together comprise the CCS network.
EnterpriseSpecific
An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed devices generates that indicates the
occurrence of an enterprise-specific event.
Error
A device state which may occur when CCS software encounters a problem
communicating with a device—for example, when someone removes a card
from a frame or replaces one card with another card type.
Ethernet
The most widely installed local area network (LAN) technology. An Ethernet LAN
typically uses coaxial cable or special grades of twisted pair wires.
341
342
Chapter
Event
Part of a Navigator rule. Events trigger actions. Some events are conditional.
Events are available in Magellan CCS Navigator installations that include a
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
Extensible
Built so that later users or designers can extend its capabilities.
F
Favorites
A tab or page in the Help file on which you can store a list of Help topics that
you commonly reference.
A user-defined subset of parameters for a device that can be used to configure a
control panel.
Format
A control domain that groups a device parameters according to signal formats.
Frame
A box or chassis that contains product modules—such as cards, power supplies
and fans.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol, a TCP/IP protocol that enables you to transfer files
between two different computers on a TCP/IP network.
Full-text search
An Online Help feature that creates a database of Help information so you can
search for words that occur in the content of Help topics.
Function
A control domain that groups device parameters according to their function.
Functional block
A card controlled as a single unit in a frame.
G
General user
A CCS software user who has no responsibility for installing or supporting
the software. A general user can create unique tree views of the network,
but has no control over the creation of user or group accounts or the assignment
of device access rights.
Generic Control
dialog box
A generic CCS software tool for controlling CCS devices connected to a CCS
network.
Global property
A page property that is available for all pages, rather then just the page where it
was created (as opposed to a custom property). In a Graphical Navigation page,
global properties are used to create rules and macros.
GUI
Graphical User Interface.
H
Host
In Internet Protocol (IP) specifications, any device that has full two-way access
to other devices on the TCP/IP network.
Hot-swappable
Term used to describe a device that a user can remove from a frame and replace
without interrupting power to the frame or affecting the operation of any other
device, other than those that directly depend on the removed device.
The replacement device should configure automatically to the same working
state and settings as its predecessor without special user intervention.
Hotspot
A clickable area in a topic or image that opens other topics, shows text-only
pop-ups, plays sound or video, or jumps to websites, news groups, or other
destinations.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol. The set of rules for exchanging files on the World
Wide Web.
Hyperlink
An area in a Help topic or Web page that changes when a user clicks the spot.
It is normally indicated by underlined and colored text. The mouse cursor turns
into a hand when the user hovers the mouse over the text or graphic. The hand
indicates that if the user clicks the area, another topic or a piece of linked
information will appear.
I
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol. A message-control and error-reporting
protocol that uses IP packets.
IconMasterNav
Another name for the optional Master Control license for Magellan CCS
Navigator that complements the IconMaster hardware panel and allows faster
access to many of the operational feature submenus and audio meters.
IE
(Microsoft) Internet Explorer.
Interface Control
plug-in
An optional plug-in that provides tools for device control and monitoring when a
NAVIGATOR-INT license is available.
IP
Internet Protocol. This protocol within TCP/IP determines the breakup of data
messages into packets, the routing of the packets from the sender to the
destination network and station, and the reassembly of the packets into the
original data messages at the destination.
IP address
A sequence of four numbers, each containing from one to three digits, that
together identify an Internet Protocol address for a host device connected
to a TCP/IP network.
IP packet
The unit of data routed between an origin and a destination on the TCP/IP
network. Each of these packets is separately numbered and includes the
Internet address of the source and destination.
L
License
A purchased option that adds tools to your Magellan CCS Navigator installation.
Magellan CCS Navigator normally starts with all options activated on a temporary
basis.
Link
A line or arrow in Magellan CCS Navigator’s Browser dialog box that links two
symbols.
LinkDown
An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed device generates to indicate a failure
in one of the sending agent’s communication links.
LinkUp
An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed device generates to indicate that the
normal running status of one of the sending agent’s communication links has
been restored.
Local Active
A device state that indicates that a device is operating and can only be
controlled with a control panel or card-edge controls.
Locked
The state of a router destination that a user is preventing from receiving signals
from any new router source. Only the user who locked a router destination can
unlock it.
343
344
Chapter
M
Macro
A group of actions that can be executed at a specific event. Macros are
associated with rules if you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP
license.
Master Control
plug-in
Combines tools to create and operate pages to control IconMaster switchers.
MDI
Multiple Document Interface. (CCS software and its tools run primarily
as standalone MDI worksheet applications.)
MIB
Management Information Base. A formal description of a set of network objects
that can be managed using and defined by the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP).
Monitor point
Property of a device that can be set through the Navigation Properties dialog.
This property corresponds to the name of a configured router source that is
physically connected to the signal monitoring output of a device.
N
Navigator page
A page containing objects that represent a network environment as well as any
user-defined actions. The page uses the following objects to represent network
devices and their environment: symbols, images, buttons, links, and text. All
these objects are clickable, have shortcut menus, and can have user-defined
actions associated with them.
You can associate two Navigator pages together by creating a “load page” action
for an object on one of the pages. The user-defined action identifies the other
page as the target page to load.
Navigation tool
A tool that enables CCS software users to create hierarchical views
of the organization of their CCS devices.
Navigation pane
An interface to the Navigation tool that contains the resource tree. One uses the
Navigation tool to customize the resource tree, using resource icons presenting
the devices and their environment.
Network active
A device state in which a CCS device is operational and can be controlled
remotely.
Network folder
A folder containing a hierarchical view of a CCS network. The view contains
icons representing all the studios, racks, servers, frames, products, and
functional blocks comprising the network.
Node
A connection point in a network that serves as either a redistribution point or an
end point for data transmissions.
Not ready
A device state in which the TCP/IP connection with a resource has been lost
when the resource was restarting or was disconnected from the network.
O
ODBC
Open Database Connectivity.
Operation
A control domain that groups a device parameters according to operations on
signals.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
Operational mode
A method of operating in a software application. CCS software generally has two
operational modes: Build and Control. If your Magellan CCS Navigator install has no
license, or if the license has expired, Magellan CCS Navigator operates only in Build
mode.
Operator user
A typical CCS software user who works as an equipment operator and is
responsible for setting and monitoring the control values of different signals as
these signals flow through the CCS network. This person typically has no need
to go inside the frame of a particular device, but manipulates exterior controls of
products or functional blocks residing inside the frame.
P
Parameter ID
An integer value that uniquely identifies a controllable parameter on a device.
Parameter name
The name of a controllable parameter on a device.
Parent resource
A resource that acts as a container or parent for one or more other CCS devices.
PDF
Portable Document File, a file that can be read by Adobe's Acrobat Reader
software.
Ping
A user command and an underlying protocol based on ICMP that enables users
to verify that a particular IP address exists and can accept requests.
Plug-in
An item which is not available in all versions of Magellan CCS Navigator. Examples
of plug-ins include Advanced Router Control, Master Control and Interface
Control.
Preset
A predefined control setting for one or more CCS devices.
Preset folder
A Navigation folder that contains preset files.
Product
Two or more functional blocks controlled as a single unit.
Property sheet
A dialog box that shows the properties for an object in the interface.
Protected
The state of a router destination that is prevented from receiving the signal of
any new router source except when the request is made by the user who
protected the destination. Only the user who protected a router destination can
unprotect it.
Protocol
In information technology, a special set of rules that the end points
of a telecommunication connection use to communicate.
Push-Pin icon
A pictorial symbol found on a property sheet that enables you to keep
the property sheet open while you perform other tasks. When selected, the icon
changes appearance to show that it is enabled.
R
Rack
A shelving unit containing broadcast equipment.
Radio button
An element used in forms that enables you to select only one alternative from a
group. Radio buttons are presented in a list, one of which is selected by default.
Clicking a new button may at times clear a previously selected item.
Refresh
A command that causes a device to restart without losing power—that is, a soft
reboot.
345
346
Chapter
Resource status
bar
A bar that shows information about a CCS device's connection to the network
and indicates if the resource is ready for control through the CCS Control tool.
Router
A device that directs one or more input signals to more than one destination.
Routing switchers can direct analog video or audio, digital video or audio, HDTV,
time code, RS-232/422 data, Ethernet, etc.
Router folder
A folder in the Navigation pane that contains routers and routing views. From
this folder, you can start a router configuration dialog box.
Router input
An individual signal in a source.
Router
destination
A combination of output signals.
Router level
A type of signal, such as audio or video.
Router output
An individual signal in a destination.
Router source
A combination of input signals.
Rule
A combination of an event and a condition which trigger an action.
S
Salvo
A predefined list of (router) crosspoint operations that, when executed, occur
simultaneously.
Serial
The transmission of individual bits of data one at a time with time separating
the individual bits.
Server
A computer or program on a network that responds to commands from a client
program or computer.
Server icon
A pictorial symbol that represents one IP address. Each IP address may serve
one or more frames, products, or functional blocks in CCS software.
Server node
In CCS software, this type of node represents any device that supports the TCP/
IP protocol.
Shortcut icon
An icon that gives CCS software users one-click access to resource icons in the
Network, Discovery, Configuration, Temporary, Catalog, or Preset folders in
the Navigation pane without moving down through the hierarchical structure
of the Resource tree.
Signal monitoring
tool
A CCS software tool that enables you to output a signal from a CCS device to an
external monitor or a dialog box on the application’s desktop.
Signal monitoring
dialog box
The user interface to the Signal monitoring tool.
Simple Network
Management
Protocol
SNMP. A protocol that enables SNMP applications to manage devices through
SNMP agents across a network. CCS supports SNMP as one of several
mechanisms for managing equipment. SNMP, based on UDP, is best suited
for monitoring and controlling devices in an environment that does not have
real-time requirements. Other CCS-supported protocols, such as those based
on TCP/IP, are better suited for the real-time monitoring and control of devices.
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNMP Control
plug-in
An optional plug-in that provides tools for building Navigator pages (with a
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license) for communicating with SNMP-enabled devices.
Navigator Device Control
User Manual
SNMP trap
An SNMP packet generated by devices supporting the SNMP protocol. The
seven types of SNMP traps are as follows: coldstart, warmstart, linkup, linkdown,
authenticationfailure, egpNeighborloss, and enterprisespecific.
Specific Control
Dialog Box
A specific CCS software tool for controlling a specific CCS device.
Stream
A control domain that groups a device parameters according to their position
in the signal processing stream.
Studio
A broadcast studio managed as one unit.
Subnet
An identifiable subunit of a network, such as the devices in one geographic
location, in one studio, or on the same local area network.
SuiteView Control
plug-in
An optional plug-in that provides conditional events and actions to the
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license specifically for the purpose of
communicating with SuiteView multiviewers.
T
Tab
A page in a dialog box or property sheet with an index-style tab.
Take
The act of making a crosspoint active in terms of a source and a destination.
For example, the statement “Take Input 2 to Output 5” makes the crosspoint that
connects Input 2 to Output 5 active—taking In 2 to Out 5.
Take crosspoint
The act of making a crosspoint active.
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol. A set of rules for exchanging messages with
other Internet points at the information packet level.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, developed by the U.S.
Department of Defense for communications between computers. TCP/IP has
become the standard for data transmission over networks.
Telnet
A user command and an underlying TCP/IP protocol that enables you to access
remote computers.
Temporary folder
A folder like the Network folder that contains a network hierarchy,
but the Temporary folder’s network is a draft or preliminary version.
Only the Network folder’s network view operates. Temporary folders are
a place to build rough drafts of tree views of the network. You can also use these
folders to hold information about equipment temporarily offline.
Tree
A hierarchical diagram in the CCS Navigation pane that reflects
the organization of the CCS network.
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. A communications protocol that offers a limited amount
of service when messages are exchanged between computers in a network that
uses the Internet Protocol (IP).
URL
Uniform Resource Locator. The address of a resource accessible on the TCP/IP
network. The type of resource depends on the Internet application protocol.
User account
An account representing one application user with a unique user name and
password.
User group
One or more users who have the same access rights to a set of actions.
347
348
Chapter
User interface
The set of dials, knobs, operating system commands, graphical display formats,
and other devices provided by a computer or a program to enable you to
communicate and use the computer or program.
User profile
A group of settings that define how your e-mail software is set up for a particular
user. These settings control how your e-mail system addresses and delivers
your mail and how it stores your mail and folders. Your e-mail software creates
this user profile.
V
Virtual device
A user-defined group of devices that can be controlled by a control panel as if
they were a single device.
Virtual Device
folder
A folder in the Navigation pane where users can construct virtual devices while
in Build mode.
W
Warmstart
An SNMP trap generated by an agent on a managed device that indicates
that the sending agent is re-initializing itself with no changes in its configuration.
The agent re-initializes its previous configuration tables.
Wildcard
expression
An advanced search technique using asterisks (*) and question marks (?) to
represent any characters (*) or character (?). You can use wildcards in full-text
searching to narrow the target of your search.
Workbook mode
A mode that enables you to flip easily between multiple Control dialog boxs to
work with them simultaneously. Each dialog box is on a separate tab or page in
the Control dialog box. The tabs are located at the bottom of the dialog box. The
command to activate workbook mode is on the View menu.
349
Index
A
Access options, NUCLEUS 199
Access rights 23, 104, 106, 119, 268
administrator 25, 337
device 28
general users 31, 342
pages 30
presets 29
user groups 347
Acknowledge alarms 244, 337
Add Upgrade Files box 146
Add user group 26
Add/remove programs 17
Adding indexes to a routing panel 183, 184, 185
Administrator 23
defined 337
view of Navigation pane 93
Advanced Router Control plug-in 49
Agent, SNMP configuration 70
Alarms 237–247
acknowledging 244
Alarm Event ID 239
alarm query failed 313
at card edge 313
clearing 245
column in Navigation pane 122
disabled 313
EDGE-DPS575 215
failing to report 313
filtering column in Navigation pane 124
filtering LCP/RCP 235
forwarding SNMP 73
listing 239, 245, 246
X75 261
log 245, 246
saving 245
properties 246
saving to file 245
setting 261
SNMP traps 314
tab, X75 261
troubleshooting 312
Amino STB 98
configuration 111
API 337
Application, third-party 107
Auto-assignment, NUCLEUS 201
B
BO/S 337
Boot file, upgrading device 146
Browse sequence 338
Build mode 6, 37, 338
C
Capturing a screen image 321
Cards, seating of 318
Cascading windows 55
Catalog folder 14, 338
Third party devices 111
Categories, NUCLEUS 175
Category menus, NUCLEUS 194
Category/Index selection, CENTRIO 181
CCS control panels 157, 222, 228, 234
configuring 227
refreshing 233
software upgrade 297
transferring configuration 231
CCS devices 1
discovering 75, 308
in alarm tables 239
in Diagnostics dialog box 238
CCS DPS-Gateway 96, 211
configuring 211
discovering 76
CCS host communications 237
CCS Protocol 158
CCS, defined 338
CENTRIO 98, 116
adding to a NUCLEUS configuration 164
icons in Navigation pane 96
in Navigation pane 116
NUCLEUS license for 161
350
Index
PIP names 181
CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard 164, 180
selecting displays 183
selecting PIP attributes 181
selecting source categories 184
selecting source indexes 185
selecting sources and PIPs 182
starting 180
Child resource 339
Clear "alarm query failed" message 267
Client, Navigator
Navigation pane view 94
Client, Navigator license 5
Clipboard 339
Columns in Alarm tables 238
COM port settings 60
Command Control System (CCS) 337, 340
Command tab 107
Communication options 59, 62
setting 311
Communication Settings tab 109
Configuration 59–74
CCS devices 127
device network settings 129
EDGE-DPS575 211
editing 213
File transfer tab 143
LCP/RCP control panel 227
log 154
NEO frame 221
NUCLEUS 161, 186
creating folder 163
router Wizard 186
routing panel destinations and sources 186
transferring from 208
NUCLEUS for Routers 164
setting device IP address 129
status bar 128
Connection idle time 62
for Keep Alive 311
Connection status 267
Context menu 340
configuration 156
control 266
discovery 92
navigation 117
Context-sensitive help 340
Control 2
context menu 266
dialog box 256, 268, 318, 340
DPS-575 261
tool 267, 340
Control access rights 119
Control mode 37, 237, 255, 256–264, 340
troubleshooting 318
Control panel, Windows 17
Control panels 157, 222, 234
configuring 227
LCP/RCP 227
NUCLEUS 161
configuration 186
refreshing 233
tab 232
transferring LCP/RCP configuration 231
Copy forward alarms 74
Custom view, Navigation pane 44
Customer service, contacting 321
D
DBMS 341
Default IP address 308
Deleting indexes from a routing panel 183, 184, 185
Destination categories in NUCLEUS 175
Destination routing indexes 176
Destination status, NUCLEUS 175
Destinations 311
Destinations, NUCLEUS 174
Device category NUCLEUS configuration 188
Device class 104
Device control 2
Device ID 104
discovering 78, 86, 87
in alarm lists 241
in alarm tables 239
in Diagnostic dialog box 314
in Signal Monitor dialog box 288
of SNMP server 111
setting device tab 105
Device menus, creating 193
Device menus, NUCLEUS 196
Device unity, NUCLEUS 198
Devices 119, 239
adding to a NUCLEUS configuration 165
status column in Navigation pane 122
supported 1
Device-specific alarms 237
Diagnostics dialog box 237, 239
clearing 246
clearing alarms 245
definition 341
Diagnostics tool definition 341
options 247
refreshing 245
resizing columns 240
setting alarms for 261
Dialog box 341
Digital Processing Synchronizer. See DPS-575
Disable alarm 237
Discovery 44, 75
by administrator 75
column in Navigation pane 92, 124
context menu 92
folder 341
User Manual
IP hosts, setting 82
options, setting 77
pane 341
partial 86
results 91
running a full discovery 85
save options 83
tool 341
Discrete port selection 181
Display name 121
Display properties, hardware 8
DLL 341
DNS 309, 341
DNS Service Search Order 309
Docked window, in user interface 53
DPS HTML Interface 217
DPS-475/575 211
control 215
HTTP control 216, 293
in NUCLEUS configurations 165
updating firmware 218
Uploader Utility 218
Drag and drop, defined 341
DRFM 98
Drop-down menu, defined 341
Dynamic name 121
E
EDGE-DPS575
configuration, deleting 214
configuration,editing 213
controlling 215
gateway 211
in NUCLEUS configurations 165
E-mail forwarding service 251
Engineer user 341
Error ID 239
Error level 239
Error message during installation 296
Ethernet crossover cable 308
Ethernet device 311
F
Failed download during firmware upgrade 142
Failure, card 237
Favorites 166–170
copying 170, 231
in Help system 342
in NUCLEUS configurations 168
on LCP/RCP control panels 229
virtual devices 167
Filter alarms 237, 239
Find monitored device in signal monitor tool 289
Firmware upgrades 143
Floating window, in user interface 53
Navigator Device Control
Volume 1: Device Control
Format, defined 342
FR6802+ frames 115
Frames, defined 342
FTP 156, 157, 319
defined 342
Full screen, signal monitor tool setting 289
Full-text search, in online help 342
Function, defined 342
Functional block, defined 342
G
Gateway 127, 135, 308
EDGE-DPS575 212
Gateway tab 213
General users, definition 342
Generic control dialog box 257, 342
Genesis frame 308
Group, user 25, 26
add 26
properties 31
remove 31
GUI 342
H
Hardware requirements, installation 8
Help, device-specific 119
Host IP address 82
Hotspot, definition 342
Hot-swappable 342
HTTP 99, 104, 293, 294
defined 343
DPS-475/575 control 216
properties 108
Hyperlink, definition 343
I
ICE6800+ modules 298
Index navigation, NUCLEUS 197
Indexes, routing 176, 178
Input condition for alarms 237
Installation 7
CCS control panel firmware 297
CCS software 12
exits without finishing 296
firmware versions 297
ICE6800+ firmware 298
Microsoft Installer 10
Microsoft Internet Explorer 10
Microsoft Messaging Queue 11
Microsoft XML parser 10
NEO RES-E firmware 297
SQL Server 11
troubleshooting 295
uninstalling Navigator 12
updating user database 297
351
352
Index
X75 firmware 297
Installation failure, module 237
Interface Control plugin 50
Interface overview 37
Internet host 285
Interpreting alarms 241
alarm list 239
by color 241
IP address 318
alarms 314
configuration 129, 309
defined 343
discovery 308
host 82
new CCS device 130
PC 131
X75 285
IP host 82
IP, defined 343
K
Keep alive 59
L
Layout Designer 98, 116
Layouts 56, 57
LCD assignment configuration 188
LCD auto-assignment, NUCLEUS 201
levels 178
License keys 149
activating 162
affect on operational modes 39
changing a Navigator license 20
device control 2
Graphical Navigation 3
managing Navigator licenses 19
Master Control option 6
Navigator FAQs 323
Navigator options 2
router control 162
SNMP option 5, 6
streaming 277
troubleshooting 300
viewing Navigator licenses 20
License, Navigator 13
Link, defined 343
Live name 121
Lock NUCLEUS destination 200
Log file 245, 246
Log, alarm 245
Log, user 35
Logging off 25
Logging on 24, 303
Login options 26, 32, 34
M
MDI 344
Menu bar 58
Menu unity, NUCLEUS 198
Menus, NUCLEUS 192
MIB Browser 66
MIB files 62
defined 344
line breaks in 315
Microsoft Messaging Queue 11
Modes
Control 256–264
Modes, operational, switching 37
Modifying group properties 31
Monitor point 104, 108, 344
column in Navigation pane 124
Monitor tab 239
Monitoring video signals 288
MPEG4
configuring 285
configuring video 285
system requirements for 12
Multi bus routing panels 172
N
Navigation options 120, 319
Navigation pane 44, 93, 121, 344
Amino STB 111
finding items in 98
live names 121
naming conventions for devices 121
optional columns 122
Navigation pane, launching panels from 256
Navigation properties 100, 103, 111, 119
setting 104
Navigation Properties box
Amino STB tab 111
Navigation tool 269, 344, 347
Navigator pages 3, 344
NEO frame 157, 158, 221, 225
NEO RES-E
software upgrade 297
Network folder, defined 344
Network resource 103
Network settings
PC 133
Network settings, device 129
Network view 93, 99
New Configuration dialog 187
No Video 304
Non-Pilot application 107
NSM card 311
NUCLEUS 161
access options 199
adding CENTRIO devices 164
adding devices 194
User Manual
adding off-line devices to a configuration 166
adding processing devices to a configuration 165
adding routers to a configuration 164
adding virtual devices to a configuration 166
blank configuration 193
category menus 194
configuration 171
configuring for DPS-575 214
creating a CENTRIO panel 180
creating a configuration 186
creating a configuration folder 163
creating a routing panel 171
editing a routing panel 179
license keys 162
menu and device unity 198
modifying panel configurations 202
options 198
parameters 196
transferring configuration 205
unity buttons 198
NUCLEUS configuration
access options 199
adding devices 194
adding menus 192, 194, 196
adding parameters 193, 196
assigning parameters 191
auto-assignment order 201
blank 188
configuration options 198
deleting 210
editing 202
exporting 208
Home button 198
listing 210
modifying index items 197
transferring 205
Unity buttons 198
without a wizard 193
O
Object ID 66
object ID 67
Off-line devices in NUCLEUS configurations 166
Operating system 9
Operational mode 37, 261, 344
Operational status 49, 238, 239, 246, 261
alarm 239
Operational status of a device 318
Operator user 26, 345
optional columns 121
Options menu 58
communications 59
Configuration 155
Control 268
Diagnostics 247
Navigator Device Control
Volume 1: Device Control
Discovery 77
Navigation 120
Plug-in 49
Signal Monitor 290
SNMP 62, 150
User Accounts 32, 33, 34, 35
User Groups 25
P
Panels
launching from Navigation pane 256
Parameters 258
favorites 170
IDs in Diagnostics dialog box 239
in NUCLEUS 192, 196
navigating in Control dialog boxes 260
Parameters Panel 45
Parameters panel 43
Parent resource 345
Password 24, 32, 34, 302, 303
changing 34
Paste forward alarms 74
PC monitor 8
PDFs 345
of user manuals 157, 268
Permissions 23
device 27, 28
NUCLEUS 200
pages 30
presets 29
Ping IP address 84, 308
PIP names 117, 121, 181
Plug-ins 49
advanced router control 49
Interface control 50
Master control 50
SNMP control 50
SuiteView control 51
Power failure alarms 300, 313
Power supply, monitoring 237
Presets 270
copying 274
deleting 274
in Control dialog boxes 271
in the Navigation pane 109, 272
loading 272, 273
modifying 273
saving 271, 272
undo/redo of 120
Processing devices
adding to a NUCLEUS configuration 165
Product information 119
Product, defined 345
Protect destination
using NUCLEUS 200
353
354
Index
Q
QSEE6800+ modules 116
system requirements for 12
QuickTime monitoring 285
R
Rack, defined 345
Radio button, defined 345
Reboot device 148, 313
Redundant NEO resource modules 144
Refresh 232, 245, 267
alarm list 243, 245
alarm status 313
CCS device 266, 267
control panel 233
defined 345
NEO frame 224
tree view 117
Registry Editor 19
Remove software 17
Remove user group 31
Required hardware 8
Resizing columns 240
Resource icon 99, 267
copying 102
deleting 101
finding 267
moving 102
renaming 97
setting text color of 103
Resource icons 95
Resource status bar 346
Resource tree 44, 94
navigating 97
Restart 304
Router 346
adding to a NUCLEUS configuration 164
control with NUCLEUS 171
creating a panel for NUCLEUS 171
icons in Navigation pane 96
license for NUCLEUS 161
TRAX configuration for NUCLEUS 202
Router Control Views 171
Router gateway 320
Router TRAX 202
Router troubleshooting 311
Router/Centrio Views folder 164
Routing categories in NUCLEUS 175, 178
Routing destination status 175
Routing destinations
NUCLEUS 174
Routing indexes 176, 178
routing levels 178
Routing panel configuration 171
Routing Panel Configuration Wizard 186
editing a routing panel 179
selecting destination categories 175
selecting destination indexes 176
selecting destination statuses 175
selecting destinations 174
selecting levels 175
selecting source categories 178
selecting source indexes 178
selecting sources 173
starting 171
Routing panels 165
adding and deleting indexes 183, 184, 185
cat/index mode 172, 175, 178
configuring destinations and sources 186
creating for NUCLEUS 184, 186
Routing views 98, 165
S
Screen image, capturing 321
Serial connection preferences 60
Serial port
troubleshooting 311
Server 346
icon 346
Navigator-server license 3
SNMP 111
Set alarm 261
Shortcuts 104, 109, 124
Show product information 119
Signal monitor 287, 319
context menu 289
find associated device 289
options 290
system requirements for 12
video properties 289
Simple Network Management Protocol. See SNMP
Single bus routing panels 172
SNMP 64, 99, 111, 150
control plug-in 50
enabling 110
load errors 314
servers 111
setting options 62, 150
status monitoring 110
traps 64, 111, 237, 314
SNMP Agent 70
SNMP value expressions, creating 68
SNMP variable values 67
Software installation 12
Software uninstall 16
Software Upgrade tab 146
Software Upgrade tool 135
Software upgrade tool 47
Software User License 330
Source categories in NUCLEUS 178
Source Name 121
Source routing indexes 178
User Manual
Navigator Device Control
Volume 1: Device Control
Sources, NUCLEUS 173
Split navigation NUCLEUS configuration 188
SQL server 11
Standalone program 52
Static name 121
Status bar 49
Status message, operational 318
Status Monitor 110
Amino STB 111
Streaming
system requirements for 12
Subnet 75, 211, 308
mask 127, 135
SuiteView control plug-in 51
Supported devices 1
System requirements 7, 9
installation order 11
signal monitor tool 12
streaming 12
third-party software 10
System view, Navigation pane 93
DPS-475/575 218
NEO resource modules 144
Upgrade tool 135
Uploader Utility 218
USB storage device, with NUCLEUS 200
User access 25
User account 347
adding 32
modifying account information 34
removing 33
User accounts
viewing account information 34
User groups 26, 34, 347
add 26
User log 35
viewing 36
User manuals 157
User name 32
User profile, defined 348
User tab in Navigation pane 99
User view, of Navigation pane 84
T
V
TCP/IP 132, 309, 347
Telnet 134, 135, 347
Temporary folder 91, 347
Third party devices 98
Amino STB 111
Third-party software 296
Tile windows 55
Toolbars 41
create objects 42
Graphical Navigation 42
standard 42
Tools menu 43, 51, 52, 53, 58
configuration 127
diagnostics 237–245
discovery 75–92
navigation 120
signal monitor 287–291
standalone 51
Tracking options in Control dialog boxes 268
Transferring configurations, NUCLEUS 206
TRAX 202
license keys 162
NUCLEUS license for 161
Tree View tab 121
Tree, defined 347
Value expressions, creating 68
Variable values, SNMP 67
Version information, module 152
Video properties in Signal Monitor tool 289
Video server 293
Video server, control through HTTP 293
Video signal monitoring 288
Video status monitoring 237
View menu 49
Virtual devices 166
in NUCLEUS configurations 166
U
Undo/redo tools 42
Unity, NUCLEUS 198
Unlock routing destination 311
Unprotect routing destination 311
Updating 135
W
Warranty Agreement 330
Web server 104, 293, 294
Wildcard expression, defined 348
Window menu 55, 256
Windows, cascading 55
Wizards
CENTRIO configuration for NUCLEUS 180
new page (Graphical Navigation tool) 10, 41
NUCLEUS router 171
routing panel configuration 171
SuiteView upgrade 139
troubleshooting 311
Workbook mode 54, 348
X
X/Y routing panels 172
X75
alarms 261
software upgrade 297
355
356
Index
streaming source 285
system requirements 12
XML files from NUCLEUS 208
Installation and Operation Manual
MagellanTM CCS Navigator
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application
Volume 2: Graphical Navigation
Edition J
175‐000236‐01
Publication Information
© 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential. Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product.
Trademarks
CCS Navigator™ is a trademark of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries. Portions © 1994‐1996, QLogic Corporation. All rights reserved. Portions © 2004‐2007 Amino Communications Ltd. All rights reserved. Portions © 1989, 1991, 1992, 1998 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved. Derivative Work ‐ 1996, 1998‐2000 Portions © 1996, 1998‐2000 The Regents of the University of California. All Rights Reserved. Portions © 2001‐2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions © 2001‐2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Portions © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Portions © 2003‐2008, Sparta, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network. All rights reserved. Portions © Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003. All rights reserved.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For locations and contact information see: http://www.imaginecommunications.com/contact‐us/
Support Contact Information
For support contact information see: Support Contacts: http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/technical‐support/
eCustomer Portal: http://support.imaginecommunications.com
iii
Contents
Preface ......................................................................................................................... ix
Manual Information ...................................................................................................... ix
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... ix
Audience ................................................................................................................... ix
Revision History ......................................................................................................... ix
Writing Conventions ......................................................................................................x
Obtaining the User Manuals .........................................................................................x
Chapter 1
Introduction to Graphical Navigation ......................................................... 1
Graphical Navigation Overview ................................................................................... 1
Setting Graphical Navigation Options ......................................................................... 2
General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane ................................................... 2
Build Mode Options for Graphical Navigation Pages .................................................. 3
View Options for Graphical Navigation Pages ............................................................ 4
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation ............................................................. 7
Illustrating the Network Environments ....................................................................... 7
Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page ................................................................ 8
Creating a Frame View Page ...................................................................................... 8
Saving Graphical Navigation Pages .......................................................................... 10
Opening an Existing Page ........................................................................................ 11
Deleting a Navigator Page ....................................................................................... 11
Previewing and Printing a Page ................................................................................ 11
Using Zoom Tools .................................................................................................... 12
Panning in a Graphical Navigation Page ................................................................... 12
Defining Global Properties ......................................................................................... 13
Deleting a Global Property ....................................................................................... 14
Setting the Properties of a Page ................................................................................ 14
Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background ................................................................ 14
Setting an Image as a Page Background .................................................................. 15
Defining Custom Properties for a Page .................................................................... 15
Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page ...................................................... 17
Adding Buttons ........................................................................................................... 17
iv
Contents
Creating a Button .................................................................................................... 18
Setting the Properties of a Button ............................................................................ 18
Creating Buttons to Load Other Magellan CCS Navigator Pages ............................... 22
Adding a Hot Button ................................................................................................... 23
Creating a Hot Button .............................................................................................. 23
Setting the Properties of a Button ............................................................................ 23
Adding a Text Object ................................................................................................... 24
Setting the Properties of a Text Object ..................................................................... 24
Adding an Image ......................................................................................................... 25
Adding a Hotspot ........................................................................................................ 26
Adding a Signal Monitor ............................................................................................ 27
Adding a Navigator Frame ......................................................................................... 28
Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page ................................................................ 29
Creating a Multi-Monitor Streaming Page ................................................................ 29
Adding a Thumbnail or Stream to a Graphical Navigation Page ................................ 32
Starting a QuickTime Player From a Graphical Navigation Page ................................. 34
Adding a Streaming Icon .......................................................................................... 35
Adding a Resource Icon Symbol ................................................................................. 36
Adding a Symbol with the Create Objects Toolbar or Menu ..................................... 38
Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree ................................................................. 38
Setting the Properties of a Symbol ........................................................................... 39
Setting the View for Graphical Navigation Symbols .................................................. 40
Creating Links Between Symbols .............................................................................. 41
Deleting Nodes from the Resource Tree ................................................................... 42
Adding Controls ........................................................................................................... 42
Adding an ActiveX Control ...................................................................................... 43
Adding a Timer Control ........................................................................................... 45
Setting a LTIMultiCharacter Display .......................................................................... 47
Adding a Spin Control ............................................................................................. 48
Setting ActiveX Properties ........................................................................................ 49
Adding a Player Control ........................................................................................... 50
Adding a Software Clock to a Navigator Page .......................................................... 51
Adding a Gauge Control to a Navigator Page ........................................................... 53
Editing a Page .............................................................................................................. 56
Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects ...................................................................... 56
Moving a Graphical Navigation Object ..................................................................... 57
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphical Navigation Objects ..................................... 57
Setting the Display Order of Graphical Navigation Objects ........................................ 58
Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects .................................................. 58
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus ...................................................... 58
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects .................... 61
Setting Rules to Perform Actions ............................................................................... 61
Flow Chart of Generic Rule Creation Process ............................................................ 62
Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page .................................... 62
Setting an Event .......................................................................................................... 66
Defining Conditions .................................................................................................... 67
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Defining an Event or Action Property for the First Time ............................................ 68
Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition ........................................................... 68
Setting Conditions for a “Multiple Events” Event ..................................................... 68
Setting Conditions for “On Alarm” Events ............................................................... 69
Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event ................................ 71
Setting an Action ........................................................................................................ 72
Setting the Action Properties ..................................................................................... 74
Reusing the Event Properties .................................................................................... 74
Setting Properties for Alarm Filtering Actions ........................................................... 74
Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’ Action ......................................................... 75
Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action .................................................................. 76
Setting Properties for an ‘Execute Macro’ Action ..................................................... 76
Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action ................................................. 77
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’ Action ........................................................... 77
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action .............................................................. 78
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame Page’ Action .................................................... 78
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’ Action ............................................................ 79
Setting Properties for a ‘Product Info’ Action ........................................................... 80
Setting Properties for a ‘Product User Manual’ Action .............................................. 81
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action .............................................. 81
Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink Mode’ Action ................................................. 82
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action .............................................. 82
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame Custom Property’ Action .................................... 83
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link Properties’ Action .................................................. 84
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol Properties’ Action ............................................. 85
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text Properties’ Action .................................................. 85
Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX Properties’ Action ............................................ 85
Setting Properties for a “Set Page Refresh Option” Action ....................................... 86
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Screen Mode’ Action .................................................... 86
Setting Properties for the ActiveX Method’s Action .................................................. 87
Working with Macros ................................................................................................. 88
Creating a Macro .................................................................................................... 88
Modifying a Macro .................................................................................................. 90
Deleting a Macro ..................................................................................................... 90
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation .......................................................................................... 91
Router Rule Creation Overview ................................................................................. 91
Setting Router-Specific Events ................................................................................... 91
Using ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events ........................................................................ 92
Using ‘On Lock/Protect Status’ Events ...................................................................... 94
Using ‘On Salvo Status’ Events ................................................................................. 95
Using ‘On Restrict Status’ Events .............................................................................. 96
Using ‘On Signal Presence Status’ Events ................................................................. 97
Setting Router-Specific Actions .................................................................................. 98
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Destination’ Action ................................................... 99
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Source’ Action ........................................................ 100
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected’ Action ...................................................... 101
v
vi
Contents
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Destination Status’ Action ...................................... 101
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Signal Presence Status’ Action ................................ 101
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Crosspoint’ Action .................................................... 102
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Selected’ Action ....................................................... 103
Setting Properties for a `Set Crosspoint Match Type' Action ................................... 103
Setting Properties for a ‘Protect Selected Destination’ Action ................................. 104
Setting Properties for a ‘Lock Selected Destination’ Action ..................................... 105
Setting Properties For a “Swap Destinations” Action .............................................. 106
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Crosspoint’ Action ................................................ 108
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Selected Crosspoint’ Action .................................. 109
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Salvo’ Action .......................................................... 110
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Selected Salvo’ Action .......................................... 111
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Salvo’ Action ........................................................ 112
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected Salvo’ Action .............................................. 112
Chapter 5
SNMP Plug-in ........................................................................................................ 115
SNMP Plug-in Overview ............................................................................................ 115
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Update’ Events ......................... 115
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events ....................................................... 116
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable Value’ Action ................................. 118
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable Value’ Action .................................. 119
Setting Properties for a ‘SNMP Get Table’ Action ................................................... 120
Chapter 6
SuiteView Plug-in ............................................................................................... 121
SuiteView Actions Overview .................................................................................... 121
Setting Rules to Perform SuiteView Actions ........................................................... 121
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen On’ Action ..................................................... 122
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen Off’ Action .................................................... 122
Setting Properties for ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action ............................................. 123
Setting Properties for a ‘Send String to COM Port’ Action ...................................... 123
Setting Communication Options .............................................................................. 124
Creating a Preset ................................................................................................... 125
Creating a NEO SuiteView Navigator Page ............................................................. 125
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action ...................... 125
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action ....................................... 126
Recalling a Preset Page ........................................................................................... 128
Chapter 7
Using Graphical Navigation Pages ............................................................. 129
Controlling Navigation Pages Overview ................................................................. 129
Refreshing a Graphical Navigation Page ................................................................. 129
Using Navigation Pages in Control Mode ................................................................ 129
Moving between Magellan CCS Navigator Pages ................................................... 130
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus ..................................................... 130
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar ................................................................. 131
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Custom Properties Window ..................................................................................... 132
Appendix A
Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting.................................................... 135
Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting OverView .................................................. 135
Build Mode Problems ................................................................................................ 135
Navigator Fails to Display Button State Images ....................................................... 135
Custom Non-Rectangular Buttons Appear Rectangular .......................................... 135
Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified .................................... 136
In Frame Wizard, Modules Do Not Appear in Frame Correctly ................................ 136
Problems Using AutoCAD Drawings as Backgrounds on Graphical Navigation pages ...
136
Control Mode Problems ........................................................................................... 137
CPU Usage Goes to 100% When Navigator Executes a Rule .................................. 137
Global Properties Do Not Work Across Pages ......................................................... 138
Alarms “Bubble Up” Incorrectly ............................................................................. 138
Cannot Find Navigator Pages ................................................................................. 138
Alarms Fail to Appear on a Navigator Page ............................................................ 138
Index......................................................................................................................... 141
vii
viii
Contents
ix
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 2: Graphical Navigation is a companion to CCS
Navigator User Manual Volume 1: Device Control.
This manual details the features, operational procedures, and specifications of Graphical
Navigation tools. For information on the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please
refer to the CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 1: Device Control.
Audience
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the setup
and/or operation of the graphical navigation tools of CCS Navigator software.
Revision
History
Edition
Software Version
Release Date
A
Navigator 4.0
September 2007
B
Navigator 4.1
November 2007
C
Navigator 4.3
August 2008
D
Navigator 4.4
November 2008
E
Navigator 4.5
April 2009
F
Navigator 4.6
November 2009
G
Navigator 4.6.1
June 2010
H
Navigator 4.7
January 2011
I
Navigator 4.7.1
July 2011
J
Navigator 4.8
March 2012
x
Preface
Writing Conventions
This documentation adheres to the following writing conventions:
Table 1-1 Conventions
Term or Convention
Description
Bold
Indicates dialog box, property sheet, field, button, check
box, list box, combo box, menu, submenu, window, list,
and selection names
Italics
Indicates email addresses, names of books and
publications, and first instances of new terms and
specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS
Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER,
TAB, CTRL, ALT, DELETE
Code
Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a
DOS entry or something you type into a field
>
Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy
of menus and windows
hyperlink
Indicates a jump to another location in the document or
elsewhere
Internet address
Indicates a jump to a website or URL
Indicates important information that helps to avoid and
troubleshoot problems
[VersionNo.]
Placeholder for a software version number
CCS Software
Application
A generic term for any CCS software applications,
including CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, and CCS CoPilot
Obtaining the User Manuals
The documentation for your product is included in your Documentation and Product
Resources DVD as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file. The CCS Navigator Online Help is an
electronic document integrated into the software. While working in the application, you
can open the Online Help and print out individual topics.
The most up-to-date documentation and software is always available on our website.
1
1
Introduction to Graphical
Navigation
Graphical Navigation Overview
This book outlines tools that are available with the NAVIGATOR-SRV and
NAVIGATOR-SNMP licenses. The basic interface is covered in Magellan CCS
NavigatorUser Manual Volume 1: Device Control.
The NAVIGATOR-SRV and NAVIGATOR-SNMP licenses are used to create Navigation pages.
A Navigation page is a document containing graphics that represent a network
environment.
The NAVIGATOR-RTR license and router pages are described in Volume 6.
In Build mode, Administrator users with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license
can create pages that include buttons, symbols, links, images, Navigator frames, ActiveX
controls, signal monitors and text objects. Each of the graphical objects have configurable
properties that determine their appearance and how they respond to specific, defined
events, such as mouse clicks and router events. You can add objects to a page and then
reposition, resize, and configure them as required.
If you need other images in addition to the supplied ones, you can import any *.bmp or
*.jpg files.
Navigation pages can be created using a panel wizard, or they can be created by hand. CCS
Magellan CCS Navigator has wizards for creating specific pages depending on the plug-ins
you have. Those wizards are described in the plug-in documentation to which they relate.
Panels fall into two categories:

Navigator pages
A Navigator page—for example, a Source Preview panel or Multi Display panel—has
router elements as part of the panel.
The Navigator page can have rules (actions and events) applied to it, and can be edited
after creation using page building elements, such as those outlined in the following
topics:


Graphical Navigation Page Creation on page 7

Router Rule Creation on page 91
Control GUIs
A control GUI usually represents a single routing view or IconMaster device. A control
GUI cannot be edited to add buttons, rules, etc., but provides easy access to a wide
range of routing operations.
2
Chapter 1
Introduction to Graphical Navigation
Setting Graphical Navigation Options
You cannot set Graphical Navigation options unless the Graphical Navigation tool is
open.
To access the Graphical Navigation options, click the Options menu and select Graphical
Navigation. The Graphical Navigation Options dialog box has three tabs. They are
described in the following sections:

General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane on page 2

Build Mode Options for Graphical Navigation Pages on page 3

View Options for Graphical Navigation Pages on page 4
General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane
The Graphical Navigation Options dialog box’s General tab looks like this:
Figure 1-1 General Graphical Navigation Options Dialog Box
The following table describes the features you can adjust on this tab of the Graphical
Navigation Options dialog box.
Table 1-1 General Graphical Navigation Options
Section
Options
Result
Graphical Page
Options
Width
Type the pixel width for your page.
Height
Type the pixel height for your page.
Use default page size
The default page size is 1000 pixels by
1000 pixels. At this size, you may need
to maximize the page or use
the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to
move to hidden areas of the page.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Table 1-1 General Graphical Navigation Options (Continued)
Section
Options
Result
Home Page
Options
Home Page
Either type the path to a home page in
the box, or click browse [...] and use the
resulting page to find the *.nav file you
want to use as the home page.
Use Current Page
Sets the default home page to load in
the Graphical Navigation page when
the Graphical Navigation tool opens.
Default Page
Select one of two buttons:
Alarm Border Size
Options

Last Used Page to have your last
used *.nav file appear as the default
page.

Select Set Home Page to set the
default page as the home page.
Hotspot border size
(pixels)
Adjusts the size of alarm borders on
hotspots
Graphical Symbol Border
Size (pixels):
Adjusts the size of alarm borders on
graphical symbols
Set Defaults
Returns both hotspot and graphical
symbol alarm border size settings to 3
Build Mode Options for Graphical Navigation Pages
Only an Administrator user can change Magellan CCS Navigator’s Build mode options.
Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode to make these changes.
The Build Mode Options section has three check boxes and one menu.
.
Figure 1-2 Build Options of the Graphical Navigation Options Dialog Box
3
4
Chapter 1
Introduction to Graphical Navigation
The following table describes the features you can adjust on this tab of the Graphical
Navigation Options dialog box.
Table 1-2 Build Mode Options
Option
Function
Show Grid
Shows a drawing grid in Build mode to help you size and position your
drawings as you place graphical objects on the page. The grid is not
visible in Control mode
Snap to Grid
Makes the graphical objects snap to the grid points, as if they are
magnetically attracted to them
Use
Options for this field are:

Icon

Front View (when available)

Hotspot

LED

Streaming control (when available)
The icon is the default view for graphical objects you create. When the
front view is not available for the newly created graphical object and this
option is selected, an icon is used instead
Hide Theme
save
confirmations
Every time there is a change in the button theme, a dialog box asks for
confirmation of the changes. Select this option and the application will
no longer ask for confirmation every time you make a change to the
button theme.
View Options for Graphical Navigation Pages
The View Options tab contains four check boxes.
Figure 1-3 View Options in the Graphical Navigation Options Dialog Box
1
The following table describes the features you can adjust on this tab of the Graphical
Navigation Options dialog box.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Table 1-3 View Options
Check Box Option
Function
Show Graphical Navigation
Toolbar (Control Mode)
Toolbar appears on the page in Control mode to assist
you in navigating the pages representing your network.
Show Graphical Navigation
Status Bar
Status bar appears at the bottom of each graphical page.
Show Navigation window on
top when a device symbol is
selected
If the Navigation paneis not open, selecting an object in
the Graphical Navigation page opens the Navigation
pane.
Page Initial View
When this is not checked and you open a page, it opens
to its default size and zoom ratio. When this option is
selected, the two items below it become available. You
can choose one or the other but not both.
Fit to Window fits the new page to the size of the
Graphical Navigation area.
Remember zooming ratio applies the same zoom factor
to a page that is being opened that was applied to it the
last time it was visited
5
6
Chapter 1
Introduction to Graphical Navigation
7
2
Graphical Navigation Page
Creation
Illustrating the Network Environments
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create pages, and a
NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use use pages to
monitor and control devices. Only Administrator users can create and modify pages.
A Navigation page is a document containing graphics that represent a network
environment.
An Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create
Navigation pages using a panel wizard, or by hand. CCS Magellan CCS Navigator has
wizards for creating specific pages depending on the plug-ins you have. Those wizards are
described in the plug-in documentation to which they relate.
The following sections describe the Build mode tools used to create pages. If you are an
Administrative user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, you can add
buttons, symbols, links, images, Navigator frames, ActiveX controls, signal monitors, and
text objects to a Navigation page. If you need images other than those supplied, you can
import *.bmp or *.jpg files. Each graphical object has configurable properties that
determine its appearance and how it responds to specific, defined events, such as mouse
clicks and router events. You can reposition, resize, and configure objects after adding them
to a page.
You can associate two pages together by associating a “load page” action with an object on
one of the pages, and then identify the other page as the target page to load.
In Control mode, the finished drawing becomes a Navigation page, *.nav, which you can
use for monitoring and control of your network environment. On a page, you can click
buttons, symbols, links and other objects, open shortcut menus and define actions to
associate with objects. See Using Graphical Navigation Pages on page 129.
8
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page
Do NOT try to copy pages or databases from one folder to another. Do NOT
rename *.nav files. Unpredictable results may occur, including program crashes and
loss of data.
When creating a new Graphical Navigation page, Magellan CCS Navigator must be in
Build mode. Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP
license can create Graphical Navigation pages. To create a new, blank Navigation page,
do one of the following:

Click the New icon on the toolbar. A blank, unnamed Graphical Navigation page
appears.
or

From the main menu, select Tools > Graphical Navigation. A new, unnamed
Graphical Navigation page appears in the Graphical Navigation area.
or

Click File > New. The New Page Wizard opens.
Pick the icon for the type of page you want to create. To create a generic page, pick the
Blank Page icon on the General tab.
Various wizards may be available depending on your system’s configuration.
The wizard may have multiple pages, if you have plug-ins installed as part of your
Magellan CCS Navigator system. Follow the instructions for the type of page you are
creating.
For plug-in related New Page Wizards, see following the specific plug-in documentation
for more information.
To edit the properties of the page, including its background, custom properties, rules and
page properties, see Setting the Properties of a Page on page 14.
For information on adding objects and buttons to the page, see Adding Objects to a
Graphical Navigation Page on page 17, Editing a Page on page 56, and Setting a Rule
for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page on page 62.
To save the page, see Saving Graphical Navigation Pages on page 10. To re-open the
page, see Opening an Existing Page on page 11.
Creating a Frame View Page
Before you can create a Frame View page using the Frame View Wizard, the frame must be
discovered. You must be an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to discover the frame, or to build a page. See CCS Device
Discovery on page 75.
To create a Frame View page, follow these steps:
1
In the File menu, select New....
The Navigator New Page Wizard opens.
2
Click the General tab.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
The box now shows the format options for the new Opus panel and includes a preview of
the two layout options, Blank Page and Frame View.
3
Double click on the Frame View icon.
The Page Wizard opens.
Figure 2-1 Frame View Wizard
4
Choose the frame for which you want to create a page from the drop-down menu at the
top of the dialog box.
Check the information about the frame that appears below it. This can help you ensure that
it is the right frame, if it has been named obscurely.
5
Choose a background from the Page Background menu.
6
Click Finish.
A progress bar appears while Magellan CCS Navigator builds your frame image.
9
10
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Figure 2-2 Finished Frame page
You can create a rule to load a frame page. See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame
Page’ Action on page 78 for more information.
Saving Graphical Navigation Pages
The Save command saves the contents of the currently active page. To save the current
Graphical Navigation page, click Save on the toolbar, or click File on the menu bar and
then select Save.
To save all unsaved content in all open pages, click Save All on the toolbar, or click File on
the menu bar and then select Save All. This command can speed the closing of multiple
pages in Magellan CCS Navigator.
If the Graphical Navigation page has been saved before, it will overwrite the previous file.
If the Graphical Navigation page has not been saved before, a Save As dialog box will
open.
Figure 2-3 Save As Dialog Box for a Graphical Navigation Page
Filling in the contents of this dialog box is optional. You can enter a descriptive name or
leave the Page Name at its default. You can add a Description. You can place checks
beside each user and user group that will have access to this page.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
You can assign or alter access to this page from the User Accounts or User Groups
screens at any time. See Changing User Account Information on page 34 of CCS Navigator:
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application. Pages are stored in the Magellan CCS
Navigator Server , and can be accessed by a Magellan CCS Navigator Client user (with a
NAVIGATOR-CLI license) who has the appropriate privileges.
To create a duplicate of a page, right click on the page and then select Save Page As from
the menu that appears. A page created in this manner can be modified without altering the
original.
Opening an Existing Page
To open an existing Graphical Navigation page, click the Open File icon on the toolbar, or
click File on the menu bar and then select Open. When the Open box appears, select a
.nav file from the list of files in the Page folder, and then click Open.
You can have multiple Graphical Navigation pages open for editing or control.
Deleting a Navigator Page
1
Do one of the following:

Click Delete

Choose File > Delete from the main menu.
on the toolbar.
The Delete dialog box opens.
Figure 2-4 Navigator Page Delete Dialog Box
2
Click a row, and then click Delete.
You can only delete one row at a time.
Previewing and Printing a Page
The Print Preview and Print commands are only available when a Graphical Navigation
page is open.
To show what a page will look like when it prints, click Print Preview on the toolbar or File
menu in the page is open.
To print a Magellan CCS Navigator page, click Print on the toolbar or File menu when the
page is open.
11
12
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Using Zoom Tools
No other functions are available while you are in Zoom Window mode. To perform other
actions, exit Zoom Window mode.
To use the Zoom menu to view a Graphical Navigation page, right-click in an empty area of
the page, and select Zoom. Then select one of the four options on the Zoom menu. These
options are as follows:
Table 2-1 Commands on the Zoom Menu
Command
Function
Fit in Window
Sizes the objects to fit in the existing page
Actual Size
Shows the objects in their actual size in the
existing page
Zoom In
Enlarges the objects in the existing page
(Keyboard shortcut: Press CTRL++)
Zoom Out
Shrinks the objects in the existing page
(Keyboard shortcut: Press CTRL+-)
Zoom Window
Zooms to a specific region
Zoom Previous
Switches back to the previous zoom percentage
Also, on the Graphical Navigation toolbar, there is a Zoom button. See Using the
Graphical Navigation Toolbar on page 131 for more information.
Panning in a Graphical Navigation Page
No other functions are available while you are in Pan mode. To perform other actions, exit
the Pan mode.
The Pan function aids in moving within the Graphical Navigation page. It turns the cursor
into a hand. Click and drag to move the page about within the Graphical Navigation
page. The cursor will change to a closed hand while you are dragging the page.
To access the Pan function, do one of the following:

Press CTRL+A.

Right-click in the Graphical Navigation page and from the resulting shortcut menu,
select Pan. The cursor will change from an arrow to an open hand.

Click Pan on the Graphical Navigation toolbar (Control mode only). The button
remains selected while the function is activated.
To Exit Pan Mode, do one of the following:

Press CTRL+A

Right-click within the Graphical Navigation page and select Exit from the shortcut
menu.

Click Pan on the Graphical Navigation toolbar to deselect it (Control mode only)
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Defining Global Properties
You can also define custom properties, which only apply to a single page.
Magellan CCS Navigator has two types of properties: global properties and custom
properties. Global properties are available for all pages, and you can use them to define
rules for all pages, whereas custom properties are only available on the page where you
created them. Global properties are identified by a preceding (GP) in all Properties lists.
See Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15.
To create a global property:
1
From the main menu, choose Tools > Rules and Macros...
A dialog box appears.
2
Click the Global Properties tab.
Figure 2-5 Rules and Macros Dialog Box’s Global Properties Tab
3
Click New in the top right of the screen. A new row of blank cells will appear under the
Name, Initial Value and Description columns.
4
Click in the cell in the Name column and type in a name for the resource you want to
define.
5
Click in the cell in the Initial Value column and type in your definition for the resource in
that instance.
6
Click in the cell in the Description column and type in a description that makes sense to
you.
To add another global property, click New and another new empty row of cells will appear
below the existing one. Define this property as you did the previous one.
7
When you have finished defining all global properties, click Close.
For tips on where to use a global property, see the following topics:

Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action on page 82

Setting an Event on page 66
13
14
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Deleting a Global Property
To delete one or more global properties, complete these steps:
1
From the main menu, choose Tools > Rules and Macros...
The Rules and Macros dialog box appears.
2
Click the Global Properties tab.
3
Click in the row of the global properties list that you want to delete, and click Delete in the
tab toolbar.
4
Repeat the last step to delete other custom properties from the list.
5
To close the Global Properties box, click Close.
Setting the Properties of a Page
The Page Properties box for a Graphical Navigation page has three tabs: Background,
Custom Properties, and Rules. These tabs are only available in Build mode, for an
Administrative user on a PC with a NAVIGATOR-SNMP or NAVIGATOR-SRV license.

On the Background tab, you can set a color fill to serve as the background for a page.
Or you can import an image—such as a map, drawing, or logo—to serve as the
background for the page. Imported background images must be in Windows bitmap or
JPEG format. See Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background on page 14 and
Setting an Image as a Page Background on page 15.

On the Custom Properties tab, you can define the function of the resources you have
assigned to a page. To develop your own custom pages, you may want to add custom
properties. For example, you could use custom properties to track the current selected
router destination or source. See the following topics for more information:


Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15

Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event on page 71
On the Rules tab, you will define events and conditions that will trigger specified
actions. For example, you may create a rule that will cause something to happen when
the page loads or unloads. See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and
Objects on page 61.
Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background
To set a color fill as the background for a Graphical Navigation page, complete these steps:
1
Right-click in an empty area of the page and select Properties....
2
On the Background tab of the Page Properties box, click the arrow by the Fill box and
then select a color from the resulting color palette, or click Other... to show an extended
color palette in the Color box.
3
In the Color box, select from the Basic Colors section, or click the mouse in the color and
black-to-white spectrums at right to show the color you want in the Color/Solid box.
If the page background is currently set to white, you may need to use the slider beside the
vertical color brightness bar which is located to the right of the color spectrums. This will
ensure that your selected color appears in the Color/Solid box.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
4
To add the color in the Color/Solid box to the Custom Colors palette, click Add to
Custom Colors.
5
Click OK to close the Color box.
6
Click Close to close the Page Properties box.
See Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15 to set the Custom Properties
tab of the Page Properties box.
Setting an Image as a Page Background
When you set an image to be a page background, the page will be automatically resized to
match the image. If the image is too small to “hold” all of the objects on the page, you will
need to manually modify the width and height of the Graphical Navigation page.
To set an image as the background for a Graphical Navigation page, complete these
steps:
1
Right-click in an empty area of the page and select Properties....
2
On the Background tab of the Page Properties box, click browse (...) at the right end of
the Image box.
3
When the Select Image File dialog box appears, browser to find a suitable *.bmp or *.jpg
image file.
A copy of the selected image is stored in the Magellan CCS Navigator *.nav page. If you
modify the original image, the changes will not be automatically shown in the Graphical
Navigation page. See Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified on
page 136.
4
Select the file, and then click Open.
The image will appear in the top left corner of the page.
5
Click Close to close the Page Properties box.
See Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15 to set the Custom Properties
tab.
Defining Custom Properties for a Page
You can also define global properties, which apply to all pages. See Creating a New
Graphical Navigation Page on page 8. Custom properties are identified by a preceding
(CP) in the Properties lists.
To develop your own custom pages, you may want to add custom properties and rules for
the page. Custom properties are available for all objects within a page, and you can use
them to define rules for the page. For example, the currently selected router destination or
source can be defined as a custom page property. Then you can create a page rule, defining
an action that will occur when that custom property, such as the router source, changes.
Custom properties work like variables, holding temporary values that define events while
Magellan CCS Navigator operates. If you need to store a certain value, such as the currently
selected router destination, you need to define a property for this—a “Destination”
property, for example.
15
16
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
The Custom Properties table serves as a definition of your resources in terms of their
function or conditions of use. In the case of a router-control page, a Custom Properties
table might look something like this:
Table 2-2 Sample Custom Properties Table
Name
Initial Value
Description
Source1
Camera1
Source value when the page is loaded
Destination1 VTR1
Destination value when the page is
loaded
Destination2 VTR2
Destination value when page is
unloaded
Later, when you define rules for each of the objects on the page, you will call on these
definitions in associating specific Magellan CCS Navigator objects, events, conditions, and
actions with a specific Graphical Navigation page. See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator
Pages and Objects on page 61 for more information.
Setting Custom Page Properties
To set the custom Graphical Navigation page properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the Custom Properties tab.
The Custom Properties table has three columns: Name, Initial Value, and Description.
The toolbar for the Custom Properties tab has two tools: New and Delete.
2
Click New on the toolbar.
A new row of blank cells will appear under the Name, Initial Value, and Description
columns.
3
Click in the cell in the Name column, and type in a name for the resource you want to
define.
4
Click in the cell in the Initial Value column and type in your definition for the resource in
that instance.
5
Click in the cell in the Description column and type in a description that makes sense to
you.
To add another custom property, click New and another new empty row of cells will appear
below the existing one. Define this property as you did the previous one.
6
When you have finished defining all custom properties for the page, click Close.
See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for how to set
rules that define events, conditions, and actions for specific objects and pages.
Deleting a Custom Property for a Page
You cannot delete custom page properties used to define events and actions.
To delete one or more custom properties for a page, complete these steps:
1
Right-click in an empty part of a Graphical Navigation page and select Properties....
2
Click the Custom Properties tab of the Page Properties box.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
3
Click in a row of the custom properties list that you want to delete, and click Delete on the
tab toolbar.
4
Repeat the last step to delete other custom properties from the list.
5
To close the Page Properties box, click Close.
Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page
In Build mode, an Administrative user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license
can add objects to a Graphical Navigation page. You have a variety of graphical object
types to use in customizing pages. There are two methods for adding these objects to the
Graphical Navigation page:

Right-click and use the resulting shortcut menu

Use the Create Objects toolbar, which is divided into three sections:

A series of buttons, see Table 2-3

The Symbols menu, see Adding a Resource Icon Symbol on page 36

The Controls menu, see Adding Controls on page 42
Table 2-3 Graphical Tools Used to Build Pages
Tool
Button Description
Procedure
Arrow
Changes the cursor from whatever tool had been
selected back to an arrow
Button
Creates a button that looks and acts like a Windows
button, with four customizable button states
Adding Buttons on page 17
Text
Creates a customizable text object which does not
support shadow, glow, or embossing
Adding a Text Object on
page 24
Image
Opens a dialog so you can import a *.bmp or *.jpg file,
like a symbol but with no label
Adding an Image on page 25
Link
Connects two symbols with a line, and tracks (follows)
the symbols it links. You can customize the width, style,
color, and endpoints
Creating Links Between
Symbols on page 41
Hotspot
Creates an invisible object that floats over other objects,
which flashes an alarm when it detects an error or
warning for a device or an associated Graphical
Navigation page
Adding a Hotspot on page 26
Signal
monitor
Shows video signals, and can work in conjunction with
hotspots
Adding a Signal Monitor on
page 27
Navigator
Frame
A dialog box for viewing and controlling other pages
within a page
Adding a Navigator Frame on
page 28
Adding Buttons
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add
buttons. Buttons are added in Build mode.
17
18
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Buttons are clickable objects. You can use a pre-created theme (Magellan CCS Navigator
comes with many of them), you can edit pre-created buttons, or you can develop your own
buttons in a bitmap program such as Paint, Paintshop Pro or Adobe Photoshop.
Buttons can be either selected or unselected. A button is selected when the user clicks on
the button with the mouse cursor. If the button is a Toggle button, the button remains
selected when the user releases the mouse button.
Buttons can be either highlighted or unhighlighted. The exact meaning of highlighted or
unhighlighted is up to you. A button might be highlighted in response to a specific event,
and unhighlighted in response to a different event.
Since whether a button is selected has no bearing on whether it is highlighted, it has four
possible states:

Selected, highlighted

Selected, unhighlighted

Unselected, highlighted

Unselected, unhighlighted
You can associate a bitmap with each state. The only state that must have a bitmap is the
unselected/unhighlighted state. If the other states do not have bitmaps assigned to them,
this bitmap will be used for all states.
Creating a
Button
1
To create a button, complete these steps:
Click the Add Button icon on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click an empty spot in a
Graphical Navigation page, and then click Create > Button.
The cursor turns into the Add Button cursor.
2
Click on the Graphical Navigation page to create a button that is a preset size, or drag the
cursor to create a rectangular outline.
The button appears when you release the mouse button.
See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18 for more information.
Setting the Properties of a Button
The Class and Subclass options on the Object tab are read-only.
To set the Object Properties for a button, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the button and select Properties....
The Object Properties dialog box appears with the Button tab displayed.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Figure 2-6 Object Properties: Button
See the table below for instructions on completing the Button tab:
Table 2-4 Button Tab Options and User Action
Option
User Action
Caption
Type in the button caption text that you want to appear over the
button.
Click Font to the right of the caption to open a dialog box where you
can alter the font, style, size, effects and color of the button’s caption.
Word wrap
Check to use word wrap, or clear the check box to disable. When word
wrap is disabled, text appears on a single line. If it is too long to fit on
the button, you will see the beginning of the text. If word wrap is on,
text will fill one line and then move to the next line below.
Color
Click the arrow by the Color box, and select a color for the button from
the palette.
If you select an image for the button, you can still use the color palette
to select a color for the button.
Mouse Click:
Repeat
Click this button to configure behavior of the button (which may differ
depending on whether you are using a regular monitor and mouse, or a
touch screen). See Configuring Mouse Click Repeat on page 22 for
more information.
Toggle button
When a button toggles, you can click on it when the associated feature
is on to turn that feature off and click it when that feature is off to turn
the feature on.
Select the check box to turn on button toggling; or clear the box
to disable toggling.
Button theme
Click in the field to choose a pre-made theme. A button theme is a
grouping of bitmaps to represent the four different button states
(whether the button selected and/or highlighted). When you open the
drop-down menu, you can choose from the provided Magellan CCS
Navigator Button Themes (NBT) and Custom Button Themes (CBT)
Use Add to create a new theme, or the Modify button to edit a theme.
Both of these buttons open the Modify Theme dialog box. See Using
the Modify Themes Dialog Box on page 20
Use Remove to delete custom button themes only.
19
20
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Table 2-4 Button Tab Options and User Action (Continued)
Option
User Action
Adjust button
size to match
image’s
Select the check box to turn on, or clear the check box to disable size
matching. When this is enabled, the button grows or shrinks to fit
the image without distorting it.
Preview
The Preview section of the screen displays the currently chosen button
theme.
Click the buttons to the left of the Selected and Highlighted boxes to
preview the theme in the button’s four states.
Selected /
Highlighted
See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18 to set the button theme.
2
3
Complete the Rules tab. See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on
page 61 for information on completing the Rules tab. For information on rule topics
specific to buttons, see:

Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action on page 81

Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink Mode’ Action on page 82
After you have completed the Rules tab, click Close.
Using a Pre-made Button Theme
To select a button theme, click the down arrow beside the Theme list box, and select a
theme from the list that shows. The Preview dialog box displays a view of how the selected
button theme appears for each button state.
To see the appearance of each of the different button states, use the Selected and
Highlighted check boxes below the Preview dialog box. These check boxes do not
change the bitmap used. They only show you which of the four bitmaps you are currently
viewing.
Using the Modify Themes Dialog Box
If you choose to add a new button theme (by clicking the Add button in the Button
Object Properties dialog box) or modify an existing theme (by clicking the Modify button
in the Button Object Properties dialog box), the Modify Theme dialog box will open.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Figure 2-7 Modify Theme Dialog Box
The following table describes the sections of the Add Theme and Modify Theme dialog
boxes:
Table 2-5 Sections of the Add Theme or Modify Theme Dialog Box
Section
Theme Name
Description
Displays the name of the theme. If you are creating a new theme, type
the new theme name here. You may leave the theme name blank if you
are simply customizing the look and feel of one button, and do not
want to save the changes as a theme in the database.
Transparent
Magellan CCS Navigator buttons are rectangular. To make a portion of
the button area appear as background (for example so the button can
be round or donut-shaped), use a pixel-editing program such as Paint,
Paintshop Pro or Photoshop to apply a transparency color to the areas
you want to appear as background.
Transparency
Color
Click the button to open a color palette and choose the color that will
be transparent on your buttons. The default transparency color is
magenta with RGB values of 255, 0, 216.
Custom Images
Displays the location of the bitmaps used to show each button state.
Each state can have a corresponding bitmap associated with it. The only
state that must have a bitmap is the unselected/unhighlighted state; all
other states are optional.
See Adding Buttons on page 17 for more information about button
states.
Save these
changes as a
new theme
(Modify Theme dialog box only). Select the check box to create a new
theme, and type a name in the Theme Name box. Leave the box
unselected to modify the properties only for this button; no changes to
the theme will result.
21
22
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Removing Custom Button Themes
You cannot remove any of the Magellan CCS Navigator button themes provided with
Magellan CCS Navigator, but you can remove any custom button themes that you have
created. To remove a custom button theme, select the theme to be removed from the
Theme drop-down list, and click the Remove button.
Configuring Mouse Click Repeat
On the Button tab of the Object Properties dialog box, click Mouse Click Options to
open the Mouse Click Repeat dialog box.
Figure 2-8 Mouse Click Repeat Dialog Box
There are three options:

Single Click - No matter how long the mouse button is held down, it will be recorded
as a single click.

Mouse Click Repeat - A click will be interpreted as multiple clicks, the duration
determined by the durations you set for Repeat delay (which will be interpreted as click
duration) and Repeat wait (which will be interpreted as the time between virtual clicks).

Press & Hold - This option should be chosen in instances where a button must be held
for a longer-than-normal duration in order to perform a function, such as panel lock.
To set the area of the button that is sensitive to clicking as less than the entire area of the
button, enter a percentage in the Sensitivity area field. This number cannot be set to
greater than the size of the button.
Creating Buttons to Load Other Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
If you create a non-rectangular shape for a button bitmap—such as a circle, ellipse, or star,
then use a pixel-editing program like PhotoShop or PaintShop Pro to create a pink-colored
mask for the shape so that just the shape itself shows. If you do not create a mask for the
shape, the entire rectangle occupied by the bitmap will appear.
Set the RGB color of the mask to 255, 0, 216. Magellan CCS Navigator is configured
to show this color as transparent, so your custom shape will show through when you insert
the bitmap on the Magellan CCS Navigator page.
To create navigation buttons that load another page, follow these general steps:
1
In Build mode, create a button.
See Adding Buttons on page 17 for details.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
2
Right-click the button and select Properties....
See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18 for details.
3
Set an action to load a Magellan CCS Navigator page.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action on page 78 for details.
4
Set the action properties for loading a page.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action on page 78 for details.
Adding a
Hot Button
A hot button carries traits of buttons and of hot spots. When a rule assigned to a hot
button is triggered, the button automatically changes color as defined in the properties of
the button.
Creating a Hot Button
To create a button, complete these steps:
1
Click the Add Hot Button icon on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click an empty spot
in a Graphical Navigation page, and then click Create > Hot Button.
The cursor turns into the Add Hot Button cursor.
2
Click on the Graphical Navigation page to create a hot button that is a preset size, or drag
the cursor to create a rectangular outline.
The button appears when you release the mouse button.
See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18 for more information.
Setting the Properties of a Button
The Class and Subclass options on the Object tab are read-only.
To set the Object Properties for a button, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the button and select Properties....
The Object Properties dialog box appears with the Hot Button tab displayed.
23
24
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Figure 2-9 Object Properties: Button
2
Enter text that will appear on the hot button in the Caption field.
3
Click Font to change the font, color, size, and effects on the text.
4
Click Word wrap if you want the title to make line breaks to fit on the button; otherwise,
leave Word wrap clear to have the text cropped if it exceeds the size of the button.
5
For each of the alarm states, pick a color.
6
Complete the Rules tab.
See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for information
on completing the Rules tab.
7
After you have completed the Rules tab, click Close.
Adding a Text Object
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add
text objects. Text objects are added in Build mode.
To create a text object, right-click an empty area on the Graphical Navigation page, and
then select Create > Text, or click Create Text on the Create Objects toolbar. The cursor
will turn into the Create Text cursor. Click the mouse to place the text on the page.
To resize a text object, drag one of its eight sizing handles with the mouse. This does not
change the font size of the text —just the boundaries of the object. To change the size of
the font, you must change the Object Properties of the text.
Setting the Properties of a Text Object
To set the Object Properties box for a text object, right-click the Text object and select
Properties....
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
The Object Properties box for a Text object has three tabs: Text, Object, and Rules. The
options in the Text tab are described in the table below:
Table 2-6 Text Options and Suggested User Action
Option
User Action
Text box
Type in your text.
Word wrap
Select the check box to enable word wrap, or clear it to disable
word wrap.
Horizontal Alignment
Select Left, Center, or Right.
Vertical Alignment
Select Top, Middle, or Bottom.
Font
Select a font family, weight, and size.
Text Color
Select a color from the Color list.
Text Effects:
• Underline
• Strikeout
Select the check box by a text effect to enable that effect. Clear
the check box to disable the effect.
The Class and Subclass options on the Object tab are read-only. The class is “Text,” and
the subclass is blank.
See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for information
about how to complete the Rules tab. See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text Properties’
Action on page 85 for information on a rule commonly applied to text.
Adding an Image
Images can only be added to the active Graphical Navigation page. Only an Administrator
user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add images. Magellan CCS
Navigator must be in Build mode.
Custom graphics, such as maps of a network or custom corporate logos, become images
when imported into Magellan CCS Navigator. Images can be *.bmp or *.jpg files.
To import a *.bmp or *.jpg image file, complete these steps:
1
Click Create Image on the Create Objects toolbar; or right-click an empty area of a
Graphical Navigation page, click Create > and then select Image.
2
Use the Select Image File box to browse for the image file.
3
Select the file you want, and then click Open.
The cursor changes to a special add image cursor.
4
Click on the Graphical Navigation page.
The image appears.
Setting the Properties of an Image
To change the object properties of an image, complete these steps:
25
26
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
1
Right-click the image, and then select Properties....
The Object Properties box for an image contains these tabs: Image, Object, and Rules.
2
If the image is a *.bmp file, you will have the following options:
Table 2-7 Image Tab Options for *.bmp Files
Option
User Action
Transparent
Select the check box to enable the fill in a *.bmp file to appear
transparent, or clear the check box to disable the transparency
feature.
Transparent Color Click the arrow, and then select a color for the transparency
from the color palette.
The Class and Subclass options on the Object tab are read-only.
3
See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for information
about how to complete the Rules tab.
4
After you have completed the Rules tab, click Close.
Adding a Hotspot
You can adjust the size of the alarm borders on all symbols on the Graphical Navigation
Options dialog box. See General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane on
page 2 for more information.
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add
hotspots. Hotspots are added in Build mode.
Hotspots float invisibly over your Graphical Navigation page, ready to be used for any
Magellan CCS Navigator action that you have assigned to them. For example, if a hotspot
has a rule for detecting errors and warnings on a particular device and an error or warning
is detected, the hotspot begins to flash an alarm. When the alarm causes the hotspot to
flash in the Graphical Navigation page, alarm information is provided to the Diagnostics
dialog box and Navigation pages and, in some cases, the Slot Status section of frame
Control dialog boxes. The hotspot alarms follow the existing alarm color-coding system in
Magellan CCS Navigator.
To create and link a hotspot, follow these steps when in Build mode:
1
Click Create Hotspot on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click anywhere in the
Graphical Navigation page, and then click Create > Hotspot in the resulting shortcut
menu.
A special hotspot cursor appears.
2
Click and drag the cursor to create a rectangular outline.
3
Right-click on the rectangle and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
The Object Properties box contains these tabs: Symbol, Object, Graphics, and Rules.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
4
On the Symbol tab, enter a Short Name, Name, Alternate Name, and Description for
the hotspot. The Show as Label box has no effect.
5
To associate a device with this hotspot, select the Object tab, and then type in the IP
address for the device.
6
To associate a rule with this hotspot, select the Rules tab and define the rule accordingly.
See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for information
on how to complete the Rules tab.
7
Click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop a symbol from the resource tree into a Graphical
Navigation page, and then turn it into a hotspot by right-clicking the icon, pointing to
View>, and selecting Hotspot. All object property information is inherited by the newly
created hotspot icon from the resource tree, including the icon description, IP address, and
associated rules. See Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree on page 38.
Adding a Signal Monitor
You cannot have a signal monitor object open at the same time as a Signal Monitor due to
limitations in the ActiveX control.
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add a
signal monitor to a Navigator page. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode.
Before creating a signal monitor object, the signal monitor properties must be set, as the
properties that are set for a signal monitor affect the signal monitor object as well.
To learn more about signal monitor settings, see Video Output Monitoring on page 287 of
CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
To create a signal monitor object, follow these steps:
1
Click Create Signal Monitor on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click anywhere in the
Graphical Navigation page, and then click Create > Signal Monitor in the resulting
shortcut menu.
A special monitor icon cursor appears.
2
Left-click in the Graphical Navigation page, and a 4:3 aspect ratio Signal Monitor
appears.
This object can be moved, scaled and linked just like any other object on the Graphical
Navigation page.
3
Right-click the Signal Monitor object and select Properties from the resulting shortcut
menu.
This opens the Object Properties box.
27
28
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Figure 2-10 Object Properties Dialog Box for the Signal Monitor
4
Complete the Object Properties box, which is described in the following table.
Table 2-8 Controllable Signal Monitoring Properties
Property
Description
Customized object
size
The object can be scaled to any desired size within the Graphical
Navigation page. If the aspect ratio is locked, the object will
maintain the specified aspect ratio throughout scaling.
Fit-to-Page object
size
The object will enlarge to fit the Graphical Navigation page. If
the aspect ratio is locked, the object will scale to fill the page while
maintaining its aspect. If the aspect ratio is not locked, the object
will scale to fit the entire Graphical Navigation page.
Lock aspect ratio
When checked, the object will be constrained to the selected
aspect ratio. When you check this, choose either 4:3 or 16:9 aspect
ratio.
Adding a Navigator Frame
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add a
Navigator frame. Frames are added in Build mode.
A Magellan CCS Navigator frame displays another Graphical Navigation page inside the
current page. To add a new Magellan CCS Navigator frame to the Graphical Navigation
page follow these steps:
1
Click the Add Navigator Frame icon in the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click in the
Graphical Navigation page and select Create > Navigator Frame.
The Add Navigator Frame cursor appears.
2
Drag the cursor to create to create a rectangular outline.
The Class and Subclass options of the Object tab are read-only. To set the Object
Properties for a Navigator Frame, complete these steps:
3
Right-click the frame, and then select Properties....
The Navigator Frame tab, in the Frame View Options section, has three options:
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual

Automatically fit the page in area - When selected, Graphical Navigation pages
being viewed and controlled in the Magellan CCS Navigator frame are scaled to fit
within the frame. If the check box is unselected, Graphical Navigation pages being
viewed and controlled in the Magellan CCS Navigator frame appear actual size;
horizontal and vertical scroll bars appear when necessary.

Disable vertical scroll - When selected, no scroll bar will appear at the bottom of
the screen. Any data outside the frame’s visible area will be unavailable.

Disable horizontal scroll - When selected, no scroll bar will appear at the right
side of the screen. Any data outside the frame’s visible area will be unavailable.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame Custom Property’ Action on page 83 to
complete the Rules tab.
4
After you have completed the Rules tab, click Close.
You can also create a Frame Page using the New Page Wizard. See Creating a Frame View
Page on page 8 for more information.
Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add
streaming objects to a page. Pages are built in Build mode.
A streaming component in a Graphical Navigation page can be created either manually or
using a wizard. Your options include the following:

Create a streaming page using a wizard. See Creating a Multi-Monitor Streaming
Page on page 29.

Create a streaming window on any page. See Adding a Streaming Icon on page 35.
Creating a Multi-Monitor Streaming Page
If you need to create a streaming page using X75, QSEE6800+, and/or FR6802+QXF inputs,
you can use the Multi-Monitor wizard. Follow these steps:
1
From the main menu, choose File > New. The New Page wizard opens.
2
Click on the Quality Control tab, and then double click the Multi-Monitor View icon.
29
30
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Quality
Control tab
Figure 2-11 Quality Control Tab of the New Page Wizard
The Page Wizard (step 1 of 2) opens.
Figure 2-12 Wizard Step 1of 2
3
Click Add to open a Device Selection dialog box.
The Device Selection dialog box lists the contents of the Discovery and Network folders
of the Navigation pane.
You can only add one item at a time. To add another item, click Add again.
4
Select one of the following types of item:

QSEE6800+ module (all inputs to that modules are added by default, but you can
change this later)

Input below a QSEE6800+ module

6800+ETH module (all modules that support streaming that are in the frame are
selected by default)
And then click OK to close the Device Selection dialog box.
5
Edit your selections on the Step 1 of 2 page.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
You can switch the selected input for a QSEE6800+ module by clicking the Input field. This
opens a drop-down menu that lists All plus each of the individual inputs.
You can add multiple individual inputs from the same QSEE6800+ or 6800+ETH by
selecting it multiple times in the Device Selection dialog box, however, each individual
input can only be selected once. If, for example, you choose a QSEE6800+ module (with All
selected in the Input field of the table), and an input to that module as well, you will
receive an error message. You must remove one of the selections from the Device
Selection (Thumbnails) table before proceeding.
6
Click Next>> to proceed to the Step 2 of 2 screen.
Figure 2-13 Wizard Step 2 of 2
The FR6802+QXF frame does not support MPEG-4 streaming. If you only select modules
from the frame, the MPEG-4 option will not be available.
The Name field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational
language, your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry in this
field. If you switch the keyboard back to data entry in an alternate language, data
corruption could occur.
7
Choose the number of MPEG-4 players you wish to have on the Navigator page. You must
have the QSEE6800+HS option to view video in an MPEG-4 player.
You can only have one MPEG-4 player per QSEE6800+ module, and four per Navigator
page.
If you don’t have the QSEE6800+HS option, or do not wish this page to contain an MPEG-4
player, click None.
8
If you choose One or Two MPEG-4 players, you can choose from four preset layouts. Select
an option to view a preview of it on the Step 2 of 2 screen. These are the options:
31
32
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Table 2-9 QSEE6800+ Layouts
Layout
Description
Top
Thumbnails at the top of the page, and streaming video at the bottom
Bottom
Thumbnails at the bottom of the page, and streaming video at the top
Clockwise
Thumbnails arranged in a spiral, starting from the top left corner (and
moving clockwise), with streaming video components at the center
Counter
Clockwise
Thumbnails arranged in a spiral layout, starting from the top left corner
(and moving counter clockwise), with streaming video components at
the center
If you did not choose any MPEG-4 players, there will not be any Grid Layout options.
Thumbnails will be laid out from left to right, top to bottom on your Graphical Navigation
page.
9
(Optional) To apply a custom background, click Select to browse for an image. For best
results, your background should be the same size as the viewing area that it will be seen on.
Otherwise it will be cropped or will leave blank areas.
The background image can be a .BMP or .JPG graphic file.
10 Click Finish.
There may be a slight delay while your page is built.
Switch to Control mode to view your page, or stay in Build mode to add or edit controls,
change thumbnail sizes, etc.
Adding a Thumbnail or Stream to a Graphical Navigation Page
You can manually add the following resources to a Graphical Navigation panel as a
thumbnail:

Input to a QSEE6800+

Module that supports streaming in a Selenio frame

6800+ module that supports streaming that is installed in an FR6802+QXF frame with
a 6800+ETH resource module

X75 (with X75STR-OPT option)
If the X75 has the X75STR-OPT option, or if the QSEE6800+ has the QSEE6800+HS option,
you can also use this method to stream MPEG-4 video.
To add a thumbnail to any Graphical Navigation page, follow these steps:
1
In Build mode, drag the thumbnail source from the Navigation pane to a Graphical
Navigation page.
For information on special QSEE6800+ features like waveform, vectorscope, and audio
meters, see QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes on page 278 of CCS Navigator: Advanced
Graphical Navigation Application.
2
Right click on the Input icon and then choose View > Thumbnail or View > Streaming
(if the selected resource is equipped with a QSEE6800+HS option or X75OPT-STR option
only).
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
3
Reposition the dialog box by clicking on the thumbnail or MPEG-4 streaming dialog box and
holding down the mouse button while dragging it to a new position.
4
To adjust the settings, right click on the thumbnail or streaming icon and select Properties.
See Setting the Streaming Object’s Properties on page 35 for more information.
5
To change the size of a thumbnail, right click on it and choose Size and then select from the
menu that appears.
Sizes are defined in the table below:
Table 2-10 Thumbnail Sizes for QSEE6800+
Low Quality
Thumbnail
Medium Quality
Thumbnail
High Quality Thumbnail
128×96
192×144
256×192
128×72
192×108
256×144
Standard definition
High definition
SD/HD CIF MPEG-4
HD = Letterbox
You can also drag the corners of a thumbnail or MPEG-4 stream to resize it.
If you choose two thumbnails, you have additional options of Same Size, Same Width
and Same Height. These options set the size of all selected thumbnails to match the
proportion of the last-selected thumbnail.
To change the MPEG-4 stream, in Control mode, drag and drop a thumbnail onto the
Streaming window.
Alarms Monitoring
Alarms are indicated on the borders for thumbnails in Graphical Navigation pages.
Alarm borders are not available for modules in a Selenio frame.
33
34
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
The outside border of a thumbnail indicates its alarm level.
Table 2-11 Color Indicators for Alarm Levels
Alarm Level
Border Color
No alarm
Black
Warning
Yellow
Critical
Red
Acknowledged
Orange
For QSEE6800+ modules, you can set which alarms are active, and you can set their trigger
thresholds. These settings are set on an input-by-input basis, and appear on each input’s
Control dialog box. For more information, see Using a QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box
on page 282 of CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application. For a complete
description of alarm settings, see your QSEE6800+ Installation and Operation Manual.
Starting a QuickTime Player From a Graphical Navigation Page
When you start a Quicktime player to view streaming video, you can listen to audio output,
in addition to monitoring the video. To add a button to start streaming video, follow these
steps:
1
With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, place a button on a Graphical Navigation
page. See Adding Buttons on page 17 for more information.
2
Right-click on the button and select Properties... from the menu that appears.
The Object Properties dialog box appears.
3
Select the Rules tab, and then click the New Rule button.
A new line appears in the Rules table.
4
In the new rule’s Event list, select OnMouseClick.
The default Condition setting for this event is Always; you can leave that as it is, or you
can change it by clicking the Condition button. See Defining Conditions on page 67 for
more information.
5
From the new rule’s Action list, select Launch Application.
Magellan CCS Navigator is compatible with QuickTime version 7.1.
6
Click Action Properties.
The Action Property dialog box appears. Fill it in with the following information:
Command: c:\program files\quicktime\quicktimeplayer.exe
(Or the complete path to your QuickTime Player installation, if it differs from the above)
Arguments: rtsp://[IP Address]:554/x75streaming
(Note replace [IP Address] by the IP address of the X75 streaming Ethernet port)
OR
Arguments: rtsp://[IP Address]:554/streaming
(Note replace [IP Address] by the IP address of the QSEE6800+ module)
You can leave the Initial Directory field blank.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
7
Click OK to close the Action Properties dialog box. Close the Object Properties dialog
box by clicking the X in the top right corner.
When you enter Control mode, the new button will open a QuickTime Player and play
streaming video from the selected source.
Adding a
Streaming
Icon
You can add streaming icons to a Graphical Navigation page from the following
streaming items:

X75 with X75OPT-STR option

Input listed under a QSEE6800+ module

Q-SEE compliant 6800+ module when installed in a FR6802+QXF frame that also
contains a 6800+ETH resource module (Q-SEE compliant modules can output
thumbnails only)
Follow these steps:
The number of streaming icons you can have without slowing down your computer will
depend on the specifications of your computer system.
1
Open both the Navigation pane and Graphical Navigation page in Build mode.
2
Perform one of the following actions:

Drag a streaming item from the resource tree, and drop it on the Graphical
Navigation page.
OR

Cut item that is capable of streaming from the resource tree, and then paste it on
the Graphical Navigation page.
OR

Copy item that is capable of streaming from the resource tree, and then paste it on
the Graphical Navigation page.
An icon representing that item will appear on the Graphical Navigation page.
3
Right click on the new icon in the Graphical Navigation page and choose View >
Thumbnail or View > Stream (not available for Q-SEE compliant 6800+ modules in
FR6802+QXF frames).
Setting the Streaming Object’s Properties
A streaming object (thumbnail or MPEG-4 video streaming icon) has a properties page.
To adjust the settings, right click on the Thumbnail or Streaming monitor and select
Properties. The Object Properties dialog box appears:
35
36
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Figure 2-14 Object Properties Streaming Player Tab
If the Streaming Player tab is not the active tab, click on it to bring it to the foreground.
Settings include the following:
Table 2-12 Streaming Player Options
Option
Function
Name
Enter a label that will appear on the Graphical Navigation page only;
by default, the name is a combination of the module name and input
UMD ID (in the case of a QSEE6800+ or Q-SEE compliant 6800+
module) or the X75 unit’s network name
Use name
from module/
input
Check here to use the UMD ID from the module/input (if available)
Hide Player
Controls
Check here to view just the thumbnail or streaming icon without
buttons or border.
Hide Player
Controls
Check here to turn off display of the thumbnail’s name, audio meters,
alarm border and Waveform and Vectorscope buttons
Aspect Ratio
When checked, the object will be constrained to the selected aspect
ratio when resizing
URL
Enter the URL for any streaming source you wish to view (This option
will not work if you create the streaming icon from a QSEE6800+
module/X75 frame. Rather, to stream from an external URL, right click
on your Graphical Navigation page and select Create > Streaming
Player to stream from a URL, open the Properties dialog and type the
URL)
Adding a Resource Icon Symbol
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add
symbols. Symbols are added in Build mode.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Items in the Symbol menu produce a graphic with a label underneath which can be
connected to another symbol with a Link object. You can set its device ID. Many of the
items in the Symbol list can be discovered and appear in the tree view. If you want to
duplicate an item from the Discovery folder of the Tree view, just click on that item and
drag it to the Graphical Navigation page.
Some Symbol menu items first open a dialog box allowing you to choose the type of object
in that particular category. Others do not (these ones have nothing in the Options field of
the table below). The symbol menu contains the following items:.
Table 2-13 Graphical Objects Available in the Symbol Menu
Object
Options
Studio
Rack
Server...
Select from a Generic, Generic Video, Nexio or VR server.
Frame...
Choose from:

Generic Frame

FR-3903-E (3RU Frame)

Prophesy Series

6800+ Frame

FR-3923-E (3RU Frame)


Combiner System

HD Series

DL-810 (SD Digital
Legalizer)

Integrator Series (4RU, 6RU,
or 8RU Frame)
NetVX Video Networking
System (SYS-1700,
SYS-200, SYS-300, or
SYS-350)
DL-860 (SD/HD Digital
Legalizer)

MIX BOX Series


VIA32 Series
Opus Frame



PANACEA Series (1RU or 2RU
Frame)
Digital Processing
Synchronizer (X50, X75, or
X85)


Platinum Series (15RU, 28RU,
5RU, or 9RU Frame)
XPlus Series (1RU or 2RU
Frame)

XPress Series

Platinum Module (various,
including PM-xxx and
PT-xxx modules)

Predator PiP or System

SQM ModuleVIA32 Module
or PS

RCP-X75 Remote Control
Panel

Router Control Panel

EDGE DPS575

FR-3901-E (1RU Frame)

FR-3901-E-P (1RU Frame
with LCP)
Product
Functional
Block...
Control
Panel...
Choose from:

Generic Functional Block

NetVX module (various)

3901PS

FBC-6001

3901RES-E

Integrator Control Card

3902PS

Integrator Module

6800+ Module, 6800+ PS,
or Eth Card

Integrator PS

NEO Module VIA32 Module

Centrio Module, PiP, or
System
Choose from:

Generic Control panel

NUCLEUS Control Panel 1RU

LCP-3901-1U

Opus Master Control

NUCLEUS Control Panel

RCP-CCS-1U
37
38
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Table 2-13 Graphical Objects Available in the Symbol Menu
Object
Options
Gateway...
Select from:

Generic gateway

CCS Protocol gateway

Digibus gateway

EDGE gateway
Folder
Router Control
HTTP Server
Routing System
Magellan CCS Navigator provides three methods for adding symbols. See the following
topics:

Adding a Symbol with the Create Objects Toolbar or Menu on page 38

Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree on page 38
Adding a Symbol with the Create Objects Toolbar or Menu
1
Click on the Graphical Navigation page and then click the Symbol pull-down menu on the
Create Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Graphical Navigation page and click Create>.
2
Select from the list of symbols which includes: Studio, Rack, Server…, Frame…, Product,
Functional Block…, Control Panel…, Gateway…, Folder, Router Control, Routing
System, and HTTP Server.
Many of these 12 symbol types provide a choice of symbols in a new dialog box. For
example, selecting Create > Server prompts a Create Server box to appear.
In the Create Server box, click the arrow on the Type box, select from the list of server
options, and then select either Icon or Front View. Note that not all symbols have a Front
View.
Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree
This function is only available to Magellan CCS Navigator resource icons, linked graphical
objects, and Graphical Navigation pages that have been created in Magellan CCS Navigator
1.7 or later.
Dragging a resource icon from the resource tree onto the Graphical Navigation page
creates a link between the resource icon and the graphical object. With this link (a child
icon), Magellan CCS Navigator remembers the resource icon’s parent location in the
resource tree and the parent’s assigned functions. A graphical object in the Graphical
Navigation page performs the same actions as it could when it was part of the resource
tree. Now, when you double-click on a resource icon, the icon’s assigned action occurs as if
you had double-clicked on the parent node in the resource tree.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Resource icons on which you can perform these actions include all discovered and
configured devices in the Network, Discovery, Temporary, Configuration, Catalog, and
Routers folders
Some of the actions that you can assign to an object in the resource tree include the ability
to open the Configuration dialog box, Control dialog box, URL locations for the HTTP
control of devices, and to start an external program in either Build or Control mode.
To add a symbol to a Graphical Navigation page from the resource tree, complete these
steps:
1
Open both the Navigation pane and the Graphical Navigation page.
2
Perform one of the following actions to create a symbol from an icon in the resource tree:

Drag a resource icon from the resource tree, and drop it on the Graphical
Navigation page.
OR

Cut or copy a resource icon from the resource tree, and then paste it on the
Graphical Navigation page.
An icon representing the selected device will appear on the Graphical Navigation page.
Some devices have various views you can choose from. Right-click the newly created icon,
point to View>, and then select from Icon, Front, Hotspot, or LED.
All object property information is inherited by newly created icons dragged/copied/cut from
the resource tree, including the icon description, IP address, and associated rules. When
Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode, if a CCS or SNMP device is configured to
display alarms, the border of the icon will display the alarm. When you click on a CCS
device in the Navigation pane, you can open its Control dialog box.
3
To change device information, right-click the new icon, select Properties..., and then make
the required changes within the Object Properties box.
You cannot move a Magellan CCS Navigator object from a Graphical Navigation page
to create an icon on the resource tree—only vice versa.
Setting the Properties of a Symbol
A symbol inherits the device ID of the object from which you created it. For example, if you
create a new graphical object by dragging the resource icon for a discovered device
from the Navigation pane into the Graphical Navigation page, the new graphical object
will inherit the IP address of that device on your network.
However, if you create the object using the Create menu or by dragging and dropping an
undiscovered graphical object from the Catalog folder, then the new object will have the
default IP address assigned to the device during manufacture. This is a placeholder IP
address that does not function. You must set the IP address of the graphical object before
Magellan CCS Navigator will recognize that it represents an actual device on your network.
To set the properties for a symbol, complete these steps:
1
Right-click the symbol and select Properties....
The Object Properties dialog box appears. This dialog box has four tabs: Symbol, Object,
Graphics, and Rules.
2
On the Symbol tab, you can change the names for the device or type in a description of it.
39
40
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
The naming options for a device are the same as those in the Navigation panel. For a
complete description of these names, see Setting General Navigation Properties for a
Device on page 104.
To choose the name by which the symbol will be will be labeled on the Graphical Navigation
page, choose an item from the Show Label as: drop-down box. The options are as follows:
Table 2-14 Show Label As Options for Navigation Symbols
3
Option
Function
Do not show label
No label is shown
Short Name
Short name is shown
Same as Navigation Tree
Setting
Label is displayed as set in
Table 7-14 in Volume 1.
On the Object tab, you can type a new IP address into the Device ID box.
To enter a new IP address, select the existing numbers in the corresponding box, and then
type in the numbers of the IP address of the actual device on your network that the symbol
represents.
You must change the IP address portion of the ID if you want the symbol to represent a
device of the same product type and family that resides at a different IP address.
Note that the Class and Subclass boxes on the Object tab are read-only.
4
On the Graphics tab, you can view the path to the image file used as the symbol. The box
is read-only.
5
On the Rules tab, you can create rules for a Graphical Navigation object or page. See Rules
for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for information
on completing the Rules tab. See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol Properties’
Action on page 85 for information on the Set Symbol Properties action, which is commonly
applied to symbols.
6
Click Close to close the Object Properties box.
Setting the View for Graphical Navigation Symbols
All options may not be available for all symbols.
To set the view for Graphical Navigation symbols, right-click the symbol, select View>, and
then select from one of the four options described below.
Table 2-15 Commands on the View Menu and Their Functions
Command
Function
Icon
The symbol is shown as an icon
Front
The symbol is shown as a front view, if that view
exists. If that view is not available, the Front option
will be disabled
Hotspot
The object is shown as a hotspot
Hot button
Shows the object as a hot button
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Table 2-15 Commands on the View Menu and Their Functions(Continued)
Command
Function
LED
Shows the object as an LED
Thumbnail
Shows a thumbnail video image from the device
represented by the object
Stream
Shows a streaming video from the device
represented by the object
Creating Links Between Symbols
See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link Properties’ Action on page 84 for an action that
is commonly applied to links.
To link two Graphical Navigation symbols, complete these steps:
1
Click Add Link on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click on the Graphical Navigation
page outside of any objects on the page, click Create> from the shortcut menu, and then
select Link.
The cursor will change into a plus (+) sign. When you move the cursor onto a symbol, a
circle will appear around the plus sign.
2
Click the mouse once on the start (source) symbol.
3
Move the cursor to an end (destination) symbol and click.
By default, the link will appear as an arrow, with its tail at the start symbol and its head just
outside of the end symbol.
Tips:
4

Press the SHIFT key when moving the cursor if you want the link to snap to a
straight horizontal or vertical position on the page.

Left-click anywhere on the Graphical Navigation page, prior to clicking the end
symbol, if you want to create a corner or non-direct link/route to the destination.
Right-click the link and select Properties....
The Object Properties box opens.
Figure 2-15 Object Properties for a Link
5
On the Link tab, adjust the appearance of the link. The table below describes the various
options:
41
42
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Table 2-16 Link Tab Options and User Action
6
Option
User Action
Color
Click the arrow by the Color box and select a color from the resulting
palette.
Transparent
Select the check box to make the line appear transparent, or clear the
box to disable transparency. You cannot make lines with arrowheads
transparent.
Line style
Select a line style from the list.
Line width
Select a line width from the list.
Arrowheads:
• Start
• End
Select the check box by the Start or End option to assign it an
arrowhead. Clear the check box by the Start or End option to disable
the arrowhead.
Click Close to close the Object Properties box.
To view Link object properties, on the Object Properties dialog box, click the object tab. A
link’s class is “Link” and has no subclass.
For information on creating rules for a link, see Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
and Objects on page 61.
Deleting Nodes from the Resource Tree
This function is only available to Magellan CCS Navigator resource icons, its linked graphical
objects, and Graphical Navigation pages that have been created in Magellan CCS Navigator
1.7 or later.
Magellan CCS Navigator tracks the links of nodes that are dragged from the resource tree
and the resulting graphical objects in Graphical Navigation pages.
When you chose to delete a node from the resource tree, if it is linked to any graphical
objects, a Confirm Delete box appears. This box lists all of the linked pages and their paths,
and gives you the option to either continue with the deletion or to cancel your request. If
you delete the node, any linked graphical objects will lose the double-click actions of their
parent, but will retain any rules that have been defined for them.
Adding Controls
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add
controls. Controls are added in Build mode.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Objects in the Controls menu are customizable and able to generate or respond to events.
Table 2-17 Graphical Objects Available in the Controls Menu
Object
Description
Procedure
ActiveX Control
Potentially adds any ActiveX control
that is installed on your computer
Adding an ActiveX
Control on page 43
Character Display
Adds a display for showing string
status messages
Setting a
LTIMultiCharacter
Display on page 47
Timer Control
Adds a time of day display or
stopwatch-style timer
Adding a Timer
Control on page 45
Spin Control
Adds a control to the desktop to
increment or decrement values on
another control
Adding a Spin
Control on page 48
Player Control
Adds a MPEG-4 streaming icon,
which you can use to view an RTSP
stream
Adding a Player
Control on page 50
Matrix Classic
These options are only available in RouterNAV and the full
version of Magellan CCS Navigator. See Volume 6: Routing
Configuration for more information.
Matrix Panel
Multi-bus Panel
Multi-Bus Panel with
Salvo
Single Bus Panel
Single Bus Panel with
Monitor
We cannot guarantee the behavior of any non-LTI ActiveX controls. Ensure that you
understand the various events and actions that are available for the ActiveX controls that
you choose.
In Magellan CCS Navigator, you are able to insert any ActiveX control that is available on
your computer into a Graphical Navigation page. You can then call the methods of the
control, set the properties of the control, or respond to events generated by the control.
There are three menu options for the Controls button on the Create Objects toolbar:
ActiveX Controls, Character Display, and Timer Control. See these topics for more
information about the controls:
Other controls will be available, depending on your system’s configuration.

Adding an ActiveX Control on page 43

Adding a Timer Control on page 45

Setting a LTIMultiCharacter Display on page 47

Adding a Spin Control on page 48
Adding an ActiveX Control
ActiveX controls can only be added to the active Graphical Navigation page.
43
44
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
To insert an ActiveX control into your Graphical Navigation page, follow these steps.
1
In Build mode, click Controls on the Create Objects toolbar and select ActiveX Control,
or right-click in the Navigation page and in the resulting shortcut menu select Create >
ActiveX Control....
This opens the Insert ActiveX Control box listing the ActiveX controls that are available on
your computer.
Figure 2-16 Sample List of Available ActiveX Controls
2
Select the control that you require from the list and then click OK.
3
The list box closes and the mouse cursor turns into the ‘Insert Control’ cursor.
4
Drag the cursor over the location where you want the ActiveX control to be placed. A
dotted line graphically shows the area the control will occupy.
Figure 2-17 Dotted Line Depicting Area Chosen for ActiveX Control
5
When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The ActiveX control is
created.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Figure 2-18 New ActiveX Control
Adding a
Timer
Control
The timer object helps you to define your operations based on a period of time. The timer
object can display the current time of day (derived from your PC’s clock), or one of two
stopwatch-style timers. The timers can be started or stopped independently, and each timer
can count either up or down.
To insert an ActiveX Timer, complete the following steps:
1
Select Controls, and then Timer Control, on the Create Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select ActiveX Control. In
the ActiveX Control dialog box that appears, select LTITimer.
2
Drag the cursor over the location where you want the Timer control to be placed. A dotted
line graphically shows the area the control will occupy.
3
When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The Timer control is
created.
Figure 2-19 ActiveX Timer Control
See the following topics:

Events Generated by the LTITimer Control on page 45

LTITimer Control Actions on page 46

Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control on page 47
Events Generated by the LTITimer Control
The timer object generates these Magellan CCS Navigator events:

LTITimer Control:OnStartTimer1: Generated when timer 1 starts

LTITimer Control:OnStartTimer2: Generated when timer 2 starts

LTITimer Control:OnStopTimer1: Generated when timer 1 is counting down, and when
it reaches zero, but not when the StopTimer action is called
45
46
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation

LTITimer Control:OnStopTimer2: Generated when timer 2 is counting down, and when
it reaches zero. This is not generated when the StopTimer action is called.
Setting TimerIndex Actions
See Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control on page 47 for details on
setting the parameter values, such as timerIndex.
The timer object adds specific actions to the Actions in the rules grid. For all actions which
specify a timerIndex, the timerIndex indicates which timer the action applies to. timerIndex
0 affects the time-of-day display, timerIndex 1 affects timer 1, timerIndex 2 affects timer 2,
and timerIndex -1 affects the currently-displayed timer (-1 is not supported for the
DisplayTimer action). If an invalid timerIndex is specified, the action is ignored. If timerIndex
-1 is specified and the timer control is displaying the time of day, the action is ignored.
LTITimer Control Actions
The following table explains the effect of LTITimer control actions.
Table 2-18 LTITimer Control Actions
Action
Effect
Properties
Used
LTITimer Control:
Display Timer
Selects which timer to view
timerIndex
LTITimer Control:
InputTimerValue
Opens a dialog where you can enter specific
hours, minutes and seconds for the timer
timerIndex
LTITimer Control:
ResetTimer
Resets the specified timer to the last time value
entered
timerIndex
LTITimer Control:
SetTime
Sets the timer to the specified time
This action is ignored if Hours is not between 0
and 23, or if either Minutes or Seconds are not
between 0 and 59.
timerIndex;
Hours;
Minutes;
Seconds
LTITimer Control:
SetTimerDirection
Indicates whether the timer should count up or
down
If CountingUp is 'true', or a number other than
zero, the timer counts up. If CountingUP is
'false' or the number 0, the timer counts down.
When the timer counts up, it wraps at 24
hours, i.e. the next value after 23:59:59 is
0:00:00, and continues counting. If the timer is
counting down, when it reaches 0:00:00 it
stops counting and sends an OnStopTimerX
event.
The timer displays a green arrow indicating the
direction time timer counts. The green arrow is
dim when the timer is stopped, and bright
when the timer is running.
timerIndex;
CountingUp
LTITimer Control:
StartTimer
Starts the specified timer
If the timer is not already running, this action
triggers an OnStartTimerX event.
timerIndex
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Table 2-18 LTITimer Control Actions (Continued)
Properties
Used
Action
Effect
LTITimer Control:
StopTimer
Stops the specified timer
This action does not trigger an OnStopTimerX
event.
timerIndex
LTITimer Control:
TimerStartStop
Starts or stops the specified timer
If the timer is running, the control will behave
as if a StopTimer action was called. If the timer
is not running, the control will behave as if a
StartTimer action was called.
timerIndex
LTITimer Control:
ToggleCountDirection
Reverses the direction the timer is counting.
timerIndex
LTITimer Control:
ToggleTimeFormat
Switches the time of day between 12-hour
format and 24-hour format
None
Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control
Two LTITimer Control ActiveX properties may be set through the Set ActiveX Properties
dialog.
Table 2-19 Set ActiveX Properties Dialog Box
ActiveX Property
Effect
TimeFormat
If set to 'true', or a number other than 0, displays the time in
12-hour format. If set to 'false' or 0, displays the time in 24-hour
format. Any other value will cause unpredictable results.
Enabled
Enables or disables the ActiveX control. This property should
generally not be changed, unless you are familiar with ActiveX
and COM programming. A complete discussion of this topic is
beyond the scope of this manual.
Setting a LTIMultiCharacter Display
The LTIMultiCharacter Display ActiveX object is used to display string status messages.
To insert a Character Display ActiveX control, complete the following steps:
1
Select Controls, and then Character Display, on the Create Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select ActiveX Control. In
the ActiveX Control dialog box that appears, select LTI MultiCharDisplay.
2
Drag the cursor over the location where you want the Character Display to be placed. A
dotted line graphically shows the area the display will occupy.
3
When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The character display is
created.
47
48
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Figure 2-20 Example of the ActiveX Character Display Object
The character display object’s features are caption and set display properties.
LTIMultiCharacterDisplay Control Events
The character display does not generate any events.
LTIMultiCharacterDisplay Control Actions
LTIMultiCharDisplay Control: SetCaption: Sets the text displayed by the control.
Properties used: strNewValue: The new text string to display.
Adding a
Spin Control
The ActiveX Spin Control object is used to increment or decrement values on a specific
control.
To insert a spin control, complete the following steps:
1
Select Controls, and then Spin Control, on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click in
the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select ActiveX Control. In the ActiveX
Control dialog box that appears, select LTITimer.
2
Drag the cursor over the location where you want the spin control to be placed. A dotted
line graphically shows the area the control will occupy.
3
When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The spin control is
created.
Figure 2-21 Example of the ActiveX Spin Control Object
LTISpinControl Events
LTISpinControl: OnUpdate
This event is generated whenever the spin control's value changes.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
LTISpinControl Actions
Table 2-20 LTISpinControl Actions
Action
Effect
Properties Used
LTISpinControl:
ModifyValue:
Increases or decreases the current
value of the spin control by the
specified amount.
relativeAdjust
LTISpinControl:
SetRange:
Sets the minimum and maximum
values for the spin control.
Minimum,
Maximum.
LTISpinControl Properties

Horizontal: Indicates if the buttons should be displayed horizontally or vertically.
Figure 2-22 Horizontal LTISpinControl Buttons
Figure 2-23 Vertical LTISpinControl Buttons
Setting
ActiveX
Properties

MinimumValue: The lowest value the spin control uses. Default is zero.

MaximumValue: The highest value the spin control uses. Default is 100.

Wrap: If set to 'true' or a non-zero value, the spin control will wrap around when it
reaches its maximum or minimum. If set to 'false' or to 0, the spin control will clip to
the maximum or minimum. For example, if the CurrentValue is set to the
MaximumValue, and Wrap is False, any attempt to increase the CurrentValue will result
in 100. If Wrap is True, then adding 1 to the CurrentValue will wrap to the beginning of
the range, MinimumValue.

CurrentValue: The current value of the control.
ActiveX control properties are set using the SetActiveXProperty action. See the following
for more information:

Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX Properties’ Action on page 85

Setting Properties for the ActiveX Method’s Action on page 87
Event, Property and Method Compatibility, and OLE Types
ActiveX events and methods are compatible if all parameters use OLE types that are
supported by Magellan CCS Navigator. The SetActiveXProperty dialog shows only those
properties which use OLE types that are supported by Magellan CCS Navigator. The values
that are entered into the combo box, or are retrieved from the Event Property or Custom
Property, are converted into the appropriate type if possible. If this is not possible, the call
does not succeed and nothing happens.
The supported OLE types are:

Integer — whole numbers
49
50
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation

Number — floating point values (3.1415 for example)

Currency

Date

Text — any text

Error code — whole numbers

True/False
True/False
True/False is a BOOLEAN type. The allowable values are True, False (which are not case
sensitive) or any integer. 0 means False, all other numbers mean True. The preferred number
for True is -1.
Date
The Date is a text string containing a date, time or both. The date format is heavily
dependent on the regional settings of the control panel. For example 3/1/2 is interpreted as
January 2, 2003 if the regional settings are yy/mm/dd, or as March 1, 2003 if the regional
settings are in the US-style of mm/dd/yy. The regional settings of the control panel can be
overridden by entering the month as text instead of as an integer.
For best results, enter the date using text values for the date. (January 3 2003 instead of 1/
3/3, for example.)
If the date is not specified, it will default to December 30, 1899. If the time is not specified,
it will default to midnight.
The AM/PM indicators and month names are not case-sensitive. Time can be entered with
or without minutes and seconds and using either a 24-hour or a 12-hour clock using the
AM/PM indicators in the regional settings.
Examples using the Regional Date Settings of MM/DD/YY









Adding a
Player
Control
1
2003/12/31 23:59:59
10:00 — interpreted as December 30, 1899, 10:00 AM
3/1/2 — interpreted as March 1, 2002
2002/3/1 — interpreted as March 1, 2002
Mar 1, 2002
March 1, 2002 13:55
Mar 1 2002 1:55 PM
2002 mar 1 10am
1 mar 2002
You might add a Player control to a Graphical Navigation page when you want to view an
RTSP stream from an external source.
To insert a Player control, complete the following steps:
Select Controls, and then Player Control, on the Create Objects toolbar.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
OR
Right-click in the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select Player Control. In the
ActiveX Control dialog box that appears, select Player Control.
2
Drag the cursor over the location where you want the Player control to be placed. A dotted
line graphically shows the area the control will occupy.
3
When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The Player control is
created.
Figure 2-24 Player Control
4
Right click on the Player control and choose Properties...
An Object Properties dialog box appears.
5
On the Object Properties dialog box’s Streaming tab, enter the URL of an RTSP stream.
(See Setting the Streaming Object’s Properties on page 35)
You will be able to view the stream when you switch Magellan CCS Navigator to Control
mode.
Adding a Software Clock to a Navigator Page
You can add an ActiveX software clock to a Navigator page. By creating clock styles, you
can have the clocks display different time zones.
See the following topics for more information:

Creating Clock Styles on page 52

Adding a Clock to a Navigator Page on page 52
To download the software clock ActiveX control, follow this procedure:
1
Go to our website and find the SWC-5200 to download.
2
Click on the swc5200zx_setup_1_0.exe link.
3
Enter your e-mail address and password. If you do not have a password, click Create one
now! and fill in the screen that follows. When it is complete, a password will be mailed to
you and you can continue.
4
Place a check beside I have read the above section and agree, and then click Begin
Download.
5
Follow the installation procedure.
51
52
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Creating Clock Styles
The default setting for the control is to display a 12-hour analog clock, with the current
date displayed underneath, using the time zone configured in the Windows Control Panel.
If you want to change any of these settings, you need to create new clock styles. For
example, if you want to place three clocks on the page, showing the time in three different
time zones, then you would create three different clock styles.
To create a clock style, follow this procedure:
1
Start the clock as an independent process by browsing to the folder where it was installed
and clicking clock.exe.
The Leitch Clock application starts.
2
Right click on the Leitch Clock dialog box, and from the shortcut menu that appears,
choose Clock Properties.
The Clock Settings dialog box appears.
3
In the Clock Setting Style field, type a name for the new clock style.
4
Click Modify. The rest of the fields on the screen become available. For detailed instructions
on the settings you can apply to a clock style, refer to the Software Clock Help file.
5
Click Save.
The Clock Style file is saved.
6
Repeat steps 3 - 5 to create more clock styles.
7
Click OK to close the dialog box.
Adding a Clock to a Navigator Page
Once you have installed the SWC-5200 software clock, you can add it to a Navigator page.
Clock styles are stored with the login ID of the person logged onto the computer. If the
person who created the styles logs off and a different person logs on, using a different
Windows User name, the clock styles will not be available to that person.
1
In Build mode, right click on a Navigator page and choose Create > ActiveX Control...
from the menu.
The Add ActiveX Control dialog box appears.
2
Scroll down and click on Leitch DAC Clock Control, and then click OK.
The Add ActiveX Control dialog box closes and the cursor turns into the “Insert Control”
cursor.
3
Drag the cursor over the location where you want to place the control.
A dotted line graphically shows the area that the control will occupy.
4
When the area is the size you want, release the mouse button, and the ActiveX control is
created.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
5
To apply a clock style, right click and select Properties. Create a rule with the following
properties:
Event: OnLoadPage
Action: Leitch DAC Clock Control:SetActiveXProperty
6
Click Action Properties.
The Action Property dialog box appears.
7
Enable the checkbox beside the namedStyle property. In the Value column, type in the
name of the desired clock style (this will be the same name as displayed in the Select Clock
Style list in the Software Clock's properties dialog).
8
Click OK to close the Action Property dialog box.
The clock properties will load when Magellan CCS Navigator is placed in Control mode.
Adding a Gauge Control to a Navigator Page
LTIGauge Control is an ActiveX control which can be used in Navigator pages to simulate a
gauge. The LTIGauge Control has many properties that can be set to produce different
appearances. Follow these steps:
1
2
In Build mode, right click on a Navigator page and do either of the following:

On the Create Objects toolbar, select Control > GaugeControl.

Click the ActiveX Control > LTIGauge Control.
Right click the LTIGauge control and select Properties.
From the popup dialog, you can add rules and set the following properties for the LTIGauge
control:
Table 2-21 LTIGauge Control Properties
LTIGauge Control
Property
Function or Range
Value
Current value of the LTIGauge control
MinValue
The minimum value displayed on the LTIGauge control
MaxValue
The maximum value displayed on the LTIGauge control
CenterX
The horizontal center of the gauge (in the control's client
area), as measured from the top left (0, 0) corner of the
control’s client area
CenterY
The vertical center of the gauge (in the control's client
area), as measured from the top left (0, 0) corner of the
control’s client area
Cap_Idx
The number of the caption. A gauge can have up to five
captions, labeled 0 to 4. Each caption can have the
following properties:
BaseArcColor

CapColor—The color of the caption, as an integer (so
Red would be 16711680 decimal)

CapText—The text of the caption.

CapPositionX— The horizontal position of the caption.

CapPositionY— Thevertical position of the caption.
The color of the base arc
53
54
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Table 2-21 LTIGauge Control Properties (Continued)
LTIGauge Control
Property
Function or Range
BaseArcRadius
The radius of the base arc, measured in distance from the
center
BaseArcStart
The start angle of the base arc, measured by clockwise
rotation from the centere horizontal line to the left-most
position of the arc
BaseArcSweep
The sweep angle of the base arc
BaseArcWidth
The width of the base arc
ScaleLinesInterColor
The color of the inter scale lines which are the middle scale
lines for an uneven number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesInterInnerRadius
The inner radius of the inter scale lines which are the
middle scale lines for an uneven number of minor scale
lines
ScaleLinesInterOuterRadius
The outer radius of the inter scale lines which are the
middle scale lines for an uneven number of minor scale
lines
ScaleLinesInterWidth
The width of the inter scale lines which are the middle
scale lines for an uneven number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorNumOf
The number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorColor
The color of the minor scale lines
The inner radius of the minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorInnerRadius
The outer radius of the minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorOuterRadius
ScaleLinesMinorWidth
The width of the minor scale lines
The step value of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorStepValue
ScaleLinesMajorColor
The color of the major scale lines
The inner radius of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorInnerRadius
The outer radius of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorOuterRadius
ScaleLinesMajorWidth
The width of the major scale lines
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Table 2-21 LTIGauge Control Properties (Continued)
LTIGauge Control
Property
Range_Idx
Function or Range
The number of the range that is being defined. A gauge
can have up to five ranges, labeled 0 to 4. Each range can
have the following properties:

RangeEnabled—Enables or disables the range selected
by Range_Idx.

RangeColor—The color of the range.

RangeStartValue—The start value of the range, must
be less than RangeEndValue.

RangeEndValue—The end value of the range. Must
be greater than RangeStartValue.

RangeInnerRadius— The inner radius of the range.

RangeOuterRadius—The outer radius of the range.
ScaleNumbersRadius
The position of the scale numbers as measured from the
center of the gauge
ScaleNumbersColor
The color of the scale numbers
ScaleNumbersRotation
The angle relative to the tangent of the base arc at a scale
line that is used to rotate numbers, set to 0 for no rotation
or e.g. set to 90
NeedleType
The type of the needle, options are

Type 0

Type 1
NeedleRadius
The length of the needle, as measured from the centre of
the gauge
NeedleColor1
The first color of the needle:

0 Gray

1 Red

2 Green

3 Blue

4 Yellow

5 Violet

6 Magenta
NeedleColor2
The second color of the needle
NeedleWidth
The thickness of the needle
BackgroundColor
The color of the background
55
56
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Editing a Page
To move items on a Graphical Navigation page, the Navigation option Allow drag and
drop operations in build mode must be selected. See Setting Navigation Options on
page 120.
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can edit
pages. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode.
When you select, more and resize objects on a page, Magellan CCS Navigator behaves like
most drawing tools.
To select a single Graphical Navigation object, click inside its boundaries. The object has
eight sizing handles that appear when the object is selected.
Magellan CCS Navigator provides three methods for selecting multiple Graphical Navigation
objects:

Press the SHIFT key or CTRL key and keep it depressed while you select the multiple
objects with individual mouse clicks.

Click on an empty area and drag the mouse to form a rectangular area around the
objects you want to select. A rectangle bound by a dashed line will appear on the page.
When you release the mouse, all objects having their boundaries within the area of the
rectangle are selected. This is called a marquee select.

Right-click in the Graphical Navigation page. In the shortcut menu that appears, click
Select All. This will select all of the objects in the Graphical Navigation page.
To clear the selection, select File > Clear from the main menu. This clears multiple
selections in the Navigation pane or Graphical Navigation page, leaving only one
selected item. This deletes nothing from the Navigation or Graphical Navigation page.
Magellan CCS Navigator has the following options for editing Graphical Navigation pages:

Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects on page 56

Moving a Graphical Navigation Object on page 57

Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphical Navigation Objects on page 57

Setting the Display Order of Graphical Navigation Objects on page 58

Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects on page 58
Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects
To resize a Graphical Navigation object and retain its proportional dimensions, press the
SHIFT key and then click and drag one of the four corner sizing handles of the object with
the mouse while keeping the SHIFT key pressed.
To resize a Graphical Navigation object and change its relative height and width, drag any of
the eight sizing handles of the object. This will distort the appearance of the object.
To resize multiple Graphical Navigation objects so that they are the same size, same width,
or same height; follow this procedure:
1
Select one object, hold own the Shift key and select the other objects.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
2
Right-click one of the selected objects, select Size, and then select from one of the three
options described below.
Table 2-22 Commands on the Size Menu
Command
Function
Same Size
Scales the objects so they are the same size vertically and horizontally
Same Width
Scales the objects so they are the same width
Same Height
Scales the objects so they are the same height
Moving a Graphical Navigation Object
To move items on a Graphical Navigation page, the Navigation option Allow drag and
drop operations in build mode must be selected. See Setting Navigation Options on
page 120.
To move a Graphical Navigation button, symbol, image or text object, click on the object
and hold the mouse button down while dragging the object to a new location. Release the
mouse button when the object is where you want it.
For fine adjustment of an object’s position on the page, select the object and use the arrow
keys on your keyboard to move the object into position. Turning on the Show Grid and
Snap to Grid features in the Graphical Navigation Options can help you line up the objects
with respect to each other. See Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects on
page 58.
If you select and drag a linked symbol on a Graphical Navigation page, any links to it will
track the moving symbol on the page.
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphical Navigation Objects
To copy a Graphical Navigation object, select the object and click the Copy tool on the
toolbar, or right-click the object and then select Copy.
Or, to cut a Graphical Navigation object, select the object, and then click the Cut tool
on the toolbar; or right-click the object and select Cut.
Then, to paste the cut or copied object on the page, move the mouse cursor to a new
location, then click the Paste tool on the toolbar; or right-click and select Paste.
To delete a Graphical Navigation object, select the object, and then click the Delete tool
on the toolbar; or right-click the object and select Delete.
Keyboard shortcuts are as follows:

Cut—Press CTRL+X

Copy—Press CTRL+C

Paste—Press CTRL+V

Delete—Press CTRL+D or DELETE
57
58
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Setting the Display Order of Graphical Navigation Objects
To set the display order of Graphical Navigation objects—whether the objects are buttons,
links, symbols, images or text—right-click an object, select Order>, and then select from
one of the four options described below.
Table 2-23 Commands on the Order Menu and Their Functions
Command
Function
Bring to Front
Brings the selected object to the top layer in a set of layered objects
Send to Back
Sends the selected object to the bottom layer in a set of layered
objects
Bring Forward
Brings the selected object forward one layer in a set of layered objects
Send Backward
Brings the selected object back one layer in a set of layered objects
Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects
To align and space Graphical Navigation objects, right-click one of the selected objects,
select Align or Space>, and then select from one of the eight options described below.
Table 2-24 Commands on the Align and Space Menu
Command
Function
Align Top
Aligns the tops of the objects horizontally
Align Middle
Aligns the centers of the objects horizontally
Align Bottom
Aligns the bottoms of the objects horizontally
Align Left
Aligns the left side of the objects vertically
Align Center
Aligns the centers of the objects vertically
Align Right
Aligns the right side of the objects vertically
Space Across
Evenly distributes objects horizontally
Space Down
Evenly distributes the objects vertically
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus
You cannot perform build operations, such as drag-and-drop, scaling, object creation, or
attribute definition, when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode.
When you right-click a Graphical Navigation page or object in any operational mode, a
shortcut menu appears.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
The table below lists the commands available from these shortcut menus in build mode.
Depending whether you right-click a page or an object, some commands are not available.
Table 2-25 Shortcut Menu Commands, Build Mode
Command
Function
Control
Opens the Control dialog box of the selected symbol if it has a valid
device ID
Configuration
Opens the Configuration dialog box of the selected symbol if it has a
valid device ID
Cut
Cuts the selected object or objects
Copy
Copies the selected object or objects
Paste
Cuts the selected object or objects
Delete
Deletes the selected object or objects
Select All
Selects all objects on the page
Order >
Shows the Order submenu; see Setting the Display Order of
Graphical Navigation Objects on page 58
Align or Space >
Aligns of spaces selected objects on the page; see Aligning and
Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects on page 58
Size >
Resizes selected objects on the page; see Resizing Graphical
Navigation Objects on page 56
View >
Shows the View submenu; see Setting the View for Graphical
Navigation Symbols on page 40
Create >
Shows the Create submenu; see these topics:

Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page on page 17

Adding a Resource Icon Symbol on page 36

Adding Controls on page 42
Zoom >
Shows the Zoom menu; see Using Zoom Tools on page 12
Pan
Uses the Pan submenu to move about in the Graphical Navigation
page; the Pan submenu contains these options:

Pan (Keyboard shortcut: press CTRL+A)

Zoom
Properties...
Opens the Object Properties box of the selected object
Component
Wizard...
Recalls the wizard that created the component; This command will be
disabled if the component was not created by a wizard
Options...
Opens the Graphical Navigation Options box
Help...
Opens a Help topic on the Graphical Navigation tool
59
60
Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
61
3
Rules for Magellan CCS
Navigator Pages and Objects
Setting Rules to Perform Actions
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create rules for Magellan
CCS Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator users can create rules.
In Build mode, you can define rules for Magellan CCS Navigator objects and pages. A rule
consists of an event or condition which causes Magellan CCS Navigator to perform an
action.
An event is a trigger for an action to be performed. Some examples of events that always
trigger an action are: On Load Page, On Mouse Click, and On Unload Page. For a list of
events available in Magellan CCS Navigator, see Setting an Event on page 66.
A conditional event must happen in a specific way for an associated action to be triggered.
Some examples of conditional events are On Custom Property Change and On MGI Lamp
Status. See Defining Conditions on page 67.
An action occurs in response to an event or a conditional event.
Actions can be divided into two basic types: those related to the Magellan CCS Navigator
and those related to specific plug-in (such as SuiteView or Advanced Router). Magellan CCS
Navigator actions are found in this chapter. Actions related to specific plug-ins are found in
the chapters dealing with those specific plug-ins.
For an extensive list of actions, see Setting an Action on page 72.
When configuring rules for ActiveX objects, Magellan CCS Navigator will automatically add
actions to this list that will invoke the ActiveX object’s methods, or set the ActiveX object’s
properties.
62
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Flow Chart of Generic Rule Creation Process
Figure 3-1 Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page
Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page
When an event is conditional, you can type your own description of the event in the
Condition box. However, if the event is unconditional (that is, the Condition box reads
“always”), you cannot type in a Condition box.
The generic procedure for creating a new rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator object or page
is as follows:
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
1
Right-click the object or page.
2
Select Properties... to display the Object Properties box.
3
Click the Rules tab.
New Rule
button
Delete Rule
button
Condition
button
Figure 3-2 Object Properties Dialog Box’s Rules Tab
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can
create or edit rules.
4
Click New Rule on the Rules tab toolbar. See Using the Rules Tab Toolbar on page 65.
A new record will appear as a new row in the Rules list. See Using the Rules Table on
page 65.
After providing a default description (which is based on the condition/action properties),
Magellan CCS Navigator will not change the description if you changed the one provided by
Magellan CCS Navigator. However, if you do not change these descriptions, but rather the
properties of either the event or action, Magellan CCS Navigator will provide a new set of
descriptions that match the properties of the event/action.
5
Click the arrow in the Event column, and then select an event from the list.
See Setting an Event on page 66.
6
If the event that you have chosen requires that you set a condition, click Condition and
complete the Event Condition tab of the Condition dialog box. See Defining
Conditions on page 67.
If the event does not require you to set conditions, the Condition button is still available.
When you click it, there will be a single tab labelled Custom Property Condition.
Custom property conditions can trigger and execute an action only when an event happens
AND the value of a custom property(ies) is (are) met (for example).
To create a custom property condition, follow this procedure:
63
64
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Figure 3-3 Custom Properties Tab
a
Type a name for this custom property in the Description field.
b
Click New to create a new line in the Conditions table.
c
Use the buttons near the bottom of the dialog box to create an expression.
Open bracket
Property
Value and
property
Remove open
bracket
Equals, Not
equals,
Contains or
Not Contains
Value/CP/EP#
Close bracket
Remove close
bracket
Figure 3-4 Custom Property Condition Buttons
These buttons create content for the Condition field.
Just like an algebraic equation, parentheses apply precedence to some events over
others. Your expression can extend across multiple rows in the table.
If you, for example, add an open bracket, you must add a close bracket as well or you
cannot progress to the next dialog box.
In the Logic column, you can click to choose AND or OR.
An event that contains NOT takes precedence over an event that contains AND, and an
event that contains AND takes precedence over an event that contains OR.
When your expression is complete, click OK to return to the Rules dialog box.
7
Click the arrow in the Action column, and select an action from the list. Depending on the
object you are applying rules to, different options may be available. For example, you can
only apply ActiveX actions to an ActiveX object, and you can only apply button actions to a
button. See Setting an Action on page 72 for more information.
8
Click Action Properties and set the properties in the resulting box.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
When you close the Action Properties box, the Description field for this rule is updated.
You can edit the content of this field by typing a description of the new rule that makes
sense to you.
9
To add additional rules to the list, click New Rule and repeat steps 5 -8.
10 Click Close to close the Object Properties box.
Using the Rules Tab Toolbar
The Rules tab has its own toolbar.
New
Delete Copy
Paste
Up
Down
Figure 3-5 Rules Button Bar
The names and functions of the tools on this toolbar are as follows:
Table 3-1 Toolbar for the Rules Tab
Name
Function
New
Adds a new row to the list of rules
Delete
Deletes a selected row from the list of rules
(Use to delete empty rules -- you cannot close the Object Properties dialog
box if there are incomplete or empty rules)
Copy
Copies the contents of the currently selected rule
Paste
Pastes the contents of the rule on the clipboard (after a copy operation) into
a new row of the properties dialog; you may use paste to copy rules
between properties dialog boxes
Up
Moves the selected rule up one row in the sequential order of rules
(Magellan CCS Navigator executes the rules sequentially in general, but
rules with the same type of event trigger [such as on mouse click] are
processed virtually simultaneously if they list sequentially.)
Down
Moves the selected rule down one row in the sequential order of rules
(Magellan CCS Navigator executes the rules sequentially in general, but
rules with the same type of event trigger (such as on mouse click) are
processed virtually simultaneously if they list sequentially.)
Condition
Opens a dialog in which you can define conditions for the event to occur
Action
Properties
Opens a dialog in which you can define properties for the new action
Using the Rules Table
The Rules list is a four-column table.
Figure 3-6 Rules Table Titlebar
65
66
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
The columns and their functions are as follows:
Table 3-2 Columns in the Rules Table
Column
Function and Help Reference
Event
Lists events for which you can define an action.
Condition
States whether the action always or conditionally occurs. If the text is
conditional, you can click Condition and define the conditions in the
resulting dialog box.
Action
Lists the possible actions for events associated with a Magellan CCS
Navigator object.
Description
Allows you to type in a description of the rule that suits your needs.
Setting an Event
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can
create or edit rules.
An event is the trigger for an action.
Some actions happen only when a certain condition occurs. On Crosspoint Status and On
Custom Property Change are conditional events. You must define the conditions of the
events that trigger these events. To do this, you must complete the Condition dialog box.
The items in the events list depend to some extent on the options available for your system.
For example, router options will only appear if you have the router plug-in available. Events
applicable to specific objects can be found in the chapters dealing with those objects.
When configuring rules for ActiveX objects, Magellan CCS Navigator will automatically add
events to this list that basevd on any Events that the ActiveX object fires.
The event types On Load Page, On Mouse Click, and On Unload Page always trigger an
action.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
The Events list on the Rules table has these options:
Table 3-3 Default Event Options in the Rules Table
Event
Description
Multiple Events
When any one of a defined list of events occurs
See Setting Conditions for a “Multiple Events” Event on
page 68
On Alarm
When a specific alarm is triggered
See Setting Conditions for “On Alarm” Events on page 69
On Custom
Property Change
When a defined custom property for a Magellan CCS Navigator
object or page changes
See these topics:

Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page on page 8

Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15

Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’
Event on page 71

Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action on
page 82
On Load Page
When a Graphical Navigation page opens
On Mouse Click
When you click the mouse
On Unload Page
When a page closes
Defining Conditions
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can
create or edit rules.
Some events are conditional. This means they occur on some occasions when an action is
performed, but not on others. You can determine the conditions which trigger this type of
event.
Events that are conditional are listed in the following table.
Table 3-4 Default Conditional Events in Magellan CCS Navigator
Event
Reference
On Multiple Events
Setting Conditions for a “Multiple Events”
Event on page 68
On Alarm
Setting Conditions for “On Alarm” Events on
page 69
On Custom Property Change (this
event can also use global properties)
Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom
Property Change’ Event on page 71
67
68
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Defining an Event or Action Property for the First Time
When you define an event or action property for the first time, the application creates a
default condition description (Condition box) and a default rule description (Description
box). After providing a default description (based on the condition/action properties),
Magellan CCS Navigator will not change the description if you have changed it. However, if
you do not change these descriptions, but rather the properties of either the event or
action, Magellan CCS Navigator will provide a new set of descriptions that match the
properties of the event/action.
Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition
Rather than creating a new condition set, you can also reuse previously set conditions or
select a similar set and edit them.
1
Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar, then click Existing Conditions>> to show a
box listing previously defined conditions.
2
Select from the list to reuse previously set conditions or select a similar set of conditions and
edit them, and then click OK.
Setting Conditions for a “Multiple Events” Event
The Event Condition Dialog - Multiple Events dialog box is very similar to the Object
Properties - Rules dialog box, but with the addition of a Description field at the top of
the dialog box and a Logical Event type column where the Description column is in the
Object Properties dialog box.
The effect of creating a Multiple Event event is to list a series of events. When any of these
events occurs, the resulting action occurs. The content of the Logical Event type field is
always OR.
To complete the “Multiple Events” event condition box, complete these steps:
1
Enter a name or description for the Multiple Events Condition that you are creating in the
Description field.
2
Click New on the Multiple Events toolbar.
A new record will appear as a new row in the Events list.
3
Click the arrow in the Event column, and then select an event from the list.
See Setting an Event on page 66.
4
If the Condition column reads “Conditional,” click Condition and complete the resulting
conditions dialog box.
See Defining Conditions on page 67.
5
Repeat steps 2 - 4 if you need to create more conditions.
6
Click OK to return to the Page Properties - Rules dialog box. You are now ready to add an
action that will occur when any of the events you have specified trigger it. See Defining an
Event or Action Property for the First Time on page 68.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Setting Conditions for “On Alarm” Events
The “On Alarm” event is not available for Q-SEE enabled 6800+ devices. if you select a
Q-SEE enabled device in the Condition dialog for this event, after polling the device, you
will receive an error message.
Conditions for the “On Alarm” event determine the specific alarm on the specific device
that must happen to trigger the action that will follow it. For information on alarms, see
Network Event Diagnostics on page 237.
To complete the “On Alarm” Event Condition box, complete these steps:
Figure 3-7 Event Condition Dialog for On Alarm Events
1
Click Select... and select a device to monitor.
Magellan CCS Navigator polls the selected device to retrieve the device’s alarm and
parameter information.
2
Choose By Alarm Level, By Alarm Name, or By Parameter, and then make the
appropriate selections as determined by the chart below:
69
70
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Table 3-5 Settings Options for On Alarm Events
Condition
Settings
By Alarm Level
Level - from the left drop-down menu, choose either Equals, Not
Equals or Any Value.

Equals triggers when any alarm is the specified level.

Not Equals triggers when the alarm is not the specified level.

Any Value triggers on any alarm, regardless of level.
If you choose Equals or Not Equals, from the right drop-down
menu, choose the alarm level: Critical, Warning, Information, or
Cleared.
Acknowledged - Click here if you want to trigger the rule when
the alarm is acknowledged.
By Alarm Name
Name - From the left drop-down menu, choose Equals or Not
Equals.
From the right drop-down menu, choose from the list of available
alarms for the selected device.
Cleared - Check here if you want to trigger the rule when the
alarm is cleared. If this box is unchecked, this rule will trigger when
the selected alarm is activated.
OR
Acknowledged -Click here if you want to trigger the rule when
the alarm is acknowledged.
By Parameter
Name - From the left drop-down menu, select Equals or Not
Equals.
From the right drop-down menu, choose the parameter you want
to single out. All this device’s parameters that provide alarm
feedback are listed.
Alarm - from the left drop-down menu, choose Equals, Not
Equals or Any Value. If you choose Equals or Not Equals, from
the right drop-down menu, choose an alarm for that parameter.
Value - From the left drop-down menu, choose Equals, Not
Equals or Any Value. If you choose Equals or Not Equals, use the
up/down buttons to select a number in the range for that
parameter.
Cleared -Check here if you want to trigger the rule when the alarm
is cleared. If this box is unchecked, this rule will trigger when the
selected alarm is activated.
OR
Acknowledged - Click here if you want to trigger the rule when
the alarm is acknowledged
3
Click OK to close the Event Condition box.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event
If the Magellan CCS Navigator page contains a Magellan CCS Navigator Frame, any custom
property changes on the Frame will be “bubbled up” to the containing page, triggering an
On Custom Property Page event on the main page.
A custom property is a variable. If you do not have any custom properties set, see Setting
Custom Page Properties on page 16.
To complete the “On Custom Property Change” Condition box, complete these steps:
1
Type a name for the custom property in the Property box, or click the arrow and select a
name for the custom property or global property from the Property list.
2
Click the arrow in the box to the right of the Property box, and select a condition: Equals,
Not Equals, or Any Value.
Set property action behavior is normally grayed out.
3
In the Value section, select Custom Value, Router Value, or Event/Custom Properties,
depending on your goal for that custom or global property.
Table 3-6 Columns in the Rules Table
Column
Function and Help Reference
Event
Lists events for which you can define an action.
Condition
States whether the action always or conditionally occurs. If the text is
conditional, you can click Condition and define the conditions in the
resulting dialog box.
Action
Lists the possible actions for events associated with a Magellan CCS
Navigator object.
Description
Allows you to type in a description of the rule that suits your needs.
Table 3-7 Event Conditions And How To Set Them
Value
How To Set
Custom Value Type the custom value in the Value box.
Router Value
Select the router by clicking Select... in the Device ID field.
If the router does not appear in the Router Selection dialog box, then you
must first configure the router.
See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
Then click the arrow in the Router Value box and select from the list of
sources and destinations for the specified router. Sources have the prefix
“[Src]” and destinations have the prefix “[Dst].”
Event/Custom
Properties
Type the value in the Event Value box. This option is only available if
there are properties associated with the event.
Database
value
Click here if you want the custom property to be retrieved from the
database.
Save the
Click here if you want to save the value of the custom property in the
changed value Magellan CCS Navigator database. When a value is saved in this way, you
to database
will be able to retrieve it even after rebooting Magellan CCS Navigator.
71
72
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Table 3-8 Columns in the Rules Table
Column
Function and Help Reference
Event
Lists events for which you can define an action.
Condition
States whether the action always or conditionally occurs. If the text is
conditional, you can click Condition and define the conditions in the
resulting dialog box.
Action
Lists the possible actions for events associated with a Magellan CCS
Navigator object.
Description
Allows you to type in a description of the rule that suits your needs.
Table 3-9 Columns in the Rules Table
4
Column
Function and Help Reference
Event
Lists events for which you can define an action.
Condition
States whether the action always or conditionally occurs. If the text is
conditional, you can click Condition and define the conditions in the
resulting dialog box.
Action
Lists the possible actions for events associated with a Magellan CCS
Navigator object.
Description
Allows you to type in a description of the rule that suits your needs.
Click OK to close the Event Condition box.
For information on reusing an “On Custom Property Change” condition, see Reusing or
Editing a Previously Set Condition on page 68.
Setting an Action
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can
create or edit rules.
Magellan CCS Navigator initiates actions in response to events. Together, an event and its
associated action constitute a rule. The following table lists the available actions, their
function, and a Help reference. See Setting Rules to Perform Actions on page 61.
Table 3-10 Default Actions List
Action
Function
Reference Topic
Alarm
Filtering
Toggles alarm filtering on or
off
Setting Properties for Alarm Filtering
Actions on page 74
Configuration Loads a device
configuration dialog box
Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’
Action on page 75
Control
Loads a device control
dialog box
Setting Properties for a ‘Control’
Action on page 76
Execute
Macro
Loads a pre-created macro
Setting Properties for an ‘Execute
Macro’ Action on page 76
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Table 3-10 Default Actions List (Continued)
Action
Function
Reference Topic
Launch
Application
Starts an application from
the Graphical Navigation
page
Setting Properties for a ‘Launch
Application’ Action on page 77
Load Layout
Loads a pre-created layout
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’
Action on page 77
Load Page
Loads another Magellan
CCS Navigator page
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’
Action on page 78
Load Preset
Loads a preset
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’
Action on page 79
Load Frame
Page
Loads a Magellan CCS
Navigator page in a
Magellan CCS Navigator
frame
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame
Page’ Action on page 78
Product Info
Opens a device product
brochure or spec sheet
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’
Action on page 79
Product User
Manual
Opens a device user manual Setting Properties for a ‘Product User
Manual’ Action on page 81
Set Button
Properties
Sets the appearance and
behavior for a button
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button
Properties’ Action on page 81
Set Button
Blink Mode
Sets the blink mode to on,
off, or toggle
Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink
Mode’ Action on page 82
Set Custom
Property
Changes the current value
of a custom or global
property
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom
Property’ Action on page 82
Set Frame
Custom
Property
Sets a custom value or event
for the frame
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame
Custom Property’ Action on page 83
Set Link
Properties
Changes the appearance of
a link
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link
Properties’ Action on page 84
Set ActiveX
Properties
Sets the properties for an
ActiveX control object
Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX
Properties’ Action on page 85
Set Page
Refresh
Option
Determines whether or not
the page will be updated
automatically
Setting Properties for a “Set Page
Refresh Option” Action on page 86
Set Screen
Mode
Sets or disables full screen
mode
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Screen
Mode’ Action on page 86
Set Symbol
Properties
Changes the highlighted
symbol’s state
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol
Properties’ Action on page 85
Set Text
Properties
Changes text in response to
specified events
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text
Properties’ Action on page 85
Invoke
ActiveX
Method
Allows parameters to be set
for an ActiveX control
Setting Properties for the ActiveX
Method’s Action on page 87
73
74
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
In addition, when configuring rules for ActiveX objects, Magellan CCS Navigator will
automatically add actions to this list that will invoke the ActiveX object's methods, or set
the ActiveX object's properties.
Setting the Action Properties
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can
create or edit rules.
Each of the different actions you can choose in the Action field of the Rules tab of the
Object Properties dialog box has properties to be set.
Click Action Properties to open the specific rules for the action you have selected.
To create a rule, see Setting Rules to Perform Actions on page 61.
Reusing the Event Properties
Many events have additional information associated with them. For example, 'On Custom
Property Change' events indicates which custom property has changed and its new value.
These are called Event Properties.
You can copy Event Properties into many of Action Property dialogs. For example, you could
set up a Text object to change its text to the custom property value contained in the 'On
Custom Property Change’ event.
To select the Event Property, in the appropriate Action Property dialog will have an option
labelled Event Properties or Event/Custom Properties, with a list of properties to choose
from. Event Properties have the prefix [EP], and Custom Properties have the prefix [CP].
Setting Properties for Alarm Filtering Actions
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action. For more
information on alarm filtering, see Setting Alarm Filtering Options on page 249.
An Alarm Filtering action turns alarm filtering on or off. To set alarm filtering action
properties, complete these steps:
1
Select the correct device ID by clicking Select if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator object
has not inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
You can avoid having to set the device ID and other configuration information if you create
a symbol from a fully configured device in the resource tree. The symbol will inherit
the configuration details of the device as well as its navigation properties.
Also, if you double-click the symbol, you will automatically show the symbol’s
Configuration dialog box in Build mode or its Control dialog box in Control mode.
2
In the Alarm Filtering box, click the arrow and select one of these options:
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Table 3-11 Alarm Filtering Options and Functions
3
Option
Function
On
Turns on alarm filtering
Off
Turns off alarm filtering
Toggle
Enables toggling alarm filtering on and off
(If alarm filtering is on, the action will turn it off; if alarm filtering is off, the
action will turn it on.)
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’ Action
You do not need to set an action to open a Configuration dialog box when using a symbol
object with a valid device ID—unless you want to open a Configuration dialog box for a
device that is not represented by the symbol. To open a Configuration dialog box for a
symbol with a valid device ID, double-click the symbol when Magellan CCS Navigator is
in Build mode.
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action. For
information on configuration options and settings, see CCS Device Configuration on
page 127.
A Configuration action opens a specific device’s Configuration dialog box. To set
configuration action properties, complete these steps:
1
Select the correct device ID by clicking Select, if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator
object has not inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which it was created.
You can avoid having to set the device ID and other configuration information if you create
a symbol from a fully configured device in the resource tree. The symbol will inherit
the configuration details of the device as well as its navigation properties.
Also, if you double-click the symbol, you will automatically show the symbol’s
Configuration dialog box in Build mode or its Control dialog box in Control mode.
2
Type the coordinates in the Left and Top fields where you want the Control dialog box to
be opened. You can start/stop capturing the mouse position by pressing CTRL+ALT+S. You
can also define the width and height of the Control dialog box by typing in values on the
appropriate fields. The Width and Height fields are initialized with the default values of the
selected device.
3
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
4
Click OK to close the action properties box.
75
76
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action
You do not need to set an action to open a Control dialog box when using a symbol object
with a valid Device ID—unless you want to open a Configuration dialog box for a device
that is not represented by the symbol. To open a Configuration dialog box for a symbol
with a valid device ID, double-click the symbol when Magellan CCS Navigator is
in control mode.
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an action. A Control
action opens a device’s Control dialog box. For information on Control dialog boxes, see
CCS Device Control on page 255.
If you have chosen a Control action, complete these steps:
1
Select the correct Device ID, if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator object has not inherited
the appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
You can avoid having to set the Device ID and other configuration information if you create
a symbol from a fully configured device in the resource tree. The symbol will inherit
the configuration details of the device as well as its navigation properties.
Also, if you double-click the symbol, you will automatically show the symbol’s
Configuration dialog box in Build mode or its Control dialog box in Control mode.
Depending on your system’s configuration, you may not have access to various different
devices for control.
2
Type the coordinates in the Left and Top fields where you want the Control dialog box to
be opened. You can start/stop capturing the mouse position by pressing CTRL+ALT+S. You
can also define the width and height of the Control dialog box by typing in values in the
appropriate fields. The Width and Height fields are initialized with the default values of the
selected device.
3
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
4
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for an ‘Execute Macro’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
The Execute Macro action triggers a pre-defined group of actions. If you haven’t created
any macros, you may not have an appropriate macro to load. See Creating a Macro on
page 88.
To set the Execute Macro action properties, complete these steps:
1
In the Macro Name box, click the arrow and select one of the available macro names.
2
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
3
Click OK to close the action properties box.
See Working with Macros on page 88 and CCS Device Control on page 255.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action
You can also start an application from the Navigation pane. See Setting the Command
Tab on page 107 and Starting Non-Magellan CCS Navigator Applications from the
Navigation Pane on page 107.
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
A Launch Application action starts an application from the Graphical Navigation page.
To set Launch Application action properties, complete these steps:
1
Do one of the following to have the path to the application’s executable file appear in the
Command box:

Type the path to the executable file in the Command box.
OR

Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Set Application to Launch box to
find the application on your network.
When you find the *.exe or *.bat file that starts the application, select it, and click
Open.
2
Type any special arguments in the Arguments box.
3
Do one of the following to have the path to the initial directory appear in the Initial
Directory box:

Type the path to the initial working directory in the Initial Directory box.
OR

Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Select Initial Directory box to find
the initial working directory.
When you find the initial working directory, select it, and then click OK.
4
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
5
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
A layout is a file that preserves the positions of various pages and panels on the Magellan
CCS Navigator desktop. The Load Layout action returns the pages and panels to these
positions. If you have not created any layouts, you may not have an appropriate layout to
load. See Working with Layouts on page 56.
To set the Load Layout action properties, complete these steps:
1
In the Layout Name box, click the arrow and select one of the available layout names.
2
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
3
Click OK to close the action properties box.
77
78
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action
When you define a “Load Page action” for an object, you are creating a link between that
object and the page. That object is now a parent object for that page, and any other pages
that are linked to it. Any alarm that occurs on any object on a linked page will “bubble up”
to its parent object, causing the parent object to flash an alarm.
This action loads a Graphical Magellan CCS Navigator page. For more information on
creating pages for loading, see Graphical Navigation Page Creation on page 7.
To set Load Page action properties, complete these steps:
1
Do one of the following to have the path to the Magellan CCS Navigator page appear in
the Graphical Page box:

Type the path to the Magellan CCS Navigator page in the Graphical Page box.
OR

Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Open box to find the Magellan CCS
Navigator page.
The default location for all Magellan CCS Navigator pages is the Pages folder,
which displays by default.
When you find the Magellan CCS Navigator page, select it, and then click Open.
2
Select Open Page in a New Window if you want the new page to open in a separate
dialog box.
3
Type the coordinates in the Left and Top fields where you want the dialog box to be
opened. You can start/stop capturing the mouse position by pressing CTRL+ALT+S. You can
also define the width and height of the Control dialog box by typing the values on the
appropriate fields.
4
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
5
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame Page’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
The Load Frame Page action loads a Graphical Magellan CCS Navigator frame page. This
action can only be performed on a Navigator Frame object. For information on adding a
Navigator Frame to your page, see Adding a Navigator Frame on page 28 and Creating
a Frame View Page on page 8.
To set Load Frame Page action properties, complete these steps:
1
Do one of the following to have the path to a Magellan CCS Navigator page appear in the
Custom Value box:

Type the path to the Magellan CCS Navigator page in the Custom Value box.
OR

Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Open box to find the Magellan CCS
Navigator page.
The default location for all Magellan CCS Navigator pages in the Pages folder,
which displays by default.
When you find the Magellan CCS Navigator page, select it, and then click Open.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Figure 3-8 Action Property Dialog - Load Frame Page
2
To open a customized page in the Magellan CCS Navigator Frame, select
Event/Custom Properties, and then use the down arrow to select from the list.
3
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
4
Select Attempt to initialize the loaded page's custom properties to match the
actual page if you want to set all the matching custom properties, by name, on the loaded
page, to the actual (parent) page’s value. For example, if both pages have a custom property
called 'Source', when the page in the frame gets loaded, its Source custom property will be
set to the value of the Source property of the actual (parent) page.
5
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’ Action
Depending on your system’s configuration, you may not have access to various different
devices for control.
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an action.
The Load Preset action applies a set of pre-defined control settings for one or more devices.
If you have not created any presets, you may not be able to complete this action. For
information on creating presets, refer to Using Presets on page 270 of CCS Navigator:
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
If you choose a Load Preset action, click the Action Products button. The Action
Property - Load Preset dialog box appears.
Figure 3-9 Action Property Dialog Box (Load Preset Action Setting)
Complete these steps:
79
80
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
1
Click Select... to select a device.
The Device Selection dialog box opens.
Figure 3-10 Device Selection Dialog Box
2
Select a device.
Note the listed Device Location to ensure you are selecting the correct device.
3
Click OK.
The selected device ID now appears in the corresponding field within the Action Property
dialog box.
4
In the Preset Name box, click the arrow and select one of the available preset names.
5
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
6
Click OK to close the action properties box.
See Using Presets on page 270 and CCS Device Control on page 255.
Setting Properties for a ‘Product Info’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
A Product Info action can only be applied to Magellan CCS Navigator objects. This action
displays a product brochure or specification sheet when triggered. For more information,
see Showing Product Information for a CCS Device on page 119.
To set the Product Info action properties, complete these steps:
1
Select the correct device ID by clicking Select, if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator
object has not inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
You can avoid having to set the device ID and other configuration information if you create
a symbol from a fully configured device in the resource tree. The symbol will inherit
the configuration details of the device as well as its navigation properties.
Also, if you double-click the symbol, you will automatically show the symbol’s
Configuration dialog box in Build mode or its Control dialog box in Control mode.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
2
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
3
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Product User Manual’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
A Show Product User Manual action can only be applied to a Magellan CCS Navigator
object. This action opens a PDF of the user guide for the selected item when triggered. For
more information on showing a user manual, see Showing the User Manual for a CCS
Device on page 157.
To set Product User Manual action properties, complete these steps:
1
Select the correct device ID by clicking Select , if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator
object has not inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
You can avoid having to set the device ID and other configuration information if you create
a symbol from a fully configured device in the resource tree. The symbol will inherit
the configuration details of the device as well as its navigation properties.
Also, if you double-click the symbol, you will automatically show the symbol’s
Configuration dialog box in Build mode or its Control dialog box in Control mode.
2
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
3
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
The Set Button Properties action can only be set for a Magellan CCS Navigator button.
You can set different button properties to represent different actions. For example, you can
have a button’s state change when it is clicked on, or make it take on a highlighted state
when an alarm is triggered. For information on creating buttons, see Adding Buttons on
page 17.
To set button action properties, complete these steps:
1
Select the Color check box if you want to set a color for the button other than the default
gray, or clear the check box (if not already cleared) if you prefer the default gray.
If you select the Color box, click the arrow in the color palette box to its right and select a
color from the resulting color palette, and select a percentage for Transparency.
2
Click the arrow in the Disable box and select one of these three options:

If you do not want the button to change, select Don’t Change.

If you want the button to appear selected, select True.
81
82
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
This will have a visible effect on the button only if the button is a toggle button. If it
is not a toggle button—that is, if the Toggle check box on the button properties
page has been cleared—then the button will be selected but will immediately
become unselected.
When True is selected, the No grey text option becomes available. When No grey
text is selected, the button will appear available even when it is not.

3
4
If you do not want the button to appear selected, select False.
Click the arrow in the Highlighted box and select one of these three options:

If you do not want the button to change, select Don’t Change.

If you want the button to appear highlighted, select True.

If you do not want the button to appear highlighted, select False.
In the Caption box, select one of these two options:

For unchanging text on the button face, select Custom Value and type the text in
the text box.

For button face text that changes in response to events, select Event/Custom
Properties and choose the text-changing event using the down arrow.
5
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
6
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink Mode’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
This action is used to make a button blink or stop blinking, depending on its current state.
The Set Button Blink Mode action can only be set for Magellan CCS Navigator buttons.
For information on creating buttons, see Adding Buttons on page 17.
To complete the Button Blink Mode action properties box, complete these steps:
1
Select the Blink Mode from the list.
The options are On, Off, or Toggle.
2
Select Color or Bitmap.
If Color is selected, click the arrow in the color palette box to its right and select a color for
the blink from the resulting color palette. In the Transparency box, enter the level of
transparency for the button, while in blink mode. The higher the number, the more
transparent the button.
If Bitmap is selected, click Browse to select a graphic file. When the button is blinking in
Control mode, it will display the graphic in its “on” state.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
For a complete explanation of what custom properties are and how you can use them on a
Graphical Navigation page, see Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15.
To complete the Set Custom Property action properties box, complete these steps:
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
1
In the Property drop-down menu, select a custom property (CP) or global property (GP).
Instead of completing the following steps, you can instead click Existing Actions>> to
show a box listing previously defined conditions. Select from the list to reuse previously set
conditions or select a similar set of conditions and edit them. Then click OK.
2
Under Set property action behavior, choose an option from the drop-down menu.
Options include Replace, Append to, or Remove from existing property value.
If you choose Append or Remove, the Value Separator menu becomes available. Choose
an item from the list.
Select Mute custom property change event if you want to suppress any events that the
action triggers.
3
In the Value section, select Custom Value, Router Value, Event /Custom Properties, or
Database value depending on whether you want to set a custom value, a router value, or
an event property value for the custom or global property.

If you select Custom Value, type the custom value in the Value box.

If you select Router Value, click Select... in the Device ID box and select a router
from the list of configured routers.
Then click the arrow in the Router Value box and select from the list of sources
and destinations for the specified router. Sources have the prefix “[Src]” and
destinations have the prefix “[Dst].”
If the router does not appear in the Router Select dialog, then you must first
configure the router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.

If you select Event/Custom Properties, select the value from the list.
The values in the event property list are dependent upon the event that the action
is associated with. Not all events enable the Event Property option.

If you select Database value, the custom property is set to its previously saved
value from the database.
It you want to save the value of the custom property in the Magellan CCS Navigator
database, click Save the changed value to the database. When a value is saved in this
way, you will be able to retrieve it even after rebooting Magellan CCS Navigator.
Click OK to close the Set Custom Property action property box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame Custom Property’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
This action can only be performed on a Navigator Frame object. For information on adding
a Navigator Frame to your page, see Adding a Navigator Frame on page 28.
To complete the Set Frame Custom Property action properties box, complete these steps:
1
Type a name for the custom property in the Custom Property box, or click the arrow and
select a name for the custom property from the Custom Property list.
Instead of completing the following steps, you can instead click Existing Actions>> to
show a box listing previously defined conditions. Select from the list to reuse previously set
conditions or select a similar set of conditions and edit them. Then click OK.
2
Select Custom Value or Event/Custom Properties depending on whether you want to
set a custom value or event/custom property value for the frame custom property.
83
84
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
3

If you select Custom Value, type the custom value in the Value box.

If you select Event/Custom Properties, type the custom value in the box, or select
an event or custom property from the list.
Click OK to close the Set Frame Custom Property action property box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link Properties’ Action
This action can only be applied to a link. You can use it to change the appearance of a link
when the action is triggered. For more information on links, see Creating Links Between
Symbols on page 41.
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action. To complete
the Set Link Properties action properties box, complete these steps:
1
If you want the line to become transparent, place a check in the box beside Transparent. If
the line becomes transparent, its color, style and width become irrelevant, as they are
invisible.
Figure 3-11 Set Link Properties Dialog Box
2
To change the color of the line, place a check in the Color box.
To select a new color for the line, click the color square beside the Color check box. A
palette opens. When you click on the color you desire on the palette, that color is selected
and the palette closes.
3
To change the style and weight of the line, place a check in the Line box.
From the Style menu, click on the style (solid, dash, dot and so forth). The style options
available only affect the lines that have a width of 0 point (1 pixel).
From the Width menu, click on the weight of line you want to see. Use the scroll bar at the
right of the menu to scroll up and down to review the entire list.
When you are satisfied with your choices, click OK to return to the Object Properties Rules screen.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol Properties’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
The Set Symbol Properties action can only be set for a Magellan CCS Navigator symbol.
When triggered, this action changes the highlighted state of a symbol. For information on
creating Navigator symbols, see Adding a Resource Icon Symbol on page 36.
To set symbol action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow in the Highlighted box and select one of these three options:

If you do not want the symbol’s label to change, select Don’t Change.

If you want the symbol’s label to appear highlighted, select True.

If you do not want the symbol’s label to appear highlighted, select False.
2
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
3
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text Properties’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
A Set Text Properties action can only be set for text objects. When triggered, the Set Text
Properties action can change the color of text, or change the text’s content (what it says).
For information on adding text to a Navigator page, see Adding a Text Object on
page 24.
To complete the Set Text Properties action properties box, complete these steps:
1
Select Color, if the color of the text is to change, and then select a color from the list.
2
Select Custom Value to preset the text that appears.
3
Select Event/Custom Properties to associate the text with a set event, custom property
(CP), or global property (GP). From the Event/Custom Properties list, select the event that
will define the changed text. This creates dynamic text that changes in response to events or
changes to custom properties.
4
Click OK to close the Set Text Properties action property box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX Properties’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
The Set ActiveX Properties action can only be set for ActiveX controls. For information on
creating an ActiveX control, please refer to Adding Controls on page 42.
In the Action Property dialog box, the Name column indicates the name of the ActiveX
property, and the Type column indicates the OLE type of the property.
To set Set ActiveX Properties action properties, complete these steps:
85
86
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Figure 3-12 The Action Property Box
1
Select the check boxes for the values that you want to change.
By selecting a check box, you enable the Value for that property. Only properties that have
been checked will be changed.
You can specify the value to assign to the property in the Value list. You can type in a value,
or extract it from either an event property (indicated by the prefix ‘[EP]’), a global property
(indicated by the prefix ‘[GP]’), or a custom property (indicated by the prefix ‘[CP]’).
When an ActiveX control has more than eight properties, a scroll-bar appears on the right
side of the dialog box so you can select the remaining properties.
2
Click OK to close the Action Properties box.
Setting Properties for a “Set Page Refresh Option” Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
The Set Page Refresh Option action can only be assigned to a page.
From the Refresh Control menu, choose On or Off.
This option determines whether or not the page will be updated automatically.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Screen Mode’ Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Figure 3-13 Set Screen Mode Action Properties Dialog Box
This action activates or deactivates full-screen mode.
From the Full Screen Mode menu, choose On or Off.
Under Tool Options, select whether you want the following regions of the screen to change
their state when this action is triggered.

Graphical Navigation toolbar (at the top of the screen)

Graphical Navigation status bar (at the bottom of the screen)

Navigation pane (defaults to the upper left of the screen)

Diagnostics (defaults to the lower portion of the screen)
For each of these options, you can choose the following options:

Don’t Change - leaves the particular screen component in its current state on top or
below the Graphical Navigation page

Show - activates the screen element if it is hidden, or leaves it on the screen if it is
already there

Hide - deactivates the screen element if it was on the screen, or leaves it off if it was
not there previously
Setting Properties for the ActiveX Method’s Action
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
An Invoke ActiveX Method action can only be sent from an ActiveX control. For
information on creating an ActiveX control, please refer to Adding Controls on page 42.
If the ActiveX method that you select accepts parameters, click Action Properties to open
the Action Property dialog and configure that action.
87
88
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Figure 3-14 Action Property Dialog Box
This dialog is very similar to the SetActiveXProperty dialog, except that the check boxes
are not available as all the items are automatically enabled.
See Event, Property and Method Compatibility, and OLE Types on page 49 for more
information.
Working with Macros
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can
create or edit actions.
A macro is a group of actions that can be executed at a specified event. You can use a
macro over and over on different events throughout Magellan CCS Navigator.
If a series of actions are set up to initiate at one event, that series of actions will be sent in
the order they appear in the macro list. Depending on timing of the various other
equipment, all actions may or may not appear to happen simultaneously.
Creating a Macro
Macros can only be created in Build mode.
1
From the main menu, choose Tools > Rules and Macros...
A dialog box appears.
2
Click the Macros tab.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Copy and
Paste buttons
are available
when a row is
selected, and
allow you to
duplicate a row
within the
macro.
Figure 3-15 Rules and Macros Dialog Box, Macros Tab
Macros and descriptions are listed.
3
Click New. Another dialog box appears.
Figure 3-16 New Macro Dialog Box
4
Type a name and description of the macro in the fields provided at the top of this dialog
box.
5
Click New Action.
A new field appears in the Action and Description lists below. Make a selection from a
drop-down menu in the Action field. If there are other rules in the list, a new rule is always
added at the bottom of the list. When the list grows longer than fits inside the visible frame,
a scroll bar appears so you can move up and down the list.
6
Click Action Properties. The dialog box it opens offers options specific to that action.
Once you have set the action properties and clicked OK to close the Action Properties
dialog box, the Description field is automatically filled in with a definition of the action to be
performed.
7
You can now create more actions following steps 5 and 6.
89
90
Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
8
When you are done creating rules, click OK to save it. Otherwise, click Cancel to delete the
macro.
To use a macro, see Setting Properties for an ‘Execute Macro’ Action on page 76.
Modifying a
Macro
1
Once a macro has an action in it, that macro can be deleted.
From the main menu, choose Tools > Rules and Macros...
A dialog box appears.
2
Click the Macros tab.
3
Select a macro by clicking on it in the Macro/Description field.
4
Click Modify or double click on the macro in the Macros list, and then make your
modifications.
5
Click OK to save the changes to your macro, or Cancel to delete them.
Deleting an Action from a Macro
To delete an action from the macro list:
1
Click the action you would like to delete. If you click in the Description field for the action,
the field becomes outlined. If you click the Action field, a down arrow at the right of the
field appears.
2
Click Delete Action. When a rule is deleted, the next rule below it becomes selected.
Moving an Action in a Macro
To move an action in its order in the macro list:
1
Select the action.
2
Click Move Up or Move Down to switch the rule’s position with the rule above or below
it.
Deleting a Macro
Macros that are in use can not be deleted until the rules that use them are deleted.
Once a macro has an action in it, that macro can be deleted.
1
From the main menu, choose Tools > Rules and Macros...
A dialog box appears.
2
Click the Macros tab.
3
Select a macro by clicking on it in the Macro/Description field.
4
Click Remove. A message asking if you are sure appears. If you click Yes, the macro is
deleted forever and irretrievably from your system. If you click No, the macro will stay.
91
4
Router Rule Creation
Router Rule Creation Overview
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create rules for Navigator
objects and pages. Only an Administrator user can create or edit rules.
Rules are not specific to routers; for a general overview of the standard rules that can be
applied to any Navigator system, please see Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
and Objects on page 61.
A rule consists of two separate parts: an event and an action. In a defined rule, an event
triggers an action. Some events have conditions, and all rules have preferences that need to
be defined. Rules are not necessarily router-specific, but an event or an action can be
router-specific, or both can be. This section describes the event and action settings that
apply specifically to routers.
Setting Router-Specific Events
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create
or edit rules.
When you are creating a rule, you must set an event before you can set an action. You can,
of course, set all sorts of actions on a router-related page. See Rules for Magellan CCS
Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for more information.
To create a rule, right click on an object and select Properties > Rules.
92
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
The following events that can only be set for routers.
Table 4-1 Router-Related Conditional Events
Event
Description
Reference
On Crosspoint
Status
When the crosspoint status meets
conditions defined in the Event
Conditions box
Using ‘On Crosspoint
Status’ Events on page 92
On Lock/Protect
Status
When you want to determine
whether a destination is locked,
protected or released (not locked
or protected)
Using ‘On Lock/Protect
Status’ Events on page 94
On Salvo Status
When a salvo’s status is changed
Using ‘On Salvo Status’
Events on page 95
On Restrict Status
Event
When a crosspoint’s status is
restricted/unrestricted
Using ‘On Restrict Status’
Events on page 96
On Signal Presence
Status
When a specific input or output
signal presence status changes
Using ‘On Signal Presence
Status’ Events on page 97
One default event (as outlined in Setting an Event on page 66) that can be
router-specific. That Event is described in Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom
Property’ Action on page 82. Its Destination (prefixed with Dst), Source (prefixed with
Src), or Salvo Value (prefixed with [Sal]) can be defined.
Using ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events
On Crosspoint Status events are automatically set for router sources when you create a
router page using the Multi Display or Source Preview wizards.
A crosspoint is the physical connection between a router input and a router output. You can
execute a crosspoint (make it active) in two ways: Take Crosspoint or Take Selected.
When you take crosspoint, you must define which source input will connect to which
destination output.
However, when you take selected, you must perform two actions before executing the take
crosspoint: you must first execute a Select Source action and then execute a Select
Destination action. If you maintain this preset state within the router, the router waits for
the user to click an object that triggers a Take Selected action.
A router output may only have one crosspoint active at any given time.
When a crosspoint is active, the input and output pair associated with the crosspoint are
connected, and the signal present at the designated input is sent to the designated output.
If you set an action to occur “On Crosspoint Status,” the action will occur when the
crosspoint status meets the conditions defined in the Event Condition box.
See the following topics for more information:

Graphical Navigation Page Creation on page 7

CCS Device Control on page 255 of CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation
Application
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual

Volume 6: Routing Configuration

Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition on page 68
Setting Conditions for ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events
To set an On Crosspoint Status event, you must set the crosspoint conditions that need to
be met. If the source, destination, etc. are all set as defined on the On Crosspoint Status
dialog box, then an event is triggered. To set the crosspoint conditions, complete these
steps:
1
Click Condition on the Rules toolbar. This dialog box appears:
Figure 4-1 On Crosspoint Status Condition Dialog Box
2
Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a configured router from the list.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
3
Click the arrow in the left Destination box, and select one of these three conditions, if
there are custom conditions that apply:
Table 4-2 Destination Condition Options
4
Option
Function
Equals
Destination is the same as that designated
Not Equals
Destination is not the same as that designated
Any Value
Ignore the value
Click the arrow in the right Destination box, and select the name of the destination for
which that custom condition applies.
93
94
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
The Destination list may have additional entries for custom properties. These entries are
prefixed by “[CP].” When Navigator receives a crosspoint status event, it tests to see if the
status of the destination is equal to the current value of any custom property called
“Destination.” This gives you the flexibility to create the sample router control page like that
described in Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
5
Click the arrow in the left Source box, and select one of these three conditions, if there are
custom conditions that apply:
Table 4-3 Source Condition Options
6
Option
Function
Equals
Source is the same as that designated
Not Equals
Source is not the same as that designated
Any Value
Ignore the value
Click the arrow in the right Source box, and select the name of the source for which that
custom condition applies.
Options include inputs and Breakaway. The Source list may have additional entries for
custom properties. These entries are prefixed by “[CP].”
When Navigator receives a crosspoint status event, it tests to see whether the status source
is equal to the current value of any custom property called “Source.” This gives you the
flexibility to create the sample router control page like that described in Volume 6: Routing
Configuration.
7
If this will be a breakaway take, check the Breakaway check box. Set the options—Equals,
Not Equals, or Any Value—from the first drop-down list beside each level. Then, from the
second drop-down list beside each level, select the input or Disconnect.
If this will not be a breakaway take, then clear the Breakaway check box.
8
Click OK when you have finished setting the crosspoint conditions.
Using ‘On Lock/Protect Status’ Events
Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing the destination until it is unlocked.
The router protect feature also prevents inadvertent changes to the destination, but it
differs from a lock in one respect: with the protect feature enabled, the person who
enabled the protect feature can change the destination at will, but other users cannot
change the destination until the protect is removed.
The On Lock/Protect Status event is triggered when the lock or protect status of the
chosen destination is altered.
If you set a Lock/Protect Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the
conditions, complete these steps:
1
Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting Lock Protect
Status box.
2
Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a router from the list of configured routers.
If the router does not appear in the Device ID list, then you must first configure the router.
See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
3
Click the arrow in the left Destination box, and select one of these options:
Table 4-4 Destination Condition Options
Option
Function
Status Released
The specified destination is neither locked nor protected.
Locked?
The specified destination is unprotected.
Protected?
The specified destination is protected.
4
Click the arrow in the right Destination box, and select a destination from the list of
available destinations for that router.
5
Click OK when you have finished setting event conditions.
See Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition on page 68.
Using ‘On
Salvo Status’
Events
1
The salvo status feature triggers an action when a salvo’s status (lock, protect, active or
inactive) changes.
If you set an On Salvo Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the
conditions, complete these steps:
Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting On Salvo Status
box.
Figure 4-2 Condition Dialog - On Salvo Status
2
Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a router from the list of configured routers.
If the router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the router.
See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
3
From the Salvo menu, choose your desired salvo.
4
Click the Status box, and select the option that will trigger an action:
95
96
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
Table 4-5 Destination Condition Options
Option
Function
Active
The selected salvo has been taken
Inactive
The selected salvo does not match the preset
Protected
One or more of the selected salvo’s destinations are protected
Locked
One or more of the selected salvo’s destinations are locked
Status released
One or more of the selected salvo’s destinations are unlocked or
unprotected
5
Click the arrow in the right Destination box, and select a destination from the list of
available destinations for that router.
6
Click OK when you have finished setting event conditions.
See Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition on page 68.
Using ‘On Restrict Status’ Events
The On Restrict Status feature triggers an action when a crosspoint status becomes
restricted or unrestricted.
If you plan to set a Restrict Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the
conditions, complete these steps:
1
Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting On Restrict
Status box.
Figure 4-3 Condition Dialog for On Restrict Status Event
2
Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a device from the list of configured routers.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
If the router does not appear in the Device ID list, then you must first configure the router.
See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
3
Click the arrow in the Source box, and select a source from the list of available sources for
that router.
4
Click the arrow in the Destination box, and select a destination from the list of available
destinations for that router.
5
Click the arrow in the Restrict Level box, and select one specific level, or select Any Level,
and an action can be triggered on any level restriction in the crosspoint.
6
Click the arrow in the left Restricted State box, and select one of these options:
Table 4-6 Destination Condition Options
7
Option
Function
Restricted
The specified crosspoint cannot be taken.
Unrestricted
The specified crosspoint is unprotected.
Click OK when you have finished setting event conditions.
See Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition on page 68.
Using ‘On Signal Presence Status’ Events
The ‘On Signal Presence status’ event triggers an action when the signal presence status
(normally if a router source loses or regains signal) changes.
If you plan to set a Signal Presence Status event, you must also set the conditions for it.
To set the conditions, complete these steps:
1
Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting On Signal
Presence Status box.
Figure 4-4 Condition Dialog: On Signal Presence Status Event
97
98
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
2
Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a device from the list of configured routers.
If the router does not appear in the Device ID list, then you must first configure the router.
See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
3
From the Signal Status menu, choose either Present, Not Present, or Either.
4
In the Source or Destination Selection area, click the radio button for either Source
Signal or Destination Signal. From the menu beside the option you have chosen, select
the value (custom property, input, or output).
5
In the Signal Level section of the screen, select any level from the drop-down menu.
6
Click OK when you have finished setting event conditions.
See Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition on page 68.
Setting Router-Specific Actions
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can
create or edit rules.
An action must be set after you have set an event in the Rules dialog box. For more
information on setting up rules, please see Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
and Objects on page 61.
Table 4-7 Router-Specific Actions
Action
Function
Reference Topic
Clear Selected Salvo
Clears the current salvo
selection
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear
Selected Salvo’ Action on
page 112
Clear Selected
Clears the current router
selection
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear
Selected’ Action on page 101
Execute Salvo
Sets up and immediately
takes a router salvo
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute
Salvo’ Action on page 112
Execute Selected Salvo
Performs a router salvo
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute
Selected Salvo’ Action on
page 111
Lock Selected
Destination
Locks the selected router
destination
Setting Properties for a ‘Lock
Selected Destination’ Action on
page 105
Protect Selected
Destination
Protects the selected router
destination
Setting Properties for a ‘Protect
Selected Destination’ Action on
page 104
Query Destination
Status
Queries the status of the
router destination
Setting Properties for a ‘Query
Destination Status’ Action on
page 101
Query Signal Presence
Status
Queries the signal presence
status
Setting Properties for a ‘Query
Signal Presence Status’
Action on page 101
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Table 4-7 Router-Specific Actions (Continued)
Action
Function
Reference Topic
Restrict Crosspoint
Sets up and prevents a
particular source and
destination from being
taken
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict
Crosspoint’ Action on page 108
Restrict Selected
Crosspoint
Prevents a selected source
and destination from being
taken
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict
Selected Crosspoint’ Action on
page 109
Select Destination
Presets the desired
destination in preparation
for a Take command
Setting Properties for a ‘Select
Destination’ Action on page 99
Select Salvo
Presets the desired salvo in
preparation for Execute
Selected Salvo command
Setting Properties for a ‘Select
Salvo’ Action on page 110
Select Source
Presets the desired source
in preparation for a Take
command
Setting Properties for a ‘Select
Source’ Action on page 100
Set Crosspoint Match
Type
Sets the matching
Setting Properties for a `Set
algorithm type used by the Crosspoint Match Type'
On Crosspoint Status event Action on page 103
Swap Destinations
Swaps the crosspoints of
two specified destinations
Setting Properties For a “Swap
Destinations” Action on
page 106
Take Crosspoint
Sets up and immediately
takes a router crosspoint
Setting Properties for a ‘Take
Crosspoint’ Action on page 102
Take Selected
Takes the selected router
source and destination
Setting Properties for a ‘Take
Selected’ Action on page 103
Some actions are meant to follow other actions. For example, you must select one or more
router destinations before you can set an action to Lock Selected, Protect Selected, or
Take Selected.
Do not list rules for both an action to query router status (a select or query action) and an
action to invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action) sequentially on the
Rules tab if they have the same event trigger. Navigator needs to process a status action
fully before it can implement a command action. If rules with the same event trigger list
sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually processes them simultaneously. Instead,
set one of the actions to occur after a different event.
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Destination’ Action
Multiple destinations can be simultaneously selected, and selecting a destination does not
automatically clear a previously selected destination.
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
Use the Select Destination action to choose a router destination (output). To set the Select
Destination action properties, complete these steps:
99
100
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
In the Destination box, click the arrow and select a destination.
3
In the State Select box, click the arrow and select one of the three options:
Table 4-8 State Select Options
Option
Function
On
Always selects the destination
Off
Always unselects the destination
Toggle
Always toggles the destination
If the destination is selected, it becomes unselected; or, conversely, if the
destination is unselected, it becomes selected.
4
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
5
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Source’ Action
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
Use the Select Source action to select the source (input) for a router. To set Select Source
action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
In the Source box, click the arrow and select a source.
Options include inputs and Disconnect.
3
In the State Select box, click the arrow and select one of the three options:
Table 4-9 State Select Options
4
Option
Function
On
Always selects the source
Off
Always unselects the source
Toggle
Always toggles the source
If the source is selected, it becomes unselected; or, conversely, if the source
is unselected, it becomes selected.
If this will be a breakaway take, check the Breakaway check box. For each level, select the
source for that level. You can disconnect the source (Disconnect), leave the source alone
(--No Change--), or select a level name, custom property or global property to use for that
level.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
If this will not be a breakaway take, then clear the Breakaway check box.
5
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
6
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected’ Action
Do not list rules for both an action to query router status (a select or query action) and an
action to invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action) sequentially on the
Rules tab if they have the same event trigger. Navigator needs to process a status action
fully before it can implement a command action. If rules with the same event trigger list
sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually processes them simultaneously. Instead,
set one of the actions to occur after a different event.
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
To set Clear Selected action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Destination Status’ Action
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
This status query action could become the trigger for an “On Crosspoint Status” event.
Then you may want to set button properties for additional actions.
To set Query Destination Status action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
In the Destination box, click the arrow and select the destination to query.
3
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Signal Presence Status’ Action
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
This action queries for signal presence status, using either a logical source or a logical
destination. This status query action could become the trigger for an “On Signal Presence
Status” event.
101
102
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
To set Query Signal Presence Status action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the Device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
In the Source or Destination Selection area, click the radio button for either Source
Signal or Destination Signal. From the menu beside the option you have chosen, select
the logical source or destination.
3
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Crosspoint’ Action
Do not list rules for both an action to query router status (a select or query action) and an
action to invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action) sequentially on the
Rules tab if they have the same event trigger. Navigator needs to process a status action
fully before it can implement a command action. If rules with the same event trigger list
sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually processes them simultaneously. Instead,
set one of the actions to occur after a different event.
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
A Take Crosspoint action requires that the source and destination be defined before you
trigger the action. The source and destination that are taken are independent of any prior
actions that involved setting source or destination.
An action to take a crosspoint is independent of this series of three actions:
1
Select source.
2
Select destination.
3
Take selected (source and destination).
For example, when you can perform this series of actions, Destination 1 and Source 1 will
remain the selected items:
1
Select Destination 1.
2
Select Source 1.
3
Take crosspoint of Destination 2 and Source 2.
To set Take Crosspoint action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
In the Destination box, click the arrow and select a destination.
3
In the Source box, click the arrow and select a source.
The State Select box is unavailable.
4
If this will be a breakaway take, check the Breakaway check box. For each level, select the
source for that level. You can disconnect the source (Disconnect), leave the source alone
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
(--No Change--), or select a level name, custom property or global property to use for that
level.
If this will not be a breakaway take, then clear the Breakaway check box.
5
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
6
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Selected’ Action
Do not list rules for both an action to query router status (a select or query action) and an
action to invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action) sequentially on the
Rules tab if they have the same event trigger. Navigator needs to process a status action
fully before it can implement a command action. If rules with the same event trigger list
sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually processes them simultaneously. Instead,
set one of the actions to occur after a different event.
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
A Take Selected action differs from a Take Crosspoint action in that you are required to
perform a Set Source action before you can Take Selected.
When you take selected, you must perform two actions before executing the take: First you
must execute a Set Source action and then you must execute a Set Destination action. If you
maintain this preset state within the router, the router waits for you to click an object that
triggers a Take Selection action.
An action to take selected requires this series of three actions:
1
Select source.
2
Select destination.
3
Take selected (source and destination).
To set Take Selected action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
3
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a `Set Crosspoint Match Type' Action
By default, the 'On Crosspoint Status' event uses the 'Full Match' type when extracting the
logical source information from the event.
103
104
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
The logical source information from the 'On Crosspoint Status' event is assembled based on
the input values provided by the event. As you might have inputs on the crosspoint event
that do not correspond to your logical source configuration, the event matching algorithm
is not able to determine which logical source corresponds to the input values in the 'On
Crosspoint Status' event, assigning blank values to both Source ID and Source Name event
parameters. This operation changes the matching algorithm that is used by the On
Crosspoint Status event when reporting logical source information.
Figure 4-5 Action Property Dialog - Set Crosspoint Match Type
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
To set Set Crosspoint Match Type action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click Select... by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Configuring Routers.
2
In the Match Type box, click the arrow and select one of the four match type options:
Table 4-10 Match Type Options for Set Crosspoint Match Type Action
3
Match Type
Criteria
Full Match
Crosspoint status must match all levels configured
Highest Level
Crosspoint status must match the highest level configured
Lowest Level
Crosspoint status must match the lowest level configured
[Level Name]
Crosspoint status must match on the level specified
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Protect Selected Destination’ Action
You must have selected a destination before you can protect it. See Setting Properties for
a ‘Select Destination’ Action on page 99.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Do not list rules for both an action to query router status (a select or query action) and an
action to invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action) sequentially on the
Rules tab if they have the same event trigger.
Navigator needs to process a status action fully before it can implement a command action.
If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually
processes them simultaneously. Instead, set one of the actions to occur after a different
event.
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
With the protect feature enabled, the person who enabled the protect feature can change
the destination at will, but other users cannot change the destination until the protect is
removed.
To set Protect Destination action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
Click the arrow in the Protected Selected Destination box and select one of the
following three options:
Table 4-11 Protect Selected Destination Options
3
Option
Function
Protect
Protects the selected destination
Unlock
Unlocks the selected destination.
Toggle
Toggles from the state from protected to unprotected or from unprotected
to protected.
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Lock Selected Destination’ Action
You must have selected a destination before you can lock it. See Setting Properties for a
‘Select Destination’ Action on page 99.
Do not list rules for both an action to query router status (a select or query action) and an
action to invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action) sequentially on the
Rules tab if they have the same event trigger.
Navigator needs to process a status action fully before it can implement a command action.
If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually
processes them simultaneously. Instead, set one of the actions to occur after a different
event.
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing the destination until it is unlocked.
105
106
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
A lock action toggles the current lock state. This means that the action unlocks the lock if
the destination is currently locked, but locks the destination if the destination is currently
unlocked.
A locked destination can only be unlocked by the Navigator user who applied the lock.
To set Lock Destination action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
Click the arrow in the Lock Selected Destination box and select one of the following
three options:
Table 4-12 Lock Selected Destination Options
3
Option
Function
Lock
Locks the selected destination
Unlock
Unlocks the selected destination.
Toggle
Toggles from the state from locked to unlocked or from unlocked to
locked.
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties For a “Swap Destinations” Action
This action swaps the crosspoints of two specified destinations.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Figure 4-6 Action Property Dialog - Swap Destinations
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
To set Swap Destinations action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
From the Destination 1 drop-down menu, choose a destination.
3
From the Destination 2 drop-down menu, choose a different destination.
4
Use the Available Levels and Selected Levels fields to determine which levels will be
swapped. At least one level must be selected.
To add a level from the Available Levels to the Selected Levels, select a level in the
left-hand field and click the > button to move it to the Selected Level list. You can select
multiple levels in the available section by holding down the shift key, clicking on the first
desired level and clicking on the last desired level. This selects all levels in the range between
the first chosen and last chosen level, inclusive. You can select individual levels by holding
down the CTRL key and clicking on levels one at a time. If you click the >> button, all levels
in the available level list are moved to the Selected level list.
Click < to return the level to the Available Levels list and remove it from the Preferred
Levels list, or click << to remove all levels from the Preferred Levels list and place them all
back in the Available Levels list
5
Click OK to close the action properties box.
107
108
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Crosspoint’ Action
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
A restrict action is like a lock, but instead of being tied to a whole destination, a restrict ties
itself to a specific crosspoint. You could, for example, restrict Dest 1 to Src 1, so no one
would be able to take to that crosspoint, making a take to Dest 1 to Scr 1 impossible.
This action creates a specific restriction action.
Figure 4-7 Action Property Dialog - Restrict Crosspoint
To set Restrict Crosspoint action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
Click the arrow in the Source box and select one of the source inputs.
3
Click the arrow in the Destination box and select one of the destinations.
4
Click the arrow in the Restricted State box and select one of the following three options:
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Table 4-13 Restrict Crosspoint Options
5
Option
Function
Restrict
Restricts the selected crosspoint
Unrestrict
Unrestricts the selected crosspoint
Toggle
Toggles from the state from restricted to unrestricted or from unrestricted
to restricted
Use the Available Levels and Selected Levels fields to determine which levels will be
restricted. At least one level must be selected.
To add a level from the Available Levels to the Selected Levels, select a level in the
left-hand field and click the > button to move it to the Selected Level list. You can select
multiple levels in the available section by holding down the shift key, clicking on the first
desired level and clicking on the last desired level. This selects all levels in the range between
the first chosen and last chosen level, inclusive. You can select individual levels by holding
down the CTRL key and clicking on levels one at a time. If you click the >> button, all levels
in the available level list are moved to the Selected Level list.
Click < to return the level to the Available Levels list and remove it from the Preferred
Levels list, or click << to remove all levels from the Preferred Levels list and place them all
back in the Available Levels list
6
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Selected Crosspoint’ Action
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
A restrict action is like a lock, but instead of being tied to a whole destination, a restrict ties
itself to a specific crosspoint. You could, for example, restrict Dest 1 to Src 1, so no one
would be able to take to that crosspoint, making a take to Dest 1 to Scr 1 impossible.
This action works in co-ordination with a Select Source and Select Destination action. When
you set a Restrict Selected Crosspoint, the source and destination that you set with the
previous actions cannot be connected (you cannot do a take between them).
Figure 4-8 Action Property Dialog - Restrict Selected Crosspoints
To set Restrict Crosspoint action properties, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
109
110
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
Click the arrow in the Restricted State box and select one of the following three options:
Table 4-14 Restrict Selected Crosspoint Options
3
Option
Function
Restrict
Restricts the selected crosspoint
Unrestrict
Unrestricts the selected crosspoint
Toggle
Toggles from the state from restricted to unrestricted or from unrestricted
to restricted
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Salvo’ Action
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
This action presents a salvo for an action to be taken on that selected salvo. Salvos are
pre-configured before you begin working on Navigator pages. If the router is not properly
configured (this includes the router not having a salvo defined for it), a yellow notice will be
displayed.
Figure 4-9 Action Property Dialog - Select Salvo
To set Select Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
From the Salvo drop-down menu, choose your desired salvo.
3
From the State Select drop-down menu, choose the Salvo’s state. Options are On and Off.
4
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Selected Salvo’ Action
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
This Action requires you to have set a Select Salvo action. See Setting Properties for a
‘Select Salvo’ Action on page 110 for more information.
If you have set a Select Salvo action, you can set an Execute Selected Salvo action to
perform the operation on that salvo. You can either take that salvo, disconnect it, lock it, or
protect it.
This operation works on all selected salvos, if you have selected more than one. Salvos are
pre-configured before you begin working on Navigator pages. If the router is not properly
configured (this includes the router not having a salvo defined for it), a yellow notice will be
displayed.
Figure 4-10 Action Property Dialog - Execute Selected Salvo
To set Execute Selected Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
For lock and protect salvo actions, you can set the option to lock always, unlock always, or
toggle the current state.
2
From the Salvo Action drop-down menu, choose your action.
Table 4-15
3
Salvo Action
Effect
Take Salvo
Attempt to establish all crosspoints
Disconnect Salvo
Set all the defined destinations to disconnect
Lock Salvo
Lock all the defined destinations
Protect Salvo
Protect all defined destinations
Click OK to close the action properties box.
111
112
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Salvo’ Action
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
Similarly to the Take Crosspoint and Take Selected crosspoint actions, the Execute Salvo
executes the salvo right away. You can either take that salvo, disconnect it, lock it, or
protect it. Salvos are pre-configured before you begin working on Navigator pages. If the
router is not properly configured (this includes the router not having a salvo defined for it),
a yellow notice will be displayed.
Figure 4-11 Action Property Dialog - Execute Salvo
To set Execute Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
From the Salvo drop-down menu, choose your desired salvo.
3
From the State Select drop-down menu, choose the Salvo’s state. Options are On and Off.
4
From the Salvo Action drop-down menu, choose your action.
Table 4-16 Salvo Action Options
5
Salvo Action
Effect
Take Salvo
Attempt to establish all crosspoints
Disconnect Salvo
Set all the defined destinations to disconnect
Lock Salvo
Lock all the defined destinations
Protect Salvo
Protect all defined destinations
Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected Salvo’ Action
This operation clears all the previously selected salvos that have been selected using the
Select Salvo action. Salvos are pre-configured before you begin working on Navigator
pages. If the router is not properly configured (this includes the router not having a salvo
defined for it), a yellow notice will be displayed.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Figure 4-12 Action Property Dialog - Clear Selected Salvo
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
To set Clear Selected Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
1
Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, you must first configure the router.
See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2
Click OK to close the action properties box.
113
114
Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
115
5
SNMP Plug-in
SNMP Plug-in Overview
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create rules for Magellan
CCS Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator user can create rules. You must be
in Build mode.
SNMP is a communication protocol like TCP/IP, FTP and HTTP. The SNMP plug-in is an
optional component of Magellan CCS Navigator.
Using the SNMP plug-in, you can monitor SNMP traps and variable changes, just like you can
monitor alarms via other forms of control in CCS Magellan CCS Navigator. You can use
these events as triggers for other actions. And, you can trigger events by changing SNMP
variables.
There are two SNMP events that are included in the SNMP Plug-in. For information, see the
following topics:

Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Update’ Events on page 115

Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events on page 116
An SNMP action does not have to follow an SNMP event. The SNMP actions that are
included in the SNMP plug-in are described in the following sections:

Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable Value’ Action on page 118

Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable Value’ Action on page 119
For information on general rule creation, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS
Navigator Object or Page on page 62.
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Update’ Events
If you set an action to occur On SNMP Variable Value Update, the action will occur when
the SNMP variable value reaches the conditions defined in the Condition box, or more
simply put, when the variable value changes.
To set an On SNMP Variable Value Update event, you must set the SNMP variable value
conditions by completing the following steps:
116
Chapter 5
SNMP Plug-in
1
Follow the instructions in Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping with step 5, after choosing On SNMP Variable Value Update
as your event.
2
Click Condition on the Rules toolbar. The Condition dialog box appears.
3
Click Select... and choose the SNMP device you want to monitor.
All OID strings should be prefaced with a “.”.
4
5
Beside Variable Object ID, choose Value or Property from the drop-down menu on the
left, and to complete the field on the right, do one of the following:

If the Variable Object ID is a Value, enter the object ID of the SNMP variable that
you want to compare against.

If the Variable Object ID is a Property, choose the property from the drop-down
menu.
Click the arrow in the first Variable Value box, and select one of the three conditions:
.
Table 5-1 Variable Value Condition Options
6
Option
Function
Equals
The specified variable value is the same as that designated
Not Equals
The specified variable value is not the same as that designated
Any Value
Ignore the variable value
Click the arrow in the second Variable Value box, and choose Value or Property.

If you choose Value, enter the value of the SNMP variable that you want to
compare against.
Although Magellan CCS Navigator correctly displays SNMP values on rendered pages using
enumeration names defined in the MIB, the “value” specified in this third box must be the
enumeration index (interger value) associated with the item.

If you choose Property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
7
In the third Variable Value box, enter the defined custom properties. If it is a value, you
can type the SNMP variable that you want to set. If it is a Property, choose from a
pre-defined selection in the drop-down list.
8
(Optional) Place a check beside Variable Polling Enabled.
When selected, the value of the SNMP variable is polled according to the polling interval set
for the device in the Device Properties. If you do not select the check box, this event will
occur for any response from an SNMP Set Variable or SNMP Get Variable value action. By
default this check box is unselected. See Setting SNMP Navigation Properties on page 110
of CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
9
Click OK when you have finished setting event conditions.
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events
If you set an action to occur On SNMP Trap, the action will occur when the SNMP trap is
triggered. To configure an On SNMP Trap event, you must set the SNMP trap conditions by
completing the following steps:
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
1
Follow the instructions in Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping with step 5, after choosing On SNMP Trap as your event.
2
Click Condition on the Rules toolbar. The SNMP Trap Event Condition box opens.
Figure 5-1 On SNMP Trap Event Condition Dialog
3
In the Device ID field, select <Existing SNMP Server> to enable the Select button.
4
Click Select to select the device you want to monitor the SNMP traps.
You can also select either a Global Property or Custom Property that contains the device ID
of a device you want to monitor.
You can create a condition that monitors a certain SNMP device by its type, for instance.
Selecting Any Value will make the application to catch any trap generated by the device.
5
In the first combo box of the Trap Type field, click the arrow to select one of the three
conditions:
.
Table 5-2 Variable Value Condition Options
6
Option
Function
Equals
The specified trap type is the same as that designated
Not Equals
The specified trap type is not the same as that designated
Any Value
Ignore the trap type
Select the trap type using the second combo box of the Trap Type field.
Table 5-3 Trap Types
Trap Type
Definition
Cold Start
The agent is booting.
Warm Start
The agent is rebooting.
Link Down
An interface has gone down.
Link Up
An interface has come up.
117
118
Chapter 5
SNMP Plug-in
Table 5-3 Trap Types
7
Trap Type
Definition
Authentication
Failure
An invalid community (password) was received in a message.
EGP Neighbor Loss
An EGP peer has gone down.
Enterprise Specific
An enterprise specific trap has happened. Look in the enterprise
code for information on the trap.
Click the New button to create an entry in the Variable table.
All OID strings should be prefaced with a “.”.
8
To enter data in the new field in the Variable OID column, type the OID that you want to
compare against the list of variables that comes within the trap pdu (variable binding list).
9
In the Comparison column, define the type of comparison you want to perform. Options in
this column are Equals, Not Equals, and Any Value.
10 In the Value column, define the expected value (if you didn’t choose Any Value in the
Comparison column).
Although Magellan CCS Navigator correctly displays SNMP values on rendered pages using
enumeration names defined in the MIB, the “value” specified in this box must be the
enumeration index (interger value) associated with the item.
11 Repeat steps 6 - 9 to associate other variables with the event.
12 When you have finished adding variables, click OK to close the Condition dialog box.
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable Value’ Action
To set an SNMP Get Variable Value action, complete these steps:
1
Follow the instructions in Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping with step 7, after choosing SNMP Get Variable Value as your
action.
2
Click Action Properties.
The Action Properties Dialog—SNMP Get Variable Value box opens.
3
In the Device ID field, select <Existing SNMP Server> to enable the Select button.
4
Click Select to choose the target SNMP device.
You can also select either a Global Property or Custom Property that contains the device ID
of the target device.
All OID strings should be prefaced with a “.”.
Variable Value and Variable Type are always unavailable on this screen.
5
Beside Variable Object ID, choose Value or Property from the drop-down menu on the
left, and to complete the field on the right, do one of the following:

If the object is a value, enter the object ID of the SNMP variable that you want to
control.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual

6
If the object is a property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
Click OK when you have finished setting the action property.
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable Value’ Action
To set an SNMP Set Variable Value action, complete these steps:
1
Follow the instructions in Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping with step 7, after choosing SNMP Set Variable Value as your
action.
2
Click Action Properties.
The Action Properties Dialog—SNMP Set Variable Value box opens.
3
In the Device ID field, select <Existing SNMP Server> to enable the Select button.
4
Click Select to choose the target SNMP device.
You can also select either a Global Property or Custom Property that contains the device ID
of the target device.
All OID strings should be prefaced with a “.”.
5
6
Beside Variable Object ID, choose Value or Property from the drop-down menu on the
left, and to complete the field on the right, do one of the following:

If the object is a value, enter the object ID of the SNMP variable that you want to
control.

If the object is a property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
Click the arrow in the Variable Value condition box, and select one of the three conditions:
.
Table 5-4 Variable Value Condition Options
7
Option
Function
Equals
The specified variable value is the same as that designated
Not Equals
The specified variable value is not the same as that designated
Any Value
Ignore the variable value
In the Variable Value menu, choose Value or Property.

If you choose Value, enter the value of the SNMP variable that you want to set.
Although Magellan CCS Navigator correctly displays SNMP values on rendered pages using
enumeration names defined in the MIB, the “value” specified in this third box must be the
enumeration index (interger value) associated with the item.

If you choose Property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
8
From the Variable Type box, select a supported SNMP data type for the SNMP variable to
control from the drop-down list.
9
Click OK when you have finished setting this action property.
119
120
Chapter 5
SNMP Plug-in
Setting Properties for a ‘SNMP Get Table’ Action
This action selects a table for placement on a Graphical Navigation page.
Figure 5-2 SNMP Get Table Properties Dialog Box
To complete the SNMP Get Table action, follow these steps:
1
Under Device ID, choose a device.
Device IDs that have been chosen before will appear in the menu; if the device you need is
not there, click Select to choose from a table.
2
Beside Variable object ID, choose Value, and then click MIB to select the table to get.
Tables are indicated by this icon:
The Variable Value and Variable Type rows are always unavailable for this action.
3
Click OK.
121
6
SuiteView Plug-in
SuiteView Actions Overview
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create rules for Magellan
CCS Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator user can create rules and pages.
SuiteView Control is an optional component of Magellan CCS Navigator.
To control a SuiteView multisource display processor from a Magellan CCS Navigator panel,
you need to set rules for conditional events and actions. The SuiteView-specific rules are
listed in Setting Rules to Perform SuiteView Actions on page 121. If you are unfamiliar
with how, when and why to make rules in Magellan CCS Navigator, see Rules for
Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61.
Setting Rules to Perform SuiteView Actions
You must be in Build mode to define rules for Magellan CCS Navigator objects and pages.
SuiteView rules occur in response to events and conditional events and trigger pre-defined
actions.
The following table lists the Magellan CCS Navigator actions that are specific to SuiteView.
Table 6-1 SuiteView-Specific Actions for Rule Creation
Action
Description
Reference
Send String to COM
Port
Sends a command string
to a specified serial port
Setting Properties for a ‘Send
String to COM Port’ Action on
page 123
Load SuiteView Preset
Loads a SuiteView preset
Setting Properties for ‘Load
SuiteView Preset’ Action on
page 123
Set FullScreen On
Sets the SuiteView device
screen to full screen
Setting Properties for ‘Set
Fullscreen On’ Action on page 122
Set FullScreen Off
Returns the SuiteView
device screen to
window-size
Setting Properties for ‘Set
Fullscreen Off’ Action on page 122
122
Chapter 6
SuiteView Plug-in
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen On’ Action
Attempts to apply the Set Fullscreen On action to non-SuiteView devices will not work.
The Set Fullscreen On action makes a channel input PiP in a SuiteView device open in
full-screen size on an output monitor. To configure Set Fullscreen On action properties,
complete these steps:
1
Follow the instructions in see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping at step 7, after selecting Set Fullscreen On as your action.
2
Click Action Properties.
The Action Properties Dialog—Set Fullscreen On box opens.
3
Click the arrow in the Device Name field, and then select a SuiteView device to which you
want to send a command.
If the device you want is not listed, or you need to change device communication
preferences and connection information, you will need to create a serial configuration. See
Setting Communication Options on page 59.
4
Click the arrow in the Video Input field, and then type an input channel from the list.
(There are only 16 video inputs available to choose from.)
This is the input channel on which the Set Fullscreen On action will be implemented.
5
Click OK to close the Action Properties box.
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen Off’ Action
Attempts to apply the Set Fullscreen Off action to non-SuiteView devices will not work.
The Set Fullscreen Off action returns SuiteView devices to the layout positions they held
prior to full-screen mode. To configure Set Fullscreen Off action properties, complete
these steps:
1
Follow the instructions in see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping at step 7 after selecting Set Fullscreen Off as your action.
2
Click Action Properties.
The Action Properties Dialog—Set Fullscreen Off box opens.
3
Click the arrow in the Device Name field, and then select a SuiteView device from the list
to which you want to send a command.
If the device you want is not listed, or you need to change device communication
preferences and connection information, you will need to create a serial configuration. See
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration on page 59.
4
Click the arrow in the Input Channel field, and then type an input channel from the list.
This is the input channel on which the Set Fullscreen Off action will be implemented.
5
Click OK to close the Action Properties box.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Setting Properties for ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action
Attempts to apply the Load SuiteView Preset action to non-SuiteView devices will not
work.
The Load SuiteView Preset action loads a pre-configured layout to a SuiteView system. To
configure Load SuiteView Preset action properties, complete these steps:
1
Follow the instructions in see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping at step 7, after selecting Load SuiteView Preset as your
action.
2
Click Action Properties.
The Action Properties box opens.
3
Click the arrow in the Device Name field, and then select a SuiteView device from the list
to which you want to send a command.
If the device you want is not listed, or you need to change device communication
preferences and connection information, you will need to create a serial configuration. See
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration on page 59.
4
Click the arrow in the Preset Name field, and then select a preset from the list.
5
Click OK to close the Action Properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Send String to COM Port’ Action
Command strings sent to a specific device must make use of commands that device can
understand. See your device manual for a list of available commands.
See Setting Rules to Perform Actions on page 61 for instructions on how to set an
Action.
The Send String to COM Port command sends a command string to a device.To configure
Send String to COM Port action properties, complete these steps:
1
Follow the instructions in see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping at step 7, after selecting Send String to COM Port as your
action.
2
Click Action Properties.
The Action Properties dialog box opens.
3
Click the arrow in the Device Name field, and then select a SuiteView device from the list
to which you want to send a command.
If the device you want is not listed, or you need to change device communication
preferences and connection information, you will need to create a serial configuration. See
Setting Communication Options on page 59.
String data can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language, your
keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry for strings. If you switch
the keyboard and enter text in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
4
In the String field, enter a command string acceptable to that device.
123
124
Chapter 6
SuiteView Plug-in
Command strings sent to a specific device must make use of commands that device can
understand. See your device manual for a list of available commands.
5
Click OK to send the command string and to close the Action Properties box.
Setting Communication Options
If you are connected serially to NEO SuiteView via RS-232, and you intend to create a
Magellan CCS Navigator page using the Load SuiteView Preset method (see Creating a
Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action on page 125 for details),
then you will need to make the following communication settings:
1
In Build mode, open the Options menu and click Communication.
The Communication Options dialog box opens.
2
Click the Serial Settings tab, and then select the SuiteView device from the Device Name
list.
Click the Serial
Settings tab
Select a device
from this list, or
add a new device
by clicking Add
Complete these
Connection
Preferences
settings
Figure 6-1 Communication Options Dialog Box, Serial Settings Tab
If the SuiteView device is not listed, you will need to first add it by following these steps:
a
Click Add.
The Add Device dialog box opens.
3
b
Type a name in the Name field, and then click OK to close the dialog box.
c
Select the new device name from the Device Name list.
Select the appropriate COM port from the Port list, and then make the following selections
from these Connection Preferences lists:

Bits per second: 57600

Data bits: 8

Parity: None
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
4
Creating a
Preset

Stop bits: 1

Flow control: None
Click Apply, and then click OK to close the dialog box.
To create a preset, you must be in Control mode.
1
Right click an NSV-OUT card in the Navigation pane a Control dialog box.
2
From the shortcut menu that appears, select Presets > Save the current CCS settings to
capture all CCS, SuiteView, and NEO SuiteView settings currently applied to this module.
Creating a NEO SuiteView Navigator Page
On a customized Navigator page, you can create buttons that will load various presets that
have been designed and saved. Building a custom NEO SuiteView Navigator page provides
flexibility for recalling a layout from a customized page instead of using the standard CCS
interface.
You can control Magellan CCS Navigator from a custom Navigator page by two different
methods: using either a Load SuiteView Preset action or a Load Preset action.
Load SuiteView Preset method has the following characteristics:

Control though serial RS-232 (see Setting Communication Options on page 124 to
configure)

Loads a NEO SuiteView preset layout only, and no other parameters
See Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action on
page 125.
Load Preset method has the following characteristics:

Control through Ethernet IP/TCP

Loads all the parameters included in the preset, including the NEO SuiteView preview
layout parameter
See Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action on page 126.
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action
Ensure a serial connection via RS-232 cable is established, and that the communication
settings have been made (see Setting Communication Options on page 124).
The Load SuiteView Preset action loads just the NEO SuiteView Navigator page preset
layout. To use the Load SuiteView Preset action, follow these steps:
1
With a Graphical Navigation page open in Build mode, right-click and select Create, and
from the shortcut menu, select an object/element (for example, Button), and place it on
the page.
2
Right-click on the object/element, and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
125
126
Chapter 6
SuiteView Plug-in
The Object Properties dialog box opens.
New Rule
button
Delete rule button (Use this to
remove partial or empty rules.
You cannot close the dialog box
if there are incomplete rules).
Condition button
Figure 6-2 Setting a Load SuiteView Preset Action
3
Select the Rules tab, and then click the New Rule button.
4
Set the event (for example, On Mouse Click) from the Event list.
5
Click Condition (the button, not the column heading) to set the event condition (typically
set to Always).
For more information on event conditions, see Defining Conditions on page 67.
The action Load SuiteView Preset is different from the action Load Preset. See
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action on page 126 for more
information.
6
Open the Action list, and then select Load SuiteView Preset.
7
Enter an event description, following these steps:
a
Click Action Properties.
The Action Property—Load SuiteView Preset dialog box appears.
b
Select a device name from the corresponding list.
If there are no presets available, see Creating a Preset on page 125.
8
c
From the Preset Name list, select a preset layout name that can be recalled/loaded.
d
Click OK.
Close the Object Properties dialog box, and then save the newly created page.
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action
If there are no presets available, see Creating a Preset on page 125.
The Load Preset action loads all the CCS settings that have been saved under a preset
name, not just the NEO SuiteView Navigator page preset layout. Controlling NEO SuiteView
using this method requires an active Ethernet connection.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
If you have assigned the Load Preset action to an object/element’s event, then the Action
Properties dialog box where you enter descriptive device and preset information will be
different than that shown in Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView
Preset’ Action on page 125. Follow these steps when assigning a Load Preset action to
an event:
1
With a Graphical Navigation page open in Build mode, right-click and select Create, and
from the shortcut menu, select an object/element (for example, Button), and place it on
the page.
2
Right-click on the object/element, and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Object Properties dialog box opens.
3
Select the Rules tab, and then click the New Rule button.
Condition button
Figure 6-3 Object Properties Dialog Box
4
Set an event (for example, On Mouse Click) from the Event list.
5
Click Condition to set the event condition (typically set to Always).
For more information on event conditions, see Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’
Action on page 79.
6
From the Action list, select Load Preset. Click Action Properties.
7
The Action Property—Load Preset dialog box opens.
Figure 6-4 Action Property Dialog Box (Load Preset Action Setting)
127
128
Chapter 6
SuiteView Plug-in
8
Click Select... to open the Device Selection dialog box, and then select a device from the
list.
Figure 6-5 Device Selection Dialog Box
Note the listed Device Location to ensure you are selecting the correct device.
9
Click OK to close the dialog box.
The selected device ID now appears in the corresponding field within the Action Property
dialog box.
10 From the Preset Name list, select a preset name and then click OK.
11 Close the Object Properties dialog box, and then save the newly created page.
Recalling a Preset Page
If you have not closed the Navigator page you just created in the previous steps, it will open
directly once you enter Control mode.
You will get different results depending on the action assigned in the Object Properties
dialog box.
However, if you closed the newly created Navigator page after saving it, or if you want to
open a different page, you can recall it by clicking File > Open in the main menu and then
browsing for the desired page.
Navigator pages have a .nav file extension.
129
7
Using Graphical Navigation
Pages
Controlling Navigation Pages Overview
A Navigation page is a document containing graphics that represent a network
environment.
Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode for discovery, configuration, and page
construction and editing; however, Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Control mode
for monitoring and control activities.
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create pages, and a
NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use pages to monitor
and control devices.
In Control mode, the finished drawing becomes a Navigation page, *.nav, which you can
use for monitoring and control of your network environment. On a page, you can click
buttons, symbols, links and other objects, open shortcut menus and define actions to
associate with objects. See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on
page 61.
Refreshing a Graphical Navigation Page
Only an Administrator user can alter Graphical Navigation pages. When changes are
made to the Graphical Navigation page on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server (with a
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license), all users on connected Magellan CCS
Navigator Clients (NAVIGATOR-CLI license) receive notification that a network resource has
been updated. When they reload (by clicking Reload from the toolbar, or by selecting View
> Reload from the main menu), the Graphical Navigation page is updated.
Using Navigation Pages in Control Mode
This page is composed of eight symbols (the frame and its six modules), seven links (the
arrows), and one text object (“QA 6800+ Frame”).
When you activate a Magellan CCS Navigator page by changing to Control mode, the page
shows alarms on symbols (including CCS and SNMP device icons) and their linked parent
symbols.
130
Chapter 7
Using Graphical Navigation Pages
Figure 7-1 Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Page with a Frame With Six Modules Linked to
it in Build Mode
Any alarms on the devices show as flashing highlights: yellow for a warning alarm, and red
for a critical alarm. The child devices relay the alarm to their parent device - in this case, the
frame.
This object has a
yellow warning
alarm.
This object has a
red critical alarm.
Figure 7-2 Same Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Page, Control Mode
Moving between Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
To move between Magellan CCS Navigator pages, you must do one of the following:

Click an object that loads another Magellan CCS Navigator page.

Click the Back, Forward, or Home tool on the Graphical Navigation toolbar.

Click one of the navigation commands on the shortcut menu.
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus
When you right-click a Graphical Navigation page or object in any operational mode, a
shortcut menu appears.
You cannot perform build operations, such as drag-and-drop, scaling, object creation, or
attribute definition, when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
When you right-click a Magellan CCS Navigator object when Magellan CCS Navigator is
control mode, these commands are available from the shortcut menu:
Table 7-1 Graphical Magellan CCS Navigator Shortcut Menu, Control Mode
Command
Function
Control
Opens the Control dialog box for the selected object
Configuratio
n
Opens the Configuration dialog box for the selected object
Thumbnail
Opens the thumbnail dialog box for the selected object (if available)
Stream
Opens the streaming dialog box for the selected object (if available)
Actions>
Displays a submenu for all actions defined on an object. Selecting an
action will execute it.
Back
Moves to the previous page
Forward
Moves back to the page from which you have just returned
Home
Load the first page in the hierarchy
Zoom >
Displays the Zoom submenu: Fit in Window, Actual Size, Zoom In,
Zoom Out, Zoom Window, and Zoom Previous
Pan
Moves a page within the Graphical Navigation area
Refresh
Redraws the page
Reload
Gets the Graphical Navigation page from the server
Properties...
Opens the Object Properties box of the selected object
All fields are read-only in Control mode
Options...
Opens the Graphical Navigation Options box
Help...
Opens a Help topic on the Graphical Navigation tool
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar
An optional toolbar appears on top of the Graphical Navigation area when Magellan CCS
Navigator is in Control mode. To show this toolbar, select the check box in the View
Options section of the Graphical Navigation Options box. See View Options for
Graphical Navigation Pages on page 4.
The table below lists the tools on the Graphical Navigation toolbar and their functions.
Table 7-2 Tools on the Graphical Navigation Toolbar in Control Mode
Tool
Function
Back
Loads the previous Magellan CCS Navigator
page
Forward
Reloads a Magellan CCS Navigator page you
recently loaded when you clicked Back
Reference
131
132
Chapter 7
Using Graphical Navigation Pages
Table 7-2 Tools on the Graphical Navigation Toolbar in Control Mode (Continued)
Tool
Function
Reference
Zoom
Allows you to magnify or shrink your view in
the Graphical Navigation page.
Using Zoom Tools on
page 12
Pan
Turns the cursor into a hand; click and drag to
move the page.
Click the button again to deactivate.
Panning in a Graphical
Navigation Page on
page 12
Home
Reloads the first visited Magellan CCS
Navigator page
Custom Properties Window
When you are in Control mode, you can use the Custom Properties viewer. If the Custom
Properties window is closed, open it by choosing Tools > Custom Properties from the
main menu.
By default, the Custom Properties window appears in the left portion of the screen, below
the Navigation pane if that is open. You can click on it and drag it and drop it so that it
floats over the other items in the screen, or you can dock it to the top, bottom, left or right
of the screen.
Figure 7-3 Custom Properties Panel
Table 7-3
Column
Function
Name
A user-assigned title (limited in size?) of the property
Runtime Value
The current valueof the property
Initial Value
The value that was assigned to the property when it was created
Scope
Whether the value is global or page-based, and if page-based, the
page that the value is used on
Description
Displays whatever is entered into the Description field of the
property
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
Custom properties variables store and share data between Magellan CCS Navigator rules
and pages in control mode. Global custom properties are accessible across the entire
application. Local custom properties only affect a particular instance of a given page. The
Custom Properties window always shows the global properties. To show the custom
properties for a page, open the page in Magellan CCS Navigator, and then click Refresh in
the top right corner of the Custom Properties window.
Click Refresh at any time to update the list of custom properties and their values.
If more than one instance of the same page is opened, all instances are displayed in the
same order as the pages were open. For best results, do not open more than one instance
of the same page with this tool.
133
134
Chapter 7
Using Graphical Navigation Pages
135
A
Graphical Navigation
Troubleshooting
Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting OverView
The hints and tips in this chapter relate specifically to Graphical Navigation tools, pages and
panels.

Build Mode Problems on page 135

Control Mode Problems on page 137
For general troubleshooting problems, refer to Troubleshooting on page 295 of CCS
Navigator: Volume 1.
Build Mode Problems
Graphical Navigation Build mode problems may happen in systems that have a
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license key.
Navigator Fails to Display Button State Images
Navigator displays a button image only if the first image (Unselect/Unhighlighted state field)
is defined on the Button tab of the Object Properties box.
If the image properties have not been defined for the state set by the Set Button
Properties action, the button image will not display.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action on page 81 for more
information.
Custom Non-Rectangular Buttons Appear Rectangular
If you create a custom non-rectangular shape for a button bitmap—such as a circle, ellipse,
or star—that you plan to use on a Navigator page, then you must use a pixel-editing
program like PhotoShop or PaintShop Pro to create a colored mask for the shape so that just
the shape itself shows. If you do not create a mask for the shape, the entire rectangle
occupied by the bitmap will appear.
136
Chapter
Set the RGB color of the mask to 255, 0, 216. Navigator is configured to show this color as
transparent, so your custom shape will show through when you insert the bitmap on the
Navigator page. You can also customize the color that you want to show as transparent in
the Create Button area of the Button Themes section of the Button Properties dialog
box. See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18.
Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified
This problem can afflict *.bmp, *.jpg, and so on, when used as a background for a
Navigator page.
A copy of the background image is stored inside the .nav page. Changing the original file
will have no effect on the page that is displayed. In addition, once Navigator has loaded the
background into memory, it will continue to use the image in memory. In order to update
the image, follow these steps:
1
Open the page in Build mode.
2
Clear the background image, so no image is selected.
3
Save the page.
4
Exit Navigator.
5
Restart Navigator and log in.
6
Open the page in Build mode.
7
Set the background image.
In Frame Wizard, Modules Do Not Appear in Frame Correctly
The placement on the modules (where they go) by the wizard is directly related to their slot
number, which is part of the device ID. This number indicates where the module appears on
the frame. If you are adding this information manually (not thought the discovery process),
you have to change this number as well. To do that, follow these steps:
1
Select the node on the tree.
2
Right-click on the node and select the Properties... menu entry.
3
Select the Device tab.
4
Change the last field of the device ID.
Problems Using AutoCAD Drawings as Backgrounds on Graphical Navigation
pages
Before you can use an AutoCAD image as a background in Navigator, it must be converted
to a JPG image, or you will lose all zoom detail on the image.
The bigger your settings (paper size), the bigger the image, resolution, and file size will be.
1
Open your image in AutoCAD
2
Select the Plot... command found in the File menu.
3
In the Plot Configuration area, select PublishToWeb JPG.pc3 as the name of the plotter (Plot
Device Tab)
4
Click in the Properties... button (to open the Plotter Configurator Editor)
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
5
In the Device and Document Settings tab, select Custom Paper Sizes and click
Add... to add a page that is the same size as your drawing. (Follow the instructions in the
wizard.)
6
Click the OK button to close the Plotter Configurator Editor.
7
In the Plot to file area, type in the name of the file you want to generate. This plotter will
create a JPG image.
8
Select Plot Settings tab and in the Paper size and paper units area, select the
custom paper size that you have added before using the Paper size combo box.
9
Click in the OK button.
Now, follow the instructions for importing your image as a background in Navigator, as
found in Setting an Image as a Page Background on page 15.
Control Mode Problems
Graphical Navigation Control mode problems may happen in systems that have a
NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license key.
You must have a Navigator Page Customization license to create pages and use pages to
monitor and control devices.
If you are having problems with the Graphical Navigation page, please refer to the
following topics:

Navigator Fails to Display Button State Images on page 135

Custom Non-Rectangular Buttons Appear Rectangular on page 135

Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified on page 136

In Frame Wizard, Modules Do Not Appear in Frame Correctly on page 136

CPU Usage Goes to 100% When Navigator Executes a Rule on page 137

Global Properties Do Not Work Across Pages on page 138

Alarms “Bubble Up” Incorrectly on page 138

Cannot Find Navigator Pages on page 138

Alarms Fail to Appear on a Navigator Page on page 138
CPU Usage Goes to 100% When Navigator Executes a Rule
If you execute a rule which has a recursive element in it, your CPU usage will go to 100%,
and Navigator will not respond to further commands.
Essentially, a recursive element creates a loop that goes back to the start of the rule and
causes it to trigger again. To avoid this situation, when creating a rule, ensure that an On
Update type of event is not followed by a Set Property type of action for the same element.
A similar situation can occur with one rule triggering another rule that in turn triggers the
first rule. For example, never define a rule that loads page B whenever loading page A, and
then define another rule that loads page A whenever loading page B.
137
138
Chapter
Global Properties Do Not Work Across Pages
The On Custom Property event may not update global properties that are updated in
different sessions.
If you create a global custom property and use it on different pages, and have that property
update triggered by an On Load Page event, the global property will not update, because
the "Load Page" event for the first page came before the page’s session actually started,
and so the original condition for the custom property is used.
Alarms “Bubble Up” Incorrectly
When you define a “Load Page action” for an object, you create a link between that object
and the page. Any alarm that occurs on an object on the linked page will “bubble up” to
the parent object, causing the parent object to flash an alarm.
This flexible approach allows you to monitor the status of your pages hierarchy by only
defining “Load Page” actions. However, if you create a button on a child page that loads
the parent page back again (so that it behaves like a “Back” button on a Web browser), you
run the risk of making Navigator report an alarm on a parent object when the alarm is
actually on a child object.
To avoid this, do not create new “Back” and “Forward” buttons, as they are already
provided in Navigator. To display the Navigator Back and Forward buttons, follow these
steps:
1
Right-click on a page (but not on an object), and then select Options.
2
Check the Show Graphical Navigation toolbar field.
The Navigation toolbar appears, including the Back and Forward navigation buttons.
Cannot Find Navigator Pages
The first time you save a page, you have the opportunity to save to a folder location other
than the default Pages. This is a one-time opportunity to select a save-as destination. After
this time, the page will automatically save to the previously selected destination.
Navigator pages are saved on the NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP licensed PC that
created them. Pages can be found at Program Files > Harris > Navigator > Users >
Admin > Pages (assuming the CCS Navigator application was installed in the default
directory).
Alarms Fail to Appear on a Navigator Page
Consider these questions:

Did you set the background color of a page as red, yellow, or green?
The background color of a Navigator page can mask or camouflage a flashing alarm
color.
Since CCS applications use red, yellow, and green for alarm monitoring, you should
avoid using these three colors when defining the background color of your Navigator
pages. See Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background on page 14.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual

Is there a node in the Network folder of the Navigation pane that represents the
device you want to monitor?
You must have discovered and manually configured the target device in the
Navigation pane. If you have not discovered and configured the device for which you
expect to see an alarm, you must complete these tasks before an alarm will appear
either in the Navigation pane or a Navigator page. See Discovery Overview on
page 75 and CCS Device Configuration Overview on page 127.

Have you set the device ID of the symbols for which you expect to see alarms?
To monitor a device whose icon appears in the Navigation pane, the device ID of the
companion symbol on the Navigator page should have the identical device ID. The
easiest way to ensure that a Navigator symbol inherits the correct device ID is to create
the symbol by dragging and dropping the configured resource representing the device
from the Navigation pane into the Navigator page.

Did you define a Load Page action for the Navigator object?
When you define a Load Page action for an object, you create a link between that
object and the page it loads. Any alarms that occur on any object on the linked page
also will “bubble up” to the parent object, causing the parent object to flash an alarm.
139
140
Chapter
141
Index
Symbols
*.bmp 25, 26
*.jpg 1, 7, 25
*.nav 7, 129
A
Actions 61, 66, 98, 121
action properties 74
activeX method 87
alarm filtering 74
button blink mode 82
clear selected 101
Clear Selected Salvo 112
configuration 75
control 76
defining 68
execute macro 76
Execute Salvo 112
Execute Selected Salvo 111
launch application 77
load frame page 78
load layout 77
load page 78
Load Preset 126
load preset 79
Load SuiteView Preset 123, 125
Lock Selected Destination 105
product info 80
product user manual 81
properties 74
Protect Selected Destination 104
Query Destination Status 101
Query Signal Presence Status 101
Restrict Crosspoint 108
Restrict Selected Crosspoint 109
Select Destination 99
Select Salvo 110
Select Source 100
send string to COM port 123
set activeX properties 85
set button properties 81
Set Crosspoint Match Type 103
set custom property 82
set frame custom property 83
Set Fullscreen Off 122
Set Fullscreen On 122
set link properties 84
set symbol properties 85
set text properties 85
SNMP Get Variable Value 118
SNMP Set Variable Value 119
Swap Destinations 106
Take Crosspoint 102
Take Selected 103
using event properties 74
ActiveX 1, 7, 43
adding controls 43
available controls 44
Character display 47
limitations 27
properties 85
set ActiveX Method’s action 87
set ActiveX properties action 85
setting properties 49
Spin control 48
Timer control 45
Alarm filtering action 74
Alarms 129
alarm filtering action 74
filtering 72
filtering action properties 74
on alarm event 69
AutoCAD 136
B
Build mode 1, 7, 61, 121
Build operations 58, 130
Buttons 17, 18, 23
actions 81, 82
adding 17
blink mode action 82
button state images 135
loading Navigator pages 22
properties 18, 23
142
Index
set blink mode action 82
set button properties action 81
themes 20
C
Clear selected action 101
Clear selected salvo action 112
Color fill 14
Communication options 124
Conditional events 61
Conditions 61
editing 68
event 66
multiple events 68
reusing 68
Configuration
action 72
action properties 75
Control action 72
Control mode 7, 129, 131
Copy page 11
Create Objects toolbar 38
Create Server box 38
Crosspoints 92
Custom graphics 25
Custom properties 15, 16
custom property change event 71
tab 14
D
Disconnect 94, 100, 102, 111
E
Events 61, 66, 91
conditional 61
defining 68
event conditions 67
multiple events conditions 68
on alarm 69
On Crosspoint Status 92
on custom property change 71
On Lock/Protect Status 94
On Restrict Status 96
On Salvo Status 95
On Signal Presence Status 97
ON SNMP Trap 116
On SNMP Variable Value Update 115
Execute salvo action 112
Execute selected salvo action 111
F
Frames 8
set frame custom property action 83
wizard 8
G
Global properties 13
deleting 14
Graphical navigation toolbar 131
Graphical objects 1, 7
GUI 7
H
Hotspot 17
I
Image 1, 7, 17, 25
Image file 25
L
Launch Application 73
Layouts 77
Link 1, 7, 17, 41
Load frame page 73
Load frame page action 78
Load layout action 77
Load Page 73
Load page action 78
Load preset action 79, 126
Load SuiteView Preset action 123, 125
Lock selected destination action 105
Lock/Protect Status 94, 95
Locks 95, 96
M
Macros 88, 90
creating 88
deleting 90
modifying 90
N
Navigator frame 1, 7, 17
adding to pages 28
Navigator pages 125
new 8
properties 14
O
Object properties 18, 23, 24, 25, 26, 41
On alarm event 69
On crosspoint status events 93
On custom property change event 71
On lock/protect status events 94
On restrict status events 96
On salvo status events 95
On signal presence status events 97
On SNMP Trap events 116
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation
User Manual
On SNMP Variable Value Update 115, 116
Options menu
Graphical Navigation 2
P
Pages 7, 129
adding hotspots 26
adding images 25
adding symbols 36
adding text 24
controls on 42
copy 11
custom properties 17
editing 56
frame view 8
new 8
new page wizard 8
properties 14
saved location of 138
saving 10
Pan mode 12
PDF 81
Plug-ins
SNMP control 115
SuiteView control 121
Presets 85, 125
load action 79
recalling 128
Product information 73
Product user manual 73
Protect 94
Protect selected destination action 104
Q
Query destination status action 101
Query signal presence status action 101
R
Resource tree 39
Restrict crosspoint action 108
Restrict selected crosspoint action 109
Restricting status 97
Router-specific actions 98
Router-specific events 91
Rules 14, 61, 62, 121
macros 88
SuiteView 121
Rules Tab toolbar 65
Rules, router 91
S
Salvos
status 95
Save 10
Save all 10
Save Navigator pages 10, 138
Save page as 11
Select destination action 99
Select salvo action 110
Select source action 100
Selecting multiple Navigator objects 56
Send String to COM Port action 123
Set activeX properties action 85
Set button properties action 81
Set custom property action 82
Set frame custom property action 83
Set FullScreen Off action 122
Set FullScreen On action 122
Set link properties action 84
Set symbol properties action 85
Set text properties action 85
Signal monitor 1, 7, 17
adding to pages 27
Signal presence status 97
Signal status 98
SNMP actions 115
Set Variable Value 119
SNMP control plug-in 115
Streaming icon 35
SuiteView actions 121
Set FullScreen Off 122
Set FullScreen On 122
SuiteView control plug-in 121
SuiteView presets 125
Symbols 1, 7
creating 38
links between 41
properties action 85
T
Take Crosspoint 92
Take crosspoint action 102
Take selected 92
Take selected action 103
Text 1, 7, 17
adding to pages 24
set text properties action 85
Text object 24
Timer control 45
TimerIndex actions 46
Toolbars 17
create objects 17
Graphical navigation 131
rules tab 65
Tools menu
graphical navigation 7, 129
rules and macros 61, 90
Transparency 26
Troubleshooting 135
143
144
Index
frame view 8, 136
new page 8
U
User manual, opening 81
W
Wizards 8
component 59
X
X75 streaming icon 35
Installation and Operation Manual
MagellanTM CCS Navigator
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application
Volume 3: IconMaster Software Control Panel
Edition E
175‐100002‐00
Publication Information
© 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential. Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product.
Trademarks
CCS Navigator™ is a trademark of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries. Portions © 1994‐1996, QLogic Corporation. All rights reserved. Portions © 2004‐2007 Amino Communications Ltd. All rights reserved. Portions © 1989, 1991, 1992, 1998 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved. Derivative Work ‐ 1996, 1998‐2000 Portions © 1996, 1998‐2000 The Regents of the University of California. All Rights Reserved. Portions © 2001‐2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions © 2001‐2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Portions © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Portions © 2003‐2008, Sparta, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network. All rights reserved. Portions © Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003. All rights reserved.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For locations and contact information see: http://www.imaginecommunications.com/contact‐us/
Support Contact Information
For support contact information see: Support Contacts: http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/technical‐support/
eCustomer Portal: http://support.imaginecommunications.com
iii
Contents
Publication Information .................................................................................................ii
Trademarks .....................................................................................................................ii
Support Contact Information ........................................................................................ii
Preface ..........................................................................................................................v
Manual Information .......................................................................................................v
Purpose ......................................................................................................................v
Audience ....................................................................................................................v
Revision History ..........................................................................................................v
Writing Conventions ..................................................................................................... vi
Obtaining the User Manuals ........................................................................................ vi
Chapter 1
Introduction to ISCP ............................................................................................. 1
IconMaster Software Control Panel Overview ........................................................... 1
IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP) .................................................................. 2
ISCP-LITE ................................................................................................................... 3
Chapter 2
Installation and Logging On............................................................................. 5
Software Installation Overview ................................................................................... 5
Required Hardware, Operating System and Software ............................................... 5
Hardware Requirements ............................................................................................ 6
Software Requirements ............................................................................................. 6
Installing IconMaster Software Control Panel ............................................................ 6
Removing ISCP Software .............................................................................................. 7
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode ......................................................... 7
Logging On ............................................................................................................... 7
Setting the Operational Mode ................................................................................... 8
Activating a License ...................................................................................................... 8
Chapter 3
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration ............................................................... 11
ISCP and ISCP-Lite Overview ...................................................................................... 11
Configuring ISCP ......................................................................................................... 11
iv
Contents
Defining ISCP Master Control Channels ................................................................... 12
Creating an ISCP Panel ............................................................................................. 13
Using the ISCP Wizard ............................................................................................. 15
Adjusting a Configuration ........................................................................................ 16
Configuring ISCP-LITE .................................................................................................. 17
Defining ISCP-LITE Master Control Panels ................................................................. 18
Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel ..................................................................................... 19
Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels.................................................................. 21
Overview ...................................................................................................................... 21
Displaying the ISCP or ISCP-LITE Control Panel ......................................................... 21
Lock Panel (ISCP Only) .............................................................................................. 22
Choosing Devices to Control .................................................................................... 23
Selecting an IconMaster Channel to Control (ISCP Only) ........................................... 23
Selecting Groups for Control (ISCP Only) .................................................................. 24
Dynamic Menu Selector Buttons .............................................................................. 25
Clock and Timer ....................................................................................................... 25
Machine Control ...................................................................................................... 26
Using the Primary Control Bus Cluster (ISCP Only) ................................................... 26
Aux Bus ................................................................................................................... 26
Preset (PST) Bus and Program (PGM) Bus (ISCP Only) ................................................ 28
Taking Selections On-Air (ISCP Only) ......................................................................... 31
Performing Successful Transitions (ISCP Only) .......................................................... 31
Configurable Transition Functions (ISCP Only) .......................................................... 31
Enabling a Key Transition (ISCP Only) ....................................................................... 32
Enabling a Background (Preset to Program) Transition (ISCP Only) ............................ 34
Enabling an Audio-Over Transition (ISCP Only) ......................................................... 34
External Keyers ........................................................................................................ 35
Internal Keyers ......................................................................................................... 37
Selecting an Effect ................................................................................................... 39
Quick Selects .......................................................................................................... 41
Audio Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 42
Audio Control .......................................................................................................... 42
Audio Monitor Output ............................................................................................. 45
Audio Profile Assign ................................................................................................. 46
Channel Group ........................................................................................................ 47
Appendix A
Software User License and Warranty Agreement................................. 49
License ..................................................................................................................... 49
Limited Software Warranty ...................................................................................... 49
Index ........................................................................................................................... 51
v
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
IconMaster Software Control Panel Initial Startup Guide is a companion guide to CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
This manual outlines how to get started using the IconMaster Software Control Panel
software. For information on the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to
the CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application user manual, which is
included as a PDF on your installation DVD.
Audience
Revision
History
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the
installation, setup, and/or operation of the IconMaster Software Control Panel software.
Table 1-1 Manual Revision History
Edition
Software Version
Release Date
A
Navigator 4.3 and higher with
ICONM-SCP license key
August 2008
B
Navigator 4.4.1 and higher with
ICONM-SCP or ICONM-LITE license key
January 2009
C
Navigator 4.6 and higher with
ICONM-SCP or ICONM-LITE license key
November 2009
D
Navigator 4.6 and higher with
ICONM-SCP or ICONM-LITE license key
June 2010
E
Navigator 4.7 and higher with
ICONM-SCP or ICONM-LITE license key
January 2011
vi
Preface
Writing Conventions
This documentation adheres to the following writing conventions:
Table 1-2 Conventions
Term or Convention
Description
Bold
Indicates dialog box, property sheet, field, button, check
box, list box, combo box, menu, submenu, window, list,
and selection names
Italics
Indicates email addresses, names of books and
publications, and first instances of new terms and
specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS
Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER,
TAB, CTRL, ALT, DELETE
Code
Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a
DOS entry or something you type into a field
>
Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy
of menus and windows
hyperlink
Indicates a jump to another location in the document or
elsewhere
Internet address
Indicates a jump to a website or URL
Indicates important information that helps to avoid and
troubleshoot problems
[VersionNo.]
Placeholder for a software version number
CCS Software
Application
A generic term for any CCS software applications,
including CCS Navigator, IconMasterNav, CCS Pilot, and
CCS CoPilot
Obtaining the User Manuals
The documentation for your product is included in your Documentation and Product
Resources DVD as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file. The CCS Navigator Online Help is an
electronic document integrated into the software. While working in the application, you
can open the Online Help and print out individual topics.
The most up-to-date documentation and software is always available on our website.
1
1
Introduction to ISCP
IconMaster Software Control Panel Overview
Two versions of the IconMaster Software Control Panel are available.
Figure 1-1. ISCP-LITE
Figure 1-1. ISCP

The ISCP (ISCP) replicates the functionality of the IconMaster Hardware Control Panel
and can be used to control and monitor the IconMaster switcher hardware.

ISCP-LITE contains the functionality for parametric control of the IconMaster, but does
not have the source control, channel management, transition, or keyer controls of ISCP.
The ISCP-LITE is not designed for stand-alone operation, and must be physically and
logically paired with an IconMaster Hardware Remote Control Panel.
ISCP and ISCP-LITE are both standalone plug-ins for Magellan CCS Navigator. If you have
one of these plug-ins on your system, you cannot have any other Magellan CCS Navigator
plug-ins included on the install at the same time. With an ISCP or ISCP-LITE plug-in,
Magellan CCS Navigator cannot control or monitor other hardware.
ISCP and ISCP-LITE are configured by an administrator user in Build mode, and are operated
in Control mode.
ISCP is not the same as IconMasterNav. You cannot run IconMasterNav and ISCP on the
same PC. IconMasterNav is compatible with version 2.2 of the IconMaster switcher. ISCP is
compatible with IconMaster 3.0 and above. ISCP-LITE replaces IconmasterNav as of
Iconmaster 3.0.
2
Chapter 1
Introduction to ISCP
IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP)
The ISCP was designed for use with a touch-screen monitor. Figure 1-2 shows a typical
ISCP interface.
Channel
Figure 1-2. IconMaster Software Control Panel Interface
The functionality for the ISCP matches the functionality of the hardware control panel, with
the following modifications:

The ISCP will update the name of a bus when it changes its function; for example,
when you switch the Aux bus

Button labelling on the ISCP is dynamic, meaning that button names update themselves
when, for example, the inputs to those buttons are changed
For operational instructions of redundant functionality, see your IconMaster Master Control
Switcher Functional Operation and Configuration Manual.
This document describes the unique functions and implementations on the IconMaster
Software Control Panel, including the following:

Configurable buttons

Setup etc

Dynamic parameter control (which is similar to the IconMasterNav tools)

ISCP support
ISCP
Initial Startup Guide
If you have purchased the standalone version of IconMaster Software Control Panel, you
will have only received the IconMaster Software Control Panel Initial Startup Guide. The full
Magellan CCS Navigator manual is available on the Magellan CCS Navigator installation
DVD as a PDF.
The IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP) is not a fully-featured version of Magellan
CCS Navigator. To use some features described in the Magellan CCS Navigator manual, you
must purchase separate Magellan CCS Navigator licenses after the 30-day trial period.
ISCP-LITE
The ISCP-LITE is designed for use with a touch-screen monitor. Figure 1-3 shows a typical
ISCP-LITE interface.
Figure 1-3. ISCP-LITE Interface
ISCP-LITE is designed for use directly with an IconMaster hardware remote control panel
(RCP). ISCP-LITE complements the operation of the hardware RCP, and is not designed for
stand-alone operation.
3
4
Chapter 1
Introduction to ISCP
5
2
Installation and Logging On
Software Installation Overview
IconMaster Software Control Panel is installed as part of Magellan CCS Navigator. Before
installing your ISCP software, take the time to ensure you have the necessary hardware and
software. SeeRequired Hardware, Operating System and Software on page 5.
Basic installation instructions are provided in the section Installing IconMaster Software
Control Panel on page 6. For an in-depth treatment of installation possibilities, see the
Installation chapter of your Magellan CCS Navigator User Manual (available as a PDF on your
installation DVD).
When you install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, it will start with a 30-day trial
license of all features of Magellan CCS Navigator. To add your permanent IconMaster
Software Control Panel license, see Activating a License on page 8.
Required Hardware, Operating System and Software
When configuring the IconMaster Software Control Panel, you will need to meet the
Magellan CCS Navigator Server hardware and software requirements.
The other hardware, operating system and software minimum system requirements for ISCP
are the same as those for Magellan CCS Navigator Server. For a complete list of
requirements, see the “Installation” chapter of your accompanying Magellan CCS Navigator:
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Guide.
6
Chapter 2
Installation and Logging On
Hardware Requirements
Install the ISCP software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following hardware
requirements:
Table 2-1 System Requirements for ISCP and ISCP-LITE
Minimum Supported Requirements
Processor
Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz
System Memory
16 GB DRAM or better
Network Connection
10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connection
HDD Drive
160 GB Hard Disk Drive
Available Disk Space
5 GB
Optical Drive
DVD-ROM Drive
Display

ISCP: 1280 × 1024 (19-inch touch-screen recommended)

ISCP-LITE: 1024 × 768 (15-inch touch-screen
recommended)
For best results, do not run ISCP or ISCP-LITE on a system that is running or hosting other
applications or servers.
Software Requirements
The following software is required for Magellan CCS Navigator to complete its install.

Adobe® Acrobat® Reader 4.0 minimum; 8.0 preferred

Microsoft Windows Installer 3.1

Microsoft XML parser 3.0

Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0

Windows XP Service Pack 3
If you are running Windows XP Service Pack 2, you must update to SP3 before installing
Magellan CCS Navigator.

Microsoft .Net 2.0

SQL Server Express 2005 (SP2) (Magellan CCS Navigator Server installations only)

Microsoft Messaging Queue

RouterMapper (Magellan CCS Navigator Server installations only)
During your install, if the following software is not found, an installer for the missing
program may start.
Installing IconMaster Software Control Panel
To install the Magellan CCS Navigator and IconMaster Software Control Panel, complete
these steps:
1
Close all other applications running on the PC and insert the Documentation and Product
Resources DVD into the PC DVD-ROM drive.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Select Software Applications > CCS Navigator > Navigator x.x Setup.exe.
2
When the unpacking process finishes, click Next.
A Welcome box appears.
3
Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
If you do not have all the required software that is needed to run Magellan CCS Navigator,
the installation may abort. All the required software is included on the Magellan CCS
Navigator installation DVD. Once the required software is installed, start your Magellan CCS
Navigator installation again.
Removing ISCP Software
Only an Administrator user can properly and entirely remove the IconMaster Software
Control Panel software.
For information on removing the ISCP software, please refer to your Magellan CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Guide.
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode
For the first login after an installation or reinstallation of Magellan CCS Navigator,
the User Name box will show the name Administrator. At subsequent logins, the
User Name box will show the name of the person who last logged on.
Logging On
1
To start Magellan CCS Navigator, complete these steps:
Find the Magellan CCS Navigator application icon in Windows Explorer and double-click the
icon.
By default, a new Magellan CCS Navigator installation has no password. However, if you are
upgrading from Magellan CCS Navigator 1.0, the default password is Leitch.
Or click Start, point and click on Programs > Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.].
VersionNo. represents the Magellan CCS Navigator software version number.
2
When the Logon box appears, perform one of these actions:

If you are logging on as a User, enter your assigned user name. (You do not need to
re-enter your user name if it already appears.)
For more information on administrative and log-in permissions, see your Magellan CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Manual, available on the
installation DVD as a PDF file.

If you are logging on as an Administrator user, type
Administrator

If you are logging on as a Support user, type
7
8
Chapter 2
Installation and Logging On
Support
3
Tab to the Password box, and then type in the password. (Passwords are case-sensitive.)
4
Click Log On.
Setting the Operational Mode
Magellan CCS Navigator Client installations have Control mode only.
Magellan CCS Navigator has two operational modes, as described in Chapter Four of your
accompanying Magellan CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User
Manual (available as a PDF on your installation DVD). Panel creation requires Magellan CCS
Navigator to be in Build mode, and operating the panels requires Control mode.
To set Magellan CCS Navigator’s mode, from the main menu, point to File > Operational
Mode, and then click on either Build or Control.
Activating a License
When you run an installation from the Imagine Communications Infrastructure and
Networking Documentation DVD, by default all licenses will be active with a 30-day trial
period. You must contact Customer Service in order to activate your ICONM-SCP or
ICONM-SCP-LT license after that time.
To control modules other than IconMaster, you must have other licenses. See CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application for more information.
To active a license, you must be logged onto Windows as an administrator.
To activate a license, follow these steps:
1
In Build mode, choose Help > License from the main menu.
A dialog box opens:
Click here to open a
PDF license request
form.
Figure 2-1 License Dialog Box
2
Provide the serial number from the License dialog box to your sales representative.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
There are two ways to provide the serial number and receive your license key:
3

By phone. Contact your sales representative.

By faxing or mailing a form to Imagine Communications. This form is available by
clicking License Form. The form includes information on where it should be sent.
Acrobat Reader is required.
Enter the provided key in the License Key field.
After a restart of Magellan CCS Navigator, your license will be recognized.
9
10
Chapter 2
Installation and Logging On
11
3
ISCP and ISCP-LITE
Configuration
ISCP and ISCP-Lite Overview
The following topics are described in this section:

Configuring ISCP

Configuring ISCP-LITE on page 17
Configuring ISCP
Only an Administrator user can create IconMaster Software Control Panel pages.
ISCP configuration is a Build mode operation that involves creating graphical (or “soft”)
control panels for master control frames.
Before you can configure your ISCP, you will use the Master Control Plug-in tool to enter
an IP address for each IconMaster connected to the system. See Defining ISCP Master
Control Channels on page 12.
Once your channels are defined, using the wizard, you can create a master control panel,
which provides switching and audio monitoring information for the selected channel and a
series of dynamic menus for operating some commonly used areas of your IconMaster
master control switcher. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13.
12
Chapter 3
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration
Channel or Group
management buttons
Userassignable
buttons
Figure 3-1 Portions of an ISCP That are User-Configurable
Defining ISCP Master Control Channels
Before controlling IconMaster devices using the IconMaster Software Control Panel,
Magellan CCS Navigator needs to know each channel’s name and IP address.This procedure
can be done with the MKEs already configured, or the MKEs can be configured separately.
However, you do need to know the IP addresses of the MKE modules. You must be in Build
mode to create channels.
1
With ISCP in build mode, click Options > Plug-ins in the main menu.
The Plug-ins dialog box opens.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Figure 3-2 Plug-ins Dialog Box
2
Click Master Control in the Configure Plug-ins list and then click Configure...
The IconMaster Control Configuration dialog box opens.
Deletes a
selected
channel
from the list
Opens a
dialog box
where you
can modify
the name or
IP address of
Figure 3-3 Master Control Configuration Dialog Box for ISCP
3
Click Add.
The Add Channel dialog box opens.
Figure 3-4 Add Channel Dialog Box
4
Beside Channel Name, type a descriptive name.
5
Enter the IconMaster MKE-3901 Module’s IP address.
6
Click OK to close the dialog box, and then OK to close the Plug-ins dialog box.
You can now create master control soft panels. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13.
Creating an
ISCP Panel
After completing the steps in Defining ISCP Master Control Channels on page 12, while
still in Build mode, you can use a wizard to create new IconMaster Software Control Panels.
Only an Administrator user can create ISCP pages.
13
14
Chapter 3
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration
To create an IconMaster soft control panel, follow these steps:
1
With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, select File > New....
The Navigator New Page Wizard opens.
2
Click the Master Control tab.
The box now shows the format options for the new Master Control panel and includes a
preview of the selected layout option.
Figure 3-5 Master Control Tab of the New Page Wizard
3
Click IconMaster Software Control Panel, and then click OK.
4
In the first page of the Page Wizard, first choose one of the following options:

ISCP Single Device Control—allows you to select up to eight panels to control.

ISCP Device Group Control—Allows you to select one or more groups of panels
to control. Panel groups are created in the IconMaster Configuration Utility (ICU)
and saved in an XML file. If ICU and Magellan CCS Navigator are not installed on
the same computer, you must transfer the XML file to the computer on which ISCP
is installed.
5
Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the wizard.
6
Click Finish. The panel is created.
After you switch to Control mode, you can use the IconMaster Software Control Panel.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Using the
ISCP Wizard
The following terms are used in the IconMaster Software Control panel wizard.
Table 3-1 Terms Used in IconMaster Software Control Panel Wizard
Term
Function
>
Adds highlighted items from the Available field to the Selected field. New items always
appear at the bottom of the Selected list.
<
Removes highlighted items from the Selected field.
Up
Moves highlighted items up one position in the Selected field.
Down
Moves highlighted items down one position in the Selected field.
Next >>
Moves on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item must appear in the
Selected field for this option to be available.
<< Back
Returns to the previous page in the wizard.
Close
Exits the wizard without creating a panel.
Finish
Selects the defaults on all the following pages, closes the wizard and creates a panel. At
least one item must appear in the Selected field for this option to be available.
Available channels All channels that have been made visible to Magellan CCS Navigator (see Defining ISCP
Master Control Channels on page 12)
Selected channels
You can select up to eight MKEs (channels) for the ISCP to control.
On the created panel, the buttons will appear in the order, from top to bottom , that they
appear on this ilst.
Group
Groups allow you to control more than eight MKE devices at one time. Available groups are
included in an XML file that is created in IconMaster Configuration Utility (ICU).
Profile
A profile consists of the IP address, profile name, UMD name, and multiviewer name.
Multiviewer profiles are created using the IconMaster Configuration Utility.
When you switch channels on the ISCP, the multiviewer will load the profile(s) selected on
this screen. You can associate up to three multiviewer profiles with each IconMaster
channel.
If you do not assign a profile to a particular channel, when you switch to that channel using
the ISCP, the multiviewer will retain the profile that is already loaded. Profiles can be added,
removed or changed after the ISCP panel has been created.
You must type the exact name of the profile. Profile names are case-sensitive.
Button assignment Assigns functions to the user-configurable buttons on the ISCP. See Figure 3-1 on page 12
for the location of the user-configurable buttons.
Current
Assignment
Displays the function of the specified button.
Once a function is assigned to a button, it cannot be assigned again to a different button.
Page name
Defines the name for your IconMaster Software control panel. Once an ISCP is defined, that
you cannot rename it or delete it, so give each ISCP layout a meaningful name.
GPO 1-13, Ext-1
GPO 1 - 24, Ext-2
GPO 1 - 24
(General Purpose
Output Control)
Triggers the specified GPO.
GPOs are assigned using the IconMaster configuration utility software.
15
16
Chapter 3
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration
Table 3-1 Terms Used in IconMaster Software Control Panel Wizard (Continued)
Term
Function
Quick Select 1-8
Recalls the previously stored combination of function attributes.
FTB
(fade to black)
Causes the video program outputs to immediately fade to black.
Silent
Causes the audio program outputs to immediately fade to silence.
Fast Reset
Resets PST or PGM source audio gains, audio over gains, keyer settings, individual AES
gains, individual audio cluster gains, and mono channel gains.
Play/Stop/Cue/
Mark/Rewind/
Fast Forward
Provides standard machine control functionality.
FX/FXI
When FX is selected, if an automation system controls the switcher, it can activate and
deactivate all effects. When FXI is selected, an automation system cannot deactivate effects
that are assigned from an RCP or an ISCP, though the automation system can control all
other functions of the switcher. Effects triggered from an RCP or ISCP must be deactivated
(removed) by an RCP or ISCP.
Adjusting a Configuration
Once created, you can make the following changes to an ISCP (changes must be done in
Build mode):

Changing User-Configurable Button Assignments on page 16

Reconfiguring Channels and Changing Multiviewer Profile Assignments on
page 17
Changing User-Configurable Button Assignments
To revise the function of a user-configurable button, while in Build mode, follow these
steps:
1
Right-click on the button that you want to change on the ISCP page, and choose
Component Wizard from the shortcut menu.
The Component Wizard for that button opens.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Figure 3-6 Component Wizard for User Button 6
2
Choose an item from the drop-down menu.
3
Click Finish.
The text on the selected button is updated.
You have to open the Component Wizard for each button you want to change.
Reconfiguring Channels and Changing Multiviewer Profile
Assignments
Use the Component Wizard to add or subtract channels from an open ISCP in Build mode,
or change the multiviewer profile that loads when you select a channel.
1
Right-click on a channel and choose Component Wizard from the shortcut menu.
The Component Wizard appears.
2
Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
For a list of concepts and terminology used in the wizard, see Using the ISCP Wizard on
page 15.
3
Click Finish to close the Component Wizard.
The column of channel buttons updates to reflect the changes you have made.
Configuring ISCP-LITE
Only an Administrator user can create IconMaster Software Control Panel pages.
ISCP-LITE configuration is a Build mode operation that involves creating graphical (or
“soft”) control panels for master control frames.
17
18
Chapter 3
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration
Before you can configure your ISCP-LITE, you will use the Master Control Plug-in tool to
enter an IP address for each IconMaster Hardware Control Panel connected to the system.
See Defining ISCP-LITE Master Control Panels on page 18.
Once your panels are defined, using the wizard, you can create an ISCP-LITE page, which
provides audio monitoring information for the selected panel and a series of dynamic
menus for operating some commonly used areas of your Hardware Control Panel. See
Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel on page 19.
Defining ISCP-LITE Master Control Panels
Before creating an ISCP-LITE Panel, Magellan CCS Navigator needs to know the associated
Hardware Control Panel’s name and IP address. You must be in Build mode to select panels.
1
With ISCP-LITE in build mode, click Options > Plug-ins in the main menu.
The Plug-ins dialog box opens. (See Figure 3-2.)
2
Click Master Control in the Configure Plug-ins list and then click Configure...
The IconMaster Control Configuration dialog box opens.
Deletes a
selected
panel from
the list
Opens a
dialog box
where you
can modify
the name or
IP address of
Figure 3-7 Master Control Configuration Dialog Box for ISCP-LITE
3
Click Add.
The Add Panel dialog box opens.
Figure 3-8 Add Channel Dialog Box
4
Beside Panel Name, type a descriptive name.
5
Enter the Hardware Control Panel’s IP address.
6
Click OK to close the dialog box, and then OK to close the Plug-ins dialog box.
You can now create ISCP-LITE panels. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel
Only an Administrator user can create ISCP-LITE pages.
To create an ISCP-LITE panel, follow these steps:
1
With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, select File > New....
The Navigator New Page Wizard opens.
2
Click the Master Control tab.
The box now shows the format options for the new Master Control panel and includes a
preview of the selected layout option.
Figure 3-9 New Page Wizard with ISCP-LITE License
3
Click Lite-IconMaster Software Control Panel, and then click OK.
4
Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the wizard.
For a list of concepts and terminology used in the wizard, see Using the ISCP Wizard on
page 15.
5
Click Finish.
The panel is created.
After you switch to Control mode, you can use the ISCP-LITE Panel.
You can modify the button assignments for an ISCP-LITE panel after it has been created. See
Changing User-Configurable Button Assignments on page 16 for more information.
19
20
Chapter 3
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration
21
4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE
Panels
Overview
Once an ISCP or ISCP-LITE has been created, when you switch to Control mode, you can
start controlling and/or monitoring devices. See Setting the Operational Mode on page 8.
The ISCP-LITE only works in conjunction with a paired IconMaster Hardware Control Panel to
monitor and control audio and provide dynamic parameter control.
The functionality of the ISCP is largely the same as that of the hardware control panel.
Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 on page 22 compare the locations of the buttons on both
panels. If you have multiple IconMaster hardware and software control panels, and use them
to control and monitor the same IconMaster hardware, changes you make on one panel are
reflected on the others.
Displaying the ISCP or ISCP-LITE Control Panel
If you have just created an IconMaster panel in Build mode (see ISCP and ISCP-LITE
Configuration on page 11) and you switch to Control mode, the panel will open.
If you have previously used ISCP or ISCP-LITE and left a panel open when you closed
Magellan CCS Navigator, by default the panel will open when you relaunch the software.
To open a panel if you have previously closed the panel, follow these steps:
1
From the main menu, choose File > Open.
2
Browse to the location of your panel file.
The main panel and all its dynamic menus are stored together in a single folder. If you open
a dynamic menu, it will not connect to the pre-configured channels (IconMaster master
control switchers) and the buttons will have no effect.
3
Click Open.
Magellan CCS Navigator will by default automatically load an ISCP or ISCP-LITE if it is
defined, and will automatically go to full screen mode.
ISCP pages are designed to be displayed on a 19” 1280 × 1024 screen in full screen mode.
ISCP-LITE pages are designed to be displayed on a 15” 1024 × 768 screen in full screen
mode. Both ISCP and ISCP-LITE are intended to be used with a touch-screen monitor.
From the main menu, select View > Full Screen (or press F11 on your keyboard) to switch
to full screen mode.
22
Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels
To exit full screen mode, click the Exit FullScreen Mode button that appears on the
interface, or press the F11 key on your keyboard.
Configurable cluster 1
Parameter adjustment control cluster
Optional audio
control panel
Configurable
cluster 2
Transition
controls
Shift key
(22 input mode)
Primary control
busses
Fader bar
Configurable Transition functions
Transition
“hot” button
Figure 4-1. IconMaster Hardware Control Panel
Dynamic Menus
Parameter adjustment control cluster
Audio control panel
Contextual
controls
Dynamic menu
selectors
Shift key
(22 input mode)
User assignable
buttons
Transition
controls
Primary
control buses
Transition
“hot” button
Transition
functions
Figure 4-2. IconMaster Software Control Panel
Lock Panel
(ISCP Only)
When the panel is locked, clicking any button has no effect, until the panel is unlocked.
Hold the button down for two seconds to lock the panel. A countdown appears on the
button as you approach the target duration.
When a panel is locked, the Lock button will flash. Pressing any button for any length of
time will have no effect.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
To unlock the panel, hold down the Lock button down for a quarter of a second. A
countdown appears briefly on the button.
Choosing Devices to Control
In the top left corner of the panel is a System label. Depending on how your panel is
configured, it can display Groups or Channels here.
To configure ISCP to control both channels and groups at the same time, create a group for
each individual channel you want to control, and assign a single channel to that group.
Figure 4-3 Channel Button
Figure 4-4 Group Button
A logo in the top left corner indicates when a button controls a group.
Selecting an IconMaster Channel to Control (ISCP Only)
Each channel represents a different IconMaster system. There can be up to eight, as
configured using the wizard. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13 for more
information.
Click a Channel Select button to choose a different channel (IconMaster system). The
active channel’s button is red. All subsequent actions you make on the ISCP panel will apply
to that channel and all orange-lit secondary channels, until you select a different IconMaster
system by clicking another Channel Select button.
Configuring Primary and Secondary Channels (ISCP Only)
When you configure a primary channel and then program secondary channels to that
primary channel, every change you make on the primary channel is replicated on the
secondary channel until the relationship is changed.
When selecting IconMaster channels as primary and secondary channels, they must all be
the full version of IconMaster, or all be IconMaster Lite. Do not mix IconMaster and
IconMaster Lite channels when configuring primary and secondary channels.
1
To select a channel as a primary channel, press it.
The channel’s button turns red.
2
Press the primary channel again.
Its label updates to say Primary.
3
Press once on each channel you want to follow the primary channel (secondary channels).
Each secondary channel button turns orange.
23
24
Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels
Pressing an orange button (already selected as a secondary channel) deselects it as a
secondary channel.
When a secondary channel has been selected, the Sync Now button lights, also orange.
You can press Sync Now to sync the secondary channels to the first channel. If you press
Sync Now and then select more secondary channels, but do not press Sync Now again,
not all secondary channels will be synced to the primary channel.
4
Press the Primary channel once.
The channels all return to their normal labelling. The primary channel retains its red label,
and the secondary channels retain their orange labels.
The Sync Now button ceases to be lit.
To remove a secondary channel from the group, press the primary channel, then press the
secondary channel(s) you want to remove, and then press the primary channel again to set
the change.
If you are not in primary/secondary selection mode and you press an orange (secondary)
channel, it becomes the primary channel.
If you are not in primary/secondary selection mode and you press a white channel, all
primary/secondary channels are disconnected, and the one you pressed becomes the
primary channel.
If you are not in primary/secondary selection mode and you press the red (primary) channel,
you are put into primary/secondary selection mode.
If you are in primary/secondary selection mode and you press the red (primary) channel, you
are taken out of primary/secondary selection mode.
Selecting a Multiviewer Profile (ISCP Only)
In the Master Control wizard, you have the opportunity to assign up to three multiviewer
profiles with each IconMaster channel (see Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13). These
profiles are available on the contextual control buttons to the right of the eight
user-assignable buttons.
To load a profile, press one of the Profile buttons.
When you select a channel on the IconMaster switcher, the first multiviewer profile
associatd with that channel is automatically loaded. If no profiles are associated with a
channel, the multiviewer will continue to display the currently-loaded profile.
Selecting Groups for Control (ISCP Only)
Groups are configured within IconMaster Configuration Utility, and can contain up to 35
channels.
Click a Group Select button. The active group’s button is red. All subsequent actions you
make on the ISCP panel will apply to that group.
When an ISCP is configured to control groups of devices, an extra button appears second
from the right on the Dynamic Menu bar:
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Figure 4-5 Channel Group Button
To further configure which device is the primary device within the group, and which devices
follow that device, see Channel Group on page 47.
Dynamic Menu Selector Buttons
The eight Dynamic Menu Selector buttons (see Figure 4-2 on page 22 for the location of
these buttons) on the ISCP provide access to parameter controls.
When you press one of these buttons, the region to the left of these buttons updates to
reflect the options that are available under that particular tool. For information on each of
these dynamic menus, see the following topics:

External Keyers on page 35

Internal Keyers on page 37

Selecting an Effect on page 39

Quick Selects on page 41

Audio Control on page 42

Audio Monitor Output on page 45

Audio Profile Assign on page 46
Tracking
In order to allow the Dynamic Menu Selector buttons to follow the actions that are used on
other parts of the switcher -- the external keyer buttons, etc., the IconMaster Software
Control Panel has a tracking feature.
If one of the dynamic Menu Selector buttons is selected (lit), then the dynamic page that is
selected will be continuously displayed. Tracking can be considered to not be in effect.
If none of the dynamic Menu Selector buttons is selected, then the dynamic page section of
the ISCP will follow the operational state of the system. In this case, tracking is in effect.
Thus, if an internal keyer button is pressed, the dynamic page will display the internal keyers
dynamic page. If the FX button is pressed, the effects dynamic page will appear. If an
assignable source is pressed, the source assignment page will load.
For tracking to be active, no Dynamic Menu Selector buttons can be lit.
Clock and
Timer
Both the ISCP and the ISCP-Lite have clock and timer functionality. The IconMaster MKE
hardware routinely provides clock and timer information. Clock and timer are configured in
the IconMaster Configuration Utility. See your IconMaster hardware documentation for
more information.
25
26
Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels
Figure 4-6 Clock and Timer on ISCP or ISCP-LITE
On both interfaces, clock and timer data in the lower right quadrant of the screen.
The clock appears on top, and displays the current time.
The timer appears below the clock. The timer is an up-counting timer, and normally tracks
the time since the last transition, or from when Start was pressed.
Machine
Control
You can configure ISCP or ISCP-LITE’s user-configurable buttons to display various machine
control options. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13 and Creating an ISCP-LITE
Panel on page 19.
The devices these buttons control is determined by the IconMaster Configuration Utility. See
your IconMaster hardware documentation for more information.
Using the Primary Control Bus Cluster (ISCP Only)
At the center of the main control panel, there are 3 primary buses: Auxiliary (Aux), Preset
(PST), and Program (PGM). These buses are used to monitor or select inputs and outputs.
The buttons show the name of the source currently assigned to each of the inputs. A shift
key becomes available on both the PGM and PST buses when you have configured the
IconMaster to operate in the 22 input mode. (The Auxiliary bus controls 12 inputs, whether
the system is in 12 or 22 input mode.)
Figure 4-7. PST, PGM, and AUX Buses on the Software Control Panel
Aux Bus
The Aux bus is typically used to switch external effect backgrounds, external
key/fills, and external audio routers.
You can assign input sources to the Aux buses using the ICU Auxiliary Bus Configuration
dialog box. See your IconMaster Installation and Configuration manual for instructions.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
The Aux bus holds up to 12 different input sources. Each of the 12 Aux buses can be
considered to be a 12×6 router, which allows a single aux button press to switch up to 6
simultaneous inputs to 6 destinations on multiple router levels. With 12 aux buses and 12
buttons per bus, each button can address up to 6 independent router levels. In addition, the
Aux bus allows you to perform such tasks as

Manage effects backgrounds (effects background input)

Monitor other sources such as VTRs and servers

Control a secondary router connected to the primary router

Manage video or (video with embedded audio) external backgrounds

Manage audio through an audio router

Manage additional key fields
Aux Bus Dynamic Controls
When you press Auxiliary Bus Select under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following
dynamic menu appears:
Figure 4-8 Auxiliary Bus Select Dynamic Menu
Aux bus selections that are made on a hardware panel will affect the data that appears on
this page.
This dynamic menu routes Sources to Destinations, as on the Auxiliary bus of the
IconMaster master control switcher. Initially it displays the last selected Destination and the
Source that is currently taken to that Destination.
To route a source to a destination, follow these steps:
1
Press one of the Destination buttons (Aux 1 to Aux 12).
27
28
Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels
A Source button lights up to update to indicate the source that is currently routed to that
destination (if any).
2
Press one of the Source buttons (Src 1 to Src 12) to route a different Source to the selected
Destination.
Only one Source and one Destination at a time can be selected.
Sources and Destinations are defined using IconMaster Configuration Utility software. See
the section “Auxiliary Bus Configuration Dialog Box” in your IconMaster Master Control
Switcher Configuration Utility Software Reference Manual for more information.
Selecting Aux Bus Source Selections
Use the Aux button to assign control of any preconfigured Auxiliary buses. You can
configure up to 12 different buses, with 12 selections on each bus. For best results, unused
buses are recommended to be disabled.
To use an Aux bus, select the Aux bus you want.
You can configure this control through the ICU Aux Bus dialog box. See your IconMaster
Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
Preset (PST) Bus and Program (PGM) Bus (ISCP Only)
The PST bus is typically used to select a video and/or audio input that will be placed on-air
during the next transition. It displays what will go on air. Its sources are connected to the
IconMaster through a router. When you perform a transition, the content that was
displayed on the PST bus goes on air, and the content that was on the PGM bus goes to the
PST bus.
The PST bus can be set to use 12 inputs (in 12 input mode) or 22 sources (in 22 input mode,
the last source select pushbutton on the PGM and PST buses acts as a shift between two
banks of 11 inputs, 1-11 and 12-22). These sources are assigned through the ICU.
The PGM bus displays what is currently on-air. Its sources are connected to the IconMaster
through a router. It is typically used as an on-air bus for output signals of video and audio.
When you perform a transition, the content that was displayed on the PST bus goes on air,
and the content that was on the PGM bus goes to the PST bus.
Selecting PST or PGM Bus Source Selections (ISCP Only)
Inputs are assigned to the PGM and PST bus buttons (through the ICU) as a static input or
as a dynamic input.
The process for selecting a new input source is the same for each of the primary buses: on
the selected bus, press the button that corresponds to the input. The button tally will
illuminate to confirm the selection.
You can configure this control through the ICU Primary Inputs dialog box. See your
IconMaster Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Selecting 22 Input Mode (ISCP Only)
IconMaster supports up to 22 directly accessible sources in a function called “22 input
mode.” In 22 input mode, the last button in the PGM bus bank acts as a shift button. which
allows you to shift from one bank of 12 inputs to two banks of 11 inputs: 1-11 and 12-22.
Pressing the Shift button toggles thebutton labels, so you know which source is currently
selected. One source is always selected on the PST and PGM buses.
If a source is showing on the PST or PGM bus, and the Shift button is pressed to change
banks, buttons 1 through 11 will not be illuminated. If you see just the Shift button pressed,
simply press it again to toggle to the other bank. A source button will now be seen
illuminated.
You can set up this function through the ICU System Configuration dialog box. See your
IconMaster Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
Program Bus “Hot” Punch Operation (ISCP Only)
Selections on the PGM bus automatically perform a PGM bus cut (or “hot” punch)
operation; that is, if you press a PGM bus source button, the selected source goes
immediately on air. The PST bus is used in this operation, but will return to its original source
after the action is performed, and the Preset output of the switcher momentarily shows the
selection of the PGM input. Operationally, no feedback is shown to the end user and the
action taken is transparent to the operator.
This function is not the same as the Transition Hot Key in the Transition Control cluster.
Changing Input Sources (Dynamic Inputs)
You can change router input sources through a procedure called “dynamic inputs.” Use the
Dynamic input functionality to change the router selection for an IconMaster source button.
This feature is works in both 12- or 22-input mode.
This function is enabled through the ICU Primary Inputs dialog box. See your IconMaster
Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
Each IconMaster source is set up to be either static or dynamic.

A static source is not changeable at the control panel; it can only be changed through
the ICU. This selection is appropriate for sources that will always be needed.

A dynamic source has its initial router source defined in ICU, but can be changed at
any time at the control panel. If the selected PST is the same as the current on air PGM
source, PST dynamic selection is blocked.
An IconMaster control panel can have any mix of static and dynamic inputs.
When you select a source on the PST bus or press Source Select under Dynamic Menu
Selectors, the following dynamic menu appears:
29
30
Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels
Figure 4-9 Dynamic Routing Dynamic Menu
Settings made on this page are only valid and usable if IconMaster is configured to run with
Router Database Mode enabled.
Each button in the Dynamic Routing section of the screen displays a source name, as
defined by RouterMapper when you created the routing panel.
Each IconMaster source is set up to be either static or dynamic.

A static source is not changeable at the control panel; it can only be changed through
the ICU. This selection is appropriate for sources that will always be needed.

A dynamic source has its initial router source defined in ICU, but when it is not on air,
it can be changed at any time at the control panel.
An IconMaster control panel can have any mix of static and dynamic inputs.
To change a dynamic input source:
1
Press an Input button.
The Current field indicates the Source currently taken to that input.
2
Press the Up and Down buttons beside Category to scroll through the list of available
categories.
The currently selected category is green.
3
Press the Up and Down buttons beside Index to scroll through the list of available indexes
that are in that category.
4
Press Assign to set the currently selected source to the selected Input.
The Current field updates to the selected.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Taking Selections On-Air (ISCP Only)
Taking a selection on- or off-air is part of the transition process. Depending on the
selection’s transition type (background, key, or audio-over), press the appropriate transition
control button. This will set up a transition from the PST to the PGM bus. Then, press Take
to take the selection on-air.
Performing Successful Transitions (ISCP Only)
You can perform four types of transitions: background transitions, key transitions,
audio-over transitions, and effects transitions.
On the IconMaster, transitions are performed through the Transition Functions button
cluster and the Transition Control buttons cluster. Using the IconMaster configuration utility
software, you can choose from a list of available functions to redefine these buttons. In this
way, you can customize the operation of the panel for optimum ease of use.
Configurable Transition Functions (ISCP Only)
The Transition Functions cluster controls the selection of transition type and rate that will
occur upon activation of the next transition.
Automation Hold
Transition rates
Breakaway
Transition FX
Transition types
Figure 4-10. Configurable Transition Functions
Table 4-1 Configurable Transition Functions
Function
Button
Stop IconMaster’s
response to automation
commands
Hold
Select transition rates
Slow
Med
Fast
Cut
Set up breakaways
Audio
Video
Selects an Effects
transition
FX
The Effects page of the Dynamic menus displays the preconfigured
effects. See Selecting an Effect on page 39.
31
32
Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels
Table 4-1 Configurable Transition Functions (Continued)
Function
Button
Select transition types
Cut-Fade
Cuts the program off air, and then fades the preset up
Fade-Cut,
V-Fade
Cross-Fade
Fades the transition down, and then, when the program
is off air, cuts the preset up
Fades the program down, and then, when the program
is off air, fades the preset up
Fades the program down and at the same time fades the
preset up
To perform a transition:
1
Select the content.
You select content sources through the BKGD button and a PST bus source and, optionally
through one or more of the key buttons or audio over buttons.
2
Determine whether the transition will be a background transition, effect transition, key
transition, or audio-over transition, alone or in combination.
3
Select a transition type.
4
Select a transition rate.
5
Select the elements that will be included in the transition.
One background and eight keyer enable buttons are used to enable which source(s) will be
included in the next transition. Pressing these buttons will toggle the button on and off.
Any source that is illuminated will be included in the next transition. Sources that are not
illuminated will not be included in the next transition.
6
Trigger the transition.
This is most simply done by pressing the Take button, but you can also press the Preroll
button.
Enabling a Key Transition (ISCP Only)
A key makes it possible to cut a “hole” in the program input and replace it with a separate
key fill of the same size.

Keys 1 and 2 are “external” keys; that is, they allow you to key in the video from an
external device, such as an external graphics system or character generator, onto the
PGM video.

Keys 3 through 6 are “internal” keys; that is, they allow you to control the IconMaster’s
internal IconLogo generator.
Internal keyers show their logo name and number. External keyers show the name that has
been programmed in ICU. The top of the button displays the following states:

Red: The keyer is on-air.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide

Orange: The keyer is not synced to external keyers.

Green: The keyer is available, but not on-air.

Off: The internal or external keyer is not available.
Indicator
Figure 4-11 Keyer Button With Indicator
The key source and attributes can be set using the Dynamic Menus, and transitioning the
keys is accomplished using the Transition Controls.
You can configure this control through the ICU Keyer dialog box. See your IconMaster
Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
Taking a Key On Air
1
Press a Key button. It illuminates, indicating that a keyer transition (from the Preset bus to
the Program bus) will occur when Take is selected.
2
If necessary, adjust the keyer parameters using the Dynamic menus.
3
Press Take. Once the transition is taken, the input source display indicator illuminates red
(to indicate that the keyer is on-air) and the key button remains illuminated. This means that
the keyer selection will once again be included in the next set of transitions.
Keeping a Key On Air
If a key is on-air (its indicator is red), press the Key button until the indicator is off. The key
transition will be disabled for the next transition, and the key will remain on-air.
Taking a Key Off Air
The keyer’s indicator will be red, to display that the keyer is currently on air.
1
Press the Key button until the button tally is illuminated.
2
Press Take.
The indicator turns green and the key button remains illuminated.
3
To keep the key off air, press the Key button to turn off its tally light.
Using the Transition “Trans HotKey”
The TRANSITION HOTKEY is located just above the TAKE pushbutton in the Transition
Control cluster. Press the TRANS HOTKEY button. It illuminates, indicating that HOTKEY
mode is enabled. This feature provides quick access to turn keyers on and off, without
selecting the transition enable buttons and using the TAKE process.
33
34
Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels
Unlike the Hardware Control Panel, on the ISCP the TRANS HOTKEY is a toggle. Each time
you press it, it changes on if it was off, or off if it was on. When you press one of the keyers
to transition it, the TRANS HOTKEY will remain in whatever state it was in. If the TRANS
HOTKEY is lit and you press some other button on the ISCP, such as a source selection, the
TRANS HOTKEY will be automatically turned off.
Pressing a keyer button while the TRANS HOTKEY button is enabled will immediately
transition the keyer on or off air. It will not change the keyer enable state, just the on-air
status. The keyer transition type and speed follows whatever transition type and speed are
currently selected.
Enabling a Background (Preset to Program) Transition (ISCP Only)
Background transitions are controlled through the BKGD button. The BKGD button
operates like a toggle button, and allows you to enable or disable a selected background
transition.
Taking a Background On Air
1
Press the BKGD button. The button tally illuminates, indicating that a background transition
from the PST bus to the PGM bus will occur when you select Take or Preroll.
2
Ensure the correct PST source is selected. This source will be shown on the Preset output.
3
Press the Take button to cause the next transition to start immediately; or, press the Preroll
button to cause the next transition to preroll the appropriate play machine.
Disabling a Background Transition
Press the BKGD button until the button tally light is off. The background transition will be
disabled for the next transition. As a result, the Program background source is also
displayed on the Preset output.
Effects are not available when the BKGD button is off.
Enabling an Audio-Over Transition (ISCP Only)
An audio-over allows you to reduce the level of the audio on the program channel and mix
a separate audio channel on top.
An indicator is located at the top of each audio-over button. The display can be
programmed using the ICU to indicate the source ID, and it illuminates red when the
audio-over is on-air.
The audio-over source and attributes can be set using the Dynamic menus, and
transitioning the audio-over is accomplished using the Transition Control Cluster.
You can configure these controls through the ICU Audio Over Matrix dialog box. See your
IconMaster Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
If you have the optional IconMaster audio control panel, it can be used to adjust the audio
over mix ratio. See page 42 for more information.
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Taking an Audio-Over On Air
1
Press an A/O button. It illuminates, indicating that an audio-over transition (from the
Preset bus to the Program bus) will occur when Take is selected.
2
Press Take. Once the transition is taken, the A/O button’s indicator illuminates red (to show
that the audio-over transition is on-air). This means that the keyer selection will once again
be included in the next set of transitions.
If an audio over is in progress, and the SIL (fade to silence) function is used, IconMaster
audio will turn off, and the Audio Over tally will no longer be red. it will return to an active
(red) state when the SIL function is exited.
Keeping an Audio-Over On Air
If an audio-over is on air and the A/O button’s indicator is red, press the A/O button until
the indicator is off. The audio over transition will be disabled for the next transition, and the
key will remain on-air.
Taking an Audio-Over Off Air
The A/O indicator will be red, indicating that the audio-over transition is currently on air.
1
Press the A/O button until the indicator is illuminated.
2
Press Take.
The indicator will turn green.
3
External
Keyers
To keep the key off air, press the A/O button to turn off its tally light.
To activate the External Keyers control, do one of the following:

Press External Keyers under Dynamic Menu Selectors

Press External Keyer (1 or 2) in the dynamic menu
The following appears:
35
36
Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels
Figure 4-12 External Keyer Control Dynamic Menu
This screen allows you to select each of the two external keyers on the selected IconMaster
master control switcher and adjust the parameters associated with that key. These settings
can also be adjusted using the keyer Control menu in the upper level menu list of the
Control Cluster. See “Navigating the Keyer Control” in your IconMaster Master Control
Switcher Installation and Operation Manual for more information.
1
Press Ext Key 1 or Ext Key 2. The relevant sections of the dynamic menu update with data
retrieved from the IconMaster channel (the status and values of that key on the channel).
2
Adjust the processing parameters of the selected key by pressing the up/down arrow
buttons.
Table 4-2 Processing Parameters for Keys 1 and 2
Parameter
Function
Range
Gain
Applies gain to the key signal after application
of the clip/offset value
0 - 16
Transparency
Adjusts the amount of transparency of the
resulting keyed signal
0 (off) - 100% (on)
Clip
Subtracts the clip or offset value from the key
signal input
0 - 896
ISCP
Initial Startup guide
Table 4-2 Processing Parameters for Keys 1 and 2 (Continued)
3
Parameter
Function
Range
Hue
(Only available when Modified Matte Fill is
selected) Adjusts the phase of the chrominance
of the signal
0 - 359
Saturation
(Only available when Modified Matte Fill is
selected) Adjusts the chrominance of the signal
0 - 100%
Luminance
(Only available when Modified Matte Fill is
selected) Adjusts the brightness of the signal
0 - 100%
The following buttons are active:
Table 4-3 Key Types
Button
Effect
Sel">